This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http : //books . google . com/
J 2 7 3.^7. i
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
/:> ' ^u^ ^Uu^My-^jQ^
^^Zx'^'-i-'^^
A GRAMMAR
CREE LANGUAGE
WITH WHICH IS COMBINED
AN ANALYSIS
CHIPPEWAY DIALECT.
Bt JOSEPH HOWSE, Esq. F.R.G.S.
AND RB8IDBNT T-WBNTT TEARS IN PRINCB RUPBKT's LAND, IN THB
SBRYICB 07 THB HON. HUDSON'S BAT COKPANT.
LONDON:
J. G. F. & J. RIVINGTON,
ST. PAUL'S CHURCH TARD, AND WATBRLOO PLAOB, PALL MALL.
1844.
OIBSNCBSTEIl:
PRINTED BY THOMAS PHILIP BAILT,
Colombian Press.
■ A
V
THE NOBLEAIEN AND GENTLEMEN
OP THB
ROYAL GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY,
AMD OF THB
CHURCH-MISSIONARY SOCIETY,
DESIGNED TO FACILITATE THE COMMUNICATION
<XP
CHRISTIANITY AND USEFUL KNOWLEDGE,
TO THE
UNINSTRUCTED NATIVES OF NORTH AMERICA;
AND
TO DEVELOPE THE STRUCTURE
OF
A LARQE AND PECULIAR FAMILY OF LANGUAGES,
IS,
BY PERMISSION, DEDICATED,
WITH
SENTIMENTS OF UNFEIGNED GRATITUDE AND RESPECT^
BY
THEIR OBEDIENT SERVANT,
THE AUTHOR,
Harvard Collegre Library
July 1, 1914.
Bequef i of
Qeorgrina Lev; ell Putna„i
PREFACE.
It has been truly observed, that with the abundant
information we possess on all other subjects, it is
astonishing to reflect how little correct philosophical
knowledge we have of the real condition of Man in a
state of nature. Nor is it difficult to account for this.
Travellers give us ample accounts of the physical
character and condition of the inhabitants of newly
discovered or uncivilized countries — they tell •us of
what is obvious to the senses — and here their accounts
end.. But Man is a compound subject. The mind
and moral character are beyond their reach. A
knowledge of these can be attained only through the
medium of their Language, to acquire which, where it
is merely oral, is a work of time, labour, and perse-
verance. To separate into distinct words the ever-
varying and unbroken articulations of an unknown
tongue, — to arrange them in conformity with the
genius of the language — to analyze and reduce them
to their proper elements — in short, to reduce a chaos
of new combinations of sound to order, and to dis-
cover the intelligible though perhaps novel system in
VI PREFACE.
. which they ought to be classed, is a most difficult,
but, at the same time, a necessary task. Where this
has not been accomplished, the native character can
never be duly estimated — ^his answers and enquiries are
often misunderstood ; his intentions misrepresented ;
and the real state of his mind can be but very inade-
quately conjectured. Hence arise m^tual distrust
and hostile feelings on both sides, which'too often lead
to acts of violence, and impress still more deeply the
prejudice already existing in the mind of the stranger,
as to the moral character and intellectual powers of
the Indian, whom be was at first prepared to call an
untutored Savage.
The American Indian, notwithstanding his long
connection and intimacy with the whites, is generally
contemplated by them as coming under the same
description. The object of this work is to raise him
from this degrading designation to his just rank
among our species, and to leave an evidence for future
times, when the people to whom it relates shall, in
the progress of civilization, have been swept away,
that its mental powers were of a higher order than
had hitherto been supposed.
The Iftnguage of which the Grammar is now for
the first time laid before the public, has always ap-
peared to me a subject of peculiar interest. In an
PRBFACE. VU
Ethnological point of view, it may be considered as,
substantially, the leading native language of all
the tribes belonging to the British Settlements in
North America — ^it is the language, indeed, of a na-
tion which, in its different dialects, is dispersed over a
vast extent of country — from Pennsylvania, south,
to Churchill River, in Hudson's Bay, north, or twenty
degrees of latitude : from Labrador and the Atlantic,
east, to the Missisippi, west — from Hudson's Bay,
east, to the Rocky Mountains, west — ^that is, in its
greatest width (55° to 115°) sixty degrees of longitude.
Historically, or as connected with the origin of
nations, it is also full of interest — accordingly I have
endeavoured so to shape my investigations as to enable
the philologer to compare, in some points at least,
this leading language of the new with those of the old
world ; at the same time exhibiting to the gramma-
rian the internal structure and mechanism of a new
system of speech — a new plan of communicating
thought.
The Cree language, independently of its inherent
interest, possesses great importance in relation to the
diffusion of Christianity. The formidable difficulties
in this respect, with which the missionary has to con-
tend, which it requires almost a life to surmount, and
which, in fact, few do surmount, are here removed —
Vm PREFACE*
he becomes at once, so to speak, a member of the
Indian family, as well as competent to form an esti-
mate of the mental powers and moral character of
the New World, and to direct his course, and suit his
coimsels and arguments accordingly.
In order to render my work as extensively useful
as possible, on the appearance of the Translation of
the Gospel of St. John, by Mr. Peter Jones, to whom
the Chippeway dialect is vernacular, I was induced to
alter my plan, by combining as far as I conveniently
could, the two dialects, the Cree and the Chippeway.
His work is besides to me as a foundation— a rock
that cannot be shaken. I have accordingly fortified
myself with about 2200 citations ; my great aim being
to leave as Uttle as possible to be desired — nothing
unexplained or unproved.
It may be observed that the grammatical system
of the Crees (and Chippeways) is composed of the same
philological elements as are found in the Grammars of
cultivated languages, but they are sometimes diffe-
rently arranged and differently combined. The joining
to the verb of the personal pronoun (def. and indef.)
in all its cases, and in all their combinations, as
Agent, Object, and End, to form the verbal inflexion,
has a somewhat startUng aspect for the student, but
it should be borne in mind that there is a limit to
PREFACE. IX
these forms — a fixed plan or form for these several
combinations — and that, when once the scheme of
inflexion, &c. is well understood, the dietails are perhaps
scarcely more difficult to acquire than the same pro-
nominal, &c. elements in their changeful form and
order in European tongues.* Transitive expressions
are, especiafly, from this operation, necessarily long,
as well in simple as in, compound words— the attri-
butive root is, to the eye, in a manner lost amongst
its accessories; but they are nevertheless simple,
because synthetical, every syllable or modifying ele-
ment carrying with it a defimtive meaning. From this
hew manner of structure, — this new, unalterable
collocation of the pel-sonal (inflected) signs, — ^we have,
as it were, a new organization of the same mental
matter. A sentence often consists of much fewer
separable parts or words.
It has been absurdly stated, by some writers, that
the Indian is obliged to gesticulate, in order to make
himself understood by his fellows. On the contrary,
it may safely be said, that in all the multifarious
* It may be here observed, as worthy of notice, that this, among
other forms of the yerb, seems to bring into view a third generic
family, as respects language.
1. Agent and Action, separate, as English.
2. Agent and Action, combined, as Lat. Ital.
3. Agent, Action, Obj. &c. combined, as Amer. Languages.
X PREFACE.
tranfiactions between the white and the red man,
public and private, there is never contemplated (a
competent interpreter being employed) jany obstacle
or difficulty on the ground of an imperfect appre-
hension between the parties concerned. The red
Indian, uncivilized as he is, can give expression
to his thoughts with precision and fluency. With
his Dictionary and Grammar in his mind, and always
ready for his purpose, he describes, defines, compares,
&c. in a manner suitable and in every way equal to
the ever varying necessities of social intercourse — or
of those connected, with higher objects. All this he
can do in the dark, or otherwise when gesticulation
would be useless — as well as the civilized white man.
Of the understanding and of the heart, his language
is a faithful interpreter.
The unseemly appearance which the Algonquin
dialects generally present to the eye of the learner,
proceeds often from a wrong division of the words — as
well as a too fastidious or false orthography, they
being generally characterized by a pleasing alternation
of vowels and consonants. As respects sound — in the
northern dialects (including the Cree and Chippeway)
of this language the "rabid r," the obtuse Z, the labials
/ and Vy are never to be found. Compared with the
Cree, the frequent omission , (as in French,) of the
PREFACE. XI
hissing s — the frequent insertion, &c. of the nasals m
and n (p« 13, Note), mitigating the abruptness of the
mute, &c. consonants, and a scale of intonation in the
vowels, from the deepest d to the attenuated ee, all
clearly enounced in a deep diapason tone of voice,
with its native cadence and accentuation^ give to the
Chippeway ah altogether delightful eflfect on the ear.
My affections are naturally with the Cree, but I admire
most the grave, majestic, dulcet tones of the Chip-
peway.
'Hie pretensions of these tongues, are however
limited. The circumstance that adjectives, which stand
equally attributive to their substantive, must often
take, each separately, the verbal or personally inflected
form, would alone unfit them for poetry — a string of
epithets so encumbered would make an indiffei'ent
figure in verse. But this languid manner of expres-
sion harmonizes with the cautious character of the
Indian; and should his more than classically regular^
language have few attractions for the man of ima-
gination — to the philologist and the philosopher I
cannot but believe that it will be an object of great
price.
* " More than classically regular^" because the verb has no
Gonjugational exceptions, whereof to form an " As in praesenti"
&c. as in European tongues.
XU PREFACE.
It is curious to observe that the language of the
Algonquins of the American continent, and the Esqui-
maux df Greenland, totally differing as they do in
matter, should so strikingly agree in form — even in
leading peculiarities of grammar — as respects Euro-
pean languages, in grammatical anomalies — and would
hence seem fully to justify the inference, that these
two languages, which are generally called *' mother-
tonguefs," belong to one and the same high generic
family. (See p. 318.)
On the other hand, the many strong — fundamental
ANALOGIES with Europcau, &c. tongues, which pervade
and form the basis of the Algonquin System, shew
clearly an affinity between the languages of the two
Continents ; and leading us still higher in the history
of nations, establish an intimate relationship between
the primitive inhabitants of the Old and the New
Worlds. I cannot doubt that, as radii issuing from a
common centre, the Red and the White man are
descended from a common source.
In another point of view. The Grammatical cha-
racter of the Cree, as an Inflected language on an
extended plan, leads to the inference of a higher
Origin than the mere casual, irregular, invention of
man : and an attentive analysis of its Structure con-
firms this view. When I observe in the verb, the
PREFACE. XIU
method and consistency of its various Derivative
Modes* — the regularity and exactness of their respec-
tive subdivisionst — the manner, extent, and accuracy
of the Pronominal, &c. Inflexions (Def. and Indef.) in
their manifold (double, triple, quadruple) combina-
tions — clearness of the correlative modifications |
— distinctness in form and signification through all
the details — j^vhen I contemplate this complicate but
accurate mechanisnj in connection with a " Concord
and Government" blending and connecting the several
parts of the System together, and a peculiar idiom
or Genius presiding over all, I cannot but recognize
in such a System, a regular organization of vocal
utterance, affording to my own mind a circumstan-
tially conclusive proof, that the whole is the emanation
of ONE, and that a Divine Mind.
Having been employed for twenty years of my life
in the service of the Hon. Hudson's Bay Company, I
was during that period engaged in an almost uninter-
rupted intercourse with the natives. As long as it
• Deriv. Adject (verb.) — Imitat — Augment. (Frequent, and
Abund. Iterat.) and Dimin. — Distrib. — Transit (General, Special,
and Particular) — Causat. — Making — Possess. — Instrum. &c. — ^and
their various combinations.
t Conjug. Voice, Mood, Tense^ '* Gender," Number, Person.
X Princip. and Subord. Absol. and llelat. Act. and Pass. Defin.
and Indef. of Person, Time, Action. Pos. and Neg. (Chippeway);
&c.
XIV PREFACE.
was requisite, I had the assistance of an Interpreter ;
but the absolute necessity of understanding and being
understood by those among whom I was to live, made
me diligent in endeavouring to learn their language ;
and some knowledge of Latin^ French, and Italian,
acquired before I left England, enabled me to reduce
to a Grammatical f(»rm, what could only be learned
orally, and by routine. Notwithstanding the peculi-
arities in the structure of this ^md other American
tongues. Habit will, with attention on the learner's
part, so familiarize them to the mind, that they may,
after the lapse of many years, become as spontaneously
the vehicle of his thoughts as his mother tongue.
Such in fact was my own case, and this circumstance
will, I hope, plead as my apology for any errors in
style or phraseology which may be found in this
work. I trust that having had so long and such
favourable opportunities of making the Cree Language
as it were my own, I shall not be tbou^t presumptu-
ous in supposing that I couM explain the pecidiarities
of their Dialects more deaiiy and correctly than had
been done previously : and if this little work should
serve to raise in the estimation of their feUow men,
the MENTAL CHARACTER of a Pcople, for whom, to my
latest moments, I shall entertain feelings of grateful
and affectionate regard — if, especially, it should prove
PRBFAGB XV
serviceable to those pious men who are labouring to
instruct them in the truths of the Christian Religion,
I shall think my labour in composing it amply repaid,
and the distinguished Societies to whose Uberality I
am indebted for its publication, willr have no reason
to regret their patronage of this attempt to convey a
more perfect knowledge of the structure of the Cree
Language.
The following extracts from Letters written by Mr.
BiBD, at Red River, who has lived upwards of fifty
years among the Cree Indians ; and the Rev. Mr,
Evans, who has also resided among them some years^
and assisted in the translation of one of the Gospels
into the Oojibway C'Chippeway'O Dialect, published
at New York, in 1837; will probably be considered as
favourable testimonies to the ability and execution of
this work.
^Frmn Mr. Bird to the Author.'] ,.
My dear Friend, Red River, July 26, 1842.
I cannot find t^ms to expreaa my aibniiatum of the extent oF
knowledge which your Grammar evinces^
\^From the same to the safne.]
Red River, Aug, 8, 1843.
The Rev. Mr. Smithurst has, by well studying your
Grammar, been enabled to read the Communion Service to the
Swampeys, in Cree, a few days ago; and my son ^an Interpreter],,
who went to hear it, says he did it wonderfuUy weU.
XVI PREFACE.
[^The Rev, Mr, Evans to Mr. Xis/JBird.]
Norway House^ (Lake Winnepeg,)
My dear Sir, 20th July, 1843.
Having done me the honour to request me to furnish you
with my opinion of the Cree Grammar you so kindly lent me
during the season, I feel bound to gratify your wish — I hesitate
not to state, that amidst much which has fallen under my eye, on
the subject of Indian Languages, I have met with nothing equal
to it. No author whose works I have met with, has entered so
fally and so satisfactorily into the subject ; and I think the know-
ledge of the Cree language, in all its ramifications, is possessed in
a higher degree by your friend Mr. H. than by any other person
who has hitherto attempted its investigation. It cannot fail to be
a great acquisition to the furtherance of Missionary objects
amongst the nativ^s, both by aiding the Ministers in acquiring the
Language, and in translating the Scriptures and other books into
the Cree and kindred Dialects.
James Bird, Esq., Red River.
To facilitate the progress of the reader, whether he
studies the work for its own sake, or as a part of the
philosophy of language, an analytical Index has been
prepared, to which the student may refer, as an aid
in recalling any part of the whole, which has either
escaped his recollection, or may be peculiarly the
object of his enquiries.
J. HOWSE.
Cirencester, March, 1844.
INDEX.
Preface.
Introduction, page i.
NOUNS, Primitive and Derivative, 181 et seq. 244. 309-
Abstract and Instrumental, 1 82.
Frequentative, 322.
Passive, 322.
Diminutives, 182.
Gender, 181,244.
'. Cases, 55, 183, 244, 245, 247, 256, 271.
Numbers, 181.
and their Derivative Verbs, (Denomin. Imitat. &c.) (p.
1 6 et seq.)
ARTICLE, Defin. and Indef. 248, 275.
ADJECTIVE, a Verb, 24, 26, 27, 245, 311.
PRONOUNS, Personal, 51, 60, 97, 136, 185, 245 et seq. 273, 311.
Indeterm. and Indef., 97 et seq. 189.
Possessive, 186.
Relative, 187-
Demonstrative, 188,271.
Relative, 189> 247, 273,311.
Interrogative, 189,279-
VERBS, Of the, 15 et seq. 19O.
Root and Affix, 35, 37, 51 et seq. 176.
Impersonal, 130, 145, 146, I90 et seq.
Intransitive, Verb Substantive, &c. 135, I98 et seq., 254,
314.
(Adj. and Neut), 25, 27, 30, S5, 49, 142
et seq., I92 et seq., 249, 300.
Accidental (Neut.) 146.
b
XVlll INDEX.
VERBS, Intransitive (Participial forma), 25etseq. 49, 111 et seq.
129, 212, 227, 312, 322. See
Indef. Time.
Primitive and Derivative, I6 et seq. 38 et seq. 67.
Augmentative&Diminutive,21,69et seq. 104, 172 etseq.
Simple and Compound, 134. 177.
Transitive, General, 39, 76, 211, 255, 301, 311.
Causative, I9, 38, 88, l65 et seq.
Special, 86 et seq. 95, 103.
Particular, 95, 96.
Reflective, 82 et 8eq. 95, 228, 233, 324.
Reciprocal, 84, 95, 228.
Simulative (4th Conjugation), I9, 20, 84.
Negative (Chippeway), S3, 206, 234, 278.
' Possessive, 21 obs. 10, IS9.
: Instrumentive (3d Conjug.), 20, 121, 234.
Absolute and Relative, 132, 158, 162.
Active and Passive, 26,27, 57, IO6 et seq.
114 et seq. 212, 213, 255
et seq. 262 et seq.
MOODS, Indicative, I9I, 199> 213 &c. 252, 260.
Subjunctive, 195, 201, 251 &c. 252, 260.
Imperative, 204, 220, 225, &c.
Suppositive (Indicative), 205, 302, et seq.
Dubitative (Subjunctive), 205, 302.
Negative (Chippeway), 63, 206, 234, 278.
Infinitive, 262, 313.
TENSES, Present and Preterite, see Accidence and Addenda.
Future, &c. Auxiliaries, 1 99- 203. 302.
Indefinite (Time), 73 et seq., 202. 203. 217. 275, 323.
Present and Indefinite (Imperative), 204, 220, 225.
CASES, Direct, 256, 311.
Oblique, 55, 117 et seq., 209, 229 etseq., 256,265 et seq.
271,277 Vocat).
Possess, or Accessory, 123, 209, 265 et seq.
INDEX. xlX
GENDERS, 130, I99, 212.
NUMBERS, Singular and Plural, Passim. No Dual.
PERSONS, 51, 60, 185.
Indefinite, 98 etseq. 105, 107 et seq. 122, 259-
ADVERBS, 33, 239 et seq., 281.
CONJUNCTIONS, 34, 242, 284.
PREPOSITIONS, 34, 242; 288, 29O.
INTERJECTIONS, 34, 243, 29I.
ELEMENTARY WORDS, as Being, Quality, Energy, &e. 134
et seq.
Relation, I67.
Privation, I69.
Degree or Intensity, 152, 172.
COMPOUND WORDS, 177, 292.
ACCIDENCE, 181.
SYNTAX, 244.
NEGATION, 63, 206. 234, 278.
INTERROGATION, 279-
SENTENCES, 252, 294.
THE ELLIPSIS, 296.
ACCENT, &e. 297-
ADDENDA, 300.
FURTHER REMARKS, 309-
Of the VERB SUBSTANTIVE, &c. 135 et seq. I98 et seq. 254,
314.
DIALECT, 316, 323.
ADDITIONAL NOTES, 318.
ELEMENTARY WORDS, 321.
SUPPLEMENTARY REMARKS, 322.
ERRATA, &c.
For "Ethinu," read '* Ethin'u*' passim.
p. 77, line 17, dele " Italian and."
pp. 80, line 5, and 146, line 17, to "it so moveth," add "groweth, becom-
eth/'
p. 129, line 19, dele "(the subjunctive)."
p. 135, line 29, for '* Eth," read '* Eth or Ethe."
p. 213, line 15, to " he loves him," add " or them."
p. 233, line 9, read " Accusative, Dative, and Possessive Cases
combined."
p. 301, line 1, to " subjunctive" &c. add "(see Verb Subst. Subj. Present,
p. 201.)"
p. 304, line 21, for **(plu. -tr<f)" read " (plu. -wow)."
A GRAMMAR
OF
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
INTRODUCTION.
THE ALg6nQUINS.
Of all the peculiar circumstances which charac-
terize the new world, none is more calculated to
attract the attention of the general enquirer than the
vast mmiher of nations, apparently distinct in origin,
which overspread that immense continent. Of the
chief of these, various writers have, according to their
respective means of information, given us some ac-
count, and especially of the Alg6nquin people, one of
the most conspicuous among the ancient nations of
the northern division of the new world. In the Indian
family, these stand in high relief. From their numbers,
as well as the extent of the territory they possess, they
derive a paramount claim to distinction, as from their
long intercourse with ourselves, commercially and
otherwise, they ought to have a strong hold on our
affections. It i». probable that the history of such a
nation is closely linked with that of the first peopling
of the western hemisphere.
-•^>
2 A GRAMMAR OF
Descriptions of the whole country of the Alg6n-
quins,* we possess in ample detail ; its numerous lakes
and rivers have all been explored, and are delineated
on our maps ; his native habits, means of subsistence,
♦ The country of the Alg6nquin8 may, perhaps, be defined,
in general terms, as lying between the fortieth and sixtieth
degrees of North Latitude, and between the Mississippi and a line
drawn from its head waters north-westerly to Cumberland House,
Sec* on the west side, and the Atlantic and Hudson's Bay on the
east. Within this extensive region are found most of the Great
Lakes of America. This nation consists of many tribes, (vide Dr.
Prichard's '' Researches, ^c" vol. 2,) of which the Crees, called
by some authors Kris, KnUteneaux, Killistenoes, N4hethorvays, &c.
seem to be the principal, and to occupy the greatest extent of
country^ viz, all, or nearly all that territory, the numerous rivers
of which carry their waters into Hudson's Bay.
The domain of the Crees (whose national name is NShethdtvuck,
i.e. ''exact beings or people,") may also be considered as divided
into large districts, which are severally distinguished by the name
of some notable hill, lake, river, &c. within or bordering on these
territorial divisions, and each of them has generally its own dialect
— that is, their language is marked by some of those interchanges
of cognate sounds which will hereafter be more particularly noticed.
The inhabitants of each of these districts further divide them*
selves into bands or families, which are also distinguished by the
name of some remarkable G^ject in. the tract in which they are
accustomed to hunt; but, in this case, instead of the general
denomination '*^ethinuMF — "Indians," by which the inhabitants
of a district or a whole nation are known, and which may be con-
sidered at the generic appellation, they receive or assume, in these
smaller divisions, its diminutivs form, '' ethlnSesuk," indicative
of their subordinate importance ; so W6skwy-wuch6e-ethin^e*«^,
'' the Birch-hill Indians/' may be considered as a branch of the
Kisseesk^chewun-ethlnutt^, i. e. of the Indians belonging to the
district on the river of that name*
•iibv
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
and indeed almost every thing connected with the
Alg6nqmn and his wigwam have been accurately
described. Nothing seems to be wanting to com-
plete our thorough acquaintance with him, but a
correct account of his language; a point indeed of
importance, as being the only avenue to a knowledge
of his origin and intellectual and moral character. In
more general terms, it is through the medium of hit
language alone that we can attain to the native Indian's
mind — ^to that peculiar kind of himaan intellect, which,
in all probabiUty, is one of the links connecting the
history of these tribes with that of other nations.
In order to supply this desideratum, I shall en-
deavour to exhibit the information I gained on this
subject, during a residence of many years among
the Crees (one of the Alg6nquin tribes), in a detailed,
but as compendious a manner as I am able. I pro-
pose, in the first place, to take a cursory view of
the present state of our information respecting the
Alg6nquin laiiguage, making, at the same time,
some brief observations on its general character;
and secondly, to give an analytical and grammatical
view of the Cree dialect — with such illustrations,
from the kindred dialect of the Chippeways, as may
throw additional light on disputable or difficult points,
and elucidate, in a manner more generally intel-
ligible, those principles in their structure which have
hitherto proved a barrier to the attainment of these
languages.
It has been already hinted, that the knowledge we
possess of the native American langua^s ia vtaty
B 2
A GRAMMAR OF
limited, though, perhaps, we are better informed
respecting that of the Alg6nqiiin family than any
other : this information appears to have been chiefly
derived from the missionaries, whom a great part of
a long life passed among those people in the diligent
exercise of their spiritual calling (for which an intimate
acquaintance with the language would seem indispen-
sable), may be naturally supposed to have thoroughly
qualified for furnishing abundant and correct infor-
mation, theoretical as well as practical. But their
endeavours do not seem to have been crowned with
the success which their pious intentions merited :
nor has any advance, I think, been made since the
venerable Eliot published his * ' Indian Grammar begun^
in 1666," (more than a century and a half ago,) which,
as the title implies, was considered by himself as
merely an elementary treatise.
From the circumstance of his having translated
the Bible into the language of the Massachusetts
Indians, or rather from his being the reputed trans-
lator, (which is a very different thing,) it has been
erroneously supposed that he was thoroughly versed
in their language ; I say erroneously, for he himself
admits, in his Grammar^ published two years after the
first edition of his Bible, that he " thinks there be
some more (concordances), but I have beat out no
more." From this admission alone, it may be fairly
inferred, and, indeed, any one qualified to judge of
the nature of the undertaking will at once conclude,
that the translation, if correct, was formed only by
the assistance of a half-breed interpreter, to whom
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 5
both languages were equally familiar. I am much
inclined to think, however, that, grammatically con-
sidered, it is an imperfect performance.
Cotton, also, was a learned missionary, and to
him his contemporary Eliot acknowledges his great
obligations for assistance, especially in the second
edition of this translation. Though he wrote sermons
in this language, yet he did no more towards com-
municating a knowledge of it than compile a copious,
and, as far as it goes, a valuable vocabulary. It does
not appear that either of them could make a grammar
embracing all the principles of the language in which
they preached and wrote.
These observations are by no means made with a
view to discredit the labours of the very respectable
persons here mentioned, but merely to show how diffi-
cult it is for any European to make himself thoroughly
master of the principles of the Alg6nquin tongue.
Nothing appeared on this subject, I believe, between
1666 and 1788, a period of more than 120 years,
when Dr. Jonathan Edwards* communicated to
* Dr. Edwards also, as he informs us^ enjoyed the most favour-
able advantages for acquiring the Indian tongue. He ''constantly^
from his childhood upwards^ associated with the Indians^ and
acquired a great facility in speaking their language ; it became
more ^uniliar to him than his mother tongue ; even all his thoughts
ran in Indian^" &c.
To this " perfect familiarity with their dialect^" (the Mohegan)
he is stated to have " united a stock of grammatical and other
learnings which well qualified him for the task of reducing an un-
written language to the rules of grammar/' &c. With all these
b A GRAMMAR OF
the Connecticut Society of Arts and Sciences, a
paper on the Mohegan dialect, (see Massachusetts
Historical Chllections, vol. 10,) containing various
desultory remarks on the grammatical structure of the
North American languages, but without much extend-
ing the knowledge respecting them already possessed.
Though he was, perhaps, a less skilful grammarian
than Eliot, he corrected one of his (Eliot's) promi-
nent errors, by denying the existence of an infinitive
mood. The value of his authority is however greatly
lessened, as was before observed, by the singular
errors into which he has fallen.
In 1823, nearly half a century after the appearance
of the above paper, the American Philosophical
Society published a Grammar of one of the dialects
(the Delaware) translated into English by the learned
Mr.Du Ponceau, from the manuscript of Zeisberger,
a German missionary, with a very valuable preface by
the Translator. This grammar contains a great deal
of matter, much more than all the rest put together,
but, in its present form, is ill calculated to improve
our theoretical acquaintance with these idioms. The
materials for illustration are generally ill chosen, the
parts of the verb often erroneously constructed, and
withal the arrangement of them is made on such an
advantages, however, it cannot be denied that, same of his obser-
vatiians, even on important pcnnts, are erroneous^ and others are
6akuiated to mislead, as^ 1 trust, will be shewn in the proper place.
'^ JoNATHAlf Edwards, D.D., was pastor of a diurch in New Haven>
and member of the Connecticut Society of Arts and Sciences.^
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 7
incongruous plan as greatly to lessen the merit whidi
the work would otherwise possess. It is, besides, de-
fective in several important points. Yet we are told,
that this venerable missionary, who died in 1808, at
the advanced age of eighty-seven, had resided among
them upwards of sixty years, *' preaching the gospel to
them in their native idioms." But in this compila-
tion there is sufficient evidence of his having never
thoroughly understood theoretically this or any other
language of similar structure.
We come now to another venerable and experienced
missionary, (and he is the last on my list,) in the person
of Heckewelder, who was likewise considered as well
skilled in the languages of the Indians, having passed
forty years of his long Ufe among them. He was also,
it appears, a member of the American Philosophical
Society. An extended correspondence on this very
interesting subject, between him and that eminent
scholar, Mr. Du Ponceau, its then secretary, has been
laid before the pubUc. The observations of Hecke-
welder prove however too desultory and unimportant
to be of much use, and are often too carelessly made to be
judicious or correct; his definitions, also, are frequently
crude and unsatisfactory. To generalize correctly on
this subject, above all others, requires great reflection
and care. So perplexed and intricate is the structure
of these languages to a person who does not possess a
comprehensive knowledge of their ancHnalous forms,
that he must return to his point again and again, for
the hundredth time, before he can obtain such a result
as deserves to be noted down. It cannot be investi-
8 A GRAMMAR OF
gated hastily without danger of the risk that Hecke-
WELDER often incurred, of being lost in a mist of his
own raising. Besides, though doubtless sufficiently
skilled in the language for all practical purposes in
his vocation, he was evideiitly far from being a pro-
found Indian scholar.
In taking this brief retrospect, I have been perform-
ing an unpleasant task, but I could not do otherwise,
considering the acknowledged darkness in which we
are still involved, with respect to the grammar of
these North American languages. The several au-
thors, enumerated above, seem indeed to have reached
a certain point of information, beyond which the
genius of the language has been to them all, as a
terra incognita.
The study of these idioms, and very probably of all
oral uncultivated languages, is indeed full of perplexity.
The path of the enquirer is beset with obstacles in
every direction. Even supposing him to have sur-
mounted, in some degree, the first difficulty of gaining
the names of things and actions^ he has yet to attain
to a distinct knowledge of the various relations in which
they are combined together, or their grammatical
value in a sentence, and this too in a system differing
altogether from that of his own language. This is,
indeed, even in a simple phrase or sentence, no light
task, but the great, the hitherto unsurmounted diffi-
culty is correct interpretation, and correct classification
of, or the giving of right names to, the anomalous
members of a sentence, or groups of ideas. This is
a fruitful source of confusion and error, arising indeed
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 9
sometimes from a necessity inseparable from the cir-
cimxstances of the case, of generalizing from too few
particulars. Accordingly, I have been able to detect,
among these grammarians, no fewer than six different
names for the same form of the verb. Thus have
they all gone astray. Their participles and infinitives
are mere phantoms, that irrecoverably seduce them
from the right path, and would be alone insuperable
obstacles to the forming of a right system. The
native American has a grammatical system of his
own.
From this view of the subject, we need not feel
surprized that very strange notions, as erroneous as
strange, have been entertained with respect to the
American Indians and their languages. So has it not
only been said that they have few ideas, and that
their languages are consequently poor, but a writer in
a respectable American periodical, of a recent date,
{N. A. Review, Jan. 1826,) has even gone so far as to
assert that *' this strange poverty in their languages is
suppUed by gesticulation ; and that no man has ever
seen an Indian in conversation without being sensible
that the head, the hands, and the body, are all put in
requisition to aid the tongue in the performance of its
appropriate duty." An assertion so extravagant, so
diametrically opposed to the truth, may be safely left
to the disposal of the better informed writers before
named ; and is only here noticed as an evidence of
the ignorance that still prevails on this very inte-
resting subject.
As, on the one hand, the assertion just quoted is a
12 A GRAMMAR OF
Yet it is a system complete in the mechamsm of its
parts, and adequate to the end desired. It is only,
indeed, if I may so say, language under a new phase.
The want of some forms, and the modification of others,
are compensated in a manner to which the European
is wholly a stranger. This system furnishes a beautiful
specimen of order ^ in the midst of the greatest apparent,
and, as it would seem, unavoidable confusion and
disorder. Regular in its forms, it has especial care to
distinguish the natural from the adventitious; the
definite from the indefinite accidents, as well of person,
as of action ; the act from the habit ; the particular
instance from the general character or disposition.
In want of a name for a thing, the American defines or
describes it.
It is not so copious as languages enriched by science
and civilization, but analogous, perhaps, in character
to that which we find in the early part of the first
book of the Bible, which appears to describe the cir-
cumstances of mankind in a state antecedent to the arts
and sciences of civiUzed life ; but it is abundantly stored
with terms connected with the arts of fishing, huntv
ing, &c. the sciences of savage life. Indeed, contrary
to the prevailing notions, this language will be found
to be adequate, not only to the mere expression of
their wants, but to that of every circumstance or
sentiment that can, in any way, interest or afiect un-
cultivated minds.
I may add that as, perhaps, no cultivated language
is more susceptible of analysis than the Cree and the
Chippeway, so I am greatly disposed to think that
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 13
no language is better adapted than the former of
these,* for the purpose of philosophical investigation,
whether with a reference to its own system, or, as
an object of comparison, with the languages of the
old world.
As the Indian languages are nimierous, so do they
greatly vary in their eflfect on the ear. We have the
rapid C6otoonay of the Rocky Mountains, and the
stately Blackfoot of the plains, the slow embarrassed
Flat-head of the moimtains, the smooth-toned Pierced-
nose, the guttural difficult Siissee and Chepewyiuy
the sing-song A'ssinneboigne, the deliberate Occ, and
the sonorous majestic CMppeway. Diflfering as they
do in this respect, it is worthy of notice that the
different tribes, or nations of that hemisphere discover
a much greater aptitude or facility in acquiring
the language of each other than they do in learning
any European tongue, which, indeed, they can rarely,
* My reason for preferring the Cree for the purpose men-
tioned, is not that the Chippeway does not contain in its structure
the same grammatical elements^ but that they are sometimes not so
obvious — so well defined— e.g. the nasals m and n, which constantly
occur in the latter, are often founds (as in mb, nd, ng, &c.) when
compared with corresponding terms in the former, to be unnecessary
adjuncts, not modifying the meaning of the root, and are therefore
merely expletive, at least>however they may add to the beauty of the
language. But^ besides this, by the change of th and tord into their
cognate n (see Dialect), which frequently happens, three important
elements are resolved into one^ which consequently^ even without
the addition of the redundant n above mentioned, becomes, to the
mere Chippeway scholar^ ambiguous and perplexing, if not &tal to
the object of his research.
14 A GRAMMAR OF
if ever, (I here speak of the Crees) be induced to
attempt. The European finds the same difficulty in
acquiring theirs. Their turn of mind leads them to
group their ideas and combine their thoughts after
their own peculiar manner, though indeed, in some
of these languages, the thoughts are expressed through
the medium of sounds, as unlike to those uttered by
other nations as it can be imagined the vocal organs
can produce.
Some of these languages are, more than others,
in accordance with our own system of articulation,
as the Cree and the Chippeway now under con-
sideration, which are therefore fortunately well
adapted for our purpose. These, though strictly
cognate idioms, are marked by differences of an inte-
resting description ; the one (the Chippeway) is, even
in the vowels, very strongly nasal, from which the
Cree is, in the northern districts at least, perfectly
free. The Chippeway has two negatives, like the
French ; one of which, in negative propositions, is
interwoven with the verb through all its forms. Its
cognate Cree knows nothing of this negative form.
The great characteristic which distinguishes the
languages of the new from those of the old world, is
found in the peculiar structure and powers of their
verb, and this will be the subject of the next chapter.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 15
PART I.
OF THE VERB.
Of the Indian verb^ as respects its nature or essence,
it may, without hesitation, be said to be strictly
analogous to the part of speech in European lan-
guages, bearing the same name ; viz. as — ^predicating,
being ; as — Nef i-dn, I am ; or manner of being or
acting y as — Ne neMtheteny I am glad ; Nefdwhoosin^
I am sick ; Nenepovdn, I stand ; Ne pemootan^ I walk,
&c. ; and of all this class of terms I consider the verb
substantive y in the Cree language, to be proximately or
remotely the nucleus. To convey a right notion of its
powersy however, we must necessarily go into detail.
These are, as already remarked, more extensive than
in some European tongues, and are proportionately, at
least, more difficult to exhibit in an inteUigible arrange-
ment. With a view to clearness on this point, I shall
make my observations on this intricate subject under
three general heads, viz.
First — ^The matter or materials of which the verb
is composed.
Secondly — Its kinds.
Thirdly — Its forms as developed in its various in-
flections.
16 A GRAMMAR OF
Chapter I.
The first of the heads above mentioned, or the mat-
ter of which the Indian verb consists, may be further
viewed with advantage in these five ways, viz.
I. As to its origin.
IL As consisting of a root and aflSx.
III. As primitive or derivative.
IV. As absolute or relative.
V. As simple or compound.
Section I.
As to the Origin of the Verb.
The Indian verb is of various origin, e. g.
1. It comes from the names of things^ as nouns.
2 qualities, as adnoims.
3 energy or action, as
verbs.
4 reZafion^, as pronouns
adverbs, &c.
First. — ^The noun is the root of several kinds of
verbs, among others of the following, formed firom
Nippee, water. (See Accidence.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 17
1. Nipp^eiroo (animate.) He it watery i. e. possesses the nature
of water.
N4pliyoo« a man; (vir) nkpkywoo, he is (a) man.
Oow&ssis^ a child; oowkssiaewoo, he is (a) child.
H6okemow^ a chief; h6okem6ii^oo^ he is (a) chief,
K6ona^ snow ; kdoneivoo^ he is snowy^ i. e. he is covered
with snow.
Nipp^fvun (inanimate). It is vrdiX/eTy i. e. possessing its na-
ture). It is wet.
Mtjinnet6i9tm^ it is God^Uke (supernatural).
Numm&isemin (iskee (inan.) ; it is a fishy country (from
nummdisy a fish).
A^ssiskeetPtfit (inan.)^ t^ is dusty (from 6ssiskee, dust, also
earth).
Kbonewun, it is snowy, covered with snow.
This form asserts the nature or essence of the noun
to be in the subject *
The subjoined notes are taken from Mr. Peter Jones's Ch^ppeway Translation
of the Gospel qf St John, printed for the British and Foreign Bible So-
ciety, London, IS31. [^See Acddence.li
It will be useful to the reader, in investigating these two dialects, or in
comparing them together, to bear in mind that the labial letters, b, p, m,
and 00, or w, are convertible, as are also the Unguals, th, d, t, n, s, st, ts,
eh, sh, t, zh,j. The CkCppeways also often omit the Cree s.
Cree-— Net* Et^theten, I think it, is in Chippeway, Nind' en^ndon.
Tlihn^ ispeet^k. How large is it? A^hneen menik ?
U^skee, country, A'likeh (Jonbs).
^ote^-Animate and inanimate refer to gender. [See Accidence.^
1 St. John, i. 23, 06gemah. . Lord or chlrf.
xviii. 37, Ked*6ogeaumh (Indie.). . T%oti art (a) chief.
06gem&hwe3f(m (Subj.). : That lam (a) king.
ni. 42. W^em&bw^ (Sobj.). . Who were chiefs,
vi. 70. Mfihje-nitined6oiee% (In^c). .He'is <a) devil.
X. 21. M&je-mtineddoiPMf (Subj.). ; Who is (a) devil,
iv. 24. Oojechlihgoofoeik (Indie). . He is (a) spirit.
18 A GRAMMAR OF
2. Nipp^efviMtt (anim.) heiswaUr']ike, waier'ish, (notdiminut.)
Ndp4yoo^ a man; (vir) n&piy tvUsu, he is man-like>
manly.
Ethinu^ (homo) a man, an Indian ; Ethin^w^ he is wise,
discreet.
"Sijpp^ewonf (inan.)^ it is tvaier-W^e, tvaiery, tvatenah, humid.
Kdsketayoo, a burnt coal; kdaket^ytvow, it is coaUVke,
f . e. black.
Mithkoo^ blood; mithkn^on^^ it is blood-Uke, t. e. red.
P^wdpisk, metal; pkwipisknfow, it is metalMke, i.e.
metallic.
This form shows the manner, or resemblance^ of the noun
to be in the subject
8, Ktpp^ewissoo (anim.)^ he is watered (wetted).
Nipp6fPftoyoo (inan.) it is watered (wetted).
This form implies the accident or accession of the noun
to the subject.
4. NippeeAiyoo (anim.).— This is a causative form^ and indicates
the causing of the object to become the noun^-^
turns or changes him into water.^
• vi. 63. W^yos. . Flesh.
i 14. Ke wey6sewe(^)(f& (pass, indie). . He was made flesh.
L 23. 06gemah. . The Lord^ also king, chief, &c.
viii. 54. 06gemiihweih)idezooy(m (reflect, subj.) ..ff I cbief-myMif>
" if I honour myself.*'
» » W%em6hwe(A)u2 (act. subj.) .. That clMeth me, "that
honoureth me.''
yi. 15. We 6ogem&hwe(ik)^o(Kf (subj.) . . That he was to he king-eJ
(by them), " To make him a king."
six. 12. W&gw&in wigea^w^Jidezoogwmm (reflect, subj. dub.). .
Whosoever maketh hmsejf a king.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 19
^\^pipeei&w (iiian.)^ ke turns U into water.
M6ni8-&ppwoo7> berry-Uquor, i. e. wine.
M6iiis-dppwoo^<5n;^ he turns t^ itUo wine. *
5. Nipp^weAoyoo (anim.)— -The transitive of Nipp^e«oo> indi-
cating the transfer of the aiirtbule to the object— Ae
iva/fry-eth (wets) him.
Nipp^ewetoip (inan.) — The transitive of Nippfeewttn — Ae
waiery^e^ (wets) it.
A'ssiskeewetow (inan.)^ he dusty^eih it, cavers it with dust.
6. Nippee^iy^ (inan.) — This form asserts the fnaking of the
noun — he water':make9, i. e. he is making water
(indefinite).
Mijskesin^ a shoe ; miiskesine-^ayoo> he is «Aoe-making.
Wiinnaheggun^ a trap; wilnnaheggune-^4y^> ^ ** trajh
making.
Wdskah^ggun-e^oyoo^ he is making a h(mse.
Athdppeei^4y^> ^^ n^-makes (from athuppee, a net).
They also say, figuratively,
Cowlshem6one^4yoo9 he or she is making the bed.
P6taw6ne^df^oo> he makes a smoking assembly.
'W kekoqkdyoo, he makes a feast.
Mevr^tekdyoo, he makes up a bundle or load (from mewiU,
a bag or bundle).
Ootdpane^4y^> ^^ makes (i, e. arranges the things on)
the sledge.
« ii. 3. Zhdhwe-min-dhboo. . Yellow-berry-liquor, i.e. wine,
ii. 9. Kah zhdhwemendhboow^cAe^aAc{e% (particip. pass, indie.) . .
That was made wine,
iy. 46. Zhdhwemendhboowe^doptm (act. indie.) . . He ytme-edit, '* he
made the water wine."
ii. 14. Adahwa/t^ (act.) . . " (Those) who sold/' bartered,
ii. 16. A^dahwdwe.gdhmeg6owefookdgoon (imp. neg.). . Exchange-
house-moAre-not-it.
c 2
20 A GRAMMAR OF
7« "Sippeekaidyoo (act anim.) — The transitive of the above^ and
intimating the transfer or addUion of the noun, to
an object in an iniensatwe manner^ e. g. making,
&C. (sur-attribute) — He water makes it
H6QkemoWy a chief; hookemdwekatdyoo, he cAt^makes
him, he makes him a chief,
Owak6n9 a slave; owakbnekaU^oo, he makes him a slave.
Wew^Uekaidyoo (anim.), he loads (makes, t. e. arranges
the load on) him, as a horse,
OfAki^katkatdrv (inan.), he arrat^es it on the sledge.
H6okemow^^^oo (reflect), he chief-makes himself, i. e. he
" makes or pretends the chief."
*'S&pa,jkisoo (id.) he *' makes the man." [See Section S,
Simulative form.]]
Nipp6eAa/f£m (inan.), (idem) he water-msikea it, i. e. makes
by the addition of water {as to spirits for a beverage.)
MMdm,food ; m6chime^^/tii?t, he food-makes it, i. e. he
baits it (a trap).
Picku, gttm or pitch ; pickekdtum, he pitches it, (i. e. adds
pitch toitj) as a canoe.
S6e8eep4skwut, sugar ; seeseepdskwuteAritonr, he sugar-
makes it, i. e. by the addition cf sugar to it, as to a
beverage, S^.
Wip^ekaidyoo (accid. pass, inan.), it is water^nsAe.
S6mieow, silver or gold ; stoneby^ekatdyoo, it is silvered or
gilded.
Seeaeep&akwutekatdyoo, it is sugar-made, i.e. it is sugared.
Vickeekatdyoo, it is pitched or gummed.
8. Nippee^^dfyoo-^This form implies the making of the noun,
with, or of, the object; ablatively — ^he makes water ^it
S^wdppwooy, sour liquor, i. e. vinegar.
wun, it is vinegar, partakes of vinegar.
tdw, he turns it into vinegar.
kdyoo, he makes vinegar.
kdtum, he vinegars it, that is, oAb vinegar to
some other thing.
THE CRB£ LANGUAGE. 21
SkwkppwookaidyoOf ii is vinegaxed.
kagdyoo, he makes vinegar of it.
9* NippeefA(5fi; — This form intimates abundance of the noun —
mater abounds, or there is abundance of mater.
M6nis, a berry ; xsykms^hbm berries abound.
Attik, a deer ; 2XXjikoosk6w, deer abound.
Minnahik, a spruce Jir ; minnahikoof Aroit^, spruce Jirs
abound. *
10. Oo-Nipp6e9raf< — This form (pot before a vowel) shows that the
subject possesses the noun — he has, i. e. owns or
possesses mater.
Oonk^k\mu, she has, or possesses, a man, ue. a husband.
Ocitkmu, he possesses a horse, or horses.
Assdm, a snom'Shoe.
Oo^'assamtf, he has snom-shoes.
[[Thus in these possessive verbs, the object may, in Cree,
he either singular or plural ; but, in Chippenatf, they
follow the common rules of agreement] *
11. H6okempw^^A6i?ta5foo, he cAte^thinks him; i.e. considers
him a chief.
This subject^ thinks the person, thing, &c. expressed by the
* V. 3. N^h. . Water.
iii. 23. N^eh-A;a^ (pres.'for prater.). . There was much water,
vi. 10. MeenzhdhshkooMA^ttw (preter.) . . There voas much grass.
& iv. 16. Ke ndhb^m . . Thy husband,
iv. 16. Nind' oon^b^e^e. (poss. neg.). . I haoe no husband,
iv. 18. Kah oondhb^eyuni^r (poss.) . . Whom thou husbandest them,
hast had as husbands.
Note^The present and the eompovmd qf the present, are often used for
the past tenses.
* viii. 49. Nind' 6ogemahw(£fiemail (indie.) . . I cYad-tUnk-Um, ''honour
him."
xii. 26. Ka 6ogemahw(^it«maA/tn (subj.) .."He will honour him"
V. 23. Che 6ogemBhwdnemegood (pass, subj.) . . That he should be
honoiured by, (&c.)
22 A GRAMMAR OF
noun^ to be in the object The general principle,
that, in a compounded verb, the accessory member
is, in these dialects, a secondary attributive, will be
noticed hereafter. This form constitutes perhaps
the only exception to the rule.
Most if not all nouns, both primitive and derivative,
have their derivative verbs also, as,
W^ee (g hard), a tent or dmeUing.
W6egtt (neut), he dtvelU or tents.
yf^geemayoo (transit) he ^en^-eth (with) him.
W^geemoggun, a tent-mate or person tented with* [See
Passive Nouns.'2
Usk6eoo, he countries, i. e. he dwells in that quarter (from
iiskee, country).
fVeet^dskeemdyoo, he com-patriot-eth him (transit).
Weet'(iBkeem6ggun, fellow-countrymo^e.
Oot&we, father.
Ootiwieoo, he is (a J father.
OotAwemayoo, he fathers him, i. e. he is his father, or by
adoption, &c. he is a father to him.*'
f V. 17 N'oos. . My father,
iii. 35. Way6osemtiuJ (pass.). . Who is fathercc^, " the father.''
yiii. 41. Pazhegoo Waydosemtin^ili (act.) .. He is one, whom we
esteem father, " we have one father."
viii. 42. Ooydoaeydgoobun (verb possess.). . If he were your father,
viii 44. Kef ooydoaefnakwdh (act. anim.) . . Ye esteem him father.
Oof ooydosinddn (act. inan.) . . He fathers it, " the father
of if'
viii. 39. Nind" ooydosendn Cv. poss.). ."He is our father."
iv. 50. Ke gwis . . Thy son.
i. 34. Oogwisemegood. . Who is son-ed by (God), " the Son (of God)."
i. 49. Ked* oogwiaenUg. . He eon-^th thee (God), '' thou art the Son
(of God)."
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 23
P^poon^ mrUer (or it is winter; iilso a year.
Vep6onUsu, he rvinUrs,
W^eche'^pepbonissemdyoo, he winters with him. *
iii. 16. Kah oogw^seftn (possess.) . . Whom he has for son, " his
(only begotten) son.''
V. 22. Wagw^sefiidk/tf» (act.). . Whom he son-^h, " the son."
V. 19. Wagyv6sem(nd (pass, indeter.). . Who is sfm-ed, ** the son."
iii. 36. Wagw^8em«ii%ifi (id. poss. case). . Who isBon-ed, ''the son.'*
iy. 49. Ne n^j^nis. . My child.
viii. 33. Nind* oon^j&nesefn^ootton . . Abraham . . (act.) He child^A
us, ** we be Abraham's seed."
yiii. 37. Oon^jlkhne8em«m% . . That he cYaid-eth you ''that ye are
his seed.'*
viii. 39. Oon^j&hnesemefMfyoopim ..If he child-ecf you, " If ye were
his children."
^ X. 22. P^poondb6tfii. . It was winter,
ii. 20. P^poon. . (Forty-six) years,
xiii. 30. T^kahd(^t>pim . . It was night.
i. 10. A'hkeh. . A country, " the world."
iii. 31. A^hkehweh. .It "is earthly."
xviii. 15. Mlnzhenahwa. . Disciple.
viii. 31. Ke^ oominzhenahw&mgntiii (act. indie.) . . I disciple y<m
(plu.), " ye are my disciples."
XV. viii. Che minzhenahw6mefu%roo^ (act. subj.) . . That J may
disciple you (phi.), " so shall ye be my disciples."
i. 49. Kec^ 6ogemQiWGmigoog (trans.) . . I%ey king thee, "thou art
the king of" asrael).
iv. 36. M^netrtfi. . Fruit.
XV. 2. Mkhnewiinzenoog (negat. subj.). . That beare^A not fruit
Mkhnewungin (subj. plu.). . That bear fruit.
Che m^netoKfi^ (sing.). . That it bear fruit.
XV. 8. Che mineweydig (subj.) . . That ye bear fruit.
i. 14. Tkpw&win. . Truth.
viii. 26. Tipw&wineA. . He is truth.
24 A GRAMMAR OF
12. These substafUtve-yerbB Bometimea drop the
first letter or syllable of their noun, as from
Iappee> a line or chord; dppee-Ar(fyao> he /tittf-makes or plaits ;
ip^^kdyta, liae-make-thou^U, plait it
UmiBk, a beaver; i^eskayoo^ he is beavering, i. e. taking
beaver.
E^skooiayoOfJlre ; skAiaw or ak&Um, he strikes^re or a light.
Kbotaxvayoo, he makes ajire.
13. Others assume a prefix, as from Idppee (Idppee*
dimin.), as above.
/i^-£ppee/<kp, he puts a line to or about it^ he cords it^ &c.
It'&ppeeBahufn, or T&ppeesahum, he threads it (as a needle).
S^aketdyoo, it is Jired,]ighted (from E'skootayoo,^re).
Skikahumy he^res it^ sets it on fire*
S^skethowdisu (temper), he is fiery, passionate.
SECONnLY, — ^The names of the qualities of things
famish a numerous list of Verbs, they being all, in
their simple state, verbalized. I shall divide them, as
the forms of both these dialects seem to point out,
into two classes — namely, the natural and the acd-
vi, 63. Oojecli6g. . A spirit.
Oo]eehkktkgoowdhnoon (inan.). . They are spiritual.
Peml^tez^wetroAftooft (inan.) . . They are of life,
viii. 41. Keshluntinedoo. . Grod.
zvii. 3. Kesh&mtineddotMytiii (subj.). . Who art (the only true) Grod.
z. 34. Ke m^ed6oiotm. . Ye are GodB, i.e. supernatural beings.
X. 33. £iekesh&muned6owe(A)^lM (reflect, indie.) .... Thou msikest
thyse^ God.
i. 6. En^neh, (homo) . . A man.
vii. 12. En^neweA Cindic.)i .HeisB, (good) man.
X. 33. E'nen^pcyim (subj.). . Who art a man.
xviii. 35. Ntiiif oo}6wyewh Cmdic). . J am a Jew.
iv. 9. J^weyim (subj.). . Who art a Jew,
THE CREB LANGUAGE.
25
dental. The former^ derived from. the adnoun^ eacpress
what is inherent f naiwey spontaneous ^ aad will be deno-
minated Adjective verbs: the latter, derived from
words expressing what is adventitious to the subject,
contingent, foreign, acquired, — ^have a passive signifi-
cation, and will be called accidental passive verbs^ in
contradistinction to participial and other passive verbs,
which will be noticed hereafter.
ADJECTIVE VERBS. «
ANIMATE.
INi
LNIMATE.
W6we^#u he is circular.
W6weow
U w circular.
Pittikoom he is spherical.
Pittikwow
it is spherical.
Kdwissu he is rough.
K6wow
ii is rough.
S6oskoom he is smooth.
S6oskwoxp
it is smooth.
A^wkoo*ti he is sick.
AVkwtm
it is stiong^ tart.
Kinwoosu, he is long or tall.
Klnwoft^
it is long.
NupptickfVw he is flat
Ntippuckow
it is flat
Chimmesissu he is short.
Chimm^fit
it is short.
9 ▼. 30. Odnesheshfit (indie inan.) .,itis good,
i. 46. WdnesheBhmg (subj.) . . wMch is good. [See Sec. 3, Augment
taiioes.']
ii. 10. Mahyahn&hdlUiJktfi (subj. inan.) . . which is bad. [id.]
vi. 27. PanlihdtiA; (subj. inan.) . . wMch is bad.
viii. 9. Paht^zetrod (subj. anim.) . . that they^ meMiptmaUL
viii. 3. Mligwah peshegw&hdezi({ (^j.) . , lUt the 4l^
wanton.
v. 7. M&bkezid (subj.) . . who is lame,
iy. 6. Ahj&kooM (subj.) . . who is weary,
xi. 3. A'^hkoose ^dic.) ,.heis side,
xi. 1. A^oose^wi 6ndic« pret) . .ie loac.sick.
y. 5. Ay^Uikoocu^ (snbj. augment^ who.is wk.
jdL 5 and 8. Kadem^geg<yy (subj.) . . wha ore poor, piteous,
yiii. 54. Tab enttbahtci&sinpoii 6ndic. neg.) ,,itwttLnH &c. useful.
[See Paradigm of the Negative Verb.]
26
A GRAMMAR OF
A^ppis^em^M he is small.
A^ppiscUtft
it is small.
Mkhcm
Ae wgood.
M^thotp
U is good.
MeihbsUsu
he is handsome.
Methow^fsfit
it is good, nice.
kind.
Math4tfin
it is bad.
Maihitusu
he is bad, ugly.
A^uttun
it is useful.
A'buttww
Aew useful.
lap&uj
it is high, as a
Pspww
Ae whigfa.
house.
A^ihemissu
he is difficult
A^themun
it is difficult
ACCIDENTAL (PASSIVE) VERBS, w
ANIMATE.
Chimmajoo he is erected, set upright.
Visoo he is dried,
M^atBSOO he is consume^^ (by fire), scalded.
T£ske«oo he is split (as a living tree).
Eskwdjoo he is hunU.
T4hkooplf<oo he is tied up.
Kiiskekw&foo he is sewed.
Chimmatajfoo
F&aiaifoo
M^slatojfoo ^
T&sketayoo
Eskw&toyoo
T&hkoopt^/^^oo
Ktakekwktdyoo
INANIMATE.
it is erected, set upright
it is dried.
a is consumed (by fire), scalded
it is split (as a dead tree).
it is burnt.
it is tied up.
U is sewed.
Note-^Vixal u is pronounced as in pure, endure ; and oo as in tiuxm, pool.
10 i. 27> D&hkoobe(l(6i»^ (subj. inan. poss. case) ., if it be tied.
xi. 44. TShkoohezood (subj.) . . who is tied, bound.
T^tepeengwdberooA (indie.) . . about-face-tie(i>tf-ibe.
XV. 6. N^boo(i(^mahguk (subj.) . . which is withered,
xix. 23. K&hshkegwahdhisezeiM^oMm (pret. neg.) . . it was not sewed.
xviii. 34. Minjem4peroofttd(8ubj. a»im. poss. case) . . whowashonnd.
xxi. 11. Mdoshkenanid (id.) . . which was filled.
THB CRBB LANOUAOK.
27
It maybe observed, that some roots are susceptible
of both these modes of the verb, e. g.
ADJECTIVE VERBS.
AninuUe — U^ckoom he hangs (intran.)
Inanimate — U'ckoo^in it hangs (id.)
Ex. Anim, — U^ckoo^icA vMkwuk, i.e. They hang, the stars.
Inan, — U^ckoo/MttooA n^pea They hang, the leaves.
W^theptfw he is £ou\, i.e. not clean, dirty.
W^ethepow U is foul.
Kippoof ti he is shut, stopped \ naturally or
Kfppow it is shut, stoppci^ /spontaneously.
Nuppiickt^^ he is flat
NUppuckozp it is flat
Kinwoo^ he is long or tall.
Klnwotp it is long.
W&wgissu he is crooked.
Wdwgon? it is crooked.
Mtifikbwissu he is strong or hard.
Miiskowozp it is strong or hard.
M(isk6wttn it is strong, hard, &c. (moral.)
Quitiskoofti he is straight, not crooked.
Quiuskiooip it is straight
Qliiusktf«tf he is open, straight-forward, frank.
Q<iiuskQ;iin it is right, reasonable.
ACCIDENTAL (PASSIVE) VERBS.
U^ckoojoo he is suspende^^, hung, (pass.)
U^ckootoyoo it is suspendeif, hung.
Ex. iMm.— U^ckoosooinclr nef asslbntiJb, i. e. They are hung up, my
snow-shoes.
Inan, — U^ckootaynMiA ne miiskesinaA. . They are hung up, my shoes.
28 A GRAMMAR OF
Wheithepiisoo he is fovded or soiled.
W6ethepetoyao it is fouled or toiled.
Kf ppooMO he is stoppecf 1 artificially^ as a bottle
Kippootoyoo it is stopped f or a path.
Nuppdckt^joo he is flatte^^.
Nuppticke^iiyoo it is flattet^.
Kinwoosoo he is lengthene(f.
Kinwoo/oyoo it is lengthene(f.
Wiiwgissoo he is bent.
Wkwgetayoo it is bent.
Mdsk6w»<oo he is gtrengthenei or hardenecf.
MdsUweta^oo it is strengthenee/ or hardenecL
Numerals," &c. when predicated of a subject, also
become verbs, as
P^yak, one; plyakoo, he is one, or is ahne.
N^shoo, two ; n^shootiAr, they are two.
N6annan,^ve ; n^ann&nenmA;, they are five.
Mech^ttetvuAr, they are many.
Chuckawissiseu^Ar, they are few.
" i. 26. Pazhig . . One.
viii. 41. PIbhegoo. . He is one.
X. 16. Tah p4zliegoo (anim.) . . He shall he one (shepherd).
Tah p4zhegi(Wft Qnan.). . It shall he one (fold).
X. 30. Ne blbhegoomtit . . We are one.
xvii. 22. Che p&zhegooto(^(2 (subj.), — azhe pdzhegooyfln^ (subj.) . .
That they may he one, — as ire are one.
xvii. 23. Che...p&zhegoo(^)^ioaA (pass. sul]j.) . . That they may he
made (perfect) in one.
vi. 9. N6hnun. . Rvc.
iv. 18. Ke nlUinahneum^ (anim. indie.) . . They have been five.
V. 2. Nflmin^ (inan. subj.). . As they were ^ve.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 29
Numerals may also be used transitively, as,
^^shoostowiyoo, he two^eth them, e.g. kiUs two at a shot.
V&yakooha^oo (anim.)^ he one^eth them, t.e. unUes them.
Yijakoolow (inan.)^ he nniteth them.
N^shooAoyoo (anim , he two^eth him or them, i.e. divides, SfC.
N^shootoiP inan.)^ he ^videth it or them.
There are, indeed, other words and forms pf expres-
sion which exhibit no predicate in the English phrase,
yet, standing as attributives^ are expressed by a verb
in the Indian language — such are each, every, other,
of or among (them), the two, &c. as from tahto" wwmfter
are formed,
ItxAiBBVMk (intran. anim.), they are» or ihey number, so many.
Ittihiinwah id. inan.), idem.
H^ ittii^chick (subj. anim.), as many as they are ; i.e. ef)ery
one, the whole number, the total of them.
13 ii. 10. and iii. 20. Aind^chuf (subj.) who numbere^^, " every,
every one."
i. 16. Aind^cbeyon^ (id.) . . as we number, '' all we'' bave, &c.
xiii. 21. Vi'^Dhg...kendlw)ah aind&hcbeyot^ (id.) ..one of you, as ye
number, " one of you.*'
viii. 7. Aind^cbeyat^ dd.) . . as ye number; Ang^ce, qfyowr wmnber,
" among you."
xvi. 32. Aind&bcbe^oi^r gd.) . . as ye numb^, ''ye, every man."
vii. 53. Aind^cbetooc? (id.) . . as they number, *' every."
In tbe following passages tbis verb is, for tbe sake of anpbasis, pre-
ceded by anotber verb expressive of quantity, or de^ee, viz. meniil (subj.
inan.) as, A^bneen menA.^ (subj.) . . bow mucb isii?
viii. 46. A'bneen kenabwab snemjb aind^cbeygty (subj.) . . wbicb
(of) you, how great it be tbat ye number,
vii. 19. Kab...&bweyab menik aindflicbeya^.
Not*»any one great as may be tbat ye, ^c ** of you" all.
30 A GRAMMAR OF
Hd iH&btSekee («ubj. inan.) idem.
Tdhn'h^ itXtisaechik? Tahn\hd itt^t^eitef P how number
they ? i.e. how many are they ?
P6too8," different.
Petoosi^^ti (mdic.)> it is different^ other.
Hd Fktooaissit (subj. 8ing.)> otitis different^ other.
N^shoottA;^ thei^ are two.
Kah likBliechik (subj.), which are two, i.e. the two.
[See Construction of the Attributive Verb, and of the Article.'^
Thirdly — ^The names of Energy and Action, and
their contraries, famish the class of Neuter Verbs," as
w X. 1. Pihk6n (adverb) . . separate, distinct, " some other way.*'
XX. 7. P6hkon . . " in a place by itself.''
v. 32. B6hklilme2re Ondic. animate) he is different, other, " there is
another."
v. 43. and iv. 37. B&k&hnezid (subj. animate) . . which is different,
" another" (person),
xviii. 34, iv. 38, and x. 16. Tak^nezefig (idem) .. which are, &c.
" others, other," persons, sheep,
vi. 22. Bdk6hnii^ (subj. inan. sing) . . which is different ''other" boat,
vi. 23, XX. 30, and xxi. 25. BdkahnoA^it (idem plural) . . which are,
Sfc. "other" boats, signs, things,
i. 40. P&zhig ^ewh itoA n^enzher'i^ (subj. animate). . One, those irAtcib
are two, " one of the two."
^* xi. 29. Ke bUhzegwe (indie.) . . she arose,
xiv. 31. P^Uizegw^ (imper.) . . arise (ye).
V. 6. Shingesh^nenid (subj. possess, case) . . as ib lay.
V. 3. Shingesh^nootood (subj.) . . were lying,
ii. 22. Kah ooneshkod (subj.) . . that he had risen.
y. 8. 06neshk6ii (imperO . .jise (thou),
iil 29. N^ahweft . . he standeth,
viiL 9* Ke...n^ahweA . . she was standing,
ix. 41. Ne wUhbemtii . . we see.
ix 15. Kah ezhe w&hbid (subj.) . . who thus saw.
W&hbeyon (subj*) . . (and) I see*
THE CRBE LANGUAGE.
31
I^
Af is.
A'ppn
he site.
Ptissekoo
he rises (from a sitting posture).
Fimissin
he lie* down.
Wiinneskow
he rises (from a recumbent posture).
N^powoo
Ae standi.
Wdppti
he sees.
Seeb6oytayoo
hedepaiU.
P6mooUiyao
he walks.
Plmethou;
he files.
Fimeskon;
he swims, as a fish.
Th&th4ntim
he swinu^ as a man.
Pim&stf
AesaiU.
Klwoyoo
he return*.
P6othoo
he ceases or leaves off.
Nippto
he sleep*.
Nippu
he is dead.
Etkthetum
he so thinks^ intend*.
Kiskethetiim
he know*.
Kiskissu
he remember*.
vii. 3. M^j6n (imper.) . . depart thou.
xvL 7. Che mlUbjahyoii . . that I depart ^
y. 8. P^moos^tit . . walk thou,
y. 9. Ke p^oosatd (subj.) . . he walked
iv. 51. Ahne k^wauf (subj.) ..aske was returning.
vi. 66. Ke azhak^w^id (subj. poss. case.) . . they returned back.
zi. 11. NebcfA . . he sleepe^A.
zi. 12. ^^dhgwdin (subj. dub.) ..if he sleep.
vi. 49. Ke niboowug . . they have died.
xix. 7. Che n^bood (subj.) that he die-
xxi 25. Mnd* en^ndtim . . I think.
xvl 2. Tah en^ndtim . . he wUl think.
vL 6. Oo kekldndtm . . he knoweth t^.
iiL 2. Nin keklunda^non . . we know it.
XV. 20. MequldndahmooJb ^per*) . . remember ye.
xvi. 4. Che mequ^ndahmof^ (subj.) that ye remember.
32 A GRAMMAR OF
Very many, at least, if not all the verbs, of the
classes above mentioned, may, relatively y be considered
as permanent, continuous, &c. and have their occasion-
ah J marking individual, distinct, sudden acts or mo-
tion. These furnish a new mode of the neuter verb.
(Vide infra.)
ADJECTIVE VERBS.
Mithkoo^ti he is red.
Mithkoopti^Atf he or it reddens.
ACCIDENTAL VERBS.
Quiske^oo he is tamed over.
Quiskep^Att he or t^ tum« over.
S^sketo^oo it is Bred, lifted.
S^skeputhu it Bres, takes fire.
NEUTER VERBS.
A'cheeoo he moves, has the faculty of moving.
A'cheepti^Atf he or it move^ (suddenly).
Fourthly — ^The names of Relations. — Relational
words, or words expressive of simple relation, are also
a source of verbs', as
PRONOUNS.
0'weena...who.
Ke kisklthemitcin...6f9ee7t^weun.
I know you...ti;^ you are.
K^koo...what (pronoun).
K^kwlln (noun)... something.
K^kw4n ? (verb). ..what is it?
Ne Kisk^dwten h^ Ukw^ (subj.)
I know that t^ is somediing.
THE CREB LAN6UA0E. 33
Ne kisk^theten hd \i6kwknewdk (subj.) [See verb dweoo,
anim. ; dwun, inan.^
I know what it U,
ADVERBS.
Pimich . . . cross-wise.
Pimich^^in...it is (lying) across,
Pimiche/ou;... (trans.) he does it across.
Viimtinum,,,ke lays it across (with the hand).
Sissoondy . . .parallel.
Sissoondy^(n(;...Ae does it parallel.
Sissoonaynttm ,.,he puts it parallel.
Oosam . . . over-much.
Ooskmetow ,,,he overdoes it.
N aspkch . . . wrong.
Ne }^isptLchooskdk,.,he thwarts me.
lsae,,.( sometimes It-) so, A relative particle of manner; it
is also a generic noun, signifying manner, wise, &c.
Isse;tt2m...he so sees it. Anglice^ it so appears to him.
Isse^ow...he so does it.
ltdtissu.,.he so acts (morally).
Itt^. . . there^ thither. In composition a relative particle of place
(Fr. y, Ital. ci); also a generic nowi signifying place.
lt[num,.,he thither does it (with the hand).
l^skum...he thither mis^moves it.
W^skutch . . .formerly.
We8kutchi«^uA;...^Ae^ are old.
Qdiusk . . . straight.
' Qm(jL^issu.,.he is straight
Quiiisketofr...Ae straightens it.
Peyche . . .hitherward.
P6yshooAayoo...Ae brings him.
V^jXJtom ...he brings it
Ass^che . . .backwards.
Asskttissahwdyoo...he sends, drives him back.
A9S^ttdhmahgun...it repels it.
D
34 A GRAMMAR OF
Simmutz . . .perpendicular.
Simmuti»«w...*c erects it (with the hand).
tVide Special Transitive, and Relative Verbs.]
CONJUNCTIONS.
A'8sitche...also.
A'88it-ihtim...he puts it to, or with it (quasi, he obo-eth it).
PREPOSITIONS.
Ooche...o^ from, hy, also with (instrument).
Ooch-'koo, (neut)...he is, or proceeds, from.
06*etow (trans.)... he educes it, i.e. makes it.
OdcAehayoo...he /rom-eth, hindereth him.
Odfinum...he/rom-hand-eth-it, i.e. takes it
P^eche... within, in the inside.
P^«^enum...he puts it tit.
P^etohiim...he thrusts it in.
Fiechm\xm...he puts it in the inside.
Uttimik . . .underneath.
EA/Jmahtim...he thrusts it under it
Sapoo.. .through.
6'^poosoo...he is passed ^Arot/gA (e.g. by medicine).
5^po0num...he puts it through
Kitheekow ... among.
Kitheekowent^m (act)...Ae puts it among.
T&kootch...upon.
Ke gah t&kootches^^A mistik ... he will mii'OCt (come)
upon yotiy the tree.
W&ska... around.
Ne Wkakinht...! surround, enclose it (by hand).
Ne W&skan&WKWt (refl.).../ surround myself (with some-
thing).
INTERJECTIONS.
Interjections and intensive expressions also furnish
Attributive Verbs.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 35
Keeam !...very well ! be it so !
Keamiaw, or Keeameoiv...Ae is still, quiet.
Kkeaxniasu.,.he is still-ish (not dimin.), tranquil.
K^eaxnkewissu.,.he is peaceful (disposition).
Awk and Ike (I^ before a vowel)...inten8ativeiMrefixe8.
Awkoo...very stnmgly. AwkooMi...he is very ill
I^... forcibly. Iket6w.,.ke fimu, Axes it.
Section II.
Of the Root and Affix.
The verb, even in its most simple state, intransitive
as well as transitive, consists of two parts or members,
namely, the Root^ and the AffiXy or characteristic ter-
mination.
1. OF BEING.
l'6fv,,,he or it is, I is the Root, ow the Affix, and so of
the rest.
2. OF CIRCUMSTANCE.
S6ys6yk-tiit. . M hail«.
Th6ot-tn. ..it hlovrs. Sec. &c
3. OF QUALITY.
Nupp6ck-t«^ .„he is flat*
Ndppuck-Ofp...*^ is flat.
D 2
36 A GRAMMAR OF
Nuppiick-e500...A« is flatted.
Nupptick-etoyoo...t/ is flatted.
Pimmee... melted fat^ grease.
Timm^fvoo,..he is greasy.
Viaaxn^nmn.,.it is greasy.
Pimmee-fvmoo. ..he is greasy-e^^ ( Angl.— greased^ anointed).
Vimm^wetat^...it is greast^-ed. &c &c.
4. OF ENERGY, &e.
W4pp-ti (=w4ppe-oo) . . .he see*.
Wipp^magun...it see*.
A'pp-ti (=4ppe-ao)...Ae sit*, is at rest.
Ap^magun...U sit*. &c. Sec.
5. OF ACTION.
A^chee-oo...Ae move*.
A^cb6e-iitagftfit...tV move*.
P6moot*ayoo...Ae walk*.
P^moot-ayfiuigtiit...t^ walk*, progresses, goes, as a watch.
&c. &c.
6. OF TRANSITION.
W6eth-ayoo...Ae name* Aim.
M6eth-ayoo...Ae give* (to) him.
Pem6ota-Aayoo.. Ae walk* him.
Pem6ota-tow...Ae progresse/A t/.
Pem6ota-/(iiiuigtin...t/ progress^A it.
Pimm6e-f9e-Aay<N)...Aegreas-y-e<A Atm.
Pimm6e-zpe-toft;...Ae greas-^-e^A tV.
Pimm^«^-^<^7urgtf It . . . t^ greas-y-e^A it &c. &c.
7. OF CAUSATION.
Wd.ppe»A(iyoo...Ae makes him see.
W&ppe-<<^...A€ makes it see.
THB CRBE LANGUAGE. 37
P6mootay-A(£yoo...Ae makes him walk.
P6mootay-/(^...Ae makes it go.
Pemootay-<(fmagtfit...t/ makes U go* &c. &c.
[See Accidence.'^
The Affix itself may indeed be considered, generally,
as also consisting of two parts, namely, the uninfiected
and the inflected.
First, — It consists of the uninfiected, or charac-
teristic vocable or vocables, indicating the manner
of being, doing, or acting, associated with the root,
and is analogous in signification and use to the relative
terms, or the conjugational or other forms, signifying
to be, to do, cause, make, &c. of which more will be
said hereafter.
An enumeration of the consonants of the descriptive
character alluded to, would extend to almost all that
are found in the Oree alphabet." They especially
i* The Cree alphabet is of rather limited extent. The articulate sounds
of which it is composed may be divided, as in European languages, into
Yowels and consonants.
The simple vowel sounds are coextensive with and enounced as those
in the English language, t. g.
a (Chip. =ak, Jonbs) as in far, the Italian a.
d long.
^ as in awe, law,
e as in me, see,
i (=a Jonbs) as a in fate, mate,
i (short before a consonant) as in pin, thin.
i before a vowels or final i, is pronounced long, as in mine,
thine (r=ahy, Jonbs).
asiuM).
^ as in foti; (not high), sown, own.
00 as in moon.
38 A GRAMMAR OF
characterize the numerous class of derived transitives,
and may, in such cases, be said to have some a, general
and some a special signification. I shall, for the pre-
sent, confine my notice to the following, viz. ft, *, m,
w, and th. And first of the h and the t.
The GENERAL causotive has for its endings (indie.
3 p. sing,) Adyoo and *6w, and for its constant charac-
teristic, or energizing sign, the aspirate h (anim.) and
t (inan.) both of which, used in this sense, b^gin always
an emphatic or accented syllable. (Chip. -(ft)(fe, ''t6on
or 'd6(m.)
u final, as mpwre, endure, or as the pronoun you.
at and ay as in fair, may, hay.
But the Gree consonants have a less extensive range than the English,
and, strictly considered, should perhaps be described as bebnging to the
class denominated sharp consonants.
The labials are p and w (oo) and their derivative nasal m. The/ and v
are wanting. The linguals are th (pronounced as in thin), t, s, st, ts, (t)ch,
and their nasal n (l and rare wanting — aeeDiaJect). They have the guttural
k also, to which must be added the aspirate h. I allude here to some of
the tribes on the coast of the Bay ; those of the interior, as on the Sas-
kdtchewtm, &c. affect more the jUU series, as th (in this), b, d, z, J, g
guttural; as do the Chippeways also, as may be seen in the translation
before mentioned. With all his acknowledged care, however, and general
orthographical consistency, Mr. JoNBshas sometimes fallen into the use
of one or the other of these kinds (in the same verb — in the same par-
ticle), as euphony seemed to guide him. It should be also observed, that,
on the coast, sh is used for the s of the interior ; sh and zh are also
very prominent in the Chippeway dialect. See Jones's Translation.
It may be proper to observe here that the three mutes, viz. the labial h,
the guttural g, and the lingual d (the first three consonants of the Hebrew,
&c. alphabets), with th (which I assume to be their common Radix, Vide
infra), are sometimes denominated in this treatise |>rfmf/t&e consonants ;
and their sharp cognates p, k, t, with the rest of the vocables belonging
to these three several classes, are called their derivatives.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 39
Pemootayoo...he walks^ progresses.
Pemootay-Aayoo... he makes or causes him to walk.
Pemootay-^6w...he causes it to go, e.g. as a watch.
W4pp-M...he sees.^^
Wipp6'magun,..ii sees.
Wdppe-A4yoo...he causes him to see.
Wappe-Aik...he is made to see, (by him or them, def.).
Wappe-^ow (inan.)...he causes it to see." (See Sec. 3.)
The GENERAL transitiveh?L8 the same endings as the
general causative just mentioned, viz. Aayoo for the
animate object, and tow for the inanimate object,
but lightly accented in both genders. In this
(comparatively) unemphatic form, the consonants
h and t, as well as those others of less general use
hereunder mentioned, represent the mitigated verbal
energy of the simple transitive verb, as sometimes
expressed in English by do, make, -ate, 4ze, -fy, and
the prefix or the termination en, or by an equivalent
emphasis, change of accent, &c.
Th6skon^ ,,,it%s soft.
Th6sketow...he sofWneth it.
^« ix. 7. Ke be-wahbeil . . he has hither-seen,
xii. 40. Che wlthb^m(%(fAsenig (inan. poss. case) . . that they (their
eyes) should not see.
1'^ z. 21. Oo dah w^be(A)dfi . . he would have caused him to see.
ix. 14. Ke w&t^e(h)6d (subj.). . he has made him see.
iz.l8. Kew^be(A)^ful(iny.subj.indef.). . who hsAheen made to set,
ix. 17. Ke w4hbe(A)^[Cree,-hi«k] (inv.subj.). . who has made thee see.
ix. 26. Kah ezhe wlUibe^ditNl (subj. inan.) . . who so has made them
(eyes) see.
ix. 30. Ke yiriSDhet6od{id,) . . he has made them (my eyes) see.
viii. 2. Ke n^hmahd^beA. . he sat down.
vi. 10. N^mahdahbe(A)^ (imper.). . make them sit down.
yi. 51. Che i^em^ie%ehdhg(kug)wah (subj.). . that I make them live.
40 A GRAMMAR OF
Kinwofw ..M is long.
Kiiiwootow...he lengtheneth it.
Kitteemdhkif^ „.keis poor.
Kitteem&hkeAayoo...he makes him poor^ im^verisheih. him.
Miibkwdw..,It is red,
Mithkootaw,,,He reddens it.
Kissewa^ii ,.,keis angry.
KissewdAayoo...he makes him angry ^ irritales him.
K6esquaycN>...Ae is insane^ mad.
K6esquayAayoo...he maddens^ makes him mad.
K6esquaypaycN>...Ae is drunk (insane with drinking).
KeesqfiaypayAayoo...he inehnaies him^ intoxica/ei him.
Nipptt...^e is dead.
J!^ipp^fvissu,..ke isdead^like, ashamed.
NippeweAayoo...he does him dead-like, wor^f -^^-eth him.
K6eamfon^.. he is quiet.
K^eameAayoo...he quiets, tames, paci-/^-eth him.
Sake^yoo (anim. object)... he lovex him.
S4ketow (inan. object)... he love^ it^^
068eAayoo...he make^ him.
06setow ... he make^ it.
Pem6otaAayoo...he waXketk him.
Pem6ota<ow...he progresse^^ it
18 T. 20. Oo zlilikeoii Cindic. anim.) . . he loveth him.
xii. 25. Sahyahge^oocl (subj. inan. flat, vowel) . . who he loveth it.
iv. 1. 06zheod (subj. anim.) . . that he made him or them.
ix. 11. Oo ge 6ozhe^oon (inan.). . he has educed, made, it.
xviL 4. Nim ge kezhe^oon*-*/ have finished it.
ii. 15. Kah doshecfoocKsubj.). . that he made t^
iv. 34. xvii. 4* Che gizhetooyon (subj.) . . that I finish it,
xii. 25. Oo gah wihnetoon . . he shall lose it.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 41
The following, also, among others, change hayoo,
their animate^ into tow^ their inanimate object form.
W(ixmehaifoo.„he loses him.
W^xmetom (inan.) ,..ke loses U, or them.
Mkssehaifoo (anim.)...Ae wrestles^ or handles much^ him.
M6wutcheAayoo .,he collects them.
'S6ctiehai^oo,,,he works (at) him,
KwdsseAayoo...Ae jerks away, carries off suddenly, him,
Vissitchehai/oo,,,he notices him.
K&ediehaif00...he begins him,
Kke8eehai^oo...he finishes him.
Vbo9ekayoo...he embarks him.
VJke\xggehayoo,.,he wastes, destroys him,
AlibutcheAayoo...Af renders useful, him.
Vkyhdyoo...he waits (for) him,
Mkjchehayoo,..he consumes, exhausts, him.
'StLggatchehayoe...he meets, i.e. is aware of, him,
Fkpehayoo...he laughs at him.
Nahn6ekache^yoo...Ae harasses, distresses, him.
W6yre(L8sehayoo.,.he circumvents, disappoints, him.
KitteemsihayGO..,he ill-uses him.
Chee8eehayoo,,,he deceives, cheats, him,
MirmsLhayoo,..he gives him drink.
Kitteemdhke^^oo...A# makes him poor.
M6ohe^^oo...Ae teases him.
Mis8ehayoo..,he disgraces him, brings into disfavour.
K^esoo^yoo ,,he warms him.
V^yshoohayoo,..he brings him (inan. p6ytaw).^^
Note, — The inanimate t is, in some of the derived forms of the
verb, softened into its derivative (t)ch. See Sect 3.
w X. 16. Nin gah h6n6g . . I will bring them,
vii. 45. Ke hendhsewaig (neg. subj.) . . that ye have not brought him
Oo betoon*«*Ae brings it,
xix. 39. Ke hetood (subj.) . . (he) brought it, '
V. 3. V6etoowod (subj. plu. inan.) . . who waited for it.
42 A GRAMMAR OF
Another simple transitive form, which, with regard
to the extent of its use, may be esteemed of secondary
or subordinate rank, has t for its characteristic , in both
genders, making -tayoo (anim.), and -turn (inan.), in
their respective third persons.*®
Nfigga*toyoo...he leav-eth him.
Niiggaphim ... he leav-eth it
N&ht-foyoo...he feteh-eth him.
N&ht-ton...he fetch-eth it.
Goos-^ayoo...he feareth him.
Goos-^um...he feareth it.
06t6et-toyoo...he reach-eth^ attain-eth (to) him.
06t6et-^um...he reacheth (to) it> arriveth at it.
Ketdo..,ke speaks ; /^ayoo...he so says.-^
lttd^oo,..ke so says (to) him.
lUum (inan.).. he so says of, means, it,
T^pwk'taifoo.,,ke calls aloud (to) him.
lJ^ttoo~ta^oo,..he engages him,
Me!tk'tayoo,..he longs for him,
Puekwah-/ayao...Ae hates him.
Tdot'tum (inan.)... he does it.
Tbot'tawayoo (dot.)... he does it to him.
30 z. 12. Oo ndhgahnon . . he leaveth him or them.
viii. ix. ndhgahnoA (inv. indie, indet.) . . he was Itft
iv. 62. Oo ge nlihgahne^oon (mv. indie. determ). . he was left (by it).
iv. iii. Oo ge n^gahc^em . . he left it.
31 i. 21. Ke ^edoo (neut. indie, anim.) . . he hath said.
i. 38. 41. Ekeddomahgud (id. inan.) . . it says.
vii. 16. Ke ^edood (subj. anim.) he has said,
vii. 38. Kah iked6omahguk (subj. inan.) . . as t/ (the Scripture) hath
said.
V. 6. Oo ke endin (tran. anim,). . he said to him (or them).
ii. 21. andxi. 13. Kah edt^n^ (subj. inan.) . which he spoke of.
xvi. 18. A^di^ (subj. inan. flat. voweL) . . id.
The conversions of the consonants in this verb give it the appearance
of being the most irregular in the Chippeway dialect. (See Accidence.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 43
There is a second form in the same class, viz.
-fayoo (anim.), -tow (inan.).
K&ht-toyoo...he hideth him.
K&hWow...he hideth it
O'wut-<ayoo...he gathers them together.
O^wut-toz0...he amasses or heaps it or them together.
K^too-toyoo...he makes a noise at him^ i.e. he chides him.
K^too-tow...he sounds it, as a musical instrument.
A third transitive form has for its characteristic , m
(anim.), and t (inan.) making -mayoo and 4um.^
W4pp-tt...he see-eth.
Wippa-fiiayoo...he see-eth him.
Wippa-^um ... he see-eth it.
Ooche-9itayao...Ae kisses him.
T&k&-ma^oo„.he stabs him.
W^gee-mayoo...Ae lives with him.
A^8SSL-mayoo...he gives him to eat^ feeds him.
Weepim-moyoo...^ lies with him or her, also figurat.
U^cke-9iiayoo...Ae counts him.
U^ckooche-iiiayoo...Ae suspends him in water.
Mdska-moycx). .he takes it from him.
TkhkoO'mai/oo...he is related to him.
Weetuppee-m«ycN>...^ sits with him, co-sits him.
A^che-moycN). . . he relates him. (A\6otum, inan. )
Tab^che-maycN>...^erelates^ narrates, him, circumstantially.^
» i. 29. 47. Oo ge w&hbahmon . . he saw him (or them),
xi. 9. Oowhihbwidon . . he seeth it.
ii. 24. Oo geldkaemon . . he knew them.
ii. 25. Oo gek6and(m . . Ae knew it,
^ i. 34. Mn ge debkhjemoil . . I have related, narrated, Attn,
vii. 7. Nin debkhdoodtm . . I narrate it.
i. 15. Oo ge debdhjenton . . he narrated Mm.
V. 33. Oo ge teb^dooc^ . . he narrated it.
44 A GRAMMAR OF
Also, togethei: with its compounds,**
i^-^themayoo (amm.)...he so thinks him. (See Sect. 4.)
/if-6thetum (iiiaii.)...he so thinks it.
As
M6tho-^themayao...Ae well-thinks^ esteems^ him,
M^o-6the/ttm ,.he approves it.
Kisk-6thefftayG0...Ae knows him.
Math-^emoyoo. . . he despises him.
Pissisk-6thefiuiyoo...Ae notices him.
Kunnaw-^eifiafycN>...Ae keeps, takes care of^ him.
Cheek-ethemaycN>...Aelikes^ values^ him.
Untow-6them^cN>...Ae looks for, seeks^ him.
Kwaytow-^themoyoo...^ is at a loss what to think of him.
M^toon-^emayoo...Ae thinks (on) him.
^ zxi. 25. Mfuf en-ldndum (neut.) ..1 so think.
ATtftcT en-^emaft (trans, anim.). . J so think him.
NintT en-^ndon (inan.). . I so think it.
iii. 19. Oo ge minw-kindahnakwah . . they liked, approved of, it.
^. 29. Mdnw-aindun^n (subj. plural) . . which he approves.
vii. 29. Nin kek-inemail . . J know him.
inii. 14. Nffi kek-ldndoft . . I know it.
ii. 24. Oo kek-inemon . . he knew him or them.
ii. 25. Oo kek-ldndoft . . he knew i^
▼ii. 4. Oon dndahw-dinclbit . . he seeks »/.
iv. 27. A'indahw.ldn(iaAmfm (subj. flat, vowel) . . which thou seekest.
ii. 10. Ke ge g6ihmhW'(indon . . thou hast kept t^
vi. 29* Che t&pway-4nemat^ (subj.) . . that ye think him true, beheve
on him.
iv. 50. Oo ge tllpway-6in(2oft . . he beheves it.
iv. 27. Oo ge mdhmahkahd-ldneme^oofi (inverse def.) . . he was mar-
velled at (by him or them).
vii. 21. ICe ge m^hmahkahd-&in<lom . . ye have marvelled at it.
vii. 43. Pdp&hkon ke ahyen-dnema^ocf . . . qu. diff-difierently they
thought him.
X. 24. Ka gwinahw-dindahmoo(A)^o«^ (cans, subj.) . . . wilt thou
lack-to-think make us.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 45
M4hmetoon-6themayao...^ coi^templatet km.
Tab-^emayao...Ae governs, director him.
Kitteem^-^emoyoo...^ thinks him poor^ compassionates
him.
Mdhmuskdt-^thenuiyoo (act) he thinks wonder^ is
astonished (at) him.
Kist-6them£ryoo...Ae thinks much of^ respects him,
A fourth transitive form has w (anim.) , and h (inan.) ,
for its transitive signs, making -wayoo and -hum.
Oot6mma-fvayoo ..he beat^eth him.
Oot6mma-Amn...he beat-eth it.
(Oot6mmaheggun...a hammer^ tomahawk.)
P6ckama-fvayoo...he knock-eth^ cudgel-eth him.
P6ckama-Aum...he knock-eth it
(P6ckamoggun...a club or cudgel.)
The inanimate gender of the following verbs also is
formed by changing -wayoo into "hum.
Uckwdnnaivayoo...^ covers him*
UckwunnaAum...Ae covers it.
K&asewai^oo...ke wipes him.
Ktaaehum .,,he wipes it.
PistafvayGO...Ae mis-strikes him.
Uppan^ayoo...Ae opens him.
KippauMiyoo.. he shuts him.
^6\kmayoo...he does short of him.
Ndspittaiva^oo...Ae resembles him.
V^Ua,ivayoo...he misses him, as in shootings striking, &c.
Kiskinahfimmati'ayoo...Ae shews, instructs, him.
Pinmiittissahtt;ayoo...Ae follows him.
Pds8istahz0ayoo...Ae whips him.
K&iookB,'wayoo...he visits him.
M^y8ahfvayoo...he mends, patches, him.
Nutt6pott;afyoo...Ae asks drink of him.
Itissahzvoyoo (relat)...Ae sends him thither.
N4htawayoo. .he fetches him (by water).
Kittumwoyoo.. Je finishes (eats up) him. [Kittaa>, inan.^
46 A GRAMMAR OF
Miskawoyoo. . . he finds kitn. (Miskum^ inan. obj. )^
ChkeBlts.wayoo...he pierces him,
P6cku8t6wevMiyao...Ae puts him in the water.
M6tchoostayxi7ayao...Ae puts him in the fire.
Kdskdska»ay(w...Ae scrapes him,
M6onawayoo. . . he digs him.
MootDayoo...Ae eats him (inan. obj. M6ecb«)«^ &c. &c.
The last vocable to be noticed here, is that expres-
sed by iA, of more rare occurrence, as an energetic
element, than perhaps any other. It appears, also,
in primitive verbs at least, to be of a more feeble
character.
W^e^Aayoo (anim.)...he names him.
W6e/um (inan.)... he names or tells it^
W6e^mmawayoo (dat. case)... he tells it to him.
^ i. 45. Oo ge mikshwon [Cree, mi^kahwoyoo] (indie, anim.) . . he
found Mm.
z. 9. Che mikdnff [Cree, misk^] (subj. inan.) . . that he find it.
M vi. 57. Am6od (mv. subj.) . . (he) who eateth me,
vi. 61. M6}id (subj.) . . if Ae eat t/.
vi. 23. M4}ewod (subj.) . . that they did eat t^
yi. 26. Ke m4}eyaig (subj.) . . that ye had eaten it.
vi. 66. M6hjfrf (subj.) . . {he) who eateth it, [See Augment. Sec. 3]
^ xvii. 26. Nin gah w^endon . . I will tell it.
iv. 44. Oo ge w^ndofi . . he told t^.
iii. 11. Ne wSendahnon . . we (I. 3.) tell it.
iii. 8. Ke tah wienddhzeen (neg.) . . thou canst not tell t^
viii. 14. Ke dah wienddhzeuahwah (neg.; ye cannot tell it.
xvii. 26. Nin ge w^ndahmo^o^ (dat.). . I have told t^ to them.
iv. 39. Nf» ge w^endahmojr (inv.) . . Ac has told t* to me.
iv. 26. Nin gah w^endahm(%ocmoji (inv. 1. 3.) he will tell «* to «* .
iii. 12. Ke w4endBhm6oimahgoog (subj.) ..(if) I tell it to yem.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 47
M^ygu (accus.)...he gives him, or it.«
M^^^yoo (dat)...he gives (it to) him (oblique s^isc in the
direct form.)
Also,
K'thkyoo (anim.)...he places or puts him. ^
Ast6w (inan.)...he places or puts it.
This is a generic verb. Though irregular as to
the root, it is, together with its compounds, regular
in its inflections, following those of the form before
mentioned, viz. hayoo and tow.
U^ckoo<Aayoo...he hang^ (places) him up.
U^ckoo^ow...he hang« it up.
Tiickoo/Aayoo...he on-puts, i.e. adds him.
Tuckoo^ow...he add^ it
^ i. 17. Oo ge m^ewom . . he has given it,
iii. 16. Oo ge M4gewanun (possess, case). . he has given his him.
vi. 61. Ka migewaydn (subj.) . . which I will give,
vi. 33. M^gewoic^ (subj.) . . (he) which giveth it.
xiv. 27. M6gewawod (subj.) . . (as) they give.
X. 11. Oo m4gewktahmahwon (dat) . . he gives it for them.
iii. 35. Oo ge m6n6n . . he hath given (it) to him.
X. 28. Ne m6nog . . I give Qt) unto them.
iv. 14. Ka m^ntt^r (subj.) . . which I shall give (to) him.
xvii. 2. Ke m6nud (subj.) . . (as) thou hast given (to) him.
Che m4n6d (subj.) . . that he give (it to) him or them.
iii. 27. M6nind (mv. subj. indet.) . . that he be given rto).
^ (Chip. Ood* dhson, anim. — Ood' ^t6on, inan.)
xi. 34. Ke Qiaaig ? (subj.). . ye have placed him?
XX. 13. Ke Hkmhwahgwain (subj. dubit.) . . they have placed him,
XX. 15. Ke hik^ahwahd{wud)ain(\di.) . . thou has placed him.
ix. 15. Oo ge dh^dbn (inan.) . . he put, or placed, it.
xiii. 4. Oo ge dh^dbmm . . he had placed them (garments),
xix. 29. Ke &hfo<nf;oi(subj.). . they put it,
xiii. 2. Ke dhtooc? (subj.) . . he had put it.
48 A GRAMMAR OF
AfssewuMayoo...he puts him into a bag.
A^ssewut<^...he puts it &c.
These energizing signs, however, though appearing
in many cases, when compared with the English cor-
responding terms, to be mere indications of transition,
are oftentimes essentially distinctive^ presenting diffe-
rent modifications of the action qualifying the root,
as from
Weeche (used in composition)... n^i^^ cO'.
W6eche-Aayoo...he co-operates, co-acts him.
Weeche-n;ayoo...he accompanies him.
(See Sect. 3, Special Trans.)
When the root and its characteristic ending do not
readily coalesce, as is frequently the case in derivative
verbs, they are connected by means of a vowel, which
is also sometimes distinctive, sometimes perhaps
euphonic. In the following examples, the connecting
vowel is distinctive.
Nipp-(^z(;...Ac sleeps; nipp-^-hayoo...he lulls or puts him to
sleep, qu. he en-sleeps him (Fr. il I'en-dort).
Nipp-u...Ae is dead ; nipp-^-hajoo...he dead-ens (kills) him.
Of the intransitive verbs there are, as we have
already seen, several kinds. The following summary
comprises the chief of their several terminations, with
their modifications in the same (third) person of the
subjunctive mood, and in both genders.
1. SUBSTANTIVET VERBS.
AssinneewGo (subj. -wit)., he is stoney, of stone, from assin^
nee, a stone.
Assinneen^un (-wak)...t7 is of stone.
THB CREB LANGUAGE. 49
Aasinneeskow (^skdh)... stone aboundi.
Mechim-appwoo-^(xyao j(-A»i/)...meat-liquOT (broth) maket^
he.
2. ADJECTIVE VERBS.
T&issu {'issif)...he is cold (to the touch).
T^ikow ('^k)..M is cold.
Kinwootu ('Sit)...he is long, tall.
Kinwofv (•'dk),^M is long.
A^themtfiti (-^issk) he is difficult, cross^ perverse.
A^themun (-dk) it is difficult, grievous, hard.
K^eam'issu ('issit),„heis tranquil, quiet
Keeamitvissu ('ewissU),*.he is of & jpeacefid disposition.
See Sec. S, Augment.
ACCIDENTAL (PASS,) VERBS.
Kwiski^joo ("issooi),. he is tamed over.
Kwiske^oyoo (-etaik) .,M is turned over.
Makwoof 00 ('Sooi) .,.heis pressed*
Makwooiayoo (''taik)..M is pressed.
4. IMPERSONAL VERBS.
N^ptn (-^k)...t^ is summer.
P6poon (-^)...i< is winter.
Ispiittinoff (-ak)...t/ is a high hill.
Pimmichexwin (-&k).. it flow*, as water.
5. NEUTER VERBa
These may be classed under seven conjugations. They
take -magun in their inanimate form.
50 A GRAMMAR OF
A'ppa (-t7)...he sit*.
App6magun ('msLgdk),,,U sits.
A^cheoo (-e<)...Ae move^.
Acti^magun (-mag^iA:) it move^ .
Nipp(5w (-a/) .,he sleeps.
Kusk^thetum ('dk)..,he is impatient.
P6otlioo (-00^)... Ae leave* off, ceases.
Tiiekoostn (-eek),.. he arrives (by land).
P^moot«yoo (-ait).,, he walk*.
These verbal terminations, generally, and their cha-
racteristic letters, will however fiimish a subject for
separate consideration hereafter.
Secondly, — ^The inflected, or personal, &c. part,
which comprises (together with the accessories, case
and gender) aU the usual accidents of voice, mood,
tense, &c. in the definite and indefinite, positive, suppo-
sitious and doubtful (and, in the Chlppeway, negative)
forms. This part of our subject will be fiilly de-
veloped hereafter. See Accidence, &c.
In the view that has been taken of the Affix, the
notice on the inflected or personal portion of it has
been confined to the third person ; there exists,
however, in the relative position, &c. of the personal
signs, when in combination with the verb, a pecu-
liarity of arrangement and structure, which requires
particular observation.
It has been stated, that the Affix expresses the per-
sonal and other accidents of the verb. This principle
must be understood with some limitation. The first
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 51
and second persons singular of the indicative mood
depart from this rule, and, in an abridged form, precede
the verb. The following observations will, perhaps,
place this in an intelligible point of view.
In the English language, we say " I see him," and
we express the grammatical converse of the phrase,
'Vhe sees me," by the transposition of the pronouns,
with certain modifications of their form and of the verb.
The Indian system will not admit of this operation.
The relative position of their pronouns is fixed and
unalterable. The second person, be it agent or patient,
has always precedence of the first. In like manner, the
first and second persons in aU their relations, direct
and oblique, have precedence of the third. Ex.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (See Accidence.)
N^tha...Ne (Nef or 'Nt before a vowel), /.
K6tha...Ke (Kef before a vowel), thou,
W^tha...Oo (Oof before a vowel), he, she, or it
1. The first and second persons always stand before
the {sign of the) thirds be they agent or patient, as
under.
J[Note, — The form which, in the arrangement of its personal
members, is analogous to the English phrase, will be denominated
the DIRECT ; and that which presents the inverted English phrase,
the INVERSE form: an attention to this distinction, and to the
remarks just made, will greatly tend to a dear apprehension of the
paradigms of the verb^ hereaHer given at large. See Accidence.'l
Ne Nippahoft^ (dir.).../ kill-Atm.
Ne Nlppaht^ (inv.)...(fHe killeth-Ae) he kills me.
£ 2
52 A GRAMMAR OF
Ne niidw (dir.).../ fetch-Atm.
^e nd/iA: (inv.)...(me fetcheth-A«,) he fetches me.^
^ Neen, or Nin. . Ne (Nind* before a vowel) /.
Keen. . Ke (Ked' before a vowel) thou.
Ween. . Oo (Ood' before a vowel) he, she, or it.
DIRECT.
1. 34. Nin ge dehkh]emah . . I have related him,
vii. 29. Nin kekdnemaft . . I know him.
vi. 44. Nin gah b^zegw^denoA . . I will raise him up.
i. 34. Nin ge w&hbahmaA . . I have seen him.
xiv. 21. Nin gah B&bkeah . . I will love him.
xii. 21. Newe wkhbahmaAnon . . we would (want to) see him.
xvii. 10. Nin d^banemo^ . . I govern them.
zvii. 26. Nin ge w^ndahmahwo^ . . I have told (it to) ^A^m.
xviii. 20. Nin ge gidinoono^ . . I have spoken (to) them.
xvii. 12. Mi» ge k4hnahwanemo^ . . I have kept^ taken care of them,
z. 16. Nin gah b^no^ . . I will bring them.
X. 28. JNie m^no^ . . J give (to) them.
X. 14. M» kek^emo^ . . I know them.
xvi. 33. Nin ge sh&hgoojeo^ . . I have overcome them.
INVBRSB.
viii. 29* New^^w»^..me accompany-eth-^, i.e. he accompanieth
me, and so of the rest.
iv. 39* Nin ge w^ndahmo^ . . he has told it to me.
V. 37. Nin ge teb&hjem^ . . he has related me.
vi. 45. Ne hiuihzekdhgoog . . they come (to) me.
vii. 29* viii. 42. Nin ge dhnoon^ . . he hath sent me.
ix. 11. Nin geig ..he has said (unto) me.
vii. 7. Ne zh^ng&neme^oon . . it hateth me.
viii. 18. Nin deb^jemt^ . . he narrates me.
xii. 26. Nin gah ndopenahnt^ . . he shall follow me.
xii. 49* Nin ge m^nt^. . he hath given (to) me.
xiii. 20. Mfuf ooddhpent^ . . he taketh me.
iv. 25. Mn gah w^endahm^oonon . . he will tell us (1. 3.)
y. 45. Nin gah ^nahmem^oonofi . . he will accuse f» (1. 3.)
viii. V. Nin ge ^ffoonon . . he has said to us (I. 3.)
X. 27. JVe ndopen&hne^oo^ . . they follow me.
vi. 45. Ne h^^n&hieVdhgoog . . they come to me.
XV. 24. Ntngewdhbahm^ootiaAn^ . . they have seen us (1.3.)
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 53
Ne w4ppainon; (dir.).../ see-Atm.
Ne w^ppamtA: (inv.)...(Ital. mi vede, me see-eth-Atf) he
see-eth me.
So also with the second person, Ke, as
Ke nitow (dir.)... Mow fetchest-Am.
Ke nktik (inv.)...(/Aee fetcheth-^e,) he fetches theeJ^
Ke wippamon; (dir.)...^Aotf seest-Atm.
Ke w^ppamtA: (inv. Ital. H vedc.theeseeth-he), he sees thee.
DIRECT.
^1 ix. 35. Ke t^pway&nemaA . . thou believest (on) him.
viiL 57. Ke ke wkhhahmah . . thou hast seen him.
iv. 10. Ke tah ge unddotoAmaAtoaA (dat.) . . thou mightest have asked
it of him.
X. 36. Ked' endhwah . . ye say (of, or to) him.
xiv. 7. iTe ke wdhbahmaAK^aA . . ye have seen him.
Ke kekanemaAu^aA . . ye know him.
vii. 27. Ke kekanema^non . . we (1. 2.) know him.
xvii. 9. iTe debdnemo^ . . thou govemest (art master of) them.
XXX. 6. Ke kah mikdihyrahwog . . ye will find ^Aem.
INVERSE.
xi. 28. Ke nund6omi^ . . thee caUs-he, i.e. he calls thee, smd so of
the rest,
xi. 22. Ke dah ment^ . . he will give (to) thee.
vii. 22. Ke ge m^negoowah . . he has given (to) you
V. 45. ITe^ &hnahmem^oou;a& . he accuseth you.
vii. 47. jKc wdhyazheej^oom . . they (Ft. on) deceive you.
viii. 32. Ke gah p&hgeden^oona^u^aA . . he will let go you.
viii. 33. 36. Ke gah pdhgeden^oom . . they TFr. on) will set you free.
xii. 35. Ke w4]ewigoonahwah . . it accompanieth you.
xvi. 14. Ke gah w^hbundah^oowoA . . he wiU show it to you.
xvi. 23. Ke gah m6negoowah . . he will give it to you.
XV. 20. iTe gah kdodahge (ft) ^oowo^r . . they will persecute you.
XV. 21. Ke gah (oonje) t6odaA|^ooti;o^ . . they will do to you.
xvi. 6. iTc m6oshkenashk(fA^oo7MrAii7aA . . it filleth yow.
54 A GRAMMAR OF
2. The second person (Ke) always stands before the
{sign of the) first, as,
Ke nippahtn (dir.),..th(m killest-me.
Ke nippahf«m (iny.)...Cthee kill-/^ / kill thee.^
Ke ndstn (dji,).,,thou fetchest-m^.
Ke nktUtin (iny.)...Cthee fetch-/^ / fetch thee.
Ke yfkppamin (dir.).../Aau seest me.
Ke w4ppamt//t» (Ital. ti yedo..,tkee see-/) / see thee.
DIRECT.
^ xxi. 15. Ke s&bgeh ? . . thou lovest me.
xvii. 6. Ke ke m6em:h . . thou hast given (to) me,
xiii. 36. Ke gah nSopenuzh . . thou shalt follow me.
xvii. 24. £e s^ge^ . . thou lovest me.
vii. 28. Ke kekdnemtm . . ye know me.
v. 46. £e tah ge tdpwatahwtm . . ye would have believed me,
viii. 21. £e gah tindahw&nemtm . . ye wiU seek me,
viii. 49. Ke b^penooddhwim. . ye dishonour (laugh at) me.
xiii. 13. Ked' ezh^nek^zhtm . . ye call (name) me,
xiv. 19. Ke w^bahmtm . . ye see me.
XV. 27* Ke gah teb^jemim . . ye wUl relate me.
xvi. 16. Ke kah w^bahmim . . ye will see me.
£e kah wdhbahmeseem (neg.) . . ye will not see me.
XV. 27. £e ke (be-oonje) w^j^wtm. . ye have (hitherto) accompanied me,
INVERSE.
xvi. 25. Ke ke kekibiemin . . thee have known- J^ and so of the rest,
I have known thee,
i. 48. HCe ke wdhbahmtn . . I have seen ^Aee.
xi. 27. Ke tdpwayinemtn . . I believe on thee.
iii. 11. Kef enin. . I say (to) thee.
xiv. 12. and iv. 35. KedT en^mm . . J say (to) you.
xiii. 34. Ke m^nentm . . I give (to) you.
iv. 38. Ke ke ^hnoonentm . . I have sent you.
vii. 33. JTe w^j^wenim . . I accompany you.
vii. 37. Ke kekdnementm . . I know you.
xvi. 22. Ke gah w4hbahmentm . . I will see you.
THE CRBB LANGUAGE. 55
In the preceding examples, the grammatical position
of the personal signs reix^dns the same, although the
(abbreviated) pronouns Ne I and Ke thou, be nomi-
native and accusative, or subject and object ^ altematdy.
So also with the oblique cases.
Ne nippalowofv (anim.).../ kill-(Afm)^/br-Afin.
Ne nip]^atv>dk (id.)... me kill-(hiiD)^/2)r^-Ae^ L e. ke kills him
for me.
Ne nAtowofv ,,.I £etch'{him)-for'kim,
Ne nittvdk, , .me fetch- (him)-for,-^e, i.e. he fetches him far me.
Ne mi^i^klamawaw (inan.).../ kill-(i/)^/or him.
Nemppitamdk (id.)... me kill-(it)-;/br,-Ae, i.e. he kills it
for me.
Ne nktamorvow...! fetch-(t^)^/br-Aiiii.
Ne nAtamdk...mefeitch~(it)-for,~he, i.e. he fetches it for me.
£e nlppa^fi/Oftrm (anim.)... thou ki)lest-(^iin)^/br-97te.
Ke nippatnfdtin (id.)... thee kill-(^tm)-for^-/> i.e. / kill Asm
for thee.
Ke nkttvotvin...thou fetchest (him) for me.
Ke nkdtvdt%n...thee fetch-(^«»i)-for,-/,i.e. /fetch him far thee.
Ke m^i^ktamomin {jnsxi.)...ihou kille&t-(t<)^;/br-97te.
Kevii^i^ktamcUin (id.) ... thee kill-(it)far,^l, i.e. /fetch it
far thee.
Ke nktamotvin...thou fetchest-(t^)<^/br-me.
Ke Tiiktamatin...thee £etch'(it)'for,'I, i.e. / fetch it for thee.^
DIRECT.
^ viii. 3. Oo q6 hidahmahwdhwon (anim.) they brought him or her to
him.
ix. 13. Oo g€ h4ezhew4ddhmakwdhtDon . . they brought Mm to him
or them.
iv. 16. [A^we unddom . . go call thou him.']
iv. 10. Ke tah g^ \md6otahmahwah . . thou wouldest have asked it qf
(to) him.
56 A GRAMMAR OF
It will be observed that, in both the animate and
inanimate forms, the inserted syllable (the sign of the
oblique relation) (rf which the constant letters in these
and similar examples are w and its cognate, m, respec-
tively, is aUke found in the Direct and Inverse forms.
xvii. 15. Che (m^ 6ihgw9jaahmdhwahdwah (subj.) . . that thou hold it
to (from) them.
XX. 23. Afkoonahmdhwdgwdin (dub.) . . (whomsoever) ye shall with-
draw it to (Jrom) them.
XX. 23. Mwn}4menakndkwdigwdin (id.) . . (whomsoever) ye shall
hold it to them.
iv. 33. Oo g€ hitahmahwon . . he has brought it for him.
xii. 2. Ke 6o^etdhmakwahwod (subj.) they made it for him.
XV. 13. Che ^p&tigedmahmahwod (subj.) that he should loose t^ for
n$m.
INVBRSB.
X. 3. OoniOo^ esUikoona^ma^oon (inv.). . it is opened/or Mm.
xiv. 2. Ke tab g^ w^ndoAfnooRtm . . I would have told it to you.
xiv. 2. Ket ahwe wahwdsheta&moomm . . I go prepare it for you.
xiv. 3. A^hwe wd^wizhett^imoondhgoog (subj.) . . (if) I go prepare it
for you.
xviii. 39* Che bfihgedina&mootu%oo^ (subj.). . that /loose him to you.
NEGATIVE DIRECT.
ii. 24. Oo g4 h^gedinahmahwdhs^ . . fte did not loose it (his body)
to them.
iii. 11. Kef oot&bibenahmdhwes^in ... ye take it not to (from)
U8 (1. 3.).
iii. 32. Oof ootUhpendhmePiwdhsien . . he taketh t^ not to (from) him.
viii. 50. Nin* ^dsihwimdahmdhdegoose (refl.) . . I seek it not to miy^
self.
xvi. 23. Ke gah xm^oo^ahmdkweseem . . ye will not ask it to (qf) me.
xviii. 38. xix. 6. Ne ixi<Quikmahwdhse . . I find it not to (in) him.
NEUTER.
xi. 50. N^oofoAtood (subj.) ..Mhe die /or them.
xi. 51. Che n^aootdhwdhnid (id. possess, case) . . that he die/or them.
xvi. 2. MncT lUmook^oAwaA . . I work/or him (he wiU think).
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 57
in the Affix, and that in the latter this relational sign
is consequently disjoined from its regimen^ the pro-
nominal prefix. The remark may be extended to
the auxiliary particles, e.g. ghee (= fef , or ge Jones)
" have," ga (= gahy or fcoA, Jonbs) " shall or will,"
&c. which, in both these forms, always retain their
place before the verb.
Ke ghee natamowin (see p. 55)... thou hast feteh-it-for-me.
Ke ghee natamatin (id.)... thee have fetch-it-for^-I.
The exception, here exempUfied, to the rule laid
down of the affix being the general vehicle of the
personal accidents of the verb, extends, as already
stated, to the indicative mood only. In the imperative
and subjunctive moods, all the expressed pronouns
accumulate in the aflfcc. See paradigms of the verb.
The third persons, subject as well as object, are, in
Oree as already intimated, expressed in the inflected
part of the Affix in both the direct and inverted, or (as
regards this " third" person) active:SiiiA passive, forms,
as,
Vk^ehayoo,.,he laughs at him, or them (definite).
Vki^hik,.,he is laughe<^ at by him or them, (definite.)
T^pw4/ayoo...Ae calli aloud (to) him,
T^^witik...he is called to by him, &c. Tdef.).
Kkhtayoo,.,he hide^ him,
K^ik,,,he is Indden by him, &c. (def.)
W4ppam(zyoo...Ae aeeth him,
WdppamtA;...^e is seen by him, &c. (def.)
Oot6mma«?ayoo ,,,ke heats him.
Oat6mma,wook„,ke tj beaten by him, &c. (def.)
58 A GRAMMAR OF
Kip^m>ayoo„.he ehnU him up.
Kip]paavook.,.ke is shu/ up by him, &c. (def.). ^
^The brevity of this manner of expression is remarkable; the active
•^00 (Chip, -m), and the passioe -ik or ook (Clup. -egoon or oogoon), axe,
as above, alike d^ite in their personal signification. The latter can, in
English, be accurately rendered only by a description — ^by an indefinite
participle, 9A,heis seen, qualified by a (2^n»^e pronoun with a preposition
— by him, &c. The ind^nite passive participle will hereafter be foimd
to have a different form. — ^Vide infra.
Of the following inverse (definite) forms, those marked * are expressed
directkf or actively, in the English Original ; the remaining examples only
are expressed po^nveZ^.
DIRECT AND INVERSE. — TwO third FeTBOHB.
ii. 4. xviii. 11. Oo (ge) en<^ (direct) . . he (has) said to him, (her, or
them,)
* iv. 9. Oo ge ^goon (inverse). . hehsis been said to by him, her, or them.
xii. 21. Oo ge ^dwaw^dahmahwahwon (dir. obliq. case) . . they be-
sought him.
* vii. 1. Oo ge dndahw&neme^ooft (inv.) . . he was sought by, 4'c.
iv. 31. Oo ge ezhe dndahwdnemcr^oon (inv.). . he was besought by, ^c.
zi. 45. Oo ge t&pwayinema^te^on (dir.) . . they believed on Mm,
* u. 11. viii. 30. Oo ge t£pway£ineme^oon (inv.) . . he was believed on
hy,Sfc.
iv. 3. 28. Oo ge n^Jigahdon (dir. inan.) ..heoxsheldi it,
* iv. 62. Oo ge ndbgahne^ooit (inv. inan.) . . he was left, by it, ^c.
iv. 52. Oo ge gahgw4jemofi (dir.) . . he asked hkn or them,
* ix. 2. Oo ge gahgwdjemei^oon (inv.) . . he was asked by, ^c,
i. 49. ii. 19. Oo ge g^noonon (dir.) . . he spoke (to) him or them,
* xii. 29. Oo ge k&hnoone^ooit (inv.) . . he was spoken to by, 4*0.
iii. 35. Oo z&tigeahn (dir.) . . he loveth him,
V. 20. Oo z&hgeon (dir.) . . he loveth him.
xiv. 21. Oo gah s&hgeei^ooit (inv.) he shall be loved by, ^c.
ii. 24. Oo gekdnemon (dir.) . . he knew him or them
xviii. 15. Oo ge kekdneme^oon . . he was known by, fyc.
iii. 21. Oo ben^nzekon (dir.) . . he cometh to (him or it)-
* iii. 26. Oo bendhzeka^^oon (inv.) . . he was come to by, <5*c..
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 59
In the preterite, and some of the compound tenses,
however, the Crees prefix the oo or oof of the third
person, in both the abovementioned forms. See Ac-
cidence.
The concurrence of two or more third persons in a
sentence in different relations, is often an occasion of
ambiguity, and indeed constitutes one of the leading
DIRECT.
XV. 23. Oo sh^englinemoit . . he hateth Mm,
ii. 10. Oo blilikedenoii . . he looses it,
xxi. 13. Oo ge m^non . . he has given (to) him, or them,
ii. 9. Oo ge lindoomon . . he has called him,
iv. 36. OocP ootihpenon . . he taketh (receiveth) it.
vi. 5. Oo ge w^bumon . . he has seen him or them,
vi. 19. Oo ge w^hbumai^on . . the^f have seen him.
zviii. 15. Oo ge n6openahno» . . he has followed him
xii. 19. Oo noo^pen&tmahwon . . they follow him or them,
iii. 26. Ooge h^-mhzekahwahwon . . they have come to him or them.
INVBRSB.
* xi. 48. Oo gah t£pwayt<%roon. . he will be believed on by him or them.
* i. 1. Oo ge wej ^we^roon . . he was accompanied by, Sfc,
* i. 39. Oo wedahdtf^oon . . he was remained with by, Sfc.
* iii. 26. Oo be-n4hzek<%roon . . he was come to by, Sfc,
* iv. 51. Oo ge w^ndahmaA^oofi (dat.) . . he was told it hy, ^c.
* z. iii. Oo^ esdhkoonalmu%roon (dat.) . . he was opened for^ by, ^'C.
vi. 45. Oo gah k^(ke)nooahm(%oou;on. . they shaU be taught it, lyy^^c,
* i. 4. Oo ge w6hsashkiA^oonaAt(;aA . . they have been lighted by, 4*0.
* iv. 51. Oo ge nlQiguashkaA^oon C^iv.) ftewas met by, dfc.
The particle Ae or ge (hanoe, &c.) is an uninfleddble amiUary used in die
compound tenses, and would have been better expressed bj iee (or ghee) to
mark the stress always laid on it. This form of the word would also have
rendered it less liable to be confoimded by the learner with the/ironotm
Ke, when found akne, e.g. as the auxiliary of the mtbjwtctive mood. In
the use of the pregent and eompomnd qf the present for the poit tense, the
Indian is in exact analogy with the French idiom.
60 A GRAMMAR OF
obstacles to the attainment of the American languages.
This matter will hereafter be clearly exhibited and
fully explained.
It should also be further observed, that the plural
numbers of the personal pronouns are not, as in
English, expressed by the substitution of one term for
another, as we for /, ye for thoUy &c. but by an augment
annexed to the singular.
N6thanan...(l-f3. i.e. /, and he, or / and they) We.
KetMiioft;...(l+2. i.e. /, and thou, or / and^e) We.
K€duitvow,..Ye.
W6thafP0f»...They.
[Note. — With respect to the personal pronouns, it may be proper to
remind the reader that, between the Jirst person plural, and the second
and third persons plural, there is this material difference to be observed
in their grammatical value. The second person plural comprises two or
more second persons exclusively. The third person plural, in like manner,
two or more third persons. But the first person plural is necessarily a
combination of different persons, namely, of the first person singular
with either of the other two (viz. second or third) persons — ^hence the
English plural pronoun, we, used to signify, indifferently, I and thou (or
I and ye), and I and he (or I and they), becomes, in all its cases, and also
in its possessive pronoim, equivocal, and its precise meaning must be
sought for in the tenor of the discourse, or the explanation of the speaker,
as " We praise thee O God." " Our father who art, &c." " Forgive us
our trespasses." '' And they said unto him, we are all one man's sons ;
we are true men," &c. Gen. xlii. 11. Again, " And they said one to
another, we are verily guilty concerning our brother, in that we saw the
anguish of his soul when he besought «« and we would not hear, therefore
is this distress come upon us." In the last of these examples, it is evident
that the pronouns we, us, our, include the first and second — in the others,
the first and third persons. In the Algonquin dialects, this equivocal
manner of expression is avoided by the use of a separate term for each of
these two combinations, namely, N^hanan, equivalent to the English we,
signifying I and he, &c. ; and Kethdwno, equal also to we when implying
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 61
thou, &c. and I, or the first and secfmd persons. The same distinction
is maintained through all the forms of the verbal inflection, and
also of the possessive pronoun. It is generally indicated in this work
thus, (1. 3.) and (1. 2.). The grammarians of the South Americam lan-
guages denominate these two forms, the eaebuwe and the inclusive, with
reference to the person addressed.]
These plural augments^ or affixed syllables^ of the
simple personal pronoun, when in combination with a
verb in the indicative mood, constitute, with the excep-
tion of the fAird person in some cases, the verbal affix,
or at least a part of it, the (abbreviated) singular form
only, being prefixed,
Ne ndtamin (dir.)...fre (1.3. i.e. first and third persons)
fetch him,
Ne ndtlkooitan (inv.) ,.he fetches us (1. S.).
Ke nitanow (dir.) ...we (1.2. i.e. first and second persons)
fetch him.
Ke nktikoonow (inv.)...Ae fetches t/i (1. 2.).
Ke nk8inan(6di.)..Jhou fetchest us (1. S.).
Ke nAUttinan (inv.) ..tve (1. 3.) fetch thee.
Ke n6tw6winnan (dir.), .thou fetchest Imafor us (I. 3.).
Ke luitwktinnan (inv.). ..we (1. 8.) fetch Jmnfor thee.
Ne nitowuk (dir.).../ fetch them.
Ne nktanndnuk (dir )...we (1.3.) fetch them (double plural).
Ne ni^koondnuk (inv.)...^Aey fetch us (i. 3.). (id.)
Ke n&tandfvuk (dir.) . we (1. 2.) fetch them, (id.) ^
Ke nktikoondwuk i\ny,)...theif fetch us (1. 2.). (id.)
Ke nktvrdwmawaw (dir.) ...^e fetch him for me.
Ke nitwkdnowotv (inv.).../ fetch him for you. »
s& The Chippeway is not, in this point, closely imitative of the Cree
dialect. In the intransitive form, the '* constant" to of the plurai aug-
62 A GRAMMAR OF
The same observation may be made with respect
to the intransitive verbs, as,
Indie. ^ep^ootan.../walk.
Ke p6moatan..Ahou walkest.
P6mootayoo ».he walks.
Fkmoot&ymagun (inaxL),.M walks.
Ne pem6otaniuiiz...ive (1. 3.) walk.
Ke ^m6otxnanaw..,we (l. 2.) walk.
Ke p6moot¬vorv . ye walk.
P6mootiyfvuk (po-^uk)..,Tkey walk.
P^mootkymagunwah (inan.) theif walk.^
ments is represented, in the first and second persons, by its cognate m.
In the transitive, the affixes are substantially those of the Cree dialect.
See Accidence.
N^naAtrtm. .we (I. 3.),
Kienahwun. .we (I. 2.).
K6enahwah. . ye.
W6enahwah. . they.
i. 32. Nin ge wdhbahmah (anim. sing.) . . I have seen him.
xii. 21. IVe we wahbahmahnon (plu. 1.3.) ..we want to see him.
vii. 29. Nin keklbdemah (anim. sing.) . . I know him.
vii. 27. Ke kdclmemahfioii (plur. I. 2.) ..we know him.
iv. 25. JVmkek^ndon (inan. sing.) . . I know it.
iy. 22. Ke kek£indahnofi (plu. 1. 2.) . . we know it.
zx. 15. Ke kek^dndon (inan. sing.) . . thou knowest it.
viii. 32. Ke kah ksk^ndsibnahwah (plur.) . . ye will know it.
ii. 26. Oo kekldndon (inan. sing.) . . he knows it.
vii. 26. Oo kek^indahnoMoaA (plu.) . . they know it.
^ ix. 25. Ne wob (neut.) . . I see.
ix. 41. Ne w^befaiii (1.3.). . We see.
viii. 52. xviii. 34. Kef ekid . . thou sayest.
iv. 20. ix. 41. Ked* ^edoom . . ye say.
V. 1. (Oo) Ke efMh . . he went.
iv. 45. (Oo) Ke ezt^wug. . they went.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 63
NOTE. — Of the Neoatitb Vemb*
It may be regarded, perhaps, as a curious circumstance in language,
that of two dialects so nearly allied in all other leading points, the one
should possess, and the other be destitute of, the negative form of the
verb. The Cree has no negative verbal form. The Chippeway negative
verb is formed by annexing se or ze to the singular number, with some-
times a s%ht modification of the ending. The plural augments, and
other accidents of the verb, are appended to it. The following examples,
being all in the Indicative Mood, are, for the sake of emphasis only, pre-
ceded in the Original, sometimes indeed remotely, by the neg&tive particle,
Kah or Kdkween. See Accidence and Syntax.
TRANSITIVE.
ANIMATE (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE).
viii. 55. xiii. 18. Nin gekdnemaA . . I know him,
viii. 55. Nin gekkaemahse . . /know him not,
[_Ke kekknemah . . thou knottiest him.']
[Ke kekkaemahse . . thou knowest him not.]
xiii. 11. Oo ge kekdnemon . . he has known him.
XV. 15. Oo keUoiemahseen . .'^cknoweth him not.
[Nin kekknemahnon ..we (I. 3.) know him.']
[Nin kekknemdhsenon ..we (I, 3.) know him not.]
vii. 27. Ke kekiaemahnon ..we (l. 2.) know him,
[Ke kekdnem(f^6tton ..we (1.2.) know him not.]
viii. 19. Ke (tab ge) kekdnemaAti;aA ..ye (should have) known Aim.
viii. 55. Ke kekkaemdhsewah . . ye know him not.
xii. 9. Oo (ge) kekkaemahwon . . they (have) known him.
xxi. 4. Oo (ge) kekiaemdhsewon . . they (have) known him not.
DIRECT.
xviii 9. Ne ke w^neoA^e . . I have lost him not.
xviii. 38. Ne m^kahmahwoA^e (obliq. case) . . / find in him not,
V. 37. Ke ke n6ondBihwdhsewah . . ye have not heard him.
Ke ke w^hwaui^ewah . . ye have not seen Mm,
viii. 55. Ke kekkaemdhsewah . . ye know him not.
64 A GRAMMAR OF
XV. 15. Oo V^knQmahsem . . he knoweth km not.
i. 18. Oo w^bahmaA«0efi. . he seeth him not.
xix. 9. Oo ge "kOaxkooTkohseen . . he has not spoken {to) him.
xi. 37. Oo tah ge k^shkeaA^een . . he could iiof have caused him.
xxi. 4. Oo ge kekdnem(fA«et0(m . . they have nof known ^tm.
xxi. 12. Oo we kahgwdjem(fA««toon . . they want not to ask him.
X. 5. Oo dah n6openahn(f^6won . . they would not follow him.
X. 8. Oo ge n6ondahw<^A«etoo» . . they have not heard him.
INVBR8B.
xii. 44.^/tn tdpway^nem^i^oo^e . . ^ believeth not on m^.
xvi. 9* Nin dk^^B.ykatmigooseeg . . they believe not on fiie.
xiv. 19. Nin gah w^bahm^oo^eey . . they will nof see me.
viii. 10. £e ke nahn^boom/]700«e . . he has not dead-said thee.
vi. 32. vii. 19. Ke ke men^oo^et^aA . . he has not given t^ to yoti.
xvi. 22. Ke m^dikahm^^ooset^aA . . he taketh not from you.
vii. 7- ^c tah zh^engdnem^^oosenawaA . . It (the world) will not
hate yott.
xvii. 25. Ke ke gekdnem^^^oo^ee^ . . they have iiof known thee.
i. 10. Oo ge kekdnem^^oo50«i . . he has not been known 6y t^.
xiv. 17. Oo w^bahm^^oo^een .. ^ is nof seen by it.
xiv. 17. Oo gekdnem^^oo50«i . . ^ is not known by it.
i. 11. Oo ge ood^pen^^oo^eemm . . he has not been taken by them.
INANIMATE (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE).
ix. 25. JVtn gekiindon . . I know it.
iz. 12. 25. Nin gek^ddhzeen . . I know f^ not.
xxi. 15. iTe kek^dndon . . thou knowest it.
xiii. 7. Ke kekdinde^^een . . thou knowest it not.
xix. 35. Oo kek^ndon . . he knoweth it.
xii. 35. Oo gekkinddhzeen . . he knoweth t^ not.
iv. 42. Nin gek^ndaAnon ..we (1. 3.) know it.
ix. 21. 29. Nin geldkinddhzenon ..we (1. 3.) know it not.
ix. 31. Ke kekiinda^fton . . toe (1. 2.) know it.
xvi. 18. Ke kek^dnd(^^enofi ..we (1. 2.) know it not.
viii. 32. Ke (kah) keV^ndahndhwah . . ye (will) know i^
xi. 49. iv. 22. Ke kek^ddhzenahwah . . ye know it not.
THB emu LANeUAGB. 65
x^.M. (k g^ Mnhn akm ak . . thtif know U.
)u5. Oo g fMindift WM J hw w (powasg^ caae) . . ihif know U md.
liL 3. Oo till w&bnndahiLrtfai . . he could not nee it.
xvi. SI. Oo m^qriaindalLreai . . ^ (or she) remembereik it not.
iii. S. Oo tah g£8hket6oMMiii . . he could not accomplish them.
xiv. 24. (hv^i4aADihMmmn..heh6h5i&^
xix. 24. Agiibk^«hkebed6oMiioti .. We (1. 2.) will iio^ rend tt.
vi. 5S. (A) kMskk^akMenakwah . . ye wear it not.
loiL 14. Ke dah w^dlUureiiaAioaA . . ye could no^ tell if .
xvL 24. Ke^ (oonje) ^dootdiuraMiAtffail . . ye aak tt nof .
ii. 3. Oocf tkjilaufenakmah , . thejf have if nof .
xxi. 3. Oo ge ndtdoMnoAioaib thejf have nof killed if.
▼iii. 2T. Oo ge n^setootdiur enaJhooii {possess, case) . . they have mt
understood it.
DIBBCT-HISCONO AND f IUST PSRS0N8.
xiv. 9* Ke kekinemeie , , tkw kpowest me nQt.
xix. 10. Ke glUu^oQiheie . . thon speakest (to) me not.
T. 40. Ke we b^niUiieklUiioeMeiit . . ye want (to) come not (to) me.
XV. 16. Ke ke wahwdn^bahmeyeem . . ye have not chosen me.
m. 6. jfiuMf eshe kahgw&jemeMem .. ye so ask me not.
{xvi. 16. iCegah wtiibalumm (posit.) . . ye shall pee ma,]
xvip 10. Ke wfthbahmeveem .. ye see me not.
xvi. 16» 17. 19. Ke gah wlihbthmeseem . , ye shall see me mt.
vi. 26. KetP (oonje) ^d^hw^bnmeseem . . ye (because) seek me not.
xii. 8. JTecT ahy^wei^em . . ye hay^ me not.
viL 34. Ke gah m^kah^e^eem . . ye will not find me^
viii. 19. £e kekfeneme«igm , . ye know me Mof.
iii, 11. Ke^ ootUipenahm^weirenHo (dat). . y^ take wot tp (from) tie.
INVERSE.
viii. 11. iCe nahn^boom^enooii . . thee condemn not I, i.e. I condemn
filee fiofy and so of the rest,
a. 40. Ke ke en^fenooit . . /have not said (unto) thee.
zviii. 26. K^ ke Mr6hbahm^«eiiooft . . /have not seen filee.
vi.70. ISekewahwinihbahm^waoofiim., I have iiof chosen yo».
xiii. 18. Kef eoihuienoomm . . J say it nof (to) yoti.
ziv. 27» &cPe8hem£iMtefiooMm..l80givefiof (iwfo)yot».
P
66 . ▲ QRAMMAJl OF
idv, 18. Ke kah ezhe nihgekD^senoGmm . . / will not so left?e you,
xn, 4. Ke ke w^ndalun6oMiiooiiim . . I have no^ named ihem to yon.
zv. 15. Ked^ ezheDek^imesendonim . . J call, nam^ you not.
xyi. 26. Kef eji4ne8endonim . . I say no^ (to) yo».
ADJSCTIVS VSBBS — P08ITIVS AND NEGATIVE.
V. 30. CKonesheshtn ,.it is good, ''just.''
V. 10. (yonesheahinzenoon ..iti$ not good, '* lawful.''
vi. 63. Ea&bh&lidkhsenoon ..it is not xhkM, ** pn^teih not"
ACCIDENTAL (PASSIVE) VERBS.
XX. 7* Em^ iHbidig (subj.). . there, (where) t^ was placed.
XX. 7. Ke ddhgoo-ahtcCsenoon . . t^ was not on-placai, added to.
xix. 31. Che ihgqoddsenoog (subj.). . that they should not be, *' re-
main/' hung up.
NEUTER — ANIMATE.
vii. 8. Ne we eihShse . . J want (to) go not.
xmi. 20. Mft ge ^edoose . . I have spoken not.
xviii. 17. Nind^ Qxwese (vide infra.) . . J am he not.
xviii. 17. KecP Sbwese . . thou art he not.
vii. 1. We p^oosflwe . . he wants (to) walk not.
vii. 52. Pd-oond^deze9e . . he hither-^rom proceeds (comes) not.
ix. 3. Ke m6hje-^zhecheg(£fe . . he has iU-done not.
ix. 4. Tah dhnookese . . he will not work.
xi. 9. Tah b^Uiketashntre . . he will not fall.
xi. 21. Tah ge n^boo«e . . he would not have died.
xi. 56. Tah hi-ezhdhse . . he will not hither-go (come).
xvii. 12. W^ne8htft2re . . he has not gone astray, lost himself (not
reflect.),
xxi. 11. Ke b^ooshkaA«« . . t^ has not broken.
viii. 48. .A/incT 6ked6osemn . . toe (1. 3.) say not.
TV. 35. Ked* ikedooseem . . ye say not.
iv. 48. Ke tah tdpwayaindlihsreefn . . ye would not believe.
vii. 22. Ke ke (oonje) ^zhechegdMcm. . ye have not (therefore) done it.
vi. 36. Ke t&giWKjBind&tizeem . . ye bdieve 110^.
viii. 21. Ke gah kdhshketooMem . . ye will not succeed.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 67
ix. 18. Ke t&pwatdiureicw^ . . they have not believed.
X. 28. Tah nib6o8ewug . . they shall not die.
xii, 9. Ke b^-oonje-ezh^euTfi^. . they have hither-therefore-go (come)
not.
xvii. 14. tMaD,dihgqoz4(jt€)vmg . . they are not governed,
xviii. 28. Ke ^ndegfaewug . . they have no^ entered.
(Subj. and Lnperat, vide infra.)
INANIMATE — P08ITIVB AND NBOATIVB.
i. 38. 41. ix«r7. xix. 37. E\ed6omahgud . . it saith.
viL 42. Ke ekeddomdhgdhsenoon . . it hath not said.
V. 32^ Tipwimahgfidemg (possess, case subj.). . that it istme.
viii. 13. T&pwimahgdhsenoon ,,iti$not true.
xvi. 32. A'^hzhe . . tlQigweshen6omaA$rtM^ .... already . . it arrives,
vii. 6. ii. 4. T&tkgweB\ien6omahgdh8enoott . . it arriveth not,
xii. 24. 'S^bdomahguk (subj.) .,if it die.
xii. 24. 'S£b6(mahgdhsenoog (id.) . . ^ t^ die not.
The particle *' kah" or '' gah/' constantly occurring in Mr. Jones's
** Translation/^ is of a three-fold character : 1. It is a negaiwe, ** no»"
or '' not/' and governs the indicative mood. (See Note, p. 63.) 2. It is
a pronoun relative, (who, whom, which,) and refers to a d^nite antecedent ;
in this relation it governs the subjunctive, 3. It is an auxiliary of the
future. Indicative. See Syntax,
Section III.
Of Primitive and Derivative Verbs.
Paragraph I.
Derivative verbs are, in the Cree language, of
several kinds ; the component parts of the simple
or primitive verb, namely, the attribute, the action^
f2
68 ' A GRAMMAR OF
and the personal accidents, being severally and sepa-
rately, susceptible of various modifications. I shall
divide them into two classes, as follows : —
The first class of derivative verbs includes those of
which the modification of the root qualifies or changes
the nature or meaning of the attribute, and which will
be noticed hereafter.
The second class comprizes those verbs which
are varied in their forms by accessory modes of
INTENSITY, of MANNER, Or of RELATION, aS
1. Of Intensity J as Augmentatives, &c.; the special
transitive forms ; and the indeterminate and indefinite^
as distinguished from the determinate and definite
personal and impersonal accidents.
2. Of Manner, as the transitive and causative
forms.
3. Of Relation, as the direct and oblique cases of
the personal pronouns, as they are inflected with
the intransitive, transitive, reflective, and reciprocal
forms.
These varied forms compose a numerous list of
derivative verbs, which are all referrable to their several
conjugations. We propose to exemplify them (3d
pers.pres. indie.) in the following order : 1 . Augmen-
tatives, &c. 2. Transitive, &c. Verbs. 3. Reflective
and Reciprocal Verbs. 4. Special Transitives, and
their Reflectives. 5. Indeterminate and Indefinite
Verbs. 6. Oblique Cases and their Reflectives. 7.
Genders.
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 69
AUGMENTATIVES, &c.*'
Wippdw,,,he sleeps.
Nipp^^u...he sleeps very frequently.
N^ iiipp6w...he sleeps with iteratioun (i9de£)
Nd mpp6w...he tAeeps at tknes, distributwelif,
Nippa^...^ sleeps a Uttle.
Nd mp^iu...he sleeps a Utile, mm and then.
^ iii. 4. Tah p^endega . . shall or will k^ enter,
xviii. 38. Ke z^hgahtim. . he went out.
X. 9. Tah bdhh6endega, kiya tali ^o^zaligalittm . . he shall go in {toith
repetition), and he shall go out, with repetition (indef.).
ii. 15. BUizhahnzha^gun (Cree^ Pdssistah^ggun) . . a whip.
xix. 1. Ke paAp^shonzhawo(2 (suhj.) . . they toAt'-whipped him,
-^
iii. 13. Ke ezhe domheshkoA^e . . he has not so ascended.
i. 51. Tah <%6omheshkaAtfm» kiya tah b^-noAnahzhetimn (possess.
case) . . they shall ascend (with rqtetiHon), and they shaU
descend (with rq^etition).
iii. 5. Oo ge gahnoonon . . he answered him*
XX. 18. Ke kahkSibssiOOiDi^good . . that he (or ^) was said to hy Mm
(with repetition.)
X. 25. WdzhetooycfAfim . . which I make, (indef.)
xiv. 3. Ahwe wahwiiiLQtahmoondhgook . . if I go make, intensively,
i.e. prepare, it for yon*
X. 1. P^ihkon . . different.
vii. 43. Pabdhkon ke i%en£neniahwod . . dl-differently ihej thought
(of) him, (indef.)
v. 8. P^moosatn . . walk thou,
iv. 6. Ke p^^moosoti . . as Ae had been walking.
viii. 52. Ke n€aooh . . he has died.
iii. 18. Nahn<^{ioah$e (anim.) ,, he is not (quasi) oondemnec?.
iii. 17. Che ndhm&iHMndnng (inan.) . . that he eoiidemn it.
xii. 6. PoAp&hmanemoc^ . . that he thought abont Inm or them.
vii. 20. Bab^.tindah-n^sO; (Cree, .-ish) . . who about goeth (to) kill thee.
70 A GRAMMAR OF
Th6spisu.,.he is gentle.
Th6spis6p«ru...he is of a gentle dispasition {habilual. Angl.
"OUS).
Eiib&Bkiiku...he lies very qften. ^
Kd kith^ku...^e lies tAth iteratum. ^ndef.)
£4kith48kiiiErtf...A^ lies wHk iteratum and very Jrequenily.
Angl.^ He is a very great liar.
K^etim»...Ae is lazy^ idle.
Kd \Lie\imu...ke is idle with iter(Uion. (indef.)
Kietijxasku.,,he is very often idle.
K^etimiSwisu...he is hahituaUy hzy, indolent. (Angl. -ou^.)
> P&ptf...^ laughs.
Pd pl^...Ae laughs much, or with excess, (indef.)
Vkg\sku...he laughs cften, is addicted to it
Vki^in>isu...ke is ]ocose, (habit)
Mdygti...^ gives.
Jtfif mdygif...Ae gives n^A t^olton. (indef.)
viii. 44. N^tah gen^weshke . . he knows how (to) lie.
viii. 65. Ntn dah Iboilgen&hwishk . . I should lie (indef.), i.e. be a
liar,
viii. 55. Axhe ii;aAg^nahwislikeyi% .. as ye lie Ondef.).
^x. 10. Che k^oodtd . . that he may steal.
X. 1. Kem6ode«MeA . . he steals qften, i.e. he is a thief.
X. 8. Ke VtrnfiO^eshkewmg . . they have stolen oftenf i.e. are thieves.
X. 10. Klbn6ode«AHi . . he who steals qften 0ndef.), i.e. a thief.
X. 1. M&hkondw^AibA . . he plunders often, is addicted to plunder,
i.e. he is a robber.
X. 8. Ke mfihkundw^AAietoti^ . . they plunder qften, i.e. are robbers.
X. 10. Che n^shewoti (subj.). . that he kiU.
viii. 44. N^hew(MiUt-^5tfii . . he kiU-ed qften, i.e. was a murderer.
iii. 23. N^beh-JM (Cree, skcm) . . water obcmds.
vi. 10. M^enzhahshkoo-Aef^bun . . grass abomdre^.
THE CESB LANGUAGE. 71
Md mkygu...he gives diitribuHvefy.
M&ygkysku...he gives veiy often, is in the hahii of giving.
T£Lto-puthu...if is torn.
T<t<-t4to-puthtf...tf is torn /o exce^^, to tatters.
Kinwoo-k^^oo...ie Aoj a long-1^.
£(2k6nwoo-k&tdfyoo...Ae has long legf (indef.) Anglic^^ he
is long-legge<7.
Wdgoii7...t< t> crooked.
^itf-wligummoo...the path is crooked^ winding.
Fr^-wdg(st]ckwio»...the river is crooked^ meandering.
Fti8koonayoo...Ae (an animal) is fat.
PtiskoonayiPif/r.../^ (id. definite) are fat
T& ptiskoonay«;tf^...<Aey (id. indefinite) are fat^ generalfy.
Pd j^^uikoon&ywuk „.th^ are fat^ here and there one. &c.
Thus this reduplicative form, and its equivalent, /
long, (see helow) are often, in the indicative mood,
what the flattened vowel is in the subjunctive (see p.
73), namely, the sign of an indefinite tense^ or time.
M^echti (trans.). ..Ae eats it (present, or dejinite, tense).
Md m6eehti...Ae eats it (inde/inite time) commonly^ &c
M^echen^it€«;oo...<Aey^ people, (Fr. on) eat it. (def. time.)
Md mkecheDdnenfoo...they, (Fr. on) eat it, indefinite^; An-
glicd^ it is eaten^ e.g. as an artide of food> or luxury.
/ long, = SB (= ahy, Jones.) before a vowel.**
Itw&yoo...^ says.
/-itw4yoo...Ae says with vigour or constancy, asserts^ de-
dares, (indef)
^T. 19. il^ihechegoui (subj.) . . so Ae doeth ^def. See ''flat vowel.")
v. 19. A^hyezhichega ..so he doeth (indef.).
xvi. 3. JTegah (%indood^ootf7(fj^ (inv.). . they will do to you (indef.).
xi. 11. Kah dkyekeddod (sub.) . . which he said, declared,
ii. 18. Ke c^^ezhecheg^fi (subj.) . . which thou doest. (indef.)
73 A OBABIBtAR OB
I4Mooitm...he does it droi^, Sawly, wMi ^onttalicy.
I*'iUaai6w...ke places kjbrm.
J-it-upptf...fo sits Jtrm.
J-it-uskittoiP...fo sets tf up Jtrm*
/-it-tittofp.. il€ firms, fixes it.
I-it-appe^m.-.A^tiest^^rmyieciurdiy. (See IMatipe verbs.)
(Jro^ Niee, exactly:^
Ni it4ootum.,.he does it exactly.
Ni apptf...Ae sits carefuUy.
NS asltow,..he places t< carefidbf, in order.
JT^ Ap«...Ae sees tv^ has a keen sight*
NS it-turn...^ hears tveU, acately.
NS it-tiggittii (anim. a person)...^ u of the exad sise^.
N^ 6cke^»i...4e counts them earefvlbf. &c^
ntmi^UTrVES.— >IXPERS01^AL VERBS.
Mi8poon...t< snow«.
Misp6onn...& snow« a Uitle.
'P6edtidf»..M is &r, a great distance^
'P^ectuinn,.Mis&r'isk, rather &r.
KiBoaewvLH^M raini.
Kimmewiuriit...t< rain^ a little. &c»
ADJECTIVE VERBS.
Mis8higitttf...Ae is large.
Misshigitti«w...A« if larguA, rather large*
Mi88<$iv...t< & larger
'Uisadsin,.M is largish.
Mlthkoom...Ae is red.
Mithkoomra...ile is red'isk.
Mithkwdsp ..toured.
Miihkw6sin...it is red-if^ &cw
NEUTER VERBS.
P6mootfl(yoo . . . he wallu.
P6nooch^y#tf...Ae walk^ a lUtk.
THB CEB£ LANMJAOS. 7S
JMtOCB68OS«««^0 CMC*
Some verbs have only the int^iisive ( r g p rftrt tye )
form, as,
il»-^80o.*«he is tattooed*
Pj^^^cli^...he is Aow, tedious.
irif-w^pe-pdtha..at swings^ oscillates.
2r^.tippe-p<khu...it turns (on its axis)^
Tif-td-tippe-piil]iu...it rolls (along).
Pif-pSt&yoo...it is spotted.
Cftil-ch&chagow..at is striped*
^<^w^-p6thu...it rocks^ moves backwards and forwanb..
Besides the above-mentioned intetMwe modes of
frequency^ iteration, &c. there is yet anoth^, which
may be termed the indefinite mode, (see p. 71) and
which is distinguished (in the eubjunctive or subordinate
mood) by the alteration of the fir^ vowel of the root,
signifying that the action combined with the attribute,
is generalized, or rendered indefinite in respect of time,,
and hence, secondly, impljdng sometimes custom^ or
haMt, in the subject ; when it also often becomes the
Indian equival^it of English novm ending in er, and
implying an actor. For more detailed obsehrations
on this singular modification of the verh, see Syntax.
In this point (as in some others) the In£an is analogous to the
Frendi idiom^ which ako renders certain of the EngUdi aonns at
thekindalluded to, byapfoitotiiirela/tt;eandaver&; e.g.acaller>
Fr. celoi qui appelle. , .he fvho calls. The Indian form has, however^
in this changeable vowel, a power of infusing the intensive mode of
'^ costom," '* habit," &c. implied in the English terminati<«i (-^r) ;:
an advantage which the French resolution of the English nom% does
not possess.
[Nofe.-^This modification of the verb was noticed by Sliot, but
74 A GRAMMAR OF
without his making any remarks on its charaHar or use. He calls it the
Jktttemd yowel.*^ This is not, indeed»an accurate deicrq^tkm (rf it, since
^THB PIBST VOWBL PLATTINID.
fiiL 53. Kah n^boocf . . he who is dead, {d^/bnUe, and so of the rest)
T. 25. Nifboqf^ . . who are dead. Anglic^, the dead. (Ind^fhuUe, and
so of the rest,
iv. 37. K^tega . . he soweth.
iv. 36. Kdiegmd . . he that soweth, the sower.
ii. 12. Ke exhc^i . . i^ has gone, went,
viii. 14. ilsh&hyoft . . (whither) I am gomg.
V. 30. Che izhechegBiydn . . that I do it.
V. 10. il^shechegoti . . he doeih it
X. 9* P^degoti. . (i£) he enter.'
Xk 2. P^ddegoti . . he that entereth.
t^diL 25« Ke n^ahweft . . he stood.
xviiL 22. Ntfihahwid. . he who was standtii^.
xii. 29. Niiilbihwe^ . . thejf who were standing.
XV. 2. Che memiwmg . . that it bear fruit.
XV. 2. l/Lahnevnmgin . . they that bear fruit.
XY. 2. yLdhxi4w4iuenoog . . they which bear not fruit.
ju 1. Kem6(}de8hkeh . . he steals qften, emphatically ; is a thief.
X. 10. Kam6(}de8hkid . . he who steals qften, a thief.
V. 8. P^oosotn . . walk thou,
lai. 35. Pifoiooeoti . . he who walkedi.
vi. 64. Oo ge kek&nemon . . he has known (knew) him,
vi. 42. KoklmemaiMiii^oo^ (possess, case) . . whose . . we know them.
XV. 23. Oo sh^eng&nemoii . . he hateth him.
XV. 23. Shi^nglmemfd . . he that hateth me.
vi. 58« Kah eshe m^eiDod . . as they^^&d eat it.
vL 56. 58. Mdl^id.* he that eateth it.
V. 33. Oo ge teblUidoodoit . . he related t^.
iii. 32. Tab&hdoondsm^ (subj.) . . he relates it.
THE CRH LANGUAGB. 75
H is also sometimes sharpmedj*^ in either case it is always lengfkmei :
sometimes also an tMUkmal vowel,^ m diphthong, is inserted with it.
vii. 37. Che m^equatcl. . that he drink,
vi. 56. yLdneqjaaid . . he who drinketh.
xii. 3« Oo ge w^dahbemofi .. Ae sat with iUm.
xi. 31. Wtfhd^hbemoV^ . . they who were sitttn^r with her,
viii. 55. Ne mtnj^enoii . . I hold it.
xz. 23. Wagwain . . mabkitmenakmdkwagwam .... whomsoever . . ye
Shan hold them to him. (dub.)
«1tHB first VOWBL SHARPBMID.
zx. 7. AHitaig . . (where) it lay (the linen clothes),
vi. 13. A^tdkm . . that are remaintn^.
V. 32. B(iiUcihnese . . Ae m different (another).
T. 7. BdkStaietid . . he who is different, another.
vii. 30. Oo ge uadBhwfmdahiiuAwak ..they sought him.
vii. 18. iHndahw^inddbnofturod (obliq. case.) . . he that seeketh it
fw Atm.
ix. 21. KaAgw4jemtib . . ask ye Atm.
viii. 7. Kdgw&jemaftiiKxl . . (when) thicy (continued) asking hxm.
ix* 36. Oo ge gif hnoonon . . he answered him.
ix. 37. Kf^oontsr (Cre^ -isib) ..he who've talking (to) th^
^ A Vowd, or D^hthong (=dhy Jonbs), inserted in the first syllable.
T. 30. (Mnesheshfft ..it is good, just.
L 46. ii. 10. TTiihesheshtf^ . . which is good.
viii. 42. .Nifi ge <tojebah . . I came from,
vii. 29. TTcfinjebahyoii . . whence I come.
viii. 44. Ket* ooy6osemaikoaib . . ye father him, have Mm for father,
vii. 22. TToydosemMif^ . . who are had for fiathers, the lathers.
xviii. 37. (Mgemlihweyofi . . that Jasi (a) chief.
xii. 42. 7r([%em4hw9i^ . . they who are chief, the dud's.
V. 7. yLdhketid ..he who was" unpotent.'*
V. 3. Makyahmihkeiipg . . they who were " impotent."
76 A GRAMMAR OF
Tiit rfBict.always pgodnced, ii that of Imff th m i u y ihe time of thepimteye
fyllable, and coofermig ^i it a degree of ea^kaais. The iq)pellij(ioii
given to this vowel, 4rc. answering very well the purpose of distinction.
It has, being accompanied by the above observations, been retained in
this treatise.]
Paragraph II.
Of the Transitive Verb.
. The kind of Derwative verbs next to be considered
are those of manner, as the Transitive and Causative.
iv. 17. Ke tdpwa . . thou speakest truth.
iii. 18. 36. Ta^(fpwayiinemo(2 . . he that believeth on him.
X. 17. Sdhgeid, . (whence) he loves me.
xiv, 21. Sahpdhgetd , . he that loveth me.
id. 3. Sah^dhgeUd . . he whom thou lovest.
xiL 2$. Sahffdhgetood . . he that loveth f^.
xiii. 23. zxi. 20. Sahydhgea^in . . whom he loved him.
i, 10. Oo ge dbzhefoon. . he made if.
X. 25. Wdzhetooyahnin . . which I make.
xvi. 14. Oo gah ood^penon . . he shall receive (take) it.
xiii. 20. WadStibcDod . . he who taketh Mm,
X. 21. Oo dah wdhhe{h)dn . . he could make him see.
ix. 14. Ke wdhhe(h)6d . . (and) he made him see.
xi. 37. Wahykhhe{h)6d . . he who made them see (the blind).
vi. 40. WahyMmmahjig . . who (plurO see him,
V. 24. Ti^wayldnemo(2 . . (and) helieveth on him.
m. 18. 36. T<%dpway4inemo(^ . . he that believeth on him,
vi. 40. Tahy&pwB.Yinemahjig . . who (plur.) believe on him.
vi. 47 TahyipwByisiemid . . he who believetili on me.
xii. 26. Nin gah ndo^^nShnig , . he will follow me,
vili. 12. NuKfApen&^tf . . he tktd foUoweth me,
vu. 52. Kef dbnd^hdis . . thou art, proceedesty^hm.
xix. 9. Ahn^ende wdindikd&ieyun ? . . \diat place art ihou from ?
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 77
Before we enter on U^ subject of transitive verbs,
however, it may be proper to observe, that, from
certain mtrans^vta, may be derived other intransi-
tives, as^
P^po(m...t^ is winter.
¥ep6oTiMSU...he winters.
N^tit ..Mis summer.
'S€piaissu...he summers*
W&ptm ..Mis day-light
WkpisH...ke is ear/^ (riser). Fr. U est matina/. &a
We now proceed to the consideration of that part
of our general subject which constitutes the distin-
guishing characteristic of the American languages
generally, namely, the trafmtive verb. It may just
be observed of the Cree intransitive , that its conjuga^
tional form has, in the indicative mood, the prefixed
nominative of the French ; and, in the subjunctive,
the u^ected personal termination of the Italian and
Latin, and that both moods have the augmented plural
of all those languages (see Paradigms of the verb).
So far, therefore, the strucjiire of this part of speech
may be said to have an analogy with at least some
European tongues. But the transitive verb goes
beyond this point. Retaining the European conju-
gational forms, it assumes an additional feature of its
own, adopting into its inflections all the relations of
its regimen. Besides the subject or nominative before
mentioned, it combines with the action — ^it engrafts
on the intransitive verb both the object and the end —
in other words, the direct and oblique cases of the
78 A GRAMMAR OF
j^KHKRnr, m the several modes of determbmte, indeter-
mkMUe, and indefin^, as regards both the auhjeet of
the v^b, and its regmm, and m the active BXidpassive,
animate and inanimate forms. The derelopemeut
and exemplification of these important points ^nll
form the subject of the remaining part of this Section*
Cree transitive verbs are of two kinds — ^the one
consists of those verbs which are transitive primi'
twely^ or in their most simple form. These constitute
a numerous class, and are such as the following.
AfUkdyoo (irreg.) . he places him.
T6c^ffwayoo.„he does (it to) him.
M^thoyoo ..Ae gives (it to) him.
0^w6&io...he uses it.
Kiedxehajfoo ..he begins him.
K^eaeehayoo. . . he finishes hm.
'bli6orvdyoo (irreg.)... Ae eats him.
M6echti (jtTeg.)...he eats it. &c.
The other kind, which it is intended to bring parti-
cularly under notice here, consists of those transitives
which are derived from the various kinds of intransi'
HveSy xiSiXXiAy^ substantive i (see p. 18 et seq.) adjective^
accidentaii andneuter verbs. These furnish a numerous
list of derivative transitive verbs. We shall divide
them into two classes, as follows :
1 . Gbnbral, or those in which the ^^ characteristic''
letter or sign of the action connecting the (dtribute
with, its: personal accidents ^ is indicative of simple
transition, &c.
THS CRBE LANGUAGE. 79
2. Special, or those in which the odton has a
special form and signification.
Of the several modifications of the intransitive
verb, indicative of rimple trmuiiwnf the most general
definite termination is, as already noticed (see p. 39 et
seq.)> 'hayoOy animate, and -tow, inanimate. The fol-
lowing are given as additional examples of this kind.
The most simple form of the transitive, is where the verb is
combined with a definite object, represented by a personal pronoun,
or its sign, in the accusative case.
{Note, — The tUrd person, present, indicative, is given as the conjnga-
ticMial root, on account oi its general uniformity and susceptibility of
Bti2e, as regards the other personal inflections, &c. There is no it^imtiioe
mood in the Cree or Chippeway dialects, its import being resolved into
the sutjmnetioe. See Syntax.']
An#KCTiyE VERBS.
W6weaw..M is circular.
W&wekajfoo...ke round^^A kim.
W6w^ow...ke Toundeth it,
W^df»..,it is hollow.
'WiAhehayoo..,he hollowe^A him,
W&thetofv...^ holioweth it.
WAgof9...t^ is crooked.
W^igehayoo,„kehendeth kim.
W^taw...he benddA it.
A^wkoosu„.he is sick.
A^yrkookayoo...he hurt€i^ him.
S^pssu...he is afraid.
S^gehayoo...ke frighteneth kim.
A^ihemissu. ^ke is difficult
A^'themeii^fipo...^ perplex^i^, embarrasseM kim.
Nisseewun^tif/tt...^ is vicious, bad (conduct).
Nisseewun&cheAoyoo...^ vitiatos, spoils, kim.
80 A GRAMMAR OP
Fem&(iieiiyoo...he tnakes Urn Ihre^ saveft hit lif^ ; qiiau> h€
€itliye9a him. &^
(0CCA8t0HAL OR) ACCIBKIITAL TSIIIS.
l^f^&M..M SO mavOk. (Se9 p. 32 and Betaim Feris^y
l9^^&ihehagoo,.,ke so moveth him, (suddeoly}*
lB^f^theknD...he so move/A t^. (id.) &c
NSUTBR VERBS.
Nipptf...^ is dead.
NippaAa^...^e IsSieth hwu
Ooo8tichti...^e is afraid.
G6ostayoo...Ae fear^ tiiffu
Coostiche^5oo..«Af terr|/^ him.
Ttipptissti...2e flee^.
Tdppusse^oo... ^ flees ftom Mn.
F&p»...ft« laiighs.
Tkpehayoo. . . Ae laughs (ai) him,
Kowis8immoo...he goes to bed.
KowisseemooAayoo...he puts him to bed.
A^pptf...!. Aesits. 9* Ae remains.
1. A''pptf...Ae sits. ^
A^ppeAayoo...Ae makes him mt, e.g. a cMd,
"2. A''pptf...Ae is^ stays^ remains.
Ath(^oo...Ae puts, or places, him.
W&ppti...A« sees
Wkppa!mayoo...he sees him.
P&tkeBin...he &}1b, as in walking.
P&hkeseffiiigfoo...ile miAes him fijl, throws him down
Pimmi8stfi...Ae lies.
Pimmio ic w gy oo. . .he lays him down.
THB CRB£ LANGUAGE. 81
F^etwdtfoo (neut.) ..he inhalesy^ smokes.
W6eche-p^etwdii»4yoo (trans.) ... Ae smokes widi him, co-
smokes him. ^
N6onti...^e sucks.
N6othayoo.,.she suck^« him.
Vtootay 00... he goes there.
It6otahdyoo...he carries or conveys him thither.
Ittissawayoo...Ae sends Aim.
K6w-ayoo...Ae returns.
Kewky»tahd^oo...he returns him, conveys him back.
Keway-tissa-w^^oo...A0 sends him back.
K6way-Aoo...A« returns (6y water).
K6wa,y~hoothdyoo...he returns him (id.).
Wtith&weeoo ...he goes out.
Wuthaw4y toA(£^oo ..he conveys him out
Wuthawdytissan;4yoo...Ae sends him out.
K6ospti...Aegoef inland (from river or hdce).
Koosp6/aA%oo. . . he convofs him thither^
N{^payoo...Ae goes to the river^ &c.
N^p&ytahdtfoo...he conveys him to the river^ &c.
W^nnissu...he errs {XDunne", infinite, immense).
'W^nesin...he loses himself, goes astray.
WtinneAoyoo. . . Ae loses him.
W^rmesemayoo...he leads him astray.
M^chesoo (indef. obj.)...Ae eats.
Mdowayoo (anim.)...Ae eats him.
M^echti (inan.)...Ae eats it.
^6^16800^^00... he causes him to eat.
Meches6o-Aoipayoo...A« makes him eat, feeds him, as a child.
Wieche''mMiesoomayoo...he eataxoith, co-eats, him.**
^ zi. 16. C3ie w^>a^boomii»^ . . that we co-die Amu, die with him.
zviii. 15. Oo ge neh w^j-pfoidegamoii . . he co-entered Am, entered
with him.
G
62 A GRAMMAR (fF
{[Minnekwoyoo. . . he drinks.]]
Miimekw^A4yoo...Ae gives htm to drink.
Miimekw4y-^oit;ayoo...Ae makes Mm drink^ drenches him.
Fri^ecAe-minnekway-m^^oo...Ae co-drinks^ drinks with, him.
'i^6che-haifoo.„he works at him.
N6che-toit; (inan.)...Ae works at U.
'i^octi6'k(noaifoo,..he courts her.
P6othoo...he leaves off, ceases.
]*6one-Aayoo...Ae leaves him off, lets him alone.
Ootdmme-/ Aoo...Ae is occupied, busy.
Oottimme-Aa^oo...Ae interrupts him.
Ootthnme-iitayoo...id. by speech.
Pdskay . . . diverging, branching.
Vuakiy~wethayoo...he parts (company) with him.
Paragraph III.
To the Transitive verb, generally, belong the Re-
flective and Reciprocal forms,** as
1 A^wlioohayoo...he hurts him. (See p. 39, et seq.)
A^wlu)ohCssoo (or ~hiUissoo)...he hurts himself.
** RBFLBCTIVB — INDICATIVE.
viii. 13. Ke tehkhiindis (meg.). . thou relatest thyself.
z. 33. Ke kesyuntinedoowe^i5(caus.) . . thm God-makest thyseff'.
zzi. IS. Ke k4ch.e]pcni^dezoon'^dhbun . . thou gird'thyseff-edst.
viii. 59- Ke g6hzoo (trans.) . . Ae hid himself.
T. 13. Ke m&hjewen^c2e2rooA (caus.). . he had conveyed himself kwkj.
viii. 22. Tah nis^dezoo . . he will kill himself.
ziz. 7. Ke ezhtSdezooh ..he so did, made, himseff.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
V. 31. viii. 14. Tehbh.}ifMzooydn . . if /relate m^se\f.
viii. 18. IfAidhyindizooydn (flat vowel). . who relate myseff.
ivi. 54. (yogemkhwe^dezooydn . . if J chief-mdbe myseff.
zvii. 19. Wainje ^ne^dezooydn. . whence I pure-moJte, pur\/y» mynjf.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 83
Kitteeina^^oo...Ae ill-uses him.
Kitteemahissoo (id.),., he ill-uses^ injures, hims^.
Keeskwaypayoo...Ae is drunk.
K6e8kwky]^jhdi/oo...he intoxicates him.
K^eskwiyp&jhissoo (id.).. .he intoxica/f« himself.
"2 Kaddifoo...he hides him.
KaiSOO...he hides himself.
3 Afs9amayoo...he gives him food.
A'sssm(ssw}...he gives himself food, serves himself.
Kisk^emayoo...^e knows him.
Kisk6themff«oo...^e knows himself.
4 Uckw(innait;ayoo...^e covers him.
UckwdnnaA(^oo...^^ covers himself.
Fistawayoo...he miB'Strikes him.
TistsJidossoo...he mis'Sirikes himself.
5 W6ethdyoo...he names him.
y^kethissoo...he names himself, tells his name.
Note — See Redprocais of the above forms, p. 84.
i. 22. ilyen^jindexrc^tm (flat vowel). . which thou sayest (of) thyself.
viii. 53. AfhjiikiWGidezooyun . . whom thou makest thyself.
vu. 18. TahkhjifUUzood (flat vowel). . he that narrates, relates, himself.
zi. 44. Tbiikoohezood Taccid.) ..oahe was ^d.
xiii. 5. Kah g^chepe^ood (accid.) . . (wherewith) he was gilded,
V. 18. Ahp^t-ainddhgoo^cfezood (comparison) . . he so-much-thought-
oUmade-himself. (as &c.)
viii. 9. Kekdnind^2ooii;oi . . as they knew themselves.
xi. 55. Che hineideioowod , . that they (might) puri-^^ themsekes.
ii. 6. '^xi(d4dezoowod , , when they puri/Stfd themsehes.
vii. 17. T^ticLyindizoowahndin (dub.) . . whether I relate myself,
xii. 49* JVtii ge XJ^Avndetdose (neg.). . 1 have wot related myself.
xvi. 13. Tah \JOazhimdeM6oH (neg.) . . he will not relate himself,
g2
84 , A GRAMMAR OF
Is-pdtheAoo...^ 8o moves hmu^.
0'opftAo9..«^ raises himndf (a bird).
Tyriyhoo...he alights himself (a bird).
A^chehoo,„he changes himself (dress).
A^tEJioo,.,he chokes himself (without intention).
Th4keAoo...^e lightens himself, (priv.)
Woy9iiaehoo..,he dresses^ adorns^ himsdf
W&ppamoo...^ sees himself (as in a mirror).
It-^emoo...^ so thinks himself, (see p. 44).
Kist-6themoo...Ae great-thinks himself is proud, (id.)
K&-k6che-moo...Ae great-talks^ boasts.
Pimmit4chemoo...Ae moves himself horizontally^ crawls.
Kechistapp6woo<Aoo...Ae washes himsdf.
Ootiinmie<^...Ae busies himself is much occupied.
'P\iawkyskoothoo...he cloys Atm^e^with fat (priv.)
To the Reflective class belongs also the Simulative or
feigning form, viz. -Udsoo, " he makes himself," the
reflective of the transitive termination, -katdyoo, '* he
makes him." (See p. 20.)
M<isk6wiss-ti ...he is strong.
Musk6wisse-ibd«oo...A« strong-maifcef himself, pretends to be
strong.
Nipp-(^...A« sleeps.
't^vp^kdsoo...he sleep-iiiaAef himself, pretends to be asleep.
K6esquaypay-oo ...he is dnmk.
YikeBq^ky^ky'kdsoo... he pretends to be drunk.
RECIPROCAL.** (See pp. 82> 8S.)
1 K'y9}LooUWkmk...theyh!axt one another.
S JLiiitt6oiiik^.ihe!f\aile one another.
*^ RECIPROCAL — INDICATIVE.
xiii. 14. Ke tah k^zeb^iesedan^iiHii. . ye shdDi wash^foot owe emo^Acr.
zvi. 19. Ke kahgw&jfficKfii .. ye ask owe tmother.
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 85
S A^a8amiii6ouk.„theygiyeoneanoiher€ood.
4 Vckw&im&hooitdouk...tkey cover one another.
5 W6ethitt6ouk...iheif name each other.
RECIPROCAL, ANIMATE AND INANIMATE.**
^^ge'Skofvdi/oo...he meets him.
^^ge'skdmagun.,.it meets it.
^^ge-^kootdtoouk (anim.)...M^ meet each other.
H^^ge^kootdtdomagunwd (inan.)...thei^ (things) meet one
another.
▼.1. Ke w4quondeuntg . . they feasted one another.
yii. 35. Ke et^tcw^ . . they said one to another.
xix. 24. Ke ed^bu^ . . they said one to another.
xiii. 22. Ke kahVkhnBhw&bibiJmdewug . . they looked {with rqfetUUm}
at one another.
xi. 47. Ke m&hwjinieSdeumy . . ^Aey collected one another.
xix. 24. Ke m&tidBhoon^deumg . . f A<y divided among them, one ano^
ther.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
V. 44. Ooyood&k^nahjndhdeyaig (obi. case, flat vowel). . ye who take
to (receive from) one another.
xiii. 34. Qie sShgeideyaig . . that ye love one another.
xiii. 34. XV. 12. Che ezhe sShge^deyaig. . that ye so love one another.
iii. 25. Ke m&li^e-gahgwijindewod . . they began to ask one another.
xiL 19. Kah oonje ediwod . . whence they said one to another.
iv. 33. Kah oonje dhyed^iood . . whence they said (le^ik r^p«fi<tofi) om
fo another.
XX. 19. Kah . . m£hwwi}eidewod . . loAo had assembled, collected one
another.
xxi. 23. Wow^kahnes/fule^ (flat vowel) . . who brother one another,
i.e. brethren,
xvi. 17. Ke ezhe k^noon^ietiwft (possess, case) . . they so talked one
to another.
^ [xii. 13. Ke ihwe n&hqudiBhkahwdhwod . . (snbj.) ** and" they went
(to) meet him.]
[Sihgeahkooddhdencuff (anim.) they meet each other."]
[NihgtMhkooddhd^nahgahddon (inan.) . . . they (thingf) meet each
other.']
86 A GRAMMAR OF
Ni88ewundchetofv...Ae spoils it.
l!^i8aeYnm6ichetdtnagun..M spoils it,
'Si88ew\xnkchetat6omagunwd,.Jkey (things) spcnl each other ^
Paragraph IV.
The Special differ from the Oeneral transitive forms
(see p. 38 et seq.), generally, in the energetic letter or
letters only. These special signs may be considered
as of three kinds . The first have an intensive meaning,
implying force, &c. and are positive. The second,
intimating accident or mi^-hap, or the English prefixes
mis-, or dis-, &c. may be classed 2iS privative (vide infra).
The third kind indicate the means by which the action
is performed, as by the hand, &c. and are instrumentive.
These several ** characteristic signs" are expressive of
particular, yet, common modes of action, and are there-
fore of constant occurrence in speech. They may, with
their personal adjuncts, forming together the ** special
afl^es,'* as under, be united to any suitable root.
Note. — The *' characteristic" letters are in Italic — ^the personal inflec-
tion in Roman characters.
AKIM. IKAN.
'fvkjoo -Mm implies an exertion of strength, "he forces
him or it," after the manner expressed
by the root. Joined to certain roots of
" motion" it implies also 6y water,
'4awijoo -toAdm implies he beats or batters the object, after
the manner of the root.
-^kawkyoo 'Skum implies force, or cavsativeness. (See Ge-
nera/ Causative, p. 38.)
~skawiyoo '^kvan is also privative, indicating acoident, mis^
chance, what is adverse.
THE CRKB LANOUAGB.
87
-miyoo
-nkyoo
'pUtkjoo
-skawiyoo
-/um
-itum
"fUXdm
-skma
signifies that the action is performed with
the mouth ; it implies^ also by speech.
{Metdon, the mouth).
implies with the hand, or other gentle
means. {MecMechee, the hand.)
implies the action of the arm, " he puUi
him or it. {Mdspittoon, the arm.)
also (see above) implies^ with certain roots^
the use of the leg or foot, as in walk-
ings &c. {MesMt, the 1^.)
signifies by cutting, or burning, '^he cuts,
he bums him or it/' after the manner
of the root.
The ** special affixes" may, as above remarked, be
joined to any suitable root, as under.
They form severally the three persons singular, as follows :
-iirayoo -nun
1
'W6w
ANIMATE
2
'Wdw
3
'Wdyoo
1
-h^
INANIMATE.
2 8
-aen -hi*iii
-taw(fw
"t&wdw
-tSLwdyoo
-tah^
-tah^
•takdm
"Skdwdw
-skaw(^
'SksLwdyoo
-sk^
-sk^
-sktfm
-mow
-mow
-mayoo
-t^
-t^
-ttim
-now
-now
-nayoo
-n^
-n^
-nicm
-pitt(^
-pitt<^
-pitt^fyoo
-pitUfi
-pitt^
-pitti^OT
-swow
-swow
-swayoo
-8^
-8^
-8am
Belonging to only two conjugations — ^the animate and the inanimate —
the personal adjuncts, or endings, of which may be succinctly exhibited
thus —
ANIMATE. I INANIMATE.
-ow -ow 'Oyoo I .in -in -urn
See " Paradigms, &c."
ANIMATE.
Ne T&koo-pitt(^ . . J tie him
Ke Th&ke-now . . thou pushest Am.
Kiss^e-mayoo . . he affironts him.
INANIMATE.
Ne Ndta-h^ . . / fetch it (by water).
Ke P^koo-sk^ . . thou breakest it aceidentaOy.
M&kwa-tttm . . he bites it.
88 A GRAMMAR OF
-w;dyoo, -Aum.
TiekoO'Wa^foo...ke breaks km by farce.
Ptekoo-Aiif»...Ae breaks it hj force*
K688e-iP(£^oo...Ae wipes him.
K6s8e-Atfm..Je wipes it
'P{itheepa^hum,,.ke perforates it.
Cyi3ipa^hwn.,.he supports it.
Pdeta-Aiffft...Ae puts> thrusts, it in.
Kw6ppa-Ajim ..he scoops or lades it out> as water^ &c.
W^pa-/^um ...he sweeps it away. &c.
[Ndt-oyoo ..^ fetches kim.^
Nka-ir£90O...Ae fetches Atm> by water. iec.
"tawiyoQ, -toMm.
Nuppdcke-/aMm...A« ftattens tY 6y hammering or striking.
Ta8Sw^ga«toAi^m...Af opens t^ out> expands it^ id.
SMLwa^taktim...he beats it into smaller pieces^ e.g. loaf
sugar. iec.
CAUSATIVE^ &C.
iVipT App6oy stft . . . / sweat.
Net' A^pwdojse^kdkoon (inv. inan.) ..t^ makes me perspire.
Appw6o]rse-/ib)iiu^» ... t^ sweat-ootudA^ is sudori-
ferous.
Ne Nippon.. / sleep.
Ne Nippa-«ib^iboii (inv. inan.)...»< makes me sleep.
l^ipj^'skdmagun...it is aommferous.
*7 xii. 32. IVtn gah w6\iooihkahwog (6k.) . . I will draw forcibly, drag,
them.
THE CRSK LANGUAGE. 89
PRivATiVB (vide infra.).^
Mi8pooft...i^ snowx.
Ke miejpoo^kdkoon (inv* iuan.)....t< mu-floow-eth jfou, i.e.
snows upon you.
Kimmewuft...f< rams.
Ke kimmew^'eskdkoon (inv. inan.) ii mti-rain-eth i/ou, i.e.
rains upon you. &C.
Ne kiasew^kuUBLj'^kdkoon (inv. inan.) ... t/ gives (mu-
causeth) me the cholic.
A^te'Skawd^oo,,.he mis'sliates him. Anglic^^ he dis-places
him.
(yoBe^kamdi^oo...he mis'Temoves, starts^ him (an animal).
Th&e'Skamdifoo...he mix-pushes him, Le. acddentallif.
KdoskdO'skawdi^oo he mtx-shakes> jogs^ Aim (e.g. as a person
writing).
A^yrkoo^kafvdyoo...he hurts him, inadvertmUy.
Koottippe-xA:attkf^oo...A« upsets Mm, acddetUaUg (as in a
canoe).
Nissewundte-xibim.. he spoils it by accident.
WMb€!pe'Skdm...he soils it, id.
B V. 14. Ke kah d6nge«Ait<^A^oo» (inv.) . . i4 will miX'^Mime igMm thae.
ziii. 27. Oo ge pSendegashkdhgoon (id.) . . Ae was mis-entered by
him.
xii. 35. KekBiipslh''ti6hgooneshkdhgoonahiwdh (id.) . . it will mif-oome
upon yoif .
xvi. 6. iTe m6oshkenaxAlr££l^oofiaAio<£& $d.) . . it msx-fiUeth you.
XX. 25. Ke b&hgoonaxAlr(%rooJ (id.) . . that he was mis-akixmed by-
them.
xviii. 4. Wah hiiigBJtimeshkdhgoqjin (id.) . . by which he should be
mix-struck.
XX. 25. K4h erktshkdhgood (id.) . . as Ae was mtx-done to, injured^
hy them (the nails),
xviii. 28. Che w4neshkdhgoowod (id.) . . . that they should mis-be de-
med.
90 A GRAMMAR OF
K^pe'3kum.„he throws U down^ id. as from a shelf.
S6ke'skum...ke spills it, id.
K6we'Skum,..ke prostrates it, id.
FkelioO'skum...ke breaks it, id.
Takoo-skum ...he treads on it, id. &c.
-mayoo, -ftim.**
^Kiskis8ti...Ae remembers.^
Kiskisse-mayoo...Ae reminds him.
Kuckwkyche-977(£^oo...Ae asks him.
F^ke6kksoo-md^oo...he saddens him, hy speech.
Ntittoo-mayoo...Ae calls him.
[[A^theme-Aayoo...Ae hard-e^oe^ him, places in a difficult
situation.]]
A^theme-ma^oo...Ae h&idraays to him, e.g. asks a difficult
favour.
A^them6o-ma^oo...Ae hard-^oy^ of him, accuses^ complains
of^ him.
*» [vi. 6. Elahgw4je-(^ . . that he might try, *' prove," Aim.]
[viii. 6. Ke kahgwaje-aAic(^rf. . as they tried Atm.]
xviii. 19* Oo ge kahgwdje-7?ion . . he asked (tried by speech) kim.
X. 3. Ood' ezhe tindoomcm ..he so calleth them.
xi. 28. Ken undoomig (inv.). . he caUeth thee.
ix. 2. Oo ge gsihgwi^emegoon (inv.) . . he was aaked by them.
[iii. 18. Nahn^oo<^Ase ..he is not condemnee?.]
viii. 10. Ke ke nahn^oowi^flrocwe (inv.) . . he hath not dead-^oui, sen-
tenced, thee.
viii. II. Ke nahn^boom^«ioon (inv.) . . thee sentence not I.
V. 45. Mft gah dhnahmem^oonon (inv.) ..hemUl accuse iw (1.3.)
(think ye ?).
vii. 32. E^zhemahnid . . (possess, case) . . that they so said qf him.
viii. 10. A^nahmem/H^ (Cree -misMk) (inv.) . . . who (plur.) accuse
thee.
viii. 46. Ka tabemi^n . . who can convince me.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 91
^Sk\ioO'hayoo...he overcomes^ subdues^ him.^
Sakoo-mdifoo ,,ke conquers him by speech, convinces him.
S^ooche-m^yoo...Ae persuades^ prevails on^ him,
Wdnne-moyoo . . . ( wunne^ infinite) ,.,he perplexes^ confounds^
him,
W6esa-mayoo...he invites him to accompany.
Pdpisse-moyoo [^p&pK, he laughs]]-. .A^ jokes^ diverts^ him.
[]N^pewe-Aayoo...Ae shames him by conduct, "^
N^pewe-«?iayoo...id., by speech,
Kheg2i-mayoo,,,he scolds him,
M& metho-mayoo...he speaks well of Aim.
Kipp6eche-?7iayoo...Aestops> silences^ him,
T^wa-moyoo (anim.)...Ae holds him in his mouth,
T4kwi-/f/m (inan.)...Ae holds it in his mouth,
M^yrk-mayoo (amm.)...Ae bites him,
M^wd-/um (inan.)...A« bites it,
Kissee-mayoo...Ae affronts him,
K& Kee8ke-mayoo...Ae counsels^ reproves^ him,
[[Kusk6the^2<7n. ,,,he is impatient.]]
Kusk6thettimme-A^^oo. . . he makes him impatient (by conduct),
Kusk^thetdmme-m(£yoo...Ae9na^e^ him impatient (by speech,)
[]Sege-Aflyoo...Ae terrifies him, by eonduct,"^
S^ge-'mayoo, , , id.^ by words, &c.
-nayoo, -num."*
N6ote-nayoo (anim.).. he fights Atm.
Oot^ete-nayoo...Ae assaults^ attacks Atm.
INDICATIVE.
M> vi. 44. 54. Nin gah bdhzegwinde-n(^A. . / will raise him by hand (from
a seat.)
vi. 40. Nin gah blihzegwindefu^ . . I will raise them up.
viii. 55. Ne minj^menon . . I hold^ keep, it,
xiii. 18. Nin ge dohenahmdg (inv.). . he has lifted t^up to (against) me,
[xxi. 18. Che ^zhewen/A; (Cree, -jnisk). . that he may away 2efl(f thee.'\
xvi. 13. Jfc kah &hne ^zhewen/j^ooK^aA (inv.) . . he will away /eoif yaw.
92 A GRAMMAR OF
P<ickoochee-itayoo...A« eviscerates him (as an animal).
Cli^ech4eke-ita3f00i..Ae scratches him.
K&wdyih&gge'naffoo .,,he tickles him.
xvi. 2. Ke kah sShgeiewihe-nSgoowdg . . they will out-fling you.
viii. 36. Ke kali plJiged^fie^re^om . . they (Ft. on) will free you.
i. 42. Oo ge b^eshewenoft . . he brought him.
six. 13. Oo ge b^&hgejeweiMJfi . . he brought, oui4ed, him.
xiii. 5. Oo ge zigenon . . he poured it.
xy. 2. OocT ^Ubkoo-wdbenaAittm . . he flingeth them away.
y. 22. Oo ge h^ihged6nahmahwon . . A« has committed t^, let it go, to
him.
ii. 15. Oo ge zegwihendhmahwon (poss. case) . . he poured t^ away,
ix.' 34. Oo ge z^gejewdbeno^oii . . they out-flung him.
xyiii. 28. Oo ge ne 6onje mahj^wenoAioon . . they thence removed him.
X.3. Oon ea^koonahmdhgoon (iny.) ..he is oi^ned to by him (the porter) .
xii. 34. Tah 6ombenaA . . he will be lifted up.
yiii. 4. Ke d^koonaA ..he {or she) has been taken.
xy. 6. Tah ^oonahwdbeno^ . . he shall be flung away.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
xii. 32. 0^ombe-fie^(%(m . . if they (Fr. on) lift me up.
iv. 11. W6mdenahmun (flat, vowel) . . that thou takest tV.
xiii. 12. Kezeb^gez^da»(^(2 . . that he had wash-footed them.
xix. 27. Ke kewdwetw^rf. . Ac returned, led back, ^.
iii. 14. Kah ezhe domh&bkoondd . . as Ac had lifted Aim up.
xviii. 16. Ke p^ndegahfu^ . . he in-handed, led in, Aifii.
xix. 12. Che bdhgedeiK^c? . . that he nyght let him go.
viii. 28. Ke 6obena^ . . (that) ye shall have lifted him up.
vii. 30. Che t6hkooftaAii;<^c{ . . that they might take him.
viii. 3. Kah blihged^au7(^ . . that they had let go her (or him).
xix. 16. Ke ne mahj^wenaAu^c^ . . they led him away.
viii. 36. Viitigedinendig ..if he let go you.
viii. 3. Kah d&bkoon^nd . . who had been taken.
ix. 22. Che zUigejewabenifui . . that Ac should be out-flung.
viii. 51. Minj^menun^ . . if Ac hold, keep, it.
xiii. 12. Kah ood&hpemtn^ . . that Ac had taken them.
x. 4. Kah zl^gejewen(%m . . when Ac out-handeth ^Acm.
XV. 6. Azhe ikoonaihwihenegahddig ..as it is flung away.
V. 13. Ke mih}4wen^dezoo (reflect.) . . he had walked? himself away.
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 93
Westigge-iuijfoo...^ hurts him, puts him to pain.
MAkwa^ntiifi...^ presses it with the hand, squeezes it
T4kwaF-ittifii...Ae grasps^ holds it in the hand.
'PiLket^num..,he looses it from the hand, yields^ gives> it up.
Q6isk&-nfif»...tum-handeth-(it)-he> he turns it with the
hand*
N^ete-itt«f9i...Ae down-hands it, takes it down (from above).
Sdckuskin-itum...A« closes it, as a door.
S^e-ftfim...Ae touches t^ with the hand.
Oote-num,„he from^handeth, i.e. takes it.
P^me-ittifii...A« awry-edi it.
Pimme-itfim ...he twists i^.
Cyope-fttfiit...Ae lifts tV.
Sissoon&y-nfim...Ae |ni/x it parallel.
Th^e-ittint ...he pushes it.
W6pe-iitim...Ae flings it.
A^pplthkoo-fttfm...Ae unties it.
P6ekoo-ittif7i...Ae breaks t^.
. S6ekoo-itfim.. he empties it.
Skekee~num...he pours it.
ChkeSte»num...he pierces it,
Koottippe«ntif7i...Ae upsets it, places upside down.
Ittissee-ittim...Ae sends it by hand, hands it thither. Sec
'jnttiyoOy -ptVftim."
'S^eche-pittdi^oo. ..he puUs him down.
N6eche-pi^t^in...Ae pt<Z£f it down.
[xiii. 4. Ke oonje pihzegwe . . he rose (from a seat).]
vi. 39. Che bdhzegwindenoAfiu^ . . that I raise it up (id.).
IMPERATIVE.
ii. 8. Z6ge-4Mhmook . . pour out pe it.
xi. 39. E^oonahmook . . with-drawye it.
xiz. 15. Mahj^eittib . . lead he him away,
xzi. 6. A^hpfihgent^ . . let go ye it, drop ye it.
*i zi. 44 TUikoo&Airoorf (acdd. pass.) as he wof tied
xi. 44. Ke taht^peengwi^effooft (lA.) . . he um$ tie*fiiee-ec^.
94 A GRAMMAR OF
M6o»ke'piUdifoo...he bares kim kf pulling (samething away).
M6o8ke^iUum...he exposes, uncovers, ii, idem.
Ktiske''pittiim...ke breaks it hy pulUng.
TitO'pittiim,.,he tears it by pulUng.
Thase'pittiim...he puUs, draws, it down (as a curtain).
K^e8ke'pitttim,,.he tears it off, by pulling. &c.
'SkawiyoOy -^fcum.
A^wkw&r^kafvdyoe.. he passes behind, avoids, him.
Athewii''Skafvdyoo...he out tvalks him.
M^]i.W3L'skawdyoo...he meets, i.e. falls in with, him.
Tkclie-skarvdyoo...he kicks him.
^^gge'Skan>dyoo...he meets him (by land).
^VLgga^mdyoo...he meets him (by water).
[[Ndggat-flyoo...Ae leaves Aim.]
Ndggata-fV(£^oo...Ae leaves him by water. &c.
-5trayoo, -5um.
M4tis-jfvayoo...Ae cuts him.
M4tis-^ttm...he cuts it.
M.{ame'Sfvayoo...he cuts him out.
Miinne-Jum...Ae cu/^ it out.
P^ekoo-^m...Ae breaks t^ by cutting (as a seam).
06xhe-sum...he cuts it fair or regular.
K6eske-^f7i...Ae ci^^^ f/ off, amputates it.
Nktwi'Sum,. he cuts it in two.
[^K&sp-ow.. t^ is brittle.3
Kkspe'Sum,..he makes it brittle, by jlre, crisps it.
Pit-ram... A« dries iJt by the fire. &c.
i. 27. D^ihkoo&edc^M^ (id. possess, case) . . as they are iked.
V. 21. Azhe ooneshk^denod . . as ^ raiseth, puUeth them up (from
a recumbent posture,
six. 24. Ke gah k^shke&ecidbseiion (neg.). . we (1.2.) will not tear it.
THE CRES LAIMUAGE.
95
Roots are variously susceptible of one or more of
these Affixes.
£P6ekoo-puthu ,.M break^.^
P6ekoo-Az<m...Ae breaks it by force.
Tkekoo-tahdm,..he breaks through it hy striking or ham''
mering.
Peekoo-skum..,he breaks it by accident, or with theybo^.
P^koo-/iim...Ae breaks^ tears it with the mouth.
VkekoO'num...he breaks it with the hand.
P6ekoo-pt/fum...Ae breaks it by pulling.
P^koo-^m...Ae breaks it by cutting.
A'8tow-ayoo...t/ is extinct
A8tow6-ittim...Ae extinguishes it, by hand, e.g. as a candle.
Ast6we-Afim...id., hj force, e.g. as &Jire, quenches it
Ast6we-^^tim...id.> by accident, or with theyoo^.
The *' Special Affixes" make their Reflectives and
Reciprocals, respectively, as follows :
TRANSITIVE.
REFLECTIVE.
RECIPROCAL.
8d. P. Sing.
3d. p. Sing.
3d. P. Plu.
-wdfyoo
"hoossoo
"hoottdouk
'tawdyoo
'tsUtidossoo
'tahoottdouk
-skawcfyoo
-sk^joo
-akootdtoouk
"mdyoo
-missoo
-mittdouk
"Tidyoo
"TiisSOO
-nittdouk
-pitt%oo
"^^issoo
'pittittdouk
"Syrayoo
-awdosoo
"SSfoottdouk
To the " General" and '' Special" we shall add
what may be denominated particular affixes, namely,
those expressive of the action or operation of the
Senses f after the manner of the attribute with which
they are respectively compounded.
5M^
A
GRAMMAE OF
SIMPLE.
Amu.
INAN.
W&ppa-mayoo
"turn
he sees him or ii.
Tfy'towa^oo
'turn
he hears him or i^.
M6th4^fiiayoo
'turn
Ae smells him or t<.
Nis6et<5o-#pt^%oo -spUHm
Ae tastes (perceives a flavour in) him
M6ose-Aajfoo
'tow
Ae feels him or t^.
COMPOUNDED.
M^tho-nofvc^oo
-fttllfl
Ae good- or> well-ieex^ admires^ Asm
or U,
he yfeVL'hearSy likes to hear, him or t/.
M^tho-/ozp(f^oo
"turn
Metho-mo^ifyoo
'tnatum
he yfreWsmeUsy likes the smell of,
him or t<. (Reflect, -nt^^oo.)
W^ke-pfvajfoo
'Stum
he SYfeet-tastes (likes much the taste
of) him or it.
Meth6-<^<^fvd^^ao
-skum
he vreM-feels, likes the feel of, him
or »<.
K tittoo-non^^^oo. . . he seeks himM
Nisset6we-noft;iyoo...A« knows Asm, Inf sight.
A'hwe-noiP(f^oo...Ae recognizes Asm, 6y ^tgA/.
Kittem&hke-nowdf^oo...Ae ^A« on him with pity.
Moost6we-9toit;(f^oo...Ae longing-^ea^-Atm, longs for him.
Aht6we-9ioiz^4^oo(priv.)...Ae dis-^ef him, dislikes his appear-
ance.
[[T4pwayoo...A« speaks the truth.]
T&pwdy-tofv%oo...Ae true-Aear^, believes, Atnt.^
^ viii. 38. Kah ^zhe-ndhwaig (anim.) . . as ye have seen Mm.
vii. 24. A^zkenahjndig (inan.) . . as ye see it, ** according to the ap-
pearance."
V. 19. Ajf6zhenahwod (flat vowel). . as they saw Aim.
^ i. 37. (h ge ndon-ddhwdhuxm . . they heard Aim.
iv. 21. T&pwa/(fAtoesAtfi : . believe thou me.
viii. 40. viii. 26. xv. 15. Kah 4netdhtDug . . as /hear of Attn,
xviii. 27. Ke n6oiiddhgooze (see Par. v.) Ae (the code) was heard.
V. 30. A^ne^oAm^ (flat vowel) . . as J hear it.
THB CREB LANGUAGE. 97
Kfnyi^'totvdyoo (priv.) . ,.,ke dis-Aear^^ disbelieves^ (also^
denies) him.
'Sisseet6o'towdyoo,,,he understands him.
Nutt6o-/ofz;(fyoo...Ae listens to him.
Weeke'mdkoosu.,,(8ee Par. V,) he is sweet-^me/ZeJ.**
Paragraph V.
Of the Indeterminate and Indefinite Pronouns.
Intensity is, emphatically, an Accident of the Cree
and Chippeway verb. In extent, or degree, it contin-
gently modifies the several members of which the
simple verb consists, as
1. The Attribute — ^in *' degree," as will be noticed
hereafter.
2. The Action — in *' extent," as the repetitive^
frequentative, habitual, and (in respect of time) inde-
finite, forms : — in '' degree," as in the different forms
denoting special degrees of energy in the action, as
causation, force, &c. (See Par. I. and III.)
3. The Personal Accidents — in ** extent," as the
indeterminate and indefinite pronouns, which form the
leading subject of this paragraph.
The verbal examples, which have been given in this
work, have been chiefly confined to the determinate
or definite forms of the personal pronoun, as regards
both subject and object ; this being, as already ob-
^ xi. 39* Ke nib'ihzoo-mdhgooZ'idoog , . . he is desLd^^ke'smeU-ahle-
probably.
H
98 A GRAMMAR OF
served, the most simple form of the Transitive verb.
We now proceed to point out the verbal forms ex-
pressive of the intensive or amplified English pronouns
they^ onCy people ^ some one, 8fc. (Fr. on) which I denomi-
nate Jnrfeierminafe pronouns ; and also those others of a
still more extended signification, implying, some, any,
8fc. person or thing, in an indefinite manner — these
I call Indefinite pronouns. We shall consider them in
connection with the Intransitive and Transitive Verbs,
and in the active and passive forms of the latter.
I. — ^The Intransitive verb is susceptible of only one
intensive modification of the personal pronoun, namely,
the subjective, and in the third person singular only.
It is formed by changing the inflectible termination
(3 p. sing.) into the indeterminate ttnewoo (or anewun),
at ncinewoo (or nd^nevmn),^^ as,
AVkoos-tt (:^e-foo)...^e is sick, ill.
A^Vfrkoose-ndnewoc.ikei/, (Fr. on) some one is sick, or sick-
ness prevails. (Subj. -Sek, or -ndnewik.)
Seeb6oyt-ayoo...^e departs.
SeehboyUdnetvoo (Fr. on pi^rt).../Aey (indeterm.) depart.
(Subj. -^ek or -dnewiL)
^The Chippeways add m, the cognate of oo or w (see p. 6l> note 35),
to the verbal termination, making in the Subj. -ng.
i. 28. Ke t6hzh-ezhecAe^rftm (indeterm.). . (these things) they (Fr. on)
were doing.
11. 32. Ke n6otiddhsi6em . . they (id.) have Mt heard.
SUBJUNCTIVB.
vii. 10, 11. Ainddhzhe wikoond-(ng. . as they (indet.) were feasting,
zi. 4. Che n^b6o-N^ . . that one (Fr. on) should die (from it),
xiii. 2. Ke . . . . w^sen-in^ . . as they Qndet.) had . . . eaten,
iv. »5. Ahpe ka k^eshk-iiiMi^tihithJegdi^nff . . then shall grass-cut-
they Qndet.)
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 99
TiJickoo#t7t...^e arrives.
Ttickoosim^neft^oo (Fr. on arrive) ... thet^ (indet) or some
one arrives
II. — ^From the peculiar structure of the Transitive
verh, as including in itself both the Subject and
Object (intensive as well as simple) in its active and
passive forms, a variety of combinations occur. The
range of the Intensive Pronouns being however re-
stricted to the third person of the singular number,
the forms which they furnish are comparatively few,
as they are also simple and consistent in their conju-
gational formation.
The Transitive Affix consists, as already shown, of
two parts, namely, the '* energetic'' letter or letters,
and the *' inflection" ; the intensive personal modifi-
cations alluded to here belong to the latter — the
former, or energetic letter, remaining unchanged.
Note — The " energetic" / (or d) is an exception to this rule. (See
below.)
The Indeterminate objective pronoun belongs to the
** animate*' — the Indefinite^ to the *' inanimate" class.
1 — ^The Indeterminate objective pronoun is expressed
by changing the general determinate termination -ayoo
(Chip, -on, or -aun) (3 p. sing.)=Ae — him, (see p. 38 et
seq,) into the indeterminate termination -ewdyoOy (Chip.
-ewa) or, which is almost the same thing, by prefixing
to the former the *' constant" intensive Wy together with
its preceding connecting vowel, which is generally e.**
M INDSTBHMINATB INJDICATIVB.
[xii. 47. Nin deb4hkooa(^M (neg. det.). . /judge him not.]
V. 30- NincT ezhe depihkoon«u;<f . . / ao judge.
h2
100 A GRAMMAR OF
S^e-h-oyoo {det)...ke loves him.
Sake-h-ew-(fyoo (indet.)...Ae loves^ and so of the rest.
Cheesehayoo...A€ deceives him.
Ch^8ehetvdi^oo...he deceives.
Minnahayoo...Ae gives him to drinks qu. he en-drinks him.
Minnahervdtfoo...he gives to drink.
These form^ respectively^ their three persons singular as follows :
ANIM. DET.
ANIM. INDKT.
1
otv
2 3
'Ow -ayoo.
1
-dn
2 3
iVe s^keh-on; (det.).../ love Afw.
Ne sakeh-ew-(fn (indet).../love {some one).
Ke ch6eseh-ofv...^Aof^ deceivest him.
Ke ch6eseh-*ew-(fn.. thou deceivest (some one).
It-6them-ayoo...Ae so thinks (of) him.
It-6them-ew-(£yoo...Ae sb thinks {some one).
Note-^The Transitives ending in -wdt/oo, (see p. 45.) make
-hew^^ooin the Indeterminate objective form^ as W^eche-n^oyoo...
he accompanies him; W^eche-hervdyoo...he accompanies.
Note. — Mdskam^oo {he takes from, robs, him) makes Mtiski-
twiyoo {he robs). Atkiadyoo {he exchanges with, him) makes
At^w^yoo ihe exchanges, barters). A^ssam^^oo {he gives him food,
feeds him,) makes A^ssagdyoo {he administers food). A^che-moyoo
(anim. he relates him) A^t-ootum (inan. irreg. he relates it) make
A^che-moo (indef. he relates). Ndttoo-mo^oo (he calls him) makes
Ntittoo-kaymoo (he invites). These and some others are irregular.
viii. 15. Kef ezhe tehihkoonewdim ..ye bo judge,
xi. 3. Ke n4endQhewdwun (obliq. case) . . they sent (some one) unto
him.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
viii. 16. Teh^hkoon-ewdydn . . (if) I judge.
X. 10. Che n46\i-€wdid (subj.) . . that he kill.
[v. 20. Oo w^bundahdn . . he causeth him to see, sheweth him.]
xi. 57. C)he wfihbundahewai<i . . that he shew.
THB CR££ LANGUAGE. 101
2. — The Indefinite objective is formed by changing
the inflectible terminations of the definite '* Inanimate"
forms, generally, both General and Special (3 p. sing.)
into the indefinite termination -egdyoo (Chip, -ega}^ the
intensive g (always hard) of which is *' constant,'' the
termination -ayoo only being inflectible."
*7 INDEFINITE INDICATIVE.
vii. 21. JVtfi ge 6zhech-ega . . /have done.
i. 26. Nin z4gBh6xidBh-gd . . I pour on.
zviii. 20. Nin ge k^enoo&limali^a . . J have taught.
iii. 10. Ke kekenoo&hmah^(f, nah? . . thou teachest ? nah, interr. part.
iii. 23. Ke tdhzhe z^gahtindah^c^ . . he was pouring on, baptizing.
[iv. 38. Ghe dhwe kiesYkk'&lishk'ishzhahmdig (def.) . . that go cut-
gnaa-yeM. Cree, K^sk-dsk-esumnu^.]
iv. 37. K^eshklihshkishzhe^tf (indef.) . . (another) cut-grass-^, reap-
eth. Cree, K^esk-tisk-ese-^cfyoo.
xii. 34. Nin ge (oonje) n6ondah^(fmtn. . We (1.3.) have (out oO heard,
viii. 38. Ket* 4z\iechegdim .,ye do (that, &c.).
viii. 44. Ke we 6zhechegdim', . ye wish, will, do.
xvi. 26. Ke kah und6otahmah^(ftm . . ye shall ask (for), demand.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
V. 30. Che iz\iQch-egay6n . . that I do it.
xiv. 13. Ewh ka izhechegaydn . . that shall do-/.
iv. 29. Kah hh-dhyizhechegaydn (intens.). . which Jhitherto-do, have
done,
i. 33. Che z^gahtindah^a^(^ . . that I pour on.
i. 25. Z6gah6nd9hgdyun . . ? . . (Why) pourest thou . . ?
i. 38., xi. 8., iv. 31., viii. 4. Kdkenoo4hmah^(fyten (flat vowel) . . .
tJtou who teachest (habit.) ** master."
ii. 18. Yie dhy6^Qchegdyun (intens.). . (these things) which thou hast
done (with iteration),
iii. 2. Azkechegdyun (flat vowel) . . (which) thou doest (habit.),
vii. 28. K^enoollhmah-^(f«(f (def. time). . as he taught,
iii. 2. Kdkenoodhmah^tltd (flat vowel). . he who teaches (habit.) quasi,
a teacher,
iii. 22. Ke tllhzhe-z^gahtindah^(ue^ . . (and) he constant-poured.
102 A GRAMMAR OF
When i is the energetic letter of the animate verb^ as in
n^mi^dyoo ,,,he fetches him ; ndgga-^-oyoo ,,,ke leaves him ; pdck wi-
Ua^oo,*.he hates him; it is^ in the indeterminate form^ softened
into its cognate s (or sh) as, na-s-ew4yoo...Ae fetches (some one) ;
ntigga-j-ewcfyoo...Ac leaves (some one, people, &c.) ; puckwA-
S'ervdyoo,,,he hates. On the other hand, when t is the energetic
letter of the inanimate verb, it is softened, in the indefinite form,
into its cognate (t)ch, as
GENERAL.
O'ose-^-of0...Ae make^ it.
Oose-cA-eg4yoo...Ae make^, is making (something).
X. 10. Che hahxMi^echegdid . . that he spoil, make bad.
i. 21., iv. 44., iv. 19. Anw^hegdid (flat vowel) . . he,07ie, who speak-
eth, an orator, " prophet."
ii. 12. Kah iahquBihizhechegdid . . when he had end-done, ended,
iii. 20. Mije-izhechegdid (flat vowel) . . (he) who evil-does.
ix, 8. Und6odahmah^(^ , . (^)who begged, demanded,
vii. 14. Ke k^enoo4hmab^£^u? . . he taught,
viii. 8. Ke oozh^be^gdid . . he wrote.
1. 33. Ka s^gahtindah^iu^ . . (he) who shall pour, baptize.
X. 40. Kah ddhzhe-zi^h^dahgaid . . that he constant-^vaed, was
baptizm^.
iii. 22. Ke tdhzbe z^gaihAndaixgdid . . he constant-poured,
vi. 59. Ke t^zhe k^enoodhmah^cfu^ . . as ^ constant-taught.
V. 29. Kah m^noo-^zhecAe^4;i^ . . who (plur.) well-do.
V. 29. Kah mlihje-^zhec^t^'i^ . . who (id.) evil-do.
viii. 62. 53. Anwiihchegdjig , . who Cid.) speak, orators, "prophets."
xiv. 27. Azbe migewatodd . . as they give,
vi. 13. Kah w^sen^'^ (irreg,) . . who (plu.) had eaten.
NEGATIVE.
viii. 28. JVie . . ^zhechegdse . . I do not.
iv. 2. Ke zegahdndah^^ . . he had not poured on, baptized.
ix. 3. Ke mUije-^heche^cCfe . . he hath not iH^done.
vii. 22. Ke ke 6onje ^zheche^<Cr^?m(ewh) . . ye have therefore done
not (that).
X. 37. ^^zhwhtgdsewdn (subj. possess, case^ ., (iO I do not hu it.
THE CRB£ LANGUAGE. 103
W6ime-^(^ (def.)...A€ loseth it.
Wuxme'ch-egd^oo (\nde£.).„he losdh.
M6wutche*l-(^...Ae collects^ gathers together^ it.
M6yf\itch^'Ch>^dyoo.,,he collects together.
Tkka-t'Um...ke stabbe^A it
T^k'Ch'egdyoo,,,he stabbeM.
P6ot^-^-tim „.he blowdA it.
Pooti'Ch-egdi^oo. . , he hlowetk.
SPECIAL (See p. 95.)
P6ekoo-A-2£m fdef.) makes -h-egdyoo (indef.)...Aebreakc/A, b^ force,
-tah-tim . . . -tah-egdyoo, .,ke breake^i^ by striking.
-sk'Um . . . 'Sk'Cigdyoo ,,.he breaketh, by accident.
"t'Utn ... -cli-egdy 00 ,,ke tear ethyriik the mouth,
"n^um . . . "U^egdyoo ...he hreaketh with the hand.
-pitt'Um ;.. -pi(t)ch'egdyoo,..hehreakelh, by pulling,
-s-um . . . -s-egdyoo ...he breake/A^ by cutting.
See p. 87 and Paradigms.
Ne wdnne-t-an (def.) . . . / lose it.
Ne wdnne*ch-eg^n (indef.).../ lose.
Ke n6che-t-a»...^A(n^ workest (at) it.
Ke n6che*ch^gdn.,Jhou workest, art employed.
M4sse-t-on;...Ae agitates t^
M&sse-ch-egefyoo. . . he agitates.
Ne m^tha-t-^u (anim.-m^ayoo).../ «mell it.
Ne meth4>^-eg<£5 . . . / smell.
Ke w6pa-h-^ii (anim. "Vr -ay 00),,. thou sweepest it.
Ke w6pa-h-eg^it...^Aot£ sweepest.
Miimie-s-t<m...Ae cuts it.
M iinne-s-eg^^oo . . . Ae cuts.
Kumia-w^ppa-t-um.../<e long-sees^ looks at^ it.
Kunnah-iy^ppa*ch-eg<f^oo...Ae looks out, watches.
104
A GRAMMAR OF
M6tooii-ethe-t-tt9ii...Ae complete-thinks, considers i7.
M6toon-^the-ch-eg^^oo...Ae reflects.
Note — The Indefinite, being more extetisive in its meaning than
the Indeterminate, which is exclusively personal, comprehends the
latter, and may be used for it ; but, for the same reason, not vice
versd.
The indeterminate -ewdyoo, and the indefinite
-egdyoo belong to the same conjugation, which is an
Intransitive form, having the three persons singular.
as follows : —
INDICATIVE. PRES.
CRBE,
CHIPPEWAY.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
"Cwdn
-ewrfn
-ewdi/oo.
-eyrd
-ew(f
-ewrf.
-egdn
-egdn
-egdtfoo.
~egd
-egd
-ega-
SUBJUNCTIVE. PRES.
1.
2.
3.
I.
2.
3.
'^wedn
-ew^fi
^ewdil.
•'QYikydn
-ewa^t/n
-ewdid.
"Cg^dn
-eg^un
-egdit
-egkydn
^egiyun
-egdid.
The plural is, in all cases, formed from the singular number.
(See Paradigms.)
Note, — The above two intensive forms of the objective pronoun
are susceptible of those other intensive forms (of the action}
noticed p. 69 et seq,, as
Ch^sehe-way-oo (indet.)...Ae deceives.
Ch6esehe-w&y-*^-M...Ae deceives often.
N6oten-eg4y-oo (indef.)...Ae fights, is fighting.
N6oten-eg&y-*A:-M . . . Ae fights qften.^ &c.
These intensive objective take also, besides the
*8 X. 8. Ke mkhkundrwd^hketoug . . they have roh-people-frequenthf-edr
are robbers,
viii. 44. ^^Bhe-wd'shk^hun . . he kill-^«i-ed, was a murderer.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 105
plural, the intensive subjective forms (see p. 98, Intran-
sitives), thus exhibiting double intensive signs, as,
Ch6ese-hew-rf^-oo (det. subj., iiidet. obj.v..Ae deceives.
Cheese-hew-dy-foulcAhey (idem.) deceive.
Oi^eseAiew-ctnervoo (Fr. on):,. they (indet. subj. and obj.)
deceive. (Subj. -herv-dik, or, -hew-dnewik.)
^dote-Ti-egdyoo ,.,he fights.
N6ote'n'egdywuk.,Jhey (det.) fight.
Ndote-n-egdnetvoo (Fr. on).., they (indet.) some one is fight-
ing. (Subj. -egdik, or, ^egdnewik.)
It'dyoo...he so says (to) him.
lUfvdyoo...he so says (Angl. he says).
Jt'fvdnetvoo (Fr. on 6ii%)..,they (indet.) so say, Angl. peo-
ple say ; It is said. (Subj. 'fvdik, or, -tvdnervik.)
This verb, from its Relative form, is commonly used at the
end of the sentence. See Relative Verbs, Sect. IV.
Note. — Dr. Edwabds, speaking of the Mohegans, one of the Algonquin
tribes, observes that " they cannot say, I love, thou givest, Sfc. but they
can say, I love thee, thou givest him, 8ic." The examples, of similar
grammatical import, which have been adduced in both the animate and
inanimate forms, will, I imagine, be sufficient to shew that he is
completely in error. Dr. E.'s opinions having, however, been quoted by
eminent Philological writers, (see Tooke's Diversions qf Purley, Booth's
Analytical Dictionary^ &c.) they have, generally, an especial claim to
notice, and will be hereafter considered in detail. See Additional Notes.
The simple objective forms, also, take the intensive
subjective,*® as,
Keese-t-on^...Ae finishes it.
K^eBe-t-dnervoo (Fr. on).,. they (indet.) finish it*
&9 i. 38, 41, 42. A^hnekanootahm-in^ . . (if) they (indet.) translate it.
iv. 35. Che k^eshk-dhshknsh(zh)ahm-ik^ . . that they (indet.) cut it.
vi. 13. Kah eshqtiundahm-^ . . which they (indet.) left.
See Note 55.
1^ A GRAMMAR OF
Reciprocals and Reflectives take also the same form.^
N6otenayoo...Ae fights him,
H^doteniHdouk (Fr> iU s'entre'hsLttent).,Jke^ fight one ano-
ther, are fighting.
Hidotenittoondnefvoo (Fr. on s'entre-bat) ... they (indet.) are
fightings there is an engagement
'Pk8ke8mdosoo,,,he shoots himself.
Tk8ke8w6o8oondnervoo,.,some one shoots himself.
To which may be added the *' accidental" and
'* participial" passives (see below), as taking also this
form.
Of the Passivb: forms.
The complete investigation of these intensive forms
of the pronoun, in the Algonquin dialects, brings under
notice both the Active and the Passive Verb.
It need scarcely be observed^ that the manner of using these
two modes of the verb, when in relation with the intensive pronoun,
varies even in European, or written, languages ; thus we say
indifferently, " people say," actively ; " it is said," passively ;
while the French, with their indeterminate on, affect the former,
or active form, " on dit" The Algonquin dialects assimilate to the
jpreracA idiom ; as, Ne sakehik-(^frm, Fr. m'aime-t-on, onm'aime...
MeAoYeth-'Somehody, I am loved. This diversity of idiom appears,
however, to be limited, generally, to the personal agents or subjects ;
for, with a more vague or indefinite subject, or, indeed, when it is
intended to give pi;pminence to the action rather than the agent,
they all coincide in a common passive form ; as, '* It is spoiled,"
•» ii. 1. Ke wew^kooddhdiw (recip.) . . they (iter, indet.) were feasting
(one another),
ii. 2. Aind^hsshe-wew^oodlhdiwfl' (iter, subj.) . . (where) they (id.)
were feasting. See Note 55.
THE CR££ LANGUAGE. 107
Crce, niaseyfunkchegdM^oo ; Fr. il est gftt^. "/< is lost; Cree,
w^amechegdidtfoo ; Fr. il est perdw. See Syntax.
In Construction, the Cree and Chlppeway dialects have a phrase-
ology of their own^ in which the English and Frendi active phrases
are both very often rendered by the passive voice, and vice versa.
See p. 58 and Syntax,
The indeterminate subjective pronoun is (like the
objective of the active form) of the *' animate'' class,
and is also exclusively personal; and the indefinite
subjective, or common passive verb, is of the **inani.
mate" class or form.
1. — ^The indeterminate subjective is formed from
the '* inverse" determinate termination -iAr, -afc (Chip.
dhg, Jones), or -ook, (3 p. s. inv,) = he — by him^ by
adding to it the indeterminate -dmn (Chip, -rfo) for the
first and second persons, and by changing -i/p, &c. into
'6w (pron. as in low, not high) = he — by some one,
(Chip, -dh) for the third person.**
«> INDBTBRMINATE INDICATIVE.
ill. 28. Nin ge b^n%ahn-4hzhahoog-(^o . . they (indet.) have hither-
first-sent me,
v. 14. Ke ke kdhyuhddhweeg-(^ . . they (\d.) have cured thee,
viii. 33. 36. Ke kah pdhged^nege^bm . . they (id.) will let go, release,
you.
vii. 47. Ke wahydzheeg^^om . . they (id.) deceive you.
The third person is passive, as follows :
i. 8. Ke hh-ihnoon-dh (indet.) . . he was hither-sen^ (by some one).
viii. 4. Ke dMnoon-dh , . (he or) she was takm.
viii. 9. Ke . . ndhgahn<^ . . he was lef^.
xii. 34. Tah 6omben^A . . he wiU be ]ihed up.
xix. 20. Ke . . ohgwihqusixwdh . . he was " crucifiwf."
XV. 6. Tah ^ooneihwkhendh . . he will be flung away.
ii. 2. Ke ^ndoomdhwug . . they were callecf, invited.
106 A GRAMMAR OF
DIRECT INDICATIVE.-
Ne skke-h-OR^.../ love him,
Ke 8kke'h'Otv„.thou lovest him.
Skke-h-ayoo...^e loves him.
XX. 23. "E^koo-n-dhmahwdh (obliq.case). . they are withdrawn to (from)
Mm.
XX. 23. Mmi^me-Ti'dhmahwdh (idem.). . they are held, retaineef, to him.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
xii. 7. Che ningwahoog-(^dn . . that they (indeterm.) bury me.
xii. 32. 0'ombeneg-e%<^ (if) they (indet.) up-lift me.
XV. 7. Ka t6otahg(%ai^ . . they (indeterm.) will do to you.
vii. 4. Che kekinem-{nd . . that he be known.
[iii. 14. Kah ^zhe 6ombikhkoono(2 . . as he up-hanged him.'\
iii. 14. Ka ^zhe 6ombdhkoonin(2 . . shall so be up-hanged he.
iv. 25. ilzh^nekahnine? (flat vowel.) . . who was namec?.
viii. 3. Kah d^hkoonine? . . who was taken.
ix. 22., xii. 31. Che zdhgeje-wdbeniiul . . that he be out-thrown.
iii. 27. O'onje min^nd . . (if) thence he be given to.
iii. 18. Ke nsihnibooind . . he has been condemned?.
xii. 16. Kah b^shegainddhgooiiul . . when he was glonfied.
xii. 23., xiv. 13. Che b^shegainddhgooiiul . . that he should be glori-
fied.
xii. 38. Kah wdhbundahinc^ . . {he) who hath been made to see it.
XX. 24., xxi. 2. Aninc^ . . who is saie? to, or of, callecf.
V. 33. Ke nikhzekahw/ndl-ebun . . he has been gone to.
xix. 16. Che ahgwdhquahcfcmi . . that he be " crucified."
xix. 41. Kah ddhzhe dhgw4hquah(^ond . . where he was being " cru-
cified."
xii. 16. 'E^zhehedond . . that he was written*
iii. 23. Ke z^gahunddhwindu^c^A . . they were poured on.
xvii. 19' Che b^netndu^dA . . that they be cleansed.
xvii. 23. Che pdzhegooindii;e£A . . that they be united, perfected.
xix. 31. Che ^zhew^nindtc'dA . . that they be taken away.
xix. 31. Che b6okoog4hda(^(>ndi(;dA . . that they be break-legged.
i. 24. Kah b^dhnoon/n/i^ . . who were hither-sen^.
ix. iii. Che w&hbundahmdhwind (obliq. case) . . that they be Been in
him.
xi. 3. Che . . w^endahmdhw/nd (id.) . . that he be named to^ told.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 109
Ne 8kke-h-en;-(£n.../ love^ some one, people^ &c.
Ke 8kke-h-en^-^».../A{m lovest.
Skke-h-eft^-(fjyoo .,,he loves.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Che 8kke-h-^fi^-ean...that love-some-one'I, that /love.
Che 8kke-h-eft^-^2^n...that thou love.
Che skke-h-ew-<ft7...that /*€ love.
INVERSE INDICATIVE.
Ne sake-h-/A:...wie-loveth-Ae, he loves me.
Ke sake-h-fA:...Ae loves thee.
Sake-h-/ifc...Ae is loved by him, or them (determ.).
V. 23. Wayff^i%em%nd (flat vowel) . . who was conned, called son.
Angl. " the son."
V. 23. WayooBevaind (flat vowel) . . who was fathered^, called father.
Angl. " the father."
A mistaken view of this kind of words, namely, a subjunctive verb with a
pronoun relative understood, &c. (see p. 73,) has led to an erroneous classi-
fication. Zeisbergsr has greatly erred in this respect hy classing as
NOUNS, not only intransitive verbs, e.g. " Weliliswiw.' . . O, pious man \"
literally. Thou who art good ! but even transitives vnth their regimen, e.g.
" PemlkuchsoAc^/ian. . O my Saviour," &c. which, also Uterally rendered,
is Thou who mdkest me live ; agreeably to his own more correct version
of a similar expression, found among his paradigms of the verb, viz.
" Wtilamkllesohalian ^vocative), . O thou who makest me happy" — not
less incorrectly classed under the head of " Participles." This want of
accuracy in classification, has compelled Mr. Du Ponceau to use for a
simple|?rc*e»^ of the subjunctive, the perplexing unintelligible denomination
of the *' participiaUpronominal'VOcative" form. — Trans, qf the Amer.Phil.
Soc. vol 3, new series, pp. 99. 137. — See Syntax.
negative.
iii. 24. AhpdhgenaA-sepun . . he was not depositee^, " cast."
vii. 39. P^shegainddhgoo(f^-sebun . . he was not glorifiec^.
vi. 65. M^n^sig (subj.) . . (if) Ac be not given to.
vii. 39. Mekewdsewitwi-^un . . (for) he was not given,
xix. 41. Ke ahs&hsewind-^un . . (where) he had not been placee^.
110 A GRAMMAR OF
Ne 9^^'Yi''ik^4win (Fr. m'aime-t-oit, on m'aime)... me loves-
somebody, i.e. / am \oyred (by some one)^ and so of
the rest (Chip. -i^-<fe).
Ke s^ke-h-i^'^-^^n^in (Fr. on t*3^xae)...ihou art loved. (Chip.
-ig'66).
^tke-h-drv (Fr. U est aim^^ de quelqu'un ; not on Taime)
,,,he is \oyed. (Chip. -^A).
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Che s^e-h-ik-dtve-dn ... that love-people-me, (Fr. qu'on
wi'aime,) that / beloyed, by some one. (Chip.-tg-day<5n).
Che 8ake-h-tA:-(fn?e-w» . . that love-people-thee, (Fr. qu'oi*
/*aime), that thou be loved, by some one. (Chip. -^-
doyun.)
Che sike-h-^e^ (Fr. qu'i/ soit aim^)...that he be loved.
(Chip, '{ndy
With the first and second persons the phrase is active — in the
thirds passive ; they being the return of the direct form. See
p. 51 et seq.
INDICATIVE.
Ne ■p6yUdk,,,me heareth-Ae (det. subj.).
Ke -pkytrdk . . . thee heareth- A€.
V^yUdk (pa6s.)...Ae is he&rd by him^ ^c.
Ne "p^jt-dk'dtvin (Fr. m'entend-o«).../ am heard, by some
one (indet)
Ke F€yt'dk'drvin (Fr. /'entend-on).../Aott art heard, by same
one.
Vkytr-orvdw (Fr. il est entendM)...Ae is heard, by some one.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Che p6ytrhk''6tve'dn (Fr. qu'oi» m'entende)...that I be heard,
by some one.
Che p4yt-kk-(^fi^-ifn (Fr. qu'on fentende)... thai thou be, Stc
Che j^^jt-dfV'dt (Fr. qu'tV soit entendM)««'that he be, &c.
Note. — The '^constant" orv or w, in the active, -fy4yoo(Chip.-w&),
as well as in the return or passive terminations^ 'dmn (Chip. '60),
or "dfo (Chip. ^6K), belong to the indeterminate pronouns <^euk,
<^ft^ea, <5fi^inah, seme one, somebody, SfV. (Chip, ahwea, Jonbs) which
assume here, being in a compounded form, the verbal inflection.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. Ill
2. — The indefinite subjective, or common passivei
which, to distinguish it from the accidental (see p. 26), I
shall call the participial passive form, is the opposite of
the indefinite active, and is formed from it, by changing
the active termination -gdyoo (Chip, -grf) into ^gp^tdyoo^
the inanimate passive ending (Chip* gahdd, Jones) ,^
«2 INDICATIVE.
xvi. 20. Tah gw&kene-g-ahdd (and so of the rest). . it shall be tvaned,
iv. 11. D^meydhne^a^^ ,,it is mode deep,
vi. 31., vih. 17. Z'z\iehe4gaMd ,.itis writtwt.
xix. 19. Ke izhehe6gahdd . . it has so been writt«i.
zix. 36. Ke 6zhec\iegahddtoun . . they were so don^.
vi. 45. WzheheSff ahddmahgut ., it is so written,
xi. 38. Wiembsihxiekdhddn^bun (obliq. case) . . it was hdQowed, ex-
csLYBted.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
i. 3. Kah oozheche-^a^c^t^ . . which was made.
xvii. 24. Chepwah dozhecliegahddig . . before it was mAde.
ii.Q. Kah zhdhwe-inen-4hboow^che^aA(f<%. . which toflwyellow-berry-
liquor, i.e. wine-made,
ii. 17. 'E/zheheigahdaig . . (that) it (is) was wiittefi.
xv. 6. Azhe ^koonahwabene^aA(iai^ * . &s it is away-flung (a branch),
xix. 14. Wahwdzheche^aAc^(fi^ . . that it was prepared,
xix. 28. Ke k^zheche^aMa% . . that it was finishec^.
XV. 25. Wazheheigahdaig (flat vowel) . . which is writt«i.
xxi. 25. (yoz\iehe4gahddgebiin ..if it were writt^.
xix. 23. A^hnzwat^gene^^M^^roo&t^ . . it «9a« wot«i».
zii 6. Kah b^nah^^a^t^m^ (obliq. case) . . which was put in it.
iii. 20. Che wdhbunje^a^^ni^ (idem.) . . that they might be seen.
iii.21. C/ozichegahdanig (idem.). . that they are made, "wrought."
NEGATIVE INDICATIVE.
i. 3. Tah ge dozhechegdhddsenoon . . it could not have been made.
X. 34. 0^ozliehe4gdhddsenoon ..it is not writt6}».
z. 35. Tah bahndhjeche^i^^^Tioon. . it will not be spoiki, made bad.
xix. 36. Tah h66k'6og9Akii'ai6gdhddsenen^h (obi. case). . he shall not be
break-bone-ee?.
112 ' A GRAMMAR OF
the inserted participial letters at (or ad) being pro-
nounced precisely as the same letters in the Italian
participle amai-o, the a being long, and the t ending
the syllable. It makes, in the animate form -go^oo,
the t being softened into its cognate s or z (Chip.
'gahzoo JoNBs's Orthog.).
Note, — The letter h following a, in Mr. Jones's " Translation,"
indicates the Italian sound of that vowel, as in *' father ;" without
distinguishing between its long and short sound ; when unaccom-
panied by h, a has the sound of the same vowel in ^' fate,"
*' state ;" k final, merely indicates the prolonging of the preceding
vowel.
O^ose-ch-eg-cfyoo ,,,he makes.
Oose-ch-eg^t-(fyao ..make-ed it is,
Oose-ch-eg^s-oo...Ae is make-ed, m&de.
K^skekw^'Uum (def.)...Ae sews it.
KdskekwA-ch-eg<f^oo (indef.)...Ae sews (act.).
Ktiskekwi-ch-egat-(£yao...fV is sewed (pass.).
Kilskekwa-ch-egks-oo...t^ (he anim.) is sewed, as a mitten.
W^pe-n-egrf^oo (act.)...Ae flings away.
Wepe-n-egkt-oyoo (pass.)., it is flung away.
W^pe-n-egks-oo...Ae or it (anim.) is flung away.
S6ge-n-eg<fy 00... pours he, as from a cup.
S6ge-n-eg^t-c£yoo...pour-ed it is,
Sega-h-eg^^oo... pours he, with strength, as from a bucket.
S6ga-h-6gkt-rfyoo . . . pour-ed-t/ is,
Kippa-h-eg4yoo...he shuts, as a door.
K$ppa-h-6gkt-<fyoo...close-ed it is.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
vii. 23. Che h9ihnih.}Gchegdhdds€nooff . . that it be not spoilt, made
bad.
XX. 30. Whzheheigdhddsenoog (flat vowel) . . which are not written
(indef.)
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 113
O^'ott-n-o^oo. . . he takes him,
O^ote-n-eg4yoo. • • he takes.
0^ote-n-eg^f-oo...Ae is (has 6een) taken.
O^ote-n-eg^^-(fyoo...tl t; (has 6een) taken.
0^opa-h-2^m...Ae lifts t<, with force.
O''opa-h-eg^^oo. . . he lifts .
0^opa-h-ega«oo...Ae w lifted.
O^opa-h-4g/}^4^oo.. it is lifted
Nipp4-ch-eg4yoo. .Ae kills.
Nippa-ch-eg^^oo...^ is kiUe(/.
The animate and inanimate persons are formed as follows :— -
CREJB.
INDICATIVE.
CHIPPEWAY.
1
2
3 1
2
3
(An.) -gJlsoon
^^oon
-gksoo -g^
-gkz
-gJlzoo
(In.)
'g^tdyoo
-giuli£
SUBJUNCTIVE.
(An.) 'g^ooydn 'gksdoyun ^ghsoot i ^ilzooydn -gkzdoyun -gkioot
(In.) -gilttfi^ I
Note, — It may be observed, that the above mentioned two passive
forms, namely, the Accidental and the Participial, have exactly their
equivalents in the two English participial forms, of which one is
considered to be irregular, e.g.
U^ckoo-t-oyoo (inan.)...tV is hung up (accid. state).
U'ckoo-ch-e|f^/-<£^oo.,.iV is (Anglicd, has been) YiBUged up
(by an agent implied).
£skw&-t-^^oo (inan.)...t7 is hnmt (accid. state).
Eskw^ch-egf^/d^oo ... ii is (has been) bumec^ (as by an
incendiary).
Kippoo-t-(£^oo...27 is stop/ (accid. state).
Kipp6o-ch-eg^/-^^oo ... it is (has been) stoppecf, by some
agent.
K6che-piss-oo (anim.)...Ae is gir/ (accid. state).
K6che-pi(t)ch-eg^«-oo ... he is (has been) gixdied (by an
implied agent). &c.
I
114 A GRAMMAR OF
From the above indeterminate verbal forms are
derived Adjective verbs (of a transitive signification),
by adding to the intensive signs, the termination of
MANNER, viz. -wiss-u^oT -s-u — equivalent, respectively ,
to the English active 4ng, -ive, or -ous, and the passive
-ed, -able or -ible, as,
Sakehe-fr(£yoo...Ae loves {some one, people, &c.).
Sakehe^wdif'tvissu .,, he loves-generally-like^ is lov-some-
one~ing, i.e. lovtn^, am<nr-{nfx.
Sklieh{k...ke is loved.
SakehSk'00su.,.ke is loved-generaUy-like, he is lov^able, ami-
able.
VkyUdk,.,he is heard by him, or them.
P6jtAk-oow...Atf is {may he) hear J, is aud-ti/f.
P^ytUc-ivKit...!/ is hear<i, is aud-t6/e.
M^thkmkkoow...Ae is (may he) smellfif, is 8mell-a6/e.
W6eke-m^fv«n...t/ is sweet-smelltfif.
N5k-o(Mt^...Aeu (may he) seen, uvi8-t62e.
Nok-ivfin.».tV w vis-t5^.
M^tho-n^koom.. he is well*seeit, Angl. (act) good-looking.
M6tho-n^kfv«n,..t^ ttf well-seen, has an agreeable appear-
ance.
Mdtho-8ptickoow...Ae is well-tastei.
Mutche-sp(ickfrfin...f/ is ill-tastecf.
The three persons singular are formed as follows :-«-
CREE. CUIPPE WA Y.
INDICATIVE ACTIVE.
13 3 12 3
-wis-in -wis-ira -wis-u | -wiz -wiz -mz-eh,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
-wis-eirt -wis-^ -wis-i^ | 'mz-eydn -wiz-^un -wiz-irf.
1
2
3
-o6z
-ooz
"OOzeh .
•yfud.
THB CREB LANGUAGE. 115
INDICATIYB PASSIVE.
1 2 3
(Anim.) -oos-in -oos-in -oos-t/.
(Inan.) -w-t^n.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
(Anim.) •*oo8-e<^n -oos-^n -oos-tV. i -ooe-^(^n -ooz-eytm -ooz-uf.
(Inan.) -w-dk. | -w-iiit.**
«* INDICATIVB. — ANIMATE.
iii. 30. Nin gah ne en-^dkhgoor . . J will be so-tliouglit of.
viii. 53. iv. 12. Kef ahp^t-dind^hgoo^ . . thou art so (much) -thought of.
xiv. 28. iii. 31. A^hwahshemd mah ahp^t-dindkhgooxr^^. . beyond for
he is so (much) thought of.
vii. 28 . Qudyahqu-aindkhgoofre^. .he is straight-thought, esteemec? true,
xii. 13. Shdhw-dind^hgoozeA ..he is qu. very-thought of, blessed",
favoured.
xxi. 1. Ke ezhe wahbahm^gopje^ . . he was so seen,
ix. 9. £zhen^hgoo2reA ..he is so seen, he so appears, is like,
xviii. 27. Ke n6oad^goo;?e(^) . . he was heard (the cock),
xiii. 31. P^sheg-dind^goozeA ..Jieis one-thought,-considered.
XX. 29. Shahw-aind^gooarewm^r . . they are favoured, blessed,
xvi. 7. KecP en-kindkhgoozim . . ye are so thought, considered,
viii. 23. Ke teb-dindkhgoo2rtm . . ye are governed,
xiii. 17. iTe zhahw-aindkhgoo2r«m . . ye are blessed, favoured.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
iii. 33. vii. 18. Quiyukqu^&indithgoortd. . .he is straightH;hotf^Af,is true,
viii. 47. T^b-dindkhgooirid (flat vowel) . . (he) who is governed.
i.27. viii. 53. iv. 12. Ap^t-^nd&hgoo2rtd. . who so (much) is thought of.
xiii. 32. P^sheg-dindiihgoo£rid . . if he be one-thought, i. e. great*
thought, gloriotM.
i. 32. Ke b^-ezhenkhgooarid . . he was hither-so-seen, was like.
XV. 19. Teh'^ndkhgoozeydgooh^n . . if ye were governed,
xviii. 37. Thh^iindkhgoozefig (flat vowel) . . who are governed.
INDICATIVE. — INANIMATE.
zix. 7. En-dind^igtof^d ..it is ao thought.
viii. 16. Tah qtiiukqu-^nd^igtimd . . it will be straight-, just-thought.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
xviii. 31. An-^andkhgwuk (flat vowel) . . as t^ t^ thought.
i2
116 A GRAMMAR OF
This passive adjective form may be rendered still
more intense by inserting an additional oo or w before
the Affix of manner.
Sow^themayoo.,.he favours him.
Sow^themti^ (det.)...Ae U f&yotxred by him, or them.
Sow^themoft; (indet)...A€ is favoureif (Jby some one).
Sow^thech^/^f 00 (indef. agent, def. time;...Ae is (has been)
favoure(2.
Sow6themikooftt (agent and time indef.)... Atf is favourec?.
Sow^themikdozotJ^ (infinite^ universal)... Ae is highly, su-
premely, favoured (qu. by Providence.).
S^kehayoo...Af loves him.
Skkeht^ (det)...Ae is \oyed by him, or them.
S^keh(^ (indet.)...Ae is \oved (by some one).
Shike^egiisoo (particip. pass.)...Ae is loved (def. time).
xviii. 14. U^ndahw-iindkhgtrtfib . . that it was to be ezpectec?.
XV. 13. Ap^t-dindkhgum^ . . as it is thought, esteemec^.
V. 36. Andind-khgtraAieidg (possess, case) ..d^ his ..is consider^?.
NEGATIVE INDICATIVE.
i. 27. MiuT ahp^tidnd^goor^ .. I am not so (much) thought of,
deemed worthy,
▼iii. 23. Mft deb-ainddhgoor^e ..I am not governed, ruled, owned,
ziii. 16. XV. 20. Ahp^Utindyigoo;?^tf. . (more) he is not deemed worthj.
ziii. 38. Tah ndondihgoozdse . . he shall not be audtife, hean^.
zvii. 14. Teb&inddhgoo2^(5e)ioti^ . . they are not governed, owned,
ix. 33. Teb^ddhgooxre5^^^ . . (if) he were not governed, owned,
xi. 4. En-^ndihgwdhsendon (inan.; ..it is not so-thought, deemed.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
xvii. 16. Azhe tehiandihgooz^sewon (obi. case). . as J am no^ governed^,
owned,
vii. 15. Ke k^enooahmihgooxr^i?i^ ..as he has not been instruct6cf,
taught,
viii. 47., XV. 19. Tebaind4hgoo;?^«o(ft^ ... as ye fire not governed,
owned, (of God).
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 117
Skkehikoosu (indef. time. Sic.),., he is, (may he,) \oyed, is
2ixa\able.
Silkehik<^(wwM (infin.)...Ae is lowed, qu. by Providence.
There is yet another form, which is also passive,
and implies obligation or necessity, viz. -ctt-ikoosu^ as,
G6ost''{k'00'Su.,.he is fesLred-generally-like, is terr-ible.
G6ost'dt'{k'00'SU ,,he is to be feared.
Paragraph VI.
Of the Oblique Cases.
It has been observed, that both the direct and
the oblique cases of the pronoun are combined
with the verb. The nominative and accusative, ex-
pressive of the subject and the object, have just been
exemplified in their determinate, indeterminate, and
indefinite forms. We now proceed to the Oblique
cases, or remote object.
These cases are as follows, namely — two Datives ;
the Vicarious ; the Instrumental ; and the Possessive.
Their conjugational forms differ little from those of the
Direct cases, the added sign being supplied generally
by inserted letters, rather than by change of termina-
tion. See Paradigms.
^These have, like the other cases, their animate and
inanimate forms.
The first, or common Dative, signifies to or for, and
is formed (3 p. sing.) as follows :
Nippa-h-(fy-(X) (accus. anim.)...kill-eth-Atm-Ae^ he kills him.^
Nippa-t-(^w (id. inan.)...kill-eth-f7.Ae, he kills it.
118 A GRAMMAR OF
'Srppk*-t'*otv*d^oo (anim.) ...quasi> kill-eth-Atm^/br-^tm-A^,
he killeth him for him.
l9ip^k'Udmofv*dy»oo (inan.)...kill-eth-t7^/br-Atm-Ae^ he kill-
eth it for him. See p. 51 e/ seq. ®*
Note, — ^The -«y is pronounced as in " may," " say/* &c. The oo short.
INDICATIVE.
M xvi. 2. Nfiuf Qmookitahwdh . . J work /or him (he will think),
xiv. 16. Nin gah lUmahmed^oAioe^ . . I will pray to him,
xyii. 26. Mn ge wiendahmdhwog . . J have named, told, t^ to them,
X. 15. Ne hShgedinahmdhwog . . /let t^ go, yield it, /or ^Aan.
ziz. 38. Oo ge \md6odahmahwdn , , he demanded it to ((^) him,
T. 22. Oo ge hdhged^noAmoAioi^ . . he has let t^ go, delivered it, to
him.
iv. 33. Oo ge \^idahmahwdn . . he has brought itfw him,
ii. 15. Oo ge zig--7i^vBidkmakvo6n, , he spill - flung, poured away, t^
to them,
X. 11. Oo m4gewitahmahw6n . . he giveth it for him, or ^*«fi.
xii. 22. Oo ge b^w^endoAma^e^ . . he has hither-named, told, f7 to
him
xii. 22. Oo ge wiendahmahwdhwon, . /A«y have named, told, t^ to him,
viii. 3. Oo ge b^doAmaAu^^f^ioon . . they have brought him, Sfc.for him.
ix. 13. Oo ge b^zhew^doAma^iDtfAtoofi . . they led, carried, Atm /or
him, 4rc.
xii. 21. Oo ge tindwaw-alndaAmaAio(fAiooii . . they expected, desired,
to (of) him,
xiii. 18. Nfft ge 6obenaAf}K^ (inv.) . . he has taken up, raised, to me,
X. 3. Ooft' esUhkoonoAfiuCAAioon 6d.) . . A« w opened/or, by him,
xviii. 35. Nin ge bdhged^naAmiA^oo^ . . . ibe-y6wh (id.) . . they have
delivered it to me, thy'hody,
XX. 23. Wkoondhmahwdh (id.) ..it is, or, t^ ar«, withdrawn to
(from) him.
XX. 23. Minj^men(^Ama^(i% (id.). . it is, or, they are, held to Mm.
xix. 4. Jr« hidahmdonim (id.) . . / bring him to you,
xiv. 27. iSTc n^kahdaAnu^tm (id.). . /leave t* to, or for you.
xiv. 29. Ke ke w^endoAfiu^onim (id.) . . / have named, told, it to you.
xiv. 2. JTe tah ge wiendahmdonim (id.). . / would have told it to you.
xiv. 2. JKf^* ah we wahw&zhe^oAmf^onim Cid.). . J go prepare iV/or yow.
THE CRBB LANGUAGB. 119
Zeisberoer has stated^ and I believe correctly^ that^ in the L4nni
Lendpe^ a kindred dialect^ there is a verbal dative case, but his
Indian examples are> with one exception, in the accusative.
xvi. 7' Ke kah pkhged6nahm6onim (inv.)- • I will dehver Mm to you.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
[viii. 59. Ke gkhzoo (reflect.). . he hid himself, "]
xii. 36. KekShzoo-tahwdd (id.). . he hid himself -tO'Cfrom) -them.
xviii. 14. Che n^ootahwdd . . that he die for him, or them.
XV. 13. Che ^Shged4nahmahw6d . . that he let go, yield, it for him,
or them,
xix. 16. Ke hkihgedenahmdhwdd ,.helet go, delivered, him to him or
them.
iii. 33. Kah oot&tipendhmahw6d .... (he) who hath taken, received,
to (from) him it (his relation),
xii. 2. Ke 6ozhttdhmahwdhwod . . (and) they made it for him.
xvii. 15. Che medihgwAuahmdhw^ahdwdh. . (rudwah) that thou take t^
for them.
xix. 11. Kah bdhged^naAm(^o-Ar (sk, Cree) ewh ne-ydwh. . he who let
tf go, i.e. delivered it, to thee, my-body.
i. 23. QtCayukqaBtdhunk ^mperat.) . . strait-make ye it for him.
xiv. 3. Ahwe wahwdzhetahm6onaA^(^oib (inv.) . . (if) I go prepare
it for you.
xviii. 39. Che b&hged^naAmoona^<^o^ (id.). . that /deliver him to you.
iii. 12. Ke w^ndahm6o(ne)naA^^oAr (id.). . (if) I have named it or
them, to you.
xvi. 23. Ka \md6odc^mdhwdgwdig . . (whatsoever) ye shall demand
to (qf) him.
XX. 23. (Wdgwdin) dVoonahmdhwagwdin (dub. flat vowel.) . . (whom-
soever) ye withdraw to (from) him.
XX. 23. (Wdgwidn) m(f»nj^menaA9ii(fAu;(fyt<;(im (id.) . . (whomsoever)
ye hold t^ to him.
XV. 16. (Wdgdodoogwdin) ka \iXLd(Kidahimahmdkmd^din (dub.) . . .
(whatsoever) ye shall demand, ask, to isjf) hkn.
NEGATIVE INDICATIVE.
[xvii. 9. Kmd* dhDahmei/oAtPoigr . . I ^XK^for them^
xvii. 9. 20. Miuf ^nahmeli^aAto(iA«ee^ . . I pray notfw them.
ii. 24. Oo ge hiihgedinahmahwdhseen ewh oou^e-yowh (inan.) . . he has
not committed it to them that his'hody, or person.
120 A GRAMMAR OF
The *ccofid Dative, implying motion, signifies to, or
at, an object, and is thus formed —
W6pe-n*ayoo...fling*eth-Atm-Ae^ he flings him.
W6pe-n-Mm...fling-eth-i7-Ae, he flings it
W^pe-n->^^4yoo...fling-eth-a^-Ati?t-Atf^ be flings at him.
W6pe-n-(}<-t^m...fling-eth-a/-t^-^e^ he flings at it.
The Vicarious case, signifying in the room or
stead of another (from w^cstum, " turn*'), is thus
expressed —
It-wayoo. . . he says.
lUw&y'St'iitnofV'^i/oo (def.)...8ays*«/ea<^^^-Atin-Ae^ i.e. he
interprets it for him.
It^way-*<-ii«ikg-dyoo (indef.)...Ae interprets.
A'toosk4y-oo (neut)...Ae works^ labours.
A^toosk4y-^/on;-(fyoo...^e works |/br him.
Ktoo^ky 'St'UmoW'dyoo^.he works in the stead, of him.
ill. 32. Ool^ QQ\xiicc^\idhmahwdhsien . . he taketh it to (fromj him not.
xiz. 33. Oo ge b6okoo-g^dagahnaAm(fA«eti;o-J (it indie.) . . they have
break-leg>fo-Aim not,
y. 34. NincP donde-n-^m-dhgoose (mv.), . me-takeB-for-he-not.
xviii. 30. Ke dab g4 p&liged£nahmahg6ose (id.). . they (indeter.) would
not have delivered him to thee.
xvi. 23. Ke kab und6odaAi}u^e5e«m (dir.) . . ye shall no^ ask t^ to
CqfJme,
iii. 11. Kef ootihpenahmdhwesemin (id.). . ye take it to (receive from)
us (1.3.) not.
[zii. 42. Oo ge oonje windhsewon (accus.anim.). . they have therefore
named Aifii itof .]
xvi. 4. JTe ke wSen-dt^imdosendonim (inv. inan.) . . / have not named
(told) f ^ to you.
yiii. 50. Nin tadsikwimdahmdhdezoose (reflect.) . . I seek to or for
myself not.
iv. 21. Che tdbzbe ihn&hmei-tahwdhsewdig (subj.) . . that constant
pray-to him-not-ye.
THS CREE LANGUAGE. 121
The Instrumental case is formed from the inanimate
form of the indefinite objective, by changing the third
person -gdyoOy into -gct-gdyoo, and implies with, or of,
an instrument or material, as,
Nippk-ch-eg(fyoo ... ^e kills.
Nippll-ch-^^-g(fyoo...Ae kills with (something).
O^ose-ch-eg^y^ • • • ^^ makes.
Oos^-ch-^/^-ga^oo...Atf makes with, or of, something.
Oblique cases take also the Reflective and Reci-
procal forms.
CVose-t-£{fr-(fyoo (anim.) ...Ae makes him for him.
O'ose-Xrdm^drV'dyoo (inan.)...Ae makes it for him.
O^ose-t-wdssoo fanim.)...Ae makes him for himself.
O^ose't'dm^ssoo (inan.).. he makes it for himself.
O'ose-Urvdt'toouk (mim,)...thei/ make them for each other.
O^ose-Udm^ditoouk (iuan.)...the^ make them for each other. ^
The Intensive forms of the Oblique are formed as
those of the Direct cases — namely, by the terminations
-wdyoo and -gayoo.
O'ose-t-^ir-ayoo (axiim.)...he makes him for him.
O'ose-t-dm-dW'dyoo (inan.) ,,he makes it fo>r him.
O'ose-t-nd'gdyoo (anim.)...Ae makes ^br {others').
O^ose't'dm-dgdyoo (inan.) ...he makes for (others, some
one).^
^ RECIPROCAL.
y. 44. Ooyood&ixpenahmdkdeifdig (subj.) . . ye who take to (from) one
another.
M [ii. 14. Mahydshquahdooni^n^i^ (subj. inan. flat. vow. def.) . , . who
exchange them].
ii. 15. MahydshquahdoonaAmaA^ro/t^r (id.) . . who exchange (indef.),
for others.
122 A GRAMMAR OF
Again — ^To the Indefinite form of the Objective case
may be super-added a definite Oblique case, as above,
e.g.
O^ose-t-oip (def. obj.)...A6 makes it.
Cyose-ch^egdy-oo (indef. obj.)...Ae makes.
0'ose-ch-eg4y-t-iKm-^fr-4yoo (indef. obj.)...Ae makes^ Jor
him.
It must not be forgotten, that the Oblique cases
are, as well as the Direct (see p. 105), susceptible of
the indeterminate Nominative (Fr. on).
0'ose-t-wA-g£fyoo...Ae makes^br (others^ people).
O^09e*t-yrk-gdnefvoo (obi. case> double intensive)... jom^ one
maketjbr (others).
It-w4ystamag4yoo...Ae interprets ^/br (others^ people).
It-w4y8tamag<2iiefvoo.. some one interprets for (others).
Intransitive forms also take oblique cases, &c.
NIggamoo.. he sings.
Niggam6o-f/on^ayoo...Ae sings to him, or them.
A^chemoo .,he relates.
A'cheia6o'Stowdyoo.,.he relates to him.
Kksoo (reflect)... Ae hides himself.
Kksoo*stowdi/oo,..he hides himself to (from) him.
Ne niggSLm6o'StofV(kD...2 sing to him.
Ne mggamoo^tdk.,.he sings to me. &c.
'* Substantive-verbs" form their cases in the same
manner ; as from Assdm, a snow-shoe,
Assdm-e-k-(fyoo (see p. 19) •• •snow-shoe-makes- Atf.
Ass&m-e-k*on;-^^oo (def.)...A^^ &c. for him, e.g. a pair for
his use.
A8s4m-e-k4y-^amon;-4yoo (indef.) ...he, &c. generally, ^/br
him.
Net* aLSsAm-e-kowdrv (def. dir.) ../, kc.for him.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 123
Net* assAm-e-k^i^ (Id. inv.)...Ae, Stcfar me.
Net' aBs&m'e~\Lkk'6fvin.,Jheif (indet.) make> e.g. a pair^ &c.
for me.
Net' &s3Am'e-kky'tam'dk'drvin ,,,me snow-shoe-make-(gene-
rallyYfor-he + they (Fr. on), &c.
The Possessive or Accessory case, being very
puzzling, at least, to learners, must be given at
some length ; we have therefore assigned to it the
last place in the list of verbal oblique cases. Unlike
the other cases, this refers to third persons exclusively ^
as the '^ end," &c. Though thus limited in its appli-
cation, it is nevertheless of very extensive use. It
may be superadded to all the other cases.
The simple form of this verbal ending, viz. Indie.
-ethu, anim. and inan., (Chip, -wwn anim., -ene'h inan.)
Subj. -ethit (anim.), -eth{k (inan.) ; Chip, -enid (anim.),
-enig (inan.), signifies to him, that is, vdth respect to,
or, in relation to him, her or them ; but, in English,
the equivalent of this sign is often omitted, and vaguely
only, if at all, understood.
There does not appear to be, in English, any equivalent term for
this oblique case, at least one which is uniformly used. Its import
is variously expressed by the prepositions to, /or, tvith, &c. as> it is
lost to him, that is, as regards him — a child is bom to him — ^it is
difficult for him — ^it goes hard with him, &c which may be all
resolved into in relation to him ; but, as just remarked, this sign so
frequently occurring in the Indian, is comparatively seldom found
in the English phrase, and seldom is, grammatically, even under-
stood. With the appropriation to the " third" person before men-
tioned, it is conjugated through the different forms of the verb.
Some notion of the manner of using this case may
be conceived from the following example.
124 A GRAMMAR OF
If I wish to say simply " It rains," the Cree verb
is expressed thus, Kimmew-wn {-dk, subj.) — and this
we shall, in our examples, call the absolute form ; but,
if I mention this circumstance with reference to a
** third" person or persons, I then use the termination
above mentioned, -ethu, as, Kammewun-c^M. .*^ It
rains to him, in relation to him/' &c. — ^this we shall call
the relative form.
The " constant" sign of this case is th (Chip. n.). In some
forms^ tv or m, in both dialects.
Mispoon (indie.) ,At snows.
Mispoon-ethd (id.)... it snows-to him, as respects him.
Net' dppin h^ Mispoo^ (subj).../ stay, as it snows.
Kef 4ppin he Mispook., Miou stayest^ as it snows.
A'pptt he Mispoon-e^A/^...Ae stays, as it 8now8'to him,*''
«T vi. 22. Ahp^ . . gab wdhbdn^ (absoL). . the time . . when it dawned,
zxi. 4. Kab b^-wdbbabn-6n»^ (relat.). . that it bitber-dawned to him,
ix. 4. Mdgwab . . k^zbeguA (subj.) . . whilst it is day.
xi. 9. K^zhegkhd-enfy . . (whilst) it is day to him,
iz. 4. "P^t^bekud (indie). . hitber-nigbt-»f is, night is coming.
iii. 2. vii. 50. xx. 1. T^ekfibd-eni)/ (subj.). . when, as, it was night.
viii. 14. TdpwamabgiM^ (indie.) . . it is true,
xix. 35. Tapwdmabg4bd-en^ ,.it is true.
iv. 37. Tdpwimabgu* (subj.) . . that it is true.
V. 32. Tapwdmahgud-en^. . that it is true.
xii. 50. Pem&bdez^mabgabd-entjyf (id.) . . that it is life,
iv. 14. Che ezbe m6ok^jew^n-eni^ . . that so it spring.
The h used by Mr. Jones, to indicate the Italian sound of the vowel a,
is, when accompanying a short, very inconvenient ; often vitiating the
grammatical division of the syllables^ as above. So also we have -ahgig
for 'Ug-ig, the plural of -ug, I-to him ; -ahdwah for -ud-toah, the plural
of -ttrf, thou-to him, &c. Also, -ahjin for -ud-jin, &c.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 125
It may be observed of the cases before men-
tioned, that they express the relation between the
subject and the object, &c. ; but the case now before
us shews also the relation between subjects, &c.
themselves. When two *' third" persons (both of
them agents, or both of them patients) meet together,
this relational form serves to distinguish the accessory
or dependent, from the principal or leading '* third"
person — the relative from the absolute agent, &c. —
thus obviating, by shewing their relative position, the
ambiguity which would otherwise arise from the meet-
ing of several third persons in the sentence. For a full
explanation of the use of this case, see the Syntax.^
M The grammatical import of the following examples will be best
understood, by comparing them with the context of the English Original.
The " absolute" form involves only one, the " relative," two agents, &c.
viz. a Principal, and an Accessory, — See Syntax,
xi. 6. Ahp^ kah n6ond«n^ ihkoozenid.
The time . . that he (Jesus) heard . . that he (access, viz. Laza-
rus) was sick to, in re-
spect of, him, Jesus.
V. 9- Ke "pimoosaid , , (and) he (absoL) walked.
vi. 19. Oo ge wihbsihmahwdn. . Jesus (relat.) ^moosdnid.
They have seen him .... Jesus as he (Jesus) walked.
INDICATIVE ANIMATE.
vi. 9. Ahy&h . . (here) he is. (Absolute, and so of the rest.)
ii. 1. Oo-geen emdh ke ahydh-t&tm . . His mother . . there he (she)
was. (Relative, and so of the rest.)
Note. — ^The Possessive pronoun of the third person, oo or oof (his, her,
or their,), governs this case — the object possessKD being the Accessory,
y. 13. Em&h ke ahyih-wug . . there they were.
XX. 26. P^ndig ke ahydhunm . . within they were.
vii. 37. Ke n^ihweh . . he stood.
XIX. 25. Ke nebdhwe-wwn . .he or they stood.
126 A GRAMMAR OF
Without this compensating form^ the Indian phrase would
be especially liable to ambiguity of expression^ from> among
other causes^ the {personaUi/) compounded form of the transitive
iy. 45. Ke ezh&h-tru^ . . they have gone.
iy. 8. Ke ezh^-tovn . . they have gone.
vi. 14. Ke eked6o-i(m^ . . they said,
xi. 12. Ke eked6o-4fmn . \ they said.
xi. 3. A^hkoozc ,.heis sick.
xi. 2. Ay&hkooz-en^-bun . . he was sick.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
The present Subjunctive is often determined in its meaning as present,
past, or future, by ^t principal verb of the sentence. We may also repeat
here, that the Ck)mpound of the present Indicative is often used for the
preterite tense.
iv. 25. Ke t&hgweshin-^ . . (when^ that he arrive.
iv. 47. Ke d4hgwesh^n-€i»iii . . that he had arrived.
V. 5. Aylihkooz^ . . (that) he was sick,
iv. 46. Ay4hkooz-entd . . he was sick.
V. 20. A^zhechegdid (flat vowel) . . '* which himself doeth.*'
XV. 15. il'zhecheg-efnirf (id.) . . (what) he doeth.
xi. 1. A^zhenekdhzoo-d . . who is (was) named.
X. 3. A^zh^nekahz6o-nul . . as they are named.
xi. 25. Ke neboo-d . . (though) he be dead.
xi. 13. xix. 33. Ke uSbdo^id . . (who) he is (was) dead.
viii. 59. Ke zdhgah-un^ . . (and) he went out.
xi. 31. Ke zihgahihm-enid . . she went out.
xi. 41. Shingeshin-^ (anim.) . . as Ae lay.
V. 6. Sbingeshin-enid . . as he lay.
vii. 11. Ke eked6o-wod . . (and) they said.
iv. 31. 51. Oowh ke eked6o-n»cI . . these (things) they said.
V. 29. Che ezhih'Wod . . that they pass, go.
vi. 15. We hh^zhSh-nid . . (that) they want hither-pass, come.
vi. 17. Ke h6o8e-wug ftndic). . they embarked.
vi. 22. Ke b6os-^u; . . (where) they embarked.
xix. 25. Ke nibihwe-wwi (indie, relat.). . they stood,
xix. 26. N^dhwe-nW (subj.) . . who (plur.) stood.
THE CBBB LANGUAGE. 127
verb|-^-a8, whom I see him ; which I see it ; 6ec. (see Syntax) — ^and
the want of separate distinctive forms of the personal pronoun^ as^
zviii. 14. Che n^boo-/a^io<^c? (dat. absol.) . . that he die/or them,
xi. 51. Che Ti^oQ-tahwdhnid (dat. relat.) . . that he die /or them.
vi. 19. B^nfth zpkfthmfw^ (relat.) . . as A« approached it.
▼n. 10. Kah mdhjdhnii . . (when) they were gone,
vi. 22. Mahjeoon^M/ . . (that) they had departed (by water),
vi. 66. Ke ahzhe giw^id . . had already back-gone-^^.
vii. 32. £zhe-m^Umt(2 . . that they bo said of him.
In certain cases, -ethit (subj.). Chip, -enid, is softened into Jth%{t)che,
Chip. -.^Mjin. See Syntax,
ii. 14. A'dahwd-ji^r . . wAo (plu.) exchanged,
ii. 16. A^dahwd-n6^ . . who exchanged.
xir. 5. 8. Kademdhgez-e/i^ . . who are poor, miserable, " the poor."
xiii. 29. xii. 6. Kddemdhgez-^n^/in . . who are poor, &c.
vii. 41. Pakahnez-e;t^ . . who are separate, " others."
xxi. 2. Pdkdhnez-^ne;m . . who are, &c.
ix. 8. Kah kibeengw-did . . (he) who was blind,
ix. 6. Kak^eengw-<k£;tn . . who was blind.
V. iii. Kak^eengW'djig . . who are blind.
X. 21. xi. 37. Kak^eengw-(fn«;»n . . who are bUnd.
xvii. 14. A^kew'^nejin , . who earth, are of the earth.
x. 5. May&hgez^ne/m . . w?io are strange (to them, the sheep).
vi. 11. Kah nahmahd-ahb-^6;»n . . who erect-sat.
V. 21. Nap6o)ic;m (flat, vowel) . . who are dead, *' the dead."
vii. 39. Ka ootdhpen4hne/i». . which they should receive.
X. 3. Kdnahw^ndahm^n^m. . who takes care of, keeps; qu. a keeper.
INDICATIVE INANIMATE.
xvii. 1. Bahg^ihme-a%(fA. . it is near,
xvi. 21. Pahglihme-ahy<^A-neA . . idw
ii. 17. Oo ge miqaimdahnahwah , . they remembered it,
ii. 22. Oo ge m^qudind^iAm-en^ . . they remembered it.
vii. 26. Oo ^ekiindahnahwah . . they know it.
X. 4. Oo gekJ^nddhm-enih . . they know it.
xi. 38. Weemhdhnekihdi-n^'bun (part, pass.) . . t* was hollowed, ex-
cavated.
128 A GRAMMAIU OF
he, him, himself, she, her, &c; the third person^ WAha (Chip.
fVeen), being, when expressed^ the representative of them all.
^ote, — ^EoEDE notices a corresponding modification of the verb, in his
QrammaHca Gronlandica. See Additional Notes.
vii. 38. Tah 6onj^jewun-^««w« (plur.). . they shall from-flow.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
vi. 12. A^i-dkin (flat vowel). . which are laid up, which remain.
XX. 5. Ke hhy-^Udniff (jintens,), . as they were lying.
i. 46. ii. 10. W&nesheshin-^ (inan.) . . which is good,
ii. 10. Wdneshesh^n-en/^ . . which is good.
i. 27. Dkhkoobed&-ftt^ (accid. pass.) . . which are tied.
iii. 20. 21. Che w&hbimjigdhd^bt»^ (part. pass.). . that tJtey be shewed.
xii. 6. Kah b^nah^gsLhd^t^ (id.) . . which, it, was entered, put in.
V. 36. Andind&hgwShdtfft^ ,»zsit is thought, deemed.
xiii. i. Ke b^g&hmeahy^hn^ . . that it was near.
xii. 38. Che d^eshkoos^i^r . . that it be fulfilled.
i. 51. Ahj6d (anim.) . . (where) he is.
iii. 22. £m^ dLtiydhnidke dhydd. . where they (relat.) were he (absol.)
was.
iv. 42. AOik^e-ng ay^-n^^n . . the earth-in who are.
iv. 5. Ahy6g (inan.) . . (where) it is (the ground),
iv. 6. Ke ahydhnitjf (id.). . it was, existed (Jacob's well).
vii. 13. K6o8Bhwdd . . as they feared them.
ix. 22. K6o84hni€? . . id.
iv. 47. Che ahwe . . noojemoo^hnidoo-gw^sttn. . (possess, anim*) that
he go save {to him) his-aon,
i. 27. Che ^heihahmdhwug (id. inan.) . . that J unloose it or them to
him.
NEGATIVE.
xviii. 38. Ne mikahmahwdhse . . I find not to (in) him.
xix. 6. Ne raikahmt^wdhseien) . . I find not to (in) Mm.
xix. 4. IJiikahmahwdfisewug (subj.) . . that I find not to (in) him.
XX. 25. W^hunddhmahwdhsewug emah oo-ninjee-n^ . . If / see not to
him there^his hand-tn.
THB CREB LANGUAGE. 1^9
The way in which the grammatical difficulty just mentioned is
met in European languages is^ perhaps, not undeserving of notice :
e.g. by a Participle, as,
St John i. 36. And (John) looktii^ upon Jesus as he (Jesus) walked.
£t respiciai^ (Joannes) Jeswni ambulantem.
£t (Jean) YOjant Jesus qui (Antecedent, Jesus) marchoit.
Kahnahw4hbahmo(^(subj.). . Jesus. . p^moosanidCsubj.)
As he (John) looked at him. . Jesus. . as ^(ilcce^^ory, viz. Jesus)
walked.
The Infinitive mood serves the same purpose,
iv. 8. His disciples were gone away. . to buy, &c.
Oo minzhenahwiuntm. . ke ezhlUi-umn (Indie.) g^hpenaht6o-
nid, (subj.)
His disciples (access.). . had gone (relat. to him) that they
buy Qd. to him), &c.
But the Cree and Chlppeway have no Impersonal verbal forms :
they have neither Participle (active, or passive), nor, as already
observed. Infinitive mood. These are all resolved into a personal
(the subjunctive) mood, as above. Vide infra.
But not all relations between the Verb and its Re-
gimen are expressible by Cases. -Prepositions are
sometimes employed, being prefixed to the verb, and
governing the verbal termination in the Accusative or
Dative forms already mentioned. Neuter verbs fol-
lowed, in English, by a preposition and a personal
pronoun, become, by the process alluded to. Transi-
tive verbs, e.g.
A^p-ti (neut.) ...he sits.
Ne w^'ip^-mdw (dir.accus.).../ with-sit-Atm, I sit with him.
Ne w6et-&p3-mi% (in v. id.)... me with-sits-Ae, he co-sits, sits
with, me. (See p. 51, et seq.)
Ne wkakah'kp^'StdkwUk (inv. da,t)...me round-sit-(to)-^Aey,
they sit round me.
F6mooUdyoo (neut). ..he walks.
iVe t^che-p^moot-^ibvtfi^ (inv. accus.)...me upon-walk-<Afy,
they walk upon me.
K
130 A GRAMMAR OF
P^oot^oo (neut) ,.he walks
P&p^mootoyoo (id.)...Ae walks> with repetition.
P^pkmoot^yoo (id.)...Ae walks about Fr. il se promene.
Ne w6etche-p&pkmootay-m<^ (dir. accas.).../ with«walk
about him, I walk about with him.
Ne w&skdh-sk^^fpf<^ (inv. accus.) ... wie round-walk-^^^
they walk rounds circum-walk, me.
Ne yfi^^-^dX'dkrvuk (id.) ... me round-run-/^, they cir-
cum-run, run round, me.
Ne w dskah-pt'ithe-^/^ A:n;u^ (inv. dat)...me round-move (to)
they, they move round (/o) me.
Paragraph VII.
Of Gender.
We come now to the last grammatical modification
of the verb, that is, to those conjugational forms
which, according to the rules, or rather to the practice
of this language, are considered to be in '* agreement'*
with the animate and inanimate genders or classes of
the noun, &c. See the Accidence.
Note. — It has seemed more convenient to arrange the ^^ genders"
in this order, viz. animate and inanimate; we are nevertheless
aware> that the latter, as the generic universal subject should have
stood first The same relation subsists between the third, and the
first and second persons of the verb ; the first of these being, in
Cree, the root of the others, is also entitled to precedency, and
ought to have held the first place.
1. Those verbs which are by grammarians com-
monly denominated Impersonal, are of the *^ inanimate'*
gender, and have the third person only, as,
P§poo-n (subj. ''k)...%t is winter.
S^kwu-n (subj. -^)...t^ w spring.
Th6oti-» (subj. 'k).,.it (the wind) blow«.
THB CREK LANGUAGE. 131
Some Impersonal verbs have indeed two modes of
conjugational ending — the one temporary or definite^
the other contwiwus^ — orindefinitevnih respect to time.
Kisaen-dtv =id + oo (defin.)...t^ is cold, i.e. at present
(subj. -^^).
Kksen^dmagtin, (contin.)...t^t^ cold (Anglice) weather.
2. Intransitive personal verbs have generally, and
are always smceptiUe of, both the animate and the
inanimate forms (see p. 27) ; and in the temporary and
continuous (quasi, Anglic^ -ous, 4ng, &c.) modes also.
The latter, or inanimate form, has the third person
only.
Udw = a + 00 (defin. anim.)...Ae t^ being, or existent
I-dw ^ & 4- 00 (id. inan.) ,At is (id.).
l-amagun (contin* inan.) ,.Mis (id«). Indefinite with respect
to Time.
Mithkoo-^tt (def. temporary) ,,ke is blood-like^ red.
Mithkw-(^ = a + oo (id.)...i^ is red.
M.itbkwk-fnagun (contin. inherent), „it is (Anglic^) a red
thing.
Ach6-oo (contin.).. .Ae (anim.) is, is capable of> moving.
Ach^mag^i»(id.)...t^ (inan.) is moving, is ( Anglic^) a mov«
inir thinir.
A^che-piithu-wA: (de£.),.,they (anim.) move suddenly (see
pp. 32, 80.)
A^che-piithu-^A (id.) .Jh^ (inan.) id.
3. The Transitive verb has, actively and passively,
three conjujgational modes, corresponding, in respect
of gender, with the same number of combinations of
the subject with its object, e.g. (vide supra.)
1. Subject Animate, Object Animate.
Mithkoo-A-oyoo (dir.)...A« redd-ens him,
Mithkoo«A-{^ (my.),,. he is redd-ened by him.
k2
132 A GRAMMAR OF
2. Subject Animate^ Object Inanimate.
Mithkoo-f-oit^ = a + 00 (dir.)...^e redd'Cns it.
Mlthkoo-A-i^bo (inv.) ,.,heis redd^ened by it.
3. Subject Inanimate^ Object Inanimate.
Mithkoo-/a-fitagim (dir.)...t^redd-en« it.
Mithkoo-At^-^^omagtm (mv.)...t^ is Tedd'Cned hy it.
The last of these has the third person only.
Section IV.
Of Absolute^ and Relative^ Verbs.
Verbs are here considered as Absolute^ or Relative,
with reference to their Attribute only.
Verbs which have a specific attribute of Being, Qua-
lity, &c. (Seep. 142 etseq.) we class as Absolute verbs.
On the other hand, those verbs which have as o, generic
attribute, the relative Adverb of '' manner," viz. Isse-
** so'^from the generic nounls^c, *' manner" or *'wise"),
Chip, ^zhe ; or that of ''place," viz. It-, ''there,"
"thither," (from the generic noun Ft-e, "place",)
Chip, ^ende, we class as Relative Verbs.
JVb/e.<— -The Attributes here mentioned correspond sometimes
with the French relative particles le, and y, as.
Net' isse^issin...! so-aia, I am so. Fr. Je le suis. I am it.
Net' it'in,..I there-am, I am there, or here. Fr. J'y suis.
&c.
The particles Ft and Fsse are also Prefixes to verbs, as from
pem-ootay 00... ^e walks. CPem-, qu. Fr. jjar-.)
Net* ff-ootan.../ thither-go. Fr. J'y vais. &c.
THE CREB LANGUAGE.
133
These Adverbial attributive particles may be used
generally with the Affixes of the General (see p. 38 c<
seq.) and Special (see p. 86) transitives ; which affixes,
as before observed, cannot stand without an Attribute
or root joined to them. Ex.
(see pp. 86. 96.)
he so does him or it,
he so does^ causes to^ himself,
he so does him or it (with the hand).
he so pulls him or it,
he so forces or (priv.) mis-does him
or it.
he so forcibly does him or it.
he so sees him or it.
he so hears him or it,
he so smells him or it.
he THiTHER-does him or it. (with the
hand.)
he THiTHER-puUs him or it.
ANIM.
INAN.
Tsse-hoyoo
-tow
-hissoo
"Udyoo
-num
"pittdyoo
-pittMWi
"^dtvdyoo
-skfim
"Yfdyoo
-hdm
&c.
Vs^e-XiGwdyoc^
-num
-towdi/00'^^
-turn
-mitdi/oo
-m&tum
Ite-udyoo
-num
-pitt^yoo
-pittww
&c. .
^ V. 19. Ay^zhe'iishwdd (anim. flat vowel) a« he saw him.
vii. 24. A^zhe-nahmdig (inan. id.) .,as ye see i/.
viii. 38. Kah izhe-Tahwdig ranim.). . which as ye see him.
''o viii. 26. 40. XV. 15. Kah ^-tahwte^ . . which as I hear him.
V. 30. A^ne-tBhrndn (flat vow.). . as Jhear»V.
The reader will, by noticing the " conversions'* of the Ungual conso-
nants here exemphfied, viz. dzhe = dne, izhe = 4ne (see p. 17), be some-
what prepared for our future observations on this head. iSee also,
iii. 4. 9* V. 44. 47. vi. 52. Ahn* eeN (i.e. ahh' ezH)?. . what " man-
ner," "how?'*
iVb/c— The Chippeway zh has the sound of s in " measure," " plea-
sure."
134 A GRAMMAR OF
These generic attributes are espeeially used (in the subjunctive)
in Questions of "manner," " place," &c Tdn' isse ?...What manner?
How f Tdn' U-e f ..what place ? Where ? WhUhet* 9
Tkn' ISSE ^issE-pitt^^ ? (generic)... what manner so-pulleth
"he-him ?
Ne^ch E-pitt(£^oo (specific) . . . DowN«pulleth«Ae-AtM.
T4n' isse i^ssE-mat^Ar f (gener.)...how so-smelleth-Ae-t^ ?
ME^THo-mdttffTf (specif.)... AewELL-smells it, likes the smell
of it
Tin' iT-E I'x-ootait? (gener.)...what place To-goeth-Aef
M^gew&p-ee^ I'x-ootayoo (specif.)..the TenUat TO-goeth-Ae.
Chapter II.
Of Simple and Compound Verbs.
Of the Simple Verb. — In noticing the Simple
Verb, as respects its component parts, we have pointed
out (p. 16 et seq.) the various Origin of the Root. This
will be a fit opportunity to complete the description
of this member of the verb ; which shall now be
considered in its other character, namely, that of AU
tribute, or with a reference to its Signification ; and we
propose to contemplate it as resting (simple, or modi-
fied,) on four principal points, namely, 1, Existence ;
2, Relation ; 3, Privation ; and 4, Intensity : —
which last comprises the other three.
To these fundamental Principles (which will in due course be
defined) may, indeed^ be proximately or remotely referred the
whole Gree language, as we shall endeavour to shew in the sequel ;
but our immediate concern is with the Attribute of the Verb.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 135
Section I.
Firstly, of Existence. This subject presents itself
under a two-fold aspect, viz. Existence, and Privation
of Existence— or Being in its Positive and Negative
modes. These opposite modes are indeed expressed,
substantially, by modifications of the same Element
(vide infra Privation) ; but, furnishing two classes of
terms difiering widely from each other in signification,
they will, for the sake of clearness, be noticed, gene-
rally, apart.
With reference then to Existence, in its positive
mode, we proceed now to bring into view the Simple
Verbs expressive of the primary generic *^ Attributes'*
following, namely, those of 1, Being ; 2, Manner; 3,
Rest ; 4, Motion ; 5, Action. These Verbs, although
few in number, are of very extensive use ; and, as
entering into and constituting, under difierent modifi-
cations, integral parts of other verbs, they may be
considered as Elementary. Some of them will be
noticed in both their positive and privative (see Priva-
tion) significations. And first of the Verb- Substantive.
We would remark, by way of preliminary to what follows, that
there are, in the Cree language,ybMr primary generic nomis, namely,
1. F-d (anim.), F-e (inan.), "person," "thing," &c. ; 2. Fss-e or
Fs-e, "manner," " wise," &c. ; 3. Ft-e, " place;" and 4. E'Ar-e,
'^matter," "subject." Of which it may be further remarked,
Uiat their roots, represented by /-, /*-, /<-, Eh- (pron. Eek-),
respectively, are modifications (vide infra) of the still higher — ^the
UNIVERSAL Substantive Element, or Root, Eth — the remote point
— ^the substratum (however obscured by its modes) on which the
whole Edifice of the Cree — the Algonquin language rests.
This ultimate Element has, in its simple form, a Substantive
136
A GRAMMAR OF
meaning — ^but it cannot stand alone ; — ^like the indefinite Subject
of which it is the representative^ it is ever in a modified form^ e.g.
as we have it in the personal pronouns^ I, thou^ he, JV-e^th-&,
K'E^TH'&, W'm^TH'&, qu. my, thy, his, Being or Essence ; the
lingual. It, the guttural, k, and the labial, oo, being the distinctive
personal signs of the same. (Quasi, Anglice, tru-TH, wid«TH,
mon^TH = moon-ETH, &c.). It is "energetic" in the verb
^Th-ethe^-oo (repetit. see p. 73)...BR-EATHes-A^, Sec.
Paragraph I.
Being, I-dw (=d+oo) " he is." We have, m
the last Chapter, classed verbs as Absolute, and Rela-
tive. The Verb Substantive, in its Absolute form,
hdw.Chip. ahy-rfA, (anim. and inan.) "Ac, or if, is being,
or existent,'' Anglic^, " he, or it, is'' — ^may, like the
noun first above mentioned, viz. Id, be viewed as a
Derivative (Seep. 141.) from the ultimate Element
Eth. We consider it as being the Nucleus of the whole
Indian verb. It forms its three persons (sing.) as
follows,
Anim.
Inan.
id. (contin.)
Anim.
Inan.
id. (contin.)
CRliE.
-4n -4n
INDICATIVE.
-6w
-4magun
SUBJUNCTIVE.
CHIPPEJVAY.
-dh -dh -ah
-dmagud
Ian
-lun
-dmagak
-dhy6n . -4hyun -6d
.<5g.
-^magdk '^^
■^1 INDICATIVE.
vi. 9. viii. 35. 50. Ahj-dh ,.he%8 being or existent, Angl. he is.
i. 1. 6. iv. 40. vii. 9. Ke ahy-ef^ . . he has been,
xii. 26. Tab ^ky-dh . . he shall or will be.
ii. 1. XX. 26. xxi. 25. xii. 48. xiv. 2. Ke ahyih-ioun (possess, case). .
he or they was or were.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 137
Note. — ^It would seem strange that the writers on the Algonquin lan-
guage, viz. Eliot, Edwards, &c. all deny the existence of the Verb
Substantive in the dialects on which they have severally written. This
mistake has clearly arisen — ^partly from the idiomatic omission of the verb
substantive in a certain kind of Expressions (see Syntax); — and partly from
an entire misconception of the Subject, as is evidenced by the tenor of
their Examples, which go to prove only that these dialects have no
AUXILIARY Verb Substantive. See Additional Notes,
lU6w {=d + oo) " he is there/' Fr. il y est. The Re-
lative form of the Verb Substantive has for its Attribute
vi. 64. Ket ahy-dm . . ye are.
V. 13. xvii. 11. xii. 20. xxi. 2. Ke ahjiUk-vrng . . tJiey were
V. 2. xii. 24. 28. 30. Ahj&ii-mahgud (inan. indie.) . . it is.
XV. 7' XV. 11. 16. Ahykh-mahg^k (id. subj.) . . if »* be, that it be, re-
main.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
i. 15. 30. vii. 34. 36. ix. 5. xii. 26. 32. xv. 6. A^hydh-ydn . . that, &c.
Jam.
i. 48. Ke dhydh-yun . . (when) thou wast.
i. 51. vii. 11.29. viii. 19. ix. 12. x.40. Ahj-dd. (that, &c.) he is.
i. 18. 33. iii. 22. xii. 37. Ahydhnid (acces. case.). • that, &c. ^is (with
relation to another),
viii.* 31. xiv. 2. 3. A'hjdhydig . . if, &c. yc be.
i. 29. vi. 51. vii. 4. A'ydhjig . . who {they) are.
iii. 8. iv. 22. iv. 40. xii. 20. xxi. 23. AzYi^^ydh-wod. . as, so, are they.
XV. 4. A''hy4hyooA: (imperat.) . . be ye . . .'
i. 15. Ch^wah. . . . ^ydhydn (subj. pres.), ahy(IA-bun (indie, pret.)
. . Before .... J am, he was. " He was before me.*'
INANIMATE.
iv. 5. ix. 41. xi. 55. xii. 1. xiii. 1. xvii. 5. A'hyd^r .. (which) t* is.
ii. 25. iii. 36. Akydhnig (access, case) . . which {it) was.
iv. 6. xix. 42. Emah ke dSajdhnig . . (possess, case) . . his. . (or their)
was there,
iii. 36. Ka dhydh-nig (possess, case) . . his, . shall be.
NEGATIVE.
viii. 35. Ahy dh-s4 dndic). . he is not, abideth not.
vi. 24. XV. 6. Ahy&h-«9r (subj. anim.) . . that he was w>t, if Ae be not.
vi. 22. viii. 37. xv. 4. Ke ahydh-5enoo^ (subj. inan.) . . that if was not.
Anim. -i4n -Idn -4t
Inan. -akw(ik
138 A GRAMMAR OF
the relative prefix of **place," It- (see p. 132), as
lU6w (aaim.), rt-akwwn (inan.), '' he or it is there ;'*
and is often used, as in the English colloquial phrase-
ology, to signify indifferently '' being at," '' staying
at," *' residing at." Strictly, it imports only (in the
animate form) a temporary abiding at, &c.
INDICATIVE.
CREE. CHIPPEWAY.
Anim. -4n -dn -6w i -^ -4h -ah
Inan. -akwun | -ahgoo
SUBJUNCTIVK.
-4hy<Sn -dhyun -6d
-ahg6og''*
This form is also used without a particular reference
to " place." Its animate and inanimate forms are
then equivalent, respectively, to the EngUsh Indefinite
Verb Substantive form, '* There is" a, person or thing.
(Fr. il y a,)
The Chippeway corresponding terms are (Jones's Orthog.)
Indie. Eend'dh (or d-dk), and E'end'^hg6o (or d'dhg66). Subj.
E^end-orf,and, E^'end-ahgoo-g (or d-dd, and d-ahg6o-g).'^*
Note, — This Relative verb is further deserving of notice, as exem-
plifying the manner in which the generic Attribute of Bbino, I-, or
Ei-y is commuted for (or according to our own views, vide infra, modified
'^^ ANIMATE.
i. 38. Ahn' eende kmdidhyun (subj. flat vow.). . where art thm at,
dwellest-f^ot^.
i. 39. xviii. 28. xix. 27. Emdh iXndidd (id.). . where he was abiding,
xvi. 32. Emah HxidLdhyaig (id.). . where ye abide, dwell,
vii. 53. kfyindidhwdd (id.) . . where they dwell.
INANIMATE.
xviii. 1. Emah ke Xkhgdo (indie.) . . there {it) was,
vi. 27. Ka tahg(% emah (subj.) . . which {it) shall be there,
ii. 1. ii. 11. iv. 46. A'indahg% (subj. flat vow.). . which {if) is (m.
GaHlee).
THE CRBB LANGUAGE.
139
into) a speeyks Attribute— where, of die primitive verb, the accented 4(^^00
gign of 3d pers.)> or distinctive predicative ngn, (retained through all the
inflections) is alone preserved. This mode of the verb substantive, affecting
a very numerous class of verbal terms (vide infra), exhibits a partial view
of our reasons for considering the verb substantive to be the Nuckut of
the Indian verb.
The Possessive verb we shall consider as two-fold,
viz. to *^ have/' and to " own." The former of these,
impl3dng a temporary possession, is also expressed by a
modification of the Verb Substantive. It is Transitive
both in form and signification, as,
V'OYfdyoo (anim.).. he has him. (Chip. Ood' Uiy-ahwdn.)
\''6w (inan.)...Ac has tV. (Id. Ood* ahy-c^n.)
CREE.
Anim. -ow6w -ow6w -owayool
Inan. -kn -4n -6w I
INDICATIVE.
CBIPPEWAY.
-ahw4h -ahwdh -ahw6n
.6n
-6n
-6n
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Anim. -6wuk -6wut -ow4t | -4hwug
Inan. -Ian -Tun -ak | -4hy6n
Net* I'ow-dfv (indie.) . . / have him.
Ktitche l'6yfuk (subj.)...that / have him
final cause. Fr. que), ra
-dhwud -ahw6d
-^yun -6ng
{Ktitche, conj.
■J^S POSSESSIVE — ANIMATE.
vii. 20. Kef dhyahwrfA . . thou hast Urn.
X. 20. xix. 1. 16. Oo^ lihyahwe^ . . he has him.
X. 16. Mn(f 6hyahwd^ (anim. plu.) — ^Ihave them,
xii. 8. Ked? dhyahwrf^ww^r . . ye have them.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
iv. 18. viii. 48. 52. A'yIihwtMi . . (whom) thou hast him.
iii. 29. Afj^w6d . . he who has him.
vi. 11. Wah 4hy6hwa^w(^ci . . (as much) as they wanted to have them.
xviii. 31. xix. 6. xx. 22. A^hydhwiA: (imperat.). . have ye him !
140 A GRAMMAR OF
Note, — Some of the forms of the Verb Substantive, an<J of the Posses-
sive Verb, resemble each other so nearly, that it may appear to be a
matter of difficulty to assign to them their right meaning in Speech : e.f^
The verb substantive Nef I-an, " I am*' — ^the possessive (inan.) verb
Nef I-an, ** I have it," and also the relative possessive pronoun Nef Ian,
C* my thing") " mine," all consist, in writing, of even the same letters ;
these terms are nevertheless, in practice, as free from ambiguity as are
the English pronoun "mine," and the substantive "mine," or other
Homonymes. Cadence, Emphasis, Accent, the qualifying terms used in
discourse, &c., all contribute, as relative parts of an integral sentence, to
affix the right meaning, to the perfect exclusion of the wrong meaning
from the mind. See notes 7 1 and 73.
The latter or ** continuous" mode of Possession,
namely, to '* own," is expressed by prefixing to the
noun possessed, (which takes also a verbal ending,) the
INANIMATE.
V. 36. iv. 32. X. 18. Miwf ahyow. . I have it,
viii. 26. xvi. 12. Nind' ihyahnun (plu.) . . I have them.
vi. 68. Kef ahy^hnitn (plu.) . . thou hast them.
V. 24. vi.47. 64. iii. 36. viii. 12. xvi. 21. Oof ihjon. . he has it.
V. 39. Nind^ khydihndn . . (1.3.) we have it.
xvi. 22. 24. 33. xxi. 5. Ked' ahj&linahwdh , . ye have it.
xii. 13. xix. 23. Oo ge ahyihnahwdn , , they have had (taken) them.
xii. 6. xiii. 29. xviii. 10. xix. 30. 38. Ke Bhydng (subj.) . . that he
had it.
xiv. 21. A^jdng (id. flat, vow.) . . (that) he have it.
xvi. 16. A^ydnkin (id. plu.) . (that) he hath them.
xii. 35. 36. xvi. 33. xx. 31. A'hyahwM% . . (that) ye have it.
vi. 7. 40. xviii. 3. x. 10. xix. 40. Che dhyahmoow<^c?. . that ^% have «V.
NEGATIVE.
viii. 49. Nind' ahyahwHh^^ — ^Jhave him not.
ix. 41. Ke tah ge ahyonzenahwdh . . ye could not have had it.
XV. 22. 24. Oo dah ge ahy6uzenahwdh. . they could not have had it.
xii. 8. Ked* dihyihwes^em . . ye have not me.
XV. 5. Ahyihwesewdig (subj.). . if ye have not me.
i. 47. iv. 44. Ayihnzig (id.) . . (that) he has it not.
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 141
particle (preposition) oo- {oot- before a vowelj. See
p. 21. This particle signifies, as a preposition, *' of,"
or, " from."
M<5okoom&n ... a knife.
Net' oo-m6okoon]4n-in.../ own, possess, a knife.
Ustfs...a glove.
Net* 6ot-ustis-m.../ have (own, &c.) gloves.
Muskesin...a shoe.
Xe/' oo-mdskesin-m nah? (nah? interrog. part.;... hast
thou (Anglice, any) shoes ?
Oo^-iA^-n-tf... quasi, on^n-THiNO-eth-Ae, he owns it.
O'wenah wet-iA-n-tY oomah ? . . . who o wn-T h iNO-eth-Ae f or
who own-iT-eth-he ? who owns it? (N.B. fvi=oo
flat. See p. 75. n. 42.) See Syntax,
The above two forms of the Possessive Verb may also, in another
point of view, that is, with reference to the Object, be considered
as definite and indefinite — the former being used in connection with
a definite, the latter with an indefinite object.
Reserving for another place a more detailed view of the " con-
versions" of the consonants in these dialects, we shall remark here
that the letter /-, mentioned above as the root of the generic noun
P'd, &c. is a perfect diphthong, deriving its two-fold sound from
the union of the initial vowel of Eth (somewhat flattened) with the
th softened into i short, or p = Ei or Ep, or Ai — a more accurate
representation perhaps of this diphthongal Root : quasi, Lat. iBther,
Aer (qu. flat. vow. p. 73). The Chippeways give the initial vowel
a still graver sound, viz. that of the Italian a, thus, ae, as, {ahy*
Jones. See p. 136. n. 71.)
It will be proper to add, by way of illustrating the aptitude oi the vocal
organs to the conversion alluded to (^mong others), that in the cases
where the Crees in the vicinity of the Coast, lat. 57> pronounce the th,
the contiguous inland) tribes of this nation always use I or y ; or
at most, the th is so soffly uttered that a nice ear only can detect it.
More westerly, it is decidedly lost in the t or y as above : thus the pers.
pron. N^tha, K^tha, W^tha, are pronounced N^ya, K^ya, W^ya. ThlOjie-
142
A GRAMMAR OF
or Thlige- becomes Yi^ (g bard) tbe root of the verb> he ** pmsbes" or
*' drives'* (Germ. Yagt. , drives), &c. The reasons for considering tbe
th as the Primitive will be given hereafter.
Paragraph II.
MANNer of Being, as Quality, &c. The attributes
of Quality, &c. we shall consider as generic and specific ;
of the latter we shall subjoin a few examples. The
former, or generic Attribute, brings again before us
the second generic noun mentioned above, viz. Fsse,
is-e, or isi (Chip, ^zhe, Jones), which constitutes, from
the various functions it performs in these dialects, an
important element of speech. It is, as already stated,
1, a noun; 2, an Adverb of manner; Anglic^, (w, so,
(Fr. aus'Si, si) ; and as such it becomes, 3, a generic
attribute of " manner." (See pp. 133 and 134.)
Note. — ^Tbis Element is also the nUddk member of the Adjective Verb,
connecting the Attribute of " quality*' (which it also indicates,) with its
subject, as, -iss-tf (= isse + oo). This same element, viz. isse, is, is also,
in Cree, the general verbal and substantive Dimin. sign, Anglic^ -ish,
(See Privation.) It famishes also the adverbial terminational sign of
*' manner,'' (jt)ch.
It seems likewise worthy of remark that issb or M (or is he near the
Coast, — see Judges, chap. xii. ver. 6.) Chip, bzhe, is also analogous to
(and, quasi, the Root of) some European signs of '* manner" of Being ;
e.g. the English formative elements, -ish, .ict, -^gi-, 4t%-, kc, (Vide
infra.)
Of the following Verbs, the Adjective and the Ac-
cidental may, among others, be considered as Specific.
(See p. 132.)
ADJECTIVE VERBS.
MBKTAL.
E^thin^em ...he is wise.
K}Siki6wisiu,..he is artful^ cunning.
THB CREB LAITGUAGB. 143
KSk^pAtissu,..he is stupid> focdish.
Kiskissu ...he remembers.
Wimne-kisktffM ...he forgets.
p[t-6the-/-fim (gener.).. so thinks-A^^ he thinks.
Kisk-6the^t<m...Ae intensive-thinks^ knows.
M6toon-^the^t«m...entire-thinks-Ae^ he reflects.
W(in-6the<wm...^e indefinite-thinks, is bewildered.
Kw6etow-6the^«m...A6 lack-thinks, is at a loss.
Nisset6o-^t/9it ...he — hears, understands, it. See p. 9^.]
PASSIONS.
Kissew^^u.. he is angry.
Siggethkysu.,.he is glad, rejoiced.
S^gissu...he shrinks, is alarmed.
Gdostkchu.. he is afraid.
QK4wkw-6thetfi9it...^e is jealous.
Ng-6thetfim...A« is content^ satisfied.
P^gesk&t2<m...^e is melancholy .^
VIRTUES, &c.
Ki386wktissu...he is good-natured liberal.
8askgissu...he is niggardly.
Kisses6wmtt...Ae is industrious.
K&iihowissu...he is persevering.
A'wkoowi . he is very sick.
Fthin4ywoo...Ae is recovered.
Mtisk6wmfi...Ae is strong.
N6thamt^^tt...Ae is weak.
Kdtaw4s»^^tt. . . he is handsome.
W6thepi>«i...Ae is foul, dirty.
Meth6stf^...^e is good.
MgLthitissu...he is bad.
MAtdiissu...he is wicked.
M(itche-n^koo^...A« is ugly-looked (pass.) Ang. ill-looking.
M6tho-n^ooM...AeMwell-looked(id.). AngLgood-looking.
QThithipp»...Aeis nimble.
P&p6ych6oo...A« is slow.
K6etimii ...he is lazy .
144 A GRAMMAR OF
£''theb6oakoft7...^ U prudent.
S6k-etay-(£^oo...Ae is strong-hearted^ bold.
Sakoo-tay-(£^oo...Ae is faint-hearted^ cowardly.^
FIGURE^ Sec.
Kinwoosu,,,k€ is tall or long.
Chimmi8issu..,he is short.
Missiggt/Ztt ,,,ke is big.
A^ppea^esissu ...he is small.
Seekooftf ...he is slender.
A^'thagtiskt^jtf ...he is broad.
Skgbwissu ...he is narrow.
Kisp\ickissu...he is thick.
Fk'puc\i{ssu...he is thin.
Wathtxw ...he is hollow.
Kwiiiskooftf...Ae is straight.
W^issu,..he is crooked.
'PeeTaissu...he is awry.
Ch6epoost<...^e is tapering.
W6wissu...he is rounds as a circle.
Pittickooftf ..he is spherical.
Nupp(ickw«ti...Ae t^ flat.
M^sk6wissu...he is hard^ or strong.
Th68kissu...he is soft.
Kbwissu ...he is rough.
P&piskoo^...Ae is uneven.
S6oskoo^...Ae is smooth.
Kk9pissu...he is crisp^ brittle.
S6epithkwoft'...t/ is tough.
Kksissin..M is keen (as a knife).
Pithkwto'ii...t^ M blunt (id.).
S6epissu...he is durable^ lasting.
W^kjwissu ..he is weak^ not lasting.
OF THE SENSES.
QWApii...A€ see*.
F^ytum ...he hear*.
F^B8oo..,he scents (as, an animal).
THE CESS LANQUAOB. 145
M^tbktum . . . Ae smelb d.
Nist6ospetiiift...Ae taster ii.
M6o9etaw..,ke feels iiSJ
COLOURS^ See.
W4ppisk-f«w«..Ae is white.
KAaketiysu„.h€ is black.
Mithkoosu...he is red.
Oo8kwissu,..he is yellow.
Oo8£w-ii8ktxm...Ae is yellow-grass^ i.e. grass-yellow, or
green.
CHE^Pi«TA'K-oon<...Ae is DEAD (pet^le's) couNTRY-Uke> i.e.
•KY blue.
W6ekutchtjm...Ae is sweet.
W6es<iggtfm...Ae is bitter.
S^wtfw...A^ is sour, or salt.
A^wkoofti he is strong, acrid ; sick.
W6enissu.,.he stinks.
K^6oftf...Ae if warm.
K6wutchff ...Ae is starved, with cold.
S^kutchti...A^ is starved, lean.
Mecli6/tenntck...tkey are many.
ChSika,w&am4nmk.„ihe!f are few.
N€ywoonnik.,.ihey are four.
KUaissu...he is hot (to the touch).
Tkkissu ..he is cold (id.).
TIMK.
K^sekoft^ ..t^ is day.
Tibbiskofv...!^ if night
Wipun...ii is dawn, day-lig^t.
N^n...t^ is summer.
P^poon...!^ is winter.
Tiickwftktn...t/ is autumn.
Sikwun..Al is spring.
L
146 A GRAMMAR OF
WEATHCR.
Kimmewtfii.. itrauM.
Ml8pooit...t^ snow^.
P6wtiit...t^ drifts.
S&ys&yktin...t/ hail«.
Kisshinc^ ..M is cold.
K6es-appw(^...t^ is hot (weather).
Ki8^&8tayoo...t7 is hot (in the sunshine).
PLACE.
Wutch^woo.. it is hilly.
Piissachon;.. ii is low ground^ a vale.
T6 w-uttinJf» ..Mis 'twixt-hill, a valley. &c.
^o^e.— All the Adjective Verbs, mentioned above, have the two
verbal endings, viz. the Animate and the Inanimate. See p. 131.
Occasional or Accidental (Neuter) Verbs.
See pp. 25, et seq. 32.
Is-piith-fi. fChip. -ped^, inan.3...so-moveth il (see p. 80).
S6ke-puthti...t^ spills.
T^e-puthtf...»^ splits.
TMthicke-piithtf ...f^ rends, as cloth.
T4to-piithti...f^ tears.
Tft-t^to-piithtt (iterat.)«.t/ tears to pieces, to " tatters."
Ktiskutche-piithti...t^ breaks (as a stick).
N^tw^pCLthti...t^ breaks in two.
P(iske-puthti...t^ snaps (in two), as a line or cord.
Chech^eske-piithti.. k creaks.
P4sta^piithti...t^ breaks (as a nut).
Pdske-puthti.. it bursts (from without) as a bladder.
P6o8koo-puthti...t^ bursts (from within) as a gun.
T^pe-puthu...t/ suffices.
Not^puthu...t^ falls short.
K6we-puthfi...t^ MLs prostrate, as a tree.
N6eche-puthfi...t/ falls from on high.
Miinne-puthti...it falls off, detaches.
P4h-puthtf...t^ moves hitherward, i.e. it comes.
THE CRIE LANGUAGE. 147
Ithke-puthfi...t£ falls cS, sinks (as water).
Thiske-puthu...t< rises (id).
S^ke-puthu. . . t^ spills.
SMcoo-|mthi»...t< empties.
K^nekwdn-e-p6jthii...^ revolTes, as a wiieel or eddy.
T^{qpe-p^ti...d over^vms.
Tg t^tippe-ptithu (iterat.) ...it rolls.
P6ekoo-ptithtt ..M breaks.
Kissh^-ptithtt ,.M swift-moves.
Mtitche-ptithti...t7 moves slow or ill.
M6tho-p<ithtf...t^ well-moves.
S^itche-pdthti...t< tightens^ contracts.
(yope-pdth«i...t^ ascends.
TMse-ptithtf . . . tV descends.
Ispkk4y-ptithfi...t^ goes up above.
S4poo-p!ithfi...t7 through-passes^ i.e. through an aperture,
e.g. the eye of a needle.
A^8see-p6th«-tf^ (pliir.)...<ftey gather together, assemble.
Th6th6wee-puthff...t^ diqierses.
Tdche-ptithti...s^ moves, mounts upon.
Th^e-pdthtf...t^ advances.
Pkke-ptithtt...tY swells.
Ass^eche(priv.)-p(ithtt...»^ moves backw^ds.
A^ssitche(intens.)-pdthtt...t^ also-eth, mixes with.
Ptissukee-piithu it fl|dinters.
P^kiske-ptithtf ...f^ iaUs to pieces.
Miitchoo8tay-p(ithtf...lf fidls into die fire.
Ptickust6way-piithtf...id. into the water.
P4ssitche-pidthti...t^ passes over.
Niee-pithti...^ exact^moves.
Kwfts«kwi^oo^t]ifi...t< moves by leaps, or jumps.
Ch^h^pdthtf.. it quivers.
K6oskoo-ptithtf...t< shakes.
QtHske-puthtt...t^ turns, changes sides.
Mahkoo-ptithM...t^ condenses, compresses.
Ntippoo-p(ithti...fV doubles.
Pikne-ptithtf...t< opens out, expands.
l2
148 A GRAMMAR OF
T6ke-p(ithti...t^opeiis> as a slit.
Tdssoo-piithtf...*^ spreads open.
P6eche-piithflr...t^ fidls into.
W&w^pe-p!ithtt...& swings badkwards and forwards.
Ki8s^U^i&'pdtfati...t^ clings or sticks to.
Koottippe-ptithtt ...t^ turns iqisidedownj capsizes^ as a canoe.
&c.
Paragraph III.
Rest, or Absence of Motion, Apu or -46m (Chip.
Ahbehf Jones). This elementary verb has a two-fold
bearing, viz. Absolute and Relative. Used " abso-
lutely" it signifies he sits^ — or ** he abides/' " stays,"
having a reference to place — when it may also be classed
as ** positive." On the other hand, when used '' rela-
tively," it signifies he stays, remains, &c. as opposed
to a verb> &c. of motion. In this sense we class it as
*' privative," as indicating contrariety. The inanimate
form is irregular.^*
Apt^ or Abii = &be + oo (anim.) ... sits-Ae^ he sits : — he is,
Le. stays, abides ; is lying, A-Bsing.
Ast&yoo = ^ist4(y)oaXinan.)...i^ is lying, placed, &c.
7* ANIMATE.
xxi. 9* Ke khbeh (indie.) . . he was *' lying.''
xxi. 22. 23. Che 6hbid (subj.) . . that he remain, *' tarry."
INANIMATS.
xi. 38. AhU^bun (indie, preter.) . . it was lying, lay.
▼i. 11. At^ffi (subj. plur. flat vowel). . which (thejf) remain.
XX. 6. 7. Ahyiht% (subj. intens.) . . which (t^) is (was) lying.
XX. 5. Ahyaht<^.iit^ (subj. intens. access, case) . • which (jU) is (was)
lying (in relat.) to him.
XX. 12. Ke 4ht<fy-ebtin (subj. preter.). . (where) t^ had laiQ.
ii. 6. Ke aht6-mah^aAd(^)(^ (accid. pass. inan. plur. see pp. 49,
60, -magun) . . they were set.
XX. 7. Aht48eiuxm (negat. indie.) . . it (the napkin) was not lying,
emah iiht(% (posit, subj.), where it (the clothes) lay.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 149
Relatively^ the same terms imply^
A^tf or kbti...Ae stays^ he remaios.
A'8t4(y)oo...t^ stays, or remains.
A'teet 6otin-egi^soo-ifik^ (part. pass. anim. plur.) 6teet A^Bu^uk-
...part (number) they are taken, part they remain.
A^teet 6otin-egitdy-fpaA, (id. inan. id.) ^teet AST6y'ivah.,Ad.
This verb forms its three persons (sing.) as follows : The inan-
imate form has only the third person :
CRBE.
{Net', 4^?.) ab-in, -in,-u, or,
abi-n, -n, -oo, (I,^c.) sit, &c. quasi. Germ. (Ich)
bun, Aug], be.
ast- -ayoo, or, astk-^oo. It is lying, being,
&c. (quasi, Ital. std.)
CHIPPEWAY.
{Nind, Jj^.y dp, tip, ahheh (/, &c.) stay, &c.
aht'6..M is lying, &c.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
CRBE. I CHIPPEWAY,
Ab-edn, -6un, -it | Ab-eyon, -6yiin, -it
To the same (privative) class may be referred (p=b),
Nip-ff...Aetf dead.
Nip-(^...Ae is asleep.
Kip-(^...Ae is shut, stopped.
Kip-6ch^...A^ stop-moves, i.e. he stops (e.g. in walking).
Kfp-&tdt-tim.. he stop-breathes, expires.
filip-&tik-moo... (reflect) he suffocates, &c. (See Privation.)
Note. — ^It is somewhat remarkable that this element (a5) has both a
positive, and privative or reverse, signification in certain BngUsh, &c.
words also, e.g. (posit.) a-bet, a-bound ; (privat.) ab-ate, ab-use, av-ert,
&c. (vide infra.)
In its primary sense, viz. of Posture, this verb takes
for its transitive, abe-h(£yoo, he seats him, e.g. a child.
In its secondary meanings it takes, athdyoo, (anim.) ;
150 ^ A GRAMMAR OP
z&i6w = ASTA-00 (man.). Chip. Ood' Stsdun (anim.) ;
Ood' iX6on (inan.) he srts, puts, places, ^tows him,
or it.'^
The three persons (nng.) of the Transitive form are as follows :
crcb*
{Net', 4^.) ath-d«p> 'dfv, ^dyoo (anim.) (/, S^.) put him.
(Nety 4^.) ast-an^ -an^ "Ofv (inan.) I, S^. put k.
A^dae-gagco (indef. obj.)...^put8, places. (See p. 101.)
A^ehe-gJts-oo (partidp. pass, anim.) ... Ae is put^ placed.
'f^U&yoo (id. inan.)...t^ id. (See p. Ill ef seq.)
CHIPPEWAY.
{Nind, ^) J»-^> 'Ok, -4un (anim.) ... (I, 4^.) put him
Qpron. ^uhs&h^ &c.).
{Nind, 4*c.) kt>6on> -6on -6on (inan.)...(/, 4t?.) put »^ (pron.
kt-t6on« &c.).
^o^e.— The root (aTH) of this verb^ irregular in both dialects^ exhibits
in its modifications, as above, some of the *' conversions'' of the (lingual)
element th*
The above signs ab, aih, ast (C3iip. dt), are privative or opposite
also in the folkywing and other similar expressicms. JVb^e.— The
W TBANSITIVB ANIMATE.
zi. 34. Ke ^S£% (subj.) . . ye have laid Um,
xix. 42. AhsoAiodcI Qd.) . . that they laid Um.
XX. 15. Ke zhsdhiwdhd^n QA. dubit.) . . (the place) tlwu hast put,
** laid,'* Awn.
XX. 2. 13. Ke ahs(£^aig-wldn C^d. dubit) .... (id.) they have put,
« laid,*' Amu.
INANIMATE.
ix. 15. Oo ge aht^ findic). . he did put it.
xiii. 4. Oo ge ahtdbmni (id. plur.) . . he put, placed, " laid aside,"
xiii. 2. Ke ehXiM (subj.) . . he had put t^
xix. 2. 29. Ke 4htooto(^ (id.) . they put tV.
xix. 29. Ke ihehe-^flMf (parftct|7. pass, see p. ill). . it had been set.
THE CRBE LANQUAGE. 151
Chippeways often miit the O^ «> JiangthemBg the pri^ca^ifig
vowel. (Quasi^ AngL tnofterj Hrar^e; Pr. maitre, Strange^ &(C.)'*
Ab'0(Akyoo...be back-gaee.
I-M>e-p)idHi (I ss JE intens. see p. 71) -. he backward and
iforwaid moves.
AhAa^isu (anim.) ... he is back-like> i.e. is recovering, or
recovered^ e.g. &ioxa a fit.
Ab-ow Qnaxi.)...k is back, i.e. op-en.
Aharhum,..he op*«ns it.
A'b^oot^ym,.. back-takes he^it, turns It inside out.
A'8t-ow4yoo..j7 is hack, extinct (fire), Angl. "out."
A'8ta(y)-p&y-oo...back-drink-w-Ae, he is (become) sober.
A'sta(y)-kwamtt...^ back^sleep is, is recovered from sleep.
A'thoo-4sti-it...t/ pause4dxvir is, it is (beecmw) edm, still.
Athoo^u, pron. ^tfa^w^ (intena.)...Ae ve-siU, rests, re-
poses.
Atoo-^thetusi...^ back-thinks, dislikes, t^.''^
[[Metho-^thetttm...Ae well-thinks^ likes, approves, if*2
Anwe^tifm (see p. 96) •.•^ bl^do4)lears^ dis-beUeyei^ it*
A'8t<k>-gummu...»^ is back-, still-water, modei^ted current.
A^stum-oow(^oo...A^ back-does, hind^jBf, obnstructs, him.
There is a second Simple Verb, expressive also of
a state of Rest, of which the attributive sign may like-
ns vi. 63. ily-IUibeze-^wlUmahgdk (Indet. an. obj. Detenu, inai^. subject.
flat vowel). . which recovereth, testoreth (see pp. 9d. 36).
xi. 44. A^b-ah(^ib! ^mperat.). . back-, " loose-^ ye-Mm.
XX. 9' Che 4hbe-j^-(^ (neut. subj.) . . 4ihat he back*^ un-dead, rise
from the dead,
xii. 17. Ke ihJbe-^^>-9k6d <trans. sub}.) . . has baek-deadwJbe-Mi, he
raised him from the dead.
"xii. 48. A^Y-dhtMhw-iaemid (subj. intens.) ...he that inilt..tlniyc8,
" rejects,'' me.
152 A GRAMMAR OF
wise be classed as both positive and privative. It has
its three persons (sing.) as follows :^
POSITIVE.
{Nee, 4^.) fikdoesM^ -m^ ^mi or, dckeos-; (/> S^.) hang,
depend, hover.
ftk6o- -tin (inan.) U hangs, &c.
PRIVATIVE.
(ATe^, S^.) IdLoo-sift, -siii, -sv : or, l^goo-; (/,4^«) am very-
back,^ very sick.^
dkw- -uft or, fkgw-un (inan.) t< is very-
back,* i.e. strong, (taste,
smell, &c.) acrid.
TRANSITIVE.
A'koo-thiiyoo, or, uckoo- (anim.)...Ae hangs him up.
A^koo-tofv (inan.).«.Ae hangs U up.
A^koo-ch^;fb-oo (part pass. aniin.)...Ae is hangei up (by
an agent).
A^oo-di^^it-ayoo (id. inan.)... t^ is hangeil up (id.).
A^oo-sti...A^ sits (a bird in a tree).
A^koo-moo...Ae suspends, sits (a duck in the water).
Alcoo-tiii...t^ hangs, suspends, is n(-uate, e.g* an island, in
the water.
The fidlowing expressions also, among others, exhibit this
attributive sign as being likewise sometimes positive, sometimes
privative ; in whichsoever sense it appears, whether as the primary
OS the acoessOTy attribute, the signification may be considered as
'^ intensive" also. See Intensity.
A^goo-thow&yoo...t< very hard-blows, blows a hurricane.
AwkQo-tho-w&y-sti...hurricane-ish-(is)-Ae, he is stormy, i.e.
he is passionate.
ra vi. 31. Ke fligwahsrf-mahgnd. . it was suspended, ^ anchored.''
xiz. 31. Che AIigood<£-fenoo>^ (acdd. pass. neg. subj.) . . that they be
not, ** remain'% hung up.
)• xi. iii. A^hkoo-ire . . fte if sick.
• See Privation.
THB CRBE LANGUAGE. 153
A^goo-a8t4yoo...t< t^ quite-oppo8ite-(8un)light> i*e. shade.
A^g6o-aFht^n...t/ quite-opposite-> back-wave-t#^ the waves
are quite still.
A^g6o-e-8kow&yoo...Ae 8trong-back-forces> re-pulses^ him.
[[AViwe-ttffn...Ae back-hears (see p. 96), dis-sents^ dis-
believes t<.]
A^goo-^we-tttm...Ae strong-back-hears, denies, ii.^
A^g6w-ftMti (tempor*)...^^ i* very-hard-like> austere, cruel.
A^gW'kwissu (contin.)...Ae is of & cruel temper.
A^kum-^emoo (intran.)... he strong-thinks, is fixed in
resolution.
AVkw-^emoo (id.) ...he back-, or, very-hard-thinks.
Nei' 4wkwah-mdf».../ back-say, contra-diet, him.
Net' dwkoo-m^.../ very-hard-say, provoke, him.
AVgw-ah (prepos.)... behind.
A^wgwah-puthtf...behind-moves it, it goes behind, on the
other side of, an object.
Ab/e.— Hereafter we shall endeavour to show that the same (or equiva-
lent) letters, in similar combination, are positive, or privative, and inten-
sive, in certain English &c. words also; and that they are alike ultimately
referrable to the correlative or opposite Intbrjbctional Expressions of
Plxasubx and Pain, &c. (Vide infra.)
Gonnected with the subjects of Rest and Motion,
are Identity and Diversity^ continuous and variable,
Disposition and Conduct. (See next Par. and Inten-
sity.)
80 xviii. 25. 27. Ke lUigwah-nwatibi . . he strong-denied t^.
xiii. 38. Ke £hgoo-nwat^wqftm. . (when) thou shalt strong-deny me.
i. 20. Ke dhgoo-nwatimre (neg. inan.) . . he denied t^ not.
joi. 11. Ke ^hgwah-dlttibalinocl ;subj.) . . (and) he hard-drew t^.
xiz. 15. Nin gah ahgw-IUiquahwif A ? . . shall I Qntens.) hang up,
crucify, him?
XV. 2. Ood' kkoo-w4be-n-lihn-un (inan. plur.). , he quite away-fling-
eth'tJiem (with the hand).
154 A GRAMMAB OF
The dement as (as whUl mb the cognate hbiab , m and oo or w) is
abo the rooi of words expressive ef IdetUii^ : E*Mhkck, the sAMe
(E- intens. 'db^, root, -tch, adv. tennfaL) T4&^8k6otch^ like.
JS4>AW-e, (E^, intens.) the samc, coiUinwdfy, unifbmily.
A'Be-p6pooit...f^ it re-winter> wint^ over again.
Tdbe^4^.,.he tame^^eSih, re-does, re-news, U.
TJib-&8kwahu«f he re-wood-eth it, puts anew handle
to it
Tkbe»kw&mM...Ae re-sleeps, i.e. sleeps in the same place.
(^A^chemdb...A£ relates.^ ^^
T^b-&chem(^ (intens.)... Ae relates, with accuracy. (Fr. il
m-conte.)
T^p-w4yoo...Ae same- i.e. true-says, speaks die truth.^
K6e-AM-abe, or k^eant-b^ (inq>erat.)...vay-#a9ite-, i.e. still-
sit-/Aotf.
K^-ant-issti (temper.) ..very-fanie-i8h-(is)-Ae...he is quiet.
K^ewim-ewisstt (contin.).-.he is very sedate, quiet, (disposi-
tion), qu. Aug}, calii-ous.
^1 [xvi. 18. Ewh lidahmoo^-wain (intrans. subj. dubit.) . . that (which^
he discourses of.]
[v. 32. En.6hjem«i (subj.) . . (which) he so-relates (of) me.]
V. 32. Tab4hjems(^ $d.) . . who narrates, " beareth witness" of, me.
iii. 32. Tab.lUid6ondf^r (id. inan.) . . he "testifieth" t^. (<9ee p. 43.
note 23.)
^ iv. 17. Ke tdp-w4. . thou true-speakest.
iv. 21. T^pwa-t^wefffttfi. . true-hear-tAou-me, believe thou me. See
p. 96.
V. 46. TdpwlUtahw(£7.oopun (subj. pret. dubit.). . had ye believed
him.
Ke tah g^ tiipwa-tahu^tm (indie). . ye would have beUeved me.
THB CRBB LANGUAGE. 155
Ay9vfoo,.,ke is hb^ or it.
AV.6eio> pron. 4-iir6oo (|Ay8i<ally)...Ae w he, the same
man, &c.^
A'w-isstf, (morally).. .Ae ii the same, in character.
AV-^Wisstf (id. intens. see p. 70). ..Ae w the same continu-
ously, i.e. in dispatUion.
{Net', 4t?.) kw-in, -i», -600 (/, 4^.) am he, the same.
^w- -tilt t^ t# it, the same.
^w- 'iicko (intens.) it is very same he or U,
(Net, <Jh?.) aw-issi», -issin, -issn (/, S^.) am the same-like,
the 8ameperson(moirally).
A'we-now(^oo...Ae same-sees Atm,re-oognizeshim. Seep. 96*
83 INDICATIVE.
vi. 41. 48. xiii. 13. xviii. 5. 6. zix. 21. Mmf 6wh .. J am he, or it,
the same,
i. 21. 42. xviii. 33. KecP dwh . . thou art he.
SUBJUNCTIVB*
viii. 24. 28. xiii. 14. 19* xviii. 8. Ahweyt^ . . that I am he, or it.
iv. 19. vi. 69. XL 27. Ahw^wi . . that thou art he, &c.
iv. 42. vn. 26. xx. 14. 31. xxi. 4. 7. 12. Afawwl . . that he (Angl. it)
iff he.
V. 15. Akwtmd (access, case) . . that t^ is (was) he, &c.
X. 24. K^pin (sah) 96hwewahmQtnm)dim (suhj. dabit. intens.) . . if
thou be he.
viii. 53. Wanain. . Iihy4hwe^ez6qytiii ? (cans, reflect) .... whom
SAMB-make-ihyself-^JIott (oAy- intens. See jpp. 71. 82.)
NBOATIVB.
i. 20.21. iii.28. xviii. 17. 25. Nind^ iihwG-^ (indie). , I am not he, &c.
xviiL 17. 25. JTatf ahwese $d.). . thou vrt not he.
vi. 42. ix. 8. Ahwesei 0d.) . . ^ is no^ he ?
i. viii. Ke ahwete (id.). . he was not he (or, it).
X. 12. Aihwe5^ (subj. flat vowel). . who (he) is not he (the shepherd).
X. 26. AhweMiM% (subj.). . (as) ye are not they.
i. 25. Keshpin a,y^wes^ahn(wun)din (neg. subj.dubit. intens.). . if
thou he not he.
viii. 7. Ke idttiy-ahwe-ti4(neut.). . he re-established, re-samed, lifted
up himself,
ii. 19. Nin gah mihy-ahwe-ndn (trans.) / will very-same, re-
estabUsh, it (with the hand).
156 A OEAMMAR OF
It should at the same time be observed^ that two Pronouns^ or a
Pronoun and a defimle Noun^ occurrmg in apporiiion, the copula-
tive verb is ^ien omitted, aa, (ywen& kAM ?...who (art) tkau ? See
Syntax.^
Paraoeaph IV.
Motion. Ache-oo (ch = tch) or Age-oo (g = dg),
Chip. A UN J -EH, he moves (quasi^ Lat. age-re). The
Attribute, or root, of this simple verb would seem to
be derived from, or to be the continuous form of, the
elementary particle cU-^ (a long), the sign of Diversity
(see last Par.), indicatin:g "diverse," ** other,*' '* dif-
ferent," &c. which shall first be exemplified as follows :
1. A't- A'Uidtv [[Chip. AunjVahyc^]] ...other-is-Ae-(at), he is else-
where.
A't-&p-tt (anim.) [[Aund^-ihbeA3...Ae o^er-sits, change* his
seat.
A't-ast&yoo (inan.) ^Aund^-aht^j*"^ ^^ ^ ^ lyings ^^
another place.
A^t-ath(f^oo (anim.) ^Ood' aund^-assduft]]*-*^ <i^>-ates, puts,
km in an-o<Aer place, Angl. removes him.
A^UaaXdw (inan.) f Oocf aund^-aht6oit]]...Ae removes it.
AVootdyoo faund'-oot(f]...^e goes elsewhere, " removes."
A^-ethow-kd-^oo.. other-being-maketh-Ae, he relates fables.
8* vi. 20. Nee» (sah) ween. . / {sah affirm, part.) he, orit, Anglic^, it is /.
ix. 9. Me ... . wowh . . why this ! Anglic^ why this (is) he !
i. 21. Elijah (nah) fteoi P. . Elias (nak, interrog.) tkouF Artthou
Elias?
xxi. 24. Me .... wowh mlnzhenahwi^ Ital. Eeeo . . . this Qs) thx
disciple.
X. 7. Neen (sah) bwh oo^ eshqu6ndlanaMa . . / (aoA affirm, part.)
THAT their door, " / am thb door of (them) "
X. Q. Neen (sah) bwh i8hqu6nd4im. . /, that door, '< I am thb door."
♦ Quasi Angl. " odd," " ADd-le"
THB CRBE LANGUAGE. 157
Aukw6oo.. ,he is other he, or person (than he was^ physicaUy) .
A't'ak [An-dngj—o^Aer Beings viz. a star.
Ach'kk [[O^oje-ch6g3...0<Aer Beings viz. the soul or spirit
E^chr-Ethinn (E intens.)...(a) very-other Indian (homo) a
foreigner.
£-^t-oogiim-tAr w6egu (id.)... very-other (distant) habitation-
tM be dwells.
A't-ee (adv.) (Chip, ahne^ ne)...on^ fromward^ away.^
A't-& (conj. advers.),.. yET, although^ &c. (qu. Lat at).
This element is not only a prefix or accessory attribute^ as
above^ but it b alto a verbal rooit signifying change, aUeration,
A^issti... (morally) other-like-(is)-^, he is different
/ kt-eW-isstf (id. intens. see p. 70)... Ae is changeable^ ca-
pricious^ quasi, very ali-ous.
A't'issoo (aocid. pass.) [Afht^zdo} ••• other-M-Ae-ed> he is
change<f» turned*, ripened (fruit).
A't-^^oo (id. inan.) [AfhUetd}..,ii is id.
A't-e-nc£^oo [[Oocf aund^-e-n(^]]...Ae ali-hand-Am-eth ; ali-
ates, '^removes," hm, with the hand. Se6 Special
Affixes, p. 86.
A't-e-skafP(£^oo^O(xfaunz'-e-shkahw<i»it]]...id.with strength:
or (priv.) inadvertently ; Angl. he dis-places Ann.
A^Ue-swdgoo (anim.) [Ood^ ^t-e-swimt^—Ae alters, changes
(by fire) him, dyes him.
A^tre-sum (inan.) [Ood' dht-e-s^tfit3...Ae dyes it.
A't-^w^iyoo []dhd-ahwiQ...Ae exchanges, barters.^
Awkw-kt-aw4yoo...^ hard-barters, deals hard.
As a verbal root, this element {dt) is, further, expressive of
energy or action; when it may perhaps be also considered as
^ xvi. 13. Ke gah dkne eBhew6'negoowdh . . he will away guide yon
(into, &c.).
xix. 17* A'lme pem^e-doocJ . . as ile away bore.
8«ii. 14. A^d'Skwdfig (subj. flat vowel). . who {they) ** sold."
, ii. 16. A^d-ahwdncfift Cid. acces. case). . who *' sold."
156 A GRAMMAR OF
bel(»igiiig to the elementary verb £T-u...Ae does (see Parag. V).
In the following and similar expresttons^ it is qualified by the
sign of "maxmsr" isse^ forming with it a compound (-kt-is-ti)
in meaning precisely equivalent^ and, in form, nearly approaching
to the English, &c. formative termination, -at-ile (e.g« vers-o^-tfe).
It-dt-isn pn-^d-ez^A^ ... so-act-like-(doth)«Ae, he so acts
(morally), behaves. See p. 138, Note 70.
T^n' isse H^kUi^-U ? [Alm'^en ^on-^d-esicf ?3 (subj. flat
vowel)... what manner (how ?) behaves he f
It«c^6wissfi...so-acts-like-Ae (continu.;, ^ is so disposed*
jKTole.— iSome tribes, Gree as well as Ch^[>peway, use the generic verb,
Eihe-wABezeh, in the same sense, i.e. relating to conduct^
W^n-kt-issti., err<-at-ive-(is>*Ae, inconsistent, unsteady, tin
behaviour.)
K6es-kway-kt-issii. . .giddy-head-acts-like-ie (id.).
Pis8in-^isstf...m]sdiiev-ous-(is)-Ae (id.).
Pissekw-d,t-issii ^P^shegw-4hd-ea^3 ••• ^ is wicked, looi^e
(id.).8«
Kt88^w-4iit48sii.* he is kind.
Ki8-&t-is8ii...Ae stick&-like, is fond.
2. AcH- (=a(t)ch). This mode of the particle, dt, retains the
signification of its Primitive, whether as an accessory or primary
attribute.
A'che or ache..." else," other, alias.
A^ch-M (= al-ibi, Lat)...efce-where, other place.
A^che-g£lpow-oo...^ stands aloof; quasi, di-stant-(is)-Ae.
A^che-weegM...Ae tents elsewhere.
A^che-p6ostesk«m.. he o^Aer-puts it on, changes it (e.g. his
shoes).
A^die*kippaF.Atcm...^ other (=extra) shuts ii, ie. locks it.
A'ch-6kin...t^ other-goes on,"the case is altered." See Par.V.
S7 xvii. 25. O way6osemfn(2 quiyuk kzhewihez6pm (flat, vowel). . O he
who is fathered {see Note 61 p. 109) straight (t.e. uprightly)
who {quasi) bdluivefff . " O ri^teous lather."
^ viii. 3. 4. M^ah p^i^ies^l&deztd. . whilst he («Ae) was loose, wicked.
THB CRBE LANGUAGE. Id9
As a primary attribute or root :
CASE.
{Nct\ Sfc,y Ach-ii^ -to.
-^oa
Ach-
-emagun.
CHIPPEWAY.
{Kind, SfC) h\m], aunj,
aunj-eh.
Aunj-
-^mahgut.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
CREE.
CHIPPEWAY,
Ach'-ean, -^n -^t.
Aunj^
-ey<Sn, -^yun.
-et.
Ach-6oo (contin.) [|Chip. Aunj'eh]|...Ae moves> is moving.
A^che-piithu (tempor.) [[Aunj^e-b6zoo]|...A^ dlf-moves^ i.e.
re-moves (guddeiUy), alters. (See pp. 32. 80. 14>6.)
Ach^-fftogtin [[amiy^-mahgutQ^ (contin.)... fV moves.
A^che-h-oyoo {Ood^ aunj^e-(h)-oii> or, -auro (trans, anim.)...
he alters (a(l)ters), changes, him. ®'
A'che-t-oir Xpof aunf e-t*ooit] (id. hian.)...fte, &c. it.
I-^he-t(^ (id. inan. intens.)...Ae re^4oes, re-*makes, it.
A^che-che-g&yoo [amij6-cli-eg(r| ^def.)...Ae alters changes
(somednng).
Ach6-che-g^t(^oo (jp^urticip. pass. inan.)...t^ is altered.
A^che-hdo (reflect)., he changes Mmself (Ins clothes).
A^che^hdtfoo (caus.)...Ae causes him to move.
Gh6-di6-p&th«; (iterat)...a^ quivers or throbs.
N6ie. — We i&ay just observe, m passing, that the above generic (lingual)
eleownt a(f)ck or a(d)g9, or with the euphmic Chip* «, emch or ange, &c.
is analogous in signification to similar elflmaits in certain English
words, in^tying also generic motion, &c. namely, the integral termina-
tions of such verbs as, to sn-atch, diq^ch, f-eteh, str-etch, b-udge,
tr-udge, cl-ench, wr-ench« r-ange, &c. (vide infra) of which the prefixed
letters, &e. deSmB^e species of motion. Also, d'^ash, m-ash, cr-ash;
d-ance, pr-ance, &c. (See Intensity.)
^xii. 40. Che ge xuNJE-tftdwc^bun (subj.) . . that theg might be
CBANO.e<l, "convert-«d." (See Note 61. p. 108.)
160 A ORAMMAR OF
Paragraph V.
Action, Exu^Ete+oo, he does, acts (so). This
elementary verb, growing also out of the ultimate root
BTH (and of which it may, compared with the Verb
Substantive, be considered the more "energetic" mode)
has likewise a two-fold bearing, expressing, positively,
he does or acts — privatively, he or she suffers, is unwell,
&c.
Note, — ^In the former sense^ the " constant" t begins — in the latter^ it
ends the syllable : in th6 one case it is acHve^n the other (I shall call it)
passive.
INDICATIVE.
CREE. CHIPPBWAY.
(Net,^c.)E%in, -in, -u. (Nind, ^.) Vnt, I^it, Int6h.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
EU6kn, -6un, -it Ind-6y6n, -^yun, -it.
Tan' ET^tift f (posit sabj.)***what Doesi^hou, art thou doing
(morally) ?
Tan' isse ET^n? (priv. id.) [|Chip. ahn een dind6ytmr|«**what
manner ill-est, ail-est, thou, is the matter with thee f
Thxk' etU f (posit id.). ..what doeth he ? how does he act,
or, has he acted ?
Tdne w6yche ETiif ?...what from (so) ACTeth he f why acts
he so?
Tf^ gah gh^ ETfi^-(^pun !...what could / do !
(M&hmusk^tch) F-etu (intens.) • ... (surprisingwly, won-
derfully) continu-ACTeth-Ae, he conducts himself
(strangely).
Kah ETE^tfit Tsubj.) net' E^Tin (indie.) ... (that) which thou
Doest, i.e. as thou ACTest, / do, act, so.
N£-6the-T-tffit, w^ha .,he rejoices, he. Nie-'hX^k net' 6Tiit...
(posit, or act) / also, / do (so).
Ne ghee ootthnme-H-ickoostn; 6skw& m6gg& nef s^Tin (priv.
or pass.) / have been embarrassed ; still, also, / am
so.
THB CRlfiE LANGUAGE. 161
Note, — ^For this intransitive verb in its positive sense of acting, Mr.
JoNBS uses (in Chip.), idiomatically, the indefinite transitive izhe-ch-egd,
from Ood^ ezhe-t-oo» (def.) he so does it, (See p. 102. 1. 6. and *
p. 162.)^
It is scarcely necessary to remark that these elementary verbs
are, in common with other intransitives, susceptible of the intensive
&c. formatives.
The Transitive form of this generic verb may be
said to constitute the generic or formative ending of
90 INDICATIVE.
vii. 21. Nin g^ ^zhecheg(£ (inan.)« • I have done (one work).
viii. 29* Nind ^zhechegd-ntm (id.). . I do them
V. 19. A'liy-^zhecheg(^ (intens.) . . he do-eth.
viii. 38. 41. Kef ^zhechegefim . . ye do.
viii. 39. Ke tah k^ ^zhecheg<fim . . ye would have done.
viii. 44. Ke we ^zhechegtfim. . ye want, wish, *' will" do.
IMPERATIVE.
ii. 5. E^zhechegd-ydbit. . do ye it,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
iv. 34. vi. 38. Che ^zhechegaydn. . that I do.
xiii. 7. A^zh^chegaydn (flat vow.) . . (which) I do.
iii. 2. A^-zhechegdyttn (flat vowel) . . (which) thou doest.
ii. 18. Ke Ithy-^zhechegdyun (intens.). . which thou hast done.
vii. 4. A''zhechegdif;(£Afi(tmfn)(^in (flat vow. dubit.) . . if thou do (these
things),
vii. 17. ix. 31. E^zhechegdid. . if he do.
xxi. 21. Ka ^zhechegdic? . . (what) shall he do.
7. 51. Kah ^zhecheg%ti7(fin (duhit.) . . (what) he doeth.
XV. 15. A'zhechegdntd (flat vowel acces. case). . what {his-) he doeth.
V. 19. A^zhechegd-wt^r-wdin (id. duhit.) . . (what) soever he (access.)
doeth.
vi. 28. Ka ^zhechegdyon^ . . ?. . (what) shall toe do . . ?
xiii. 17. XV. 14. E^zhecheg%(^i^ . . (if) ye do (them),
xiii. 27. Wah ^zhechegdyun (suhj.) waw^ep ^zhechegldn (imperat.). .
what thou wantest to do, quickly do thouy (it).
X. 37. K^shpin ^zhechegdsetoon (neg. inan.) . . if J do (them) not.
xix. 36. Ke ^zhechegahd4-«mn (particip. pass, inan.) . . they (things)
were so done.
M
162 A GRAMMAR OF
the General Transitive and Causative verbs, i.e. in the
Inanimate (or universal) form : (p. 38. et seq.)
Note-^The relative sense implied in the piimitiye, E^tu, is, in the derived
transitive form expressed, by the generic attributive of ''manner/' ^sse, m,
CREB. CHIPPEWAY.
Iss^e-H-oyoo 0(Nf Ezh^e(-H)-on {pvy -aun^ (def. obj. anim.).
Iss'e-T-oiP Ood* EzhVToofi (id. inan.).
Is8^e-H-ew<£^oo E2h^e(-H-)6wa (indef. obj. anim.).
l88'e-CH*-eg4yoo Ezh'e-ch-ega (id. inan. pp. 102. 104.).
Iss^e-ch-egasoo Ezhe^-ch-egasoo (part. pass. anim. pp. 111.
113.) et seq-
Iss^e-ch-egat(f^oo EzhVch-egad<£ (id. inan. id.).
* See p. 102» line 6, also Note 90.
CREE.«— INDICATIVE.
{Nef, 4*^.) Iss^e-H-oip^ -h-ow^ -h-oyoo^ (anim. obj.)...(/, &c.) so-
Do-Atm^ i.e. so actuate, or act upon, him (pp. 132. 133.).
(Net% 4^.) Iss'e-T-afi, -Uan, -Uonfy (inan. obj.)...(/, &c.) so-do-«7.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Iss'e-H-tiilb^ -h-ut, -h-a^...(If, &c) I, thou, he, so-do-^tm.
Iss'e-T-icffi, -t-iJi«, »Uat. .,(!{, &c) /, thou, he, 8o-do-t<.
CHIPPEWAY. INDICATIVE.
(Nind, 4t?.) Ezh'e-H-oA, "h-ah, -h-o», (or, -aun)...(/, ^c.) so-do-
him, &ۥ as above.
(Nind, ^c.) Ezh'e-T-oon, -t-oon, -t-oon...(/, 4^.) 8o-Do-t< (id.).
SUBJUNCTIVE.
£zh^e-H-tig, -h-iirf, -h-0(i...(lf, &c.) /, thou, he, ao-vo-him, (id.)
Ezh'e-Too^c^it, 'tod-^H, 'tood,.,(lf,Scc,) I, thou, he, so-Do-it, (id.)
But the English verb^ do (transit), has, in Cree, &c. a second
(physical) Transitive, viz.**
M ii. 4. Ka t6o'idonen^F. . (how) shall I do to thee?
zv. 21. Ke gah (6(mje) t6o-ddhgoow6g $nv.) . . they will do it to you
(because),
zvi. 3. Ke gah 6h7i-nd6o-d(Cl^ooto(^ $d. intens.) . . they will do it to
you (repetit).
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 163
Too-t-um (inan. accus.)...Ae Does U.
T6o-t-on;ayoo (anim. dBit.)...he does (it) to him.
T6o-ch-egc£^oo (inan. indef. obj.)...Ae does.
T^ch-eg^t-(fyoo (part. pass.)...t7 is done.
Etu has, for its Impersonal or indefinite form, EKin
(from Eke, '' subject," &c. p. 135) implying 'Ht is so,"
" it is the case" '' it is passing," '' going on," or the
provincial expression "it is agra*e,"&c.^ (Fr. il s'agit.),
as,
Kutt^ 6ki», (indie.)... «7 will happen, it will be so.
Tan' isp6 6ki»-oopun?... what time, when (past), happen-ed
Tkn* EK^ek f Chip, ahn' een ain-A^K-iimeg^Ar (subj.)...what-
like, is going on, happening, &c.?
Tkne ghee ek6e^ (id.)... what will happen, take place?
Tkne w^yche 6k6ek ?...what from happeneth-t7, from what
cause P
Tane gh6e 6oche 6k^ek ?...what will from fit) happen ?
SUBJUNCTIVE.
xix. 11. Che doo^dhweyun . . that thou do it to me,
ix. 26. Alin'^en gah d6o^6o'g cCree, sk) . . which manner (how ?)
which he has done to thee ?
xiii. 12. 15. Kah t6o-t6onendhg6og , . which J have done to you,
Kah dooddonendhgdog . . id.
XV. 7. Ka tdo-tdhgdoydig (inv.) . . they (indeter. Fr. on) will do it to
you,
vi. 2. Kah dhyi-n-d6o«da%to(^(l {dhyi=^I, intern, n euphon. hef. d, -ddo,
root, 'dahwdd relat. he to them}, . which he did (contin.) to
them,
^ xxi. 1 . Kah eshqu' IhkahmegtIXr dush oonoowh. . when end-happened,
also, these (things). . . .
ix. 30. Ahn' ^n, m&hmdhkahd-dhkahmig sah oowh . . what manner,
(how) wonderful this I
ix. 32. Pahahp^t-ilKU^hki^megi^it; (intens.). . as it has hitherto-hap-
pened, come to pass . . " since the world hegan'^ . . .
M 2
164 A GRAMMAR OF
For its definite inanimate form, Et^-u has EK^E-magt^fi ; in its
Positive sense signifying " it takes place/' &c Privatively, it
implies something wrong, ^^ out of order," &c.
T^' 6thekok ghee ^ke^magdk (posit subj.)*--what quantity
(Anglice "how long*) i.e. "when" (fut) willt< (def.)
happen, take place.
T^' ekk-msigcikf (subj.)...what mattereth it ? i.e. what is
the matter with it }
Note,— To the Conjugational form of the above indefinite Eki-n (Indie.)
Eld-^ (subj.) belong those other Impersonals, N^pi-n. . it is summer ;
Mispoo-fi. . it snows ; and the like.
Eki-w and EKB-majrwn, also, take for their transitive
form the General transitive signs (sing.) -t-an, -t-an,
-t-ow (def.) ; and -g-dn, -g-dn, -g-dyoo (indef.). (p.
104. and Accidence.)^
Net' ek^'e-t-an (def. obj .).../ bring it to pass.
iVe/' ek''e-ch-eg4» (indef. obj.).../ bring to pass, "bring
about"
£ke-ch-egkt(£^oo (part pass.) ..itia brought about, brought
to pass.
Thus the constant elements t, and k, (the initial e being some-
times '^ flattened" into e, = a in fate) of the above verbs Etu and
Ekin, in their active modes, supply the formative energetic t, and
k, (or g) of the General Transitive (and Causative) forms, viz.
-T-an, &c. and -eo-&n, &c. as above. On the other hand, the
Passive t (p. l60) is the ''characteristic" consonant of the Accidental
and Participial Passives.
Note. — This active consonant t, and its derived Unguals (t)ch,j, s, e, &c.
are analogous in character and force to the like " energetic" elements in
the English formatives -ore, -t Te, -t sh, -tze, &c. and to their cognate it in
the energetic prefix en-, e.g. BN-able — and the energetic or active affix -en.
'^xi. 47* Ahn' een (nah?) an-a^iblttun-eg^zeyiin^ . . . . what manner
fthings] happen-make-toe, ** bring to pass ?" " What do
we?"
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 165
e.g. black-EN. As respects position, also, it may almost be said to connect
in like manner the attribute with the object, as, Ne kinwoo-T-an, quasi,
/ length-EN-tY. In the Accidental and Participial passives the same
element (jt or d) is also analogous to the English participial signs d, t,
and (their cognate) ». Cree -ax-. Chip, -an- ; Ital. -aT-, Span. -aD-.
pp. 111. 112. (Vide infra.)
Paragraph VL
Force, Causation, &c. Thus far, then, of the
primary generic modes oi Existence, and the " Simple*'
verbal terms by which they are represented in this
language. The " Attribute" of the verb being, how-
ever (p. 97), a subject of Degree, it must be further
observed respecting certain intensive modes of Energy
or action that the same are, in Cree, represented in a
two-fold manner — ^by Words, and also by Signs.
First, by Words, as the verbal terms corresponding with
the English verbs, (to do, see last Par.) to force, to make, cause, &c.
The attributive roots of these verbs have, in Cree, a composite form,
— ^have two or more " constant" elements (s-k-oo, k-sk, oo-s), and
are transitive, as follows,
[[S£iKoo-h-ayoo...Ae conqu-ers-Atm / subdues, overcomes,
him.
SkKoO'Uow,,,he overcomes it, e.g. a heavy weight]
SkKOo'-c^-h-oyoo ... conqaer^Uke-he'him, he forces, com-
pels, Atm.^
SsiKOo'-cA^-m-oyoo (Special, by Speech, p. 87).-^ "forces,"
prevails on, convinces, him,
KasK'e-t-(^w...Ae causes, " effects," t^.^*
®*xvi.33. Nin gi sh^goo-je-c^igr. . I have conquered-like-, " overcome"
them.
^ xvii. 2. Che kkhshke-od (subj. anim.) . . that he have " power" over
them,
r. 27, Che klihshke-t-eferf (id. inan.) that he " execute" it.
166 A GRAMMAR OF
Oose-h-oyoo ... from-do-(eth)-^-Atm^ i. e. he produces^
^' makes," him.**
Oose-t-oit^...Ae "makes" it.
This last verb is the transitive of
Ooche-oo. . .firom-eth-A€.
Ooch6-fiuig^fi...from-eth-t<, it proceeds.
Secondly, by Signs, as the active or " energetic" tord (lingual),
fv (labial), ^ or g (guttural), the aspirate A, the diphthongal / (^),
and the conjoint sk, all of which have been already described as
severally expressing, in certain positions, intensive meanings of the
Action, similar to those of the English verbs above mentioned,
(pp. 37 et seq. 18. I9. 86.)
vi. 52. ix. 16. K& ezhe ^Uishketdo-pun (id.). . (how) shall so achieve,
effect•f^Aef &c.
NBGATIVB.
xi. 37. Oo tah g6 kihshkedhseeni (anim.). . he could have " caused'*
him not . . F
V. 30. Nin tah g^8hket6osien (inan.). . (notluDg) I can effect it not.
V. 19. ix. 33. Oo tah g^shket6o5^4»» Qd.) . . he can (or could) effect
it not.
iii. 2. Kah .... dhweyah 00 tah gdhshketoo^en-un (id. plur.). . not
any-one he can effect-no/-/Aem.
vii. 34. Ke kah k&kshket6os4nahwdh Qnan.) ye will not effect it.
XV. 5. Ke tah k^ahkei6os6uihwdh 0d.) . ye can not effect it.
viii. 21. 22. Ke kah gsihshkedosiem (reflect.) . . ye will not pravail.
9«ix. 11. Oo g4 6ozhetoon (inan.) . . ^made it.
ix. 6. Oo g4 6onje 6ozhetoofi (id.) . . he has from (it) made it, &c.
xix. 23. Oo g4 n4w'008ed6(mahw6n (id."". . they four-made it.
ix. 14. K^ 6ozhet6o-pun (id. preter.). . (Jesus) he made it.
iv. 1. (yozheod (subj. anim.). . that he made him or them.
ii. 15. Kah 6ozhetoo{7 Cid. inan.). . that ^ had made it.
X. 25. W&zhetooyahnin . . (subj. inan. flat vowel) . . (which) I make
tJiem (continu.)
xii. 2. Ke 6ozliQ't-dhmahwahw6d (subj. dat.). . they made 6t)/or Aim.
xvii. 24. Ch^pwah oozhechegahdif^ (par. pass, subj.) . . before it is
(was) made,
i. 3. Kah kigoo tah g6 6ozh^chegahdii9»toon (particip. pass.) . . not
anyirthing it would have been made not.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 167
Note. — The emphatic or causatwe, t, affixed to a verbalized noun,
is (with its distinctive accented vowel) correspondent in character to
Anjfl. &c. -fy, as, Nef assinee-Ti^^, (Chip. -Too-n) I petri-PY-«*, lit. I
8tone-Do-»^, or, cause, change, it into stone, (pp. 18. 19. 121.) Vide infra.
The '^intensive" English term^ make, used indifferently in
respect of things, qualities, and actions, is, in Cree, rendered vari-
ously by the Signs above mentioned, as,
Muskesine-K-^^oo (intrans.)...A^ shoe-MAKEs, is shoe-mak-
ing.
Mithkoo-T-oft; (trans.). ..Ae makes it red, i.e. redd-SNS it.
Kissewft-H-ayoo (id.)...Ae angers him, makes him angry.
W4ppe-H-i£^oo (caus.)...Ae makes him see. (p. $9, Mote 17*)
Ne Keeskwiypky^sK-dkiMn (inv.) ... me drunk-MAKeth-t<
(with reference to its properties) ; it causes, make8«
me drunk, (p. 88.)
Section II.
Relation also is, as already stated, a source of
(verbal) attributives.
Relational Terms, however, although often appear-
ing in the verbal form, constitute, primarily, a Class
of Words analogous in character and signification to
the English Definitives and Connectives. But
Relational Expressions^ in their full extent, consist,
in Cree, of both Words and Signs :
Words, as Conjunctions (posit, and priv.). [|See Accidence.'^
Prepositions, pd.]
(Articles, the defin. and the indef. are expressed hj
Construction. See Syntax.)
Pronouns Demon. (See Aocid.) Often used for the
Dejin. Article. (See Syntax.)
Pronouns Personal, Possessive, and Relative. (See be-
low.)
168 A ORAMMAR OF
SioNS^ as the inflected Personal Pronouns.
But the Personal Pronouns also are expressed both by Words
and by Signs.
By Words, as, N6tha, /; K6tha, thou; W^tha, he, she, or U,
&c. Ow^uk (indeterm.) some one ; K^kwdn (indef.) something ;
used absolutely, e.g. in answer to a Question ; or, for the sake
of Emphasis. See p. 51 et seq., also Accidence.
By Signs, as the Pronominal adjuncts of the verb in their
inflected ^' Relations" or Cases, comprising Agent, Object, End, in the
active and passive, determinate, indeterminate and indefinite, forms
(pp. 25. 99. 107. 111. 117. and Accidence).
The Ablative Case, generally expressed by the Preposition,
oo(t)che, or w^che (flat vowel Note42)yrom, hy, or with; Chip. oonfe,
wainfe ; may, when " instrumentive," be also expressed by a verbal
Sign. (pp. 20. 121.)
The Relations of (verbal) Manner, or the Moods, are also, in
Cree expressed by Words and Signs.
By Words, as the Optative, Potential, &c. auxiliary Particles.
By Signs, or Inflections, distinctive of 1. The Declarative or
Indicative ; 2. The Subordinate or Subjunctive ; and 3. The Im-
perative, Moods.
Note. — The English Infinitive is, in Cree,* resolved into the Subjunc-
tive. (See Syntax.)
The Relations of Time, or the Tenses, are also expressed both
by Words and by Signs.
By Words, as the Auxiliary particles, Kdh or Gdh (p. 67),
of the fut Indie. " shall, or will :" Ke or Ghee, the Compound of
the Present, " have ;" &c.
By Signs, as the terminational -ti (anim.;, -pun (inaq.) ; Chip.
'bun (anim. and inan.), of the preterite. Indie. &c. Angl. ^ed, (or
did,) was (see Accidence) ; the " Iterative" of the Indie, the " flat
vowel" of the Subj. and the il or g of the Imperat expressive of
" indefinite" time. (pp. 71, 73.)
The Pronoun Relative also is two-fold ; the i^ar-
TiCLE Ka or Ga (p. 67), who^ whom^ which, referring to
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 169
a definite — the flat vowel (p. 73 et seq.) to an in-
definite — Antecedent or Subject. See Syntax.
Section III.
Privation, in its largest sense, I shall, as respects
this language, consider as a genns comprising three
species, viz.
1. Simple Negation, (p. 6S and Accidence.)
2. Contrariety, already noticed.
3. The particular mode now before us, and which, for want of
an authorized special denomination, we shall call the
Adversative mode.
The first two of these, implying simply, 1. the Absence, 2. the
Extinction, of an attribute, are, as opposites, definite in their signifi-
cation ; the last, or third species, is indefinite in its '' adversative"
meaning.
The collective body of terms which we consider as
composing this (adversative) portion of the language,
have, for the most part, a negative aspect, and may,
perhaps, be characterized generally as importing,
1. Lessening, receding, declining, deviating, withdrawing, de-
grading, falling off or away, &c. from some middle point, physical or
moral; being another mode of " Diversity" (p. 153.). Having re-
ference to moral subjects, words of this class have commonly an ill
sense.
A leading root of this *' species" is a modification of the ultimate
Eth (p. 135, line 5.), viz. lih or Ith-k, constituting, as primary
or accessory attribute, a descriptive (adversative) element; although
often obscured by special modification or by dialect, it may be also
often recognised. In both its '^ converted" and dialective forms, it
becomes (the i only being ^^ constant") it, il, in, isk, ik, ig, &c. — ana-
logous, seemingly, to the English privative prefixes, il, in, ig, &c.
as in-sane, il-lude, ig-noble, &c.
170 A GRAMMAR OF
Ith^en6-woo...Ae recovers (hb health).
Ith^en6-ka-h(fyoo...A€ causes him to recover, restores him.
Ith^ipai(^n7...t^ recedes, slants from wards, as a sloping bank.
Ith6wiin-issii...^ lacks food, is starving.
Ith^is-atch . . . withstanding-ly , resisting-ly .
Ith^ewaik . . . nevertheless.
Ith^esah^^oo...Ae declines (from), rejects, him.
Ith^'esah^o (reflect.)...^ constrains himself, forbears.
Ith^e-skow(fyoo...^e withstands, re-sists, him.
Ith'eway-piith^tt...«7 lessens, falls away (as a swelling).
Ith''eway-gapowoo...Ae stands back.
Ith'ewaystt...Ae is from ward, froward, perverse.
Ith^eway-immoot/A; ^t-ee ... /Aey airay- haste from ward,
*^ make oflF."
IthkVputhu...»^ falls off, away, sinks, (as water in a river).
Ithk^etoo (neut)...^ is purged.
IthkVn-ttiw...Ae drains it (with the hand), e.g. milks it.
Ithk^oo-n-ttm...Ae with-draws (id.), takes awatf, it.^"^
IthkVh-ttm...Ae lessens, sucks up, it, (as with a bucket,
sponge, &c.)
Ith^ek-^t(£^oo...^e wt^^-draws, goes away. (Fr. il s'^carte.)
Ith'eka-th6wtt^ . . . they away-fly.
I th^ek£i-p4t6w2i^ . . . thei^ away-run.
Ith'^ekk-b^^oo...^ away-eth him, reject-eth him.
Ith6k-^tissti...^e is reserved, sullen, disagreeable.
Ithk^itcheg6woo...Ae is iMBecile.
Ith''ik-6o-magf<n...t7 w concealed, obscured, by it
Wxvii. 15. Che ^koo-n-ahdwdh lud-wdh'] (subj. anim.). ...that thou
withdraw them.
xi. 41. Ke ^koo-U'dhmoowdd (id. inan.). . they have withdrawn it.
XX. 23. Wdgwdin (sah) kkoo-n-ahmdhwdg-wdin (dir. dat. flat vow.). .
whomsoever ye withdraw-^o-Atm.
'Ekoo-U'dhmdh'wdh (inv.id.). . they are withdrawn, ''remitted"
to him.
XX. 1. Ke ek'oo-n-egahd<% (part. pass.). . that it was withdrawn,
xi. 39. Ekoo-n-rfAwoo* (imperat.). . withdraw-ye-tf.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 171
Ithikw-uskwufi...^Atc^-cloud-i8-t^, it is overcast.
Ithk^ikoop4yoo...t< is rimy (weather). &c
Note, — ^The derived formatiye -wit-, implying Accident, &c. is " priva-
tive." (p. 87. and Accidence.)
To the same (adversative) class we refer, by " conversion," &c.
such words as the following :
Eg'k (=ithk^) Cree, subord. neg. not : used with Subj. and
ImpercU,
Eg'awaudj (adv)... hardly, scarcely.
£g^kwissti-2iA;...//iey are rare, scarce.
Isk^oosK...Ae is weary.*
Fiskoot^^oo (intens.)...^e is tired by walking.
I''i8koo-gkpowoo...Ae is tired by standing.
Isk^oo-puthtt...!^ remains, is overplus.
Ab-ithkoo-n-Mw...Ae wnties (by hand), unbinds, loosens, it,
Kech^-ithkoo-n-ttm...Ae complete-wt^Mraws, unbolts, takes
to pieces, it,
W-ith'ip-issM...Ac is dirty, foul.
P-ith^is-iss2i . . . Ae is numb(ed) . /
N-eetham-iss2i . . . Ae is weak.
K-ith4sktt...Ae lies, speaks falsely.
P-ith''an^(£^oo...Ae peels it, as a fish of its scales.
Ch-ees''e-h-ayoo...Ae cheats, deceives, him.
P-issin-dtiss» . . . Ae is mi^hievous.
P-issekw-^tisstt (=p-w^oo-)...Ae is wick-ed.
M-isse-h-ayoo...Ae injures, harms^ him, qu. Angl. amiss,
M-isse-m-oyoo (8peci.)***id. by speech.
K-iss6-m-ayoo...^ affronts him.
K-isse-wassf«...Ae is offended, angry.
P-ist4-h-tim...Ae miss-eth-t^, as a mark.
P-ist6-n-tim...Ae mis-takes-i^ (with the hand).
P-eek^isse(^ft^...t< ismist-y, hazy.
S-eek'utchti ... ^ is lean.
« iv. 6. Ahy-AKOoztd (intens. flat vowel) . . as A« was very weary.
172 A GRAMMAR OF
P-eek'oo-n-oyoo (=p-ithkoo-)...Ae breaks t^ (by hand).
P-eeg^skattiiit (= p-ithk-) ... Ae is melancholly. (Fr. il
s'ennuie.) &c.
2. As expressive of lessening, &c. this element ith becomes in its
lingual ^* conversions" the General Diminutive of the Adjective
and Neuter Verbs, as well as of the Noun Substantive, viz. -is, or,
'ish, Anglic^, -ish.
This '' diminutive," -<>-, is also, as distinguished from acA- (p.
156), indicative of quick motion, as in the generic or formative
ending, -iss^-emoo.
It-iss^emoo (intran.)...Ae flees, speeds, thither.
It-W-awayoo (tran.)...Ae dispatches him thither.
Correlatively, or as opposed to ooth-, or oot-^ from, or out of,
the same (adversative) element -I/-, or eet^, signifies in or into.
P-eet'-che...in, within.
P-eet'oo-gayoo (Chip. b-eend''ega)...Ae into-eth, entereth.
It also implies inward, intellectual, moral. (Vide infra.)
A^k- or awk'-, and kkoo- (awkoo-)...i;e/^ back or bad, are both
" privative" and " intensive."
Awk-ekin (p. l63)..,it is AWK-ward, ''back-ward."
[Awkw-ah (prepos.)... behind.]
Awkw-u«...«/ is very bad, sore, acrid.
Awkoo-SM...^e is very sick or ill.
To the same (adversative) class belongs the Passive, or reverse,
form of theCreeandChippeway verb: -eet, -oot; 4nd,'0(md. (p. l60.)
Section IV.
Of Intensity or Amplitude. — We come now to
our fourth or last General head, comprising and
modifying the other three, namely, Intensity.
The Cree language, in describing, or assigning
names to, Existence, &c. and their modes — to Things,
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 173
Qualities, Energies, &c. — may be said to contemplate
the latter as subjects, not only of" Manner" or Kind,
but also of Degree or Intensity, as,
Th-6oti« (Manner^ simple)... t< blows.
K-^stin (id. intensive)...!/ stormetb.
Thith^ippu...Ae is active, nimble.
Kith'ippti...Ae hastens, is very speedy.
Ath^im-isstt...^ is difficult.
Awk'6w-i8s«...Ae is very hard, cruel.
AwkV^-Wisstt (double intens.) ..id. in ^'Disposition."
I^immu,,.he speaks.
Kisse-wayoo...Ae speaks loud.
K& K6che-m(^...Ae proud-, lofty-talks, boasts.
Jl^chesoo,,,he eats.
Kaw8^iik-ayoo...Ae gorges.
Nipp^e-wtt»...f/ is wet.
Awk^oo-stiit...t< is soaked.
Nkp&y-woo...Ae is a man.
Ook''em6w-woo...Ae is a chief, a governor.
Thk'dw,,.it is cold (to the touch).
Awk V-uttin ,,.it is frozen.
Ath'im- tin... tV is bad, difficult.
Awk^w-tfn...t/ is very bad, sore, acrid.
A^ssk-gdryoo (trans.) ...he feeds.
Miik''oo-s(f^oo...Ae feasts.
Sesk^e-to^oo (acdd. pass.)...t7 is lighted.
Awk^'w-^wk^oo-Zoyoo (id.)...t/ blazes.
NlppS^h-a^oo...Ae kills him or them.
Skw4''-h-ayoo...Ae massacres, slaughters, them.
It-^e-t-tim...^ 80-thinks it.
Kisk-ethe-t-ttm...Ae knows it
174 A GRAMMAR OF
ThlJc^e-n-ayoo...A« pushes him.
Kw&^-kw&-n-ayoo...Ae thrusts him (with force).
It^ttimoo-t^(^...Ae attaches it (to something).
Klk^timoo-t-(^...Ae sticks^ fastens^ it (id.).
l'&nane-h~d^oo...he speaks (to) him,
K6t'oo-t-ayoo...Ae noise-eth^ reproveth, him.
K6glL-m-ayoo...Ae scolds him.
Oot^e-n-egd^oo ... he takes.
Musk^^-t-w4yoo. ,he takes forcibly^ robs.
Oot6mma-w-(f^oo...Ae hammers^ beats^ him.
Pdck^omma-w-ifyoo ..he strikes with force^ knocks^ him.
Too'-t'Um ...he does it.
Kask^e-t-otv...he causes^ effects^ it.
As8fe-n-um...he assembles^ brings together^ them.
M6w^utche-t-oft'...Ae accumulates^ heaps together^ them.
Metho-^themoyoo.. he well-thinks^ likes^ him.
Cheek^-^themoyoo.. he thinks highlj of, esteems, him.
Shk^e'h-ayoo...he loves him.
AVow-6the-m-ayoo ..he anti-thinks, dislikes, him.
F}^^wk-t'affoo...he hates him.
Oot6ete-n-^^oo...Ae attacks him.
M6osk^esta-wayoo...^e rushes upon him.
Ootiim'e-h-ayoo...^e disturbs, interrupts, him.
Mick^oosk^che-h-ifyoo...Ae troubles, perplexes^ him.
KiikV^ke-h-^^oo...Ae harrasses, torments, him.
Kdwkw-^thet«m...A^ qu. very acrid-thinks, is jealous.
Kow-issti ...he IB rough.
Musk6w-isstt ...he is strong, hard.
Awkoo-sti...Ae is very sick or ill.
Awg6w-isstf...Ae is very hard, austere.
Koosekw-tittt<...Ae is heavy, weighty.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 175
Kuske-pittihn...Ae hard-^ dose-pulls^ it, draws it together
tight
Kuske-tibbisk . . . very thick darkness.
Ku8k-6thetum...Ae strong-thinks^ is eager^ impatient.
Sok-i8Sti...Ae is very strong-like^ firm (in mind)^ determined.
Groost-achfi (intran.).. he is very afraid. (Fr. il cr-aint.)
Kaskaska-h-2^m...Ae scrapes it-
Kookoos.. a hog.
Kawk-w&...a porcupine
Keche, and A^k or Akoo^ ^^ intensive" expressions of opposite
character^ signify^ generally — ^the former, what is pleasing, ex-
cellent, SfC, having the stress on the foUowing vowel e — ^the latter,
what is PAINFUL or cfi^-pleasing, reverse, Sfc. having the principal
accent, when used emphatically, on the preceding (or initial) vowel
d or aw. The former we class as •' positive" — ^the latter as ^^ pri-
vative."
Kechiit...f/ is prime, first-rate, excellent.
Keche-Ethinu (homo)... a superior-man.
Kesh^Ethinu (id)... an aged man.
Kees-itchewun...t^ is very swifl current.
Kees^-tk. . . the sky.
Kees'-lk<^...i< is day-light
Kist-dchewu7t...t^ is (a) chief, principal, current, i.e. river.
Kist-^emoo (reflect) „,he prime-thinks-Atm^/j^ is haughty,
proud.
Awkoo-stt „heis^^ very" sick, ^^bad," or ill.'
Awkw-un...t^ is " very bad," strong, biting, acrid.
Awkw&-giimtt...t^ is very strong liquor
(Aw)Kw^kwttit (impers.)...!^ (the earth) trembler, quake-j.
(Aw)Kootupe-ntfm...Ae reverses it, turns it upside down.
K-awk-eth6w (intens. number)... all.
K-awk-ek4y (id. time) ..always.
But Intensity of Signification, in respect of either
'' Extent" or " Degree'' (p. 91), is, in Cree, often ex-
pressed both by Words, and by Signs.
176 A GRAMMAR OF
By Words — ^Absolute^ as above. Indeterm. Pers. Pronouns.
Accessory, as "intensive" Adverbs of Manner, Ctuan-
tityy &c (See Accidence.)
By Signs — ^Augmentative, sk, w, I=JE, (pp. 21, 69 et seq.)
Causative General, h, t, k, sk, (pp. 18 et seq. 38,
39. note 17, p. 86.)
Special w, h, sk, (p. 86.),
Plur. and Indef. pers. pron. &c. -k, -knewoo, w, g,
ow, (pp. 73. 98. et seq. 110).
Among the " intensive" signs used in Indian Speech, Emphasis
and Accent, must not be omitted.
Note.— These varying modifications of Vocal Expression, inadequately
represented in writing, seem to constitute an essential, if not the vital,
part of Indian language. With a curious aptitude they are acquired
evem by children, simultaneously with un-emphatic sounds ; and there
needs, perhaps, no further evidence of their efficiency than (and it is
worthy of note) as they are instrumental to our understanding the im-
perfect Articulations and "Conversions'' abounding in infantile discourse;
and which, but for the appropriate expression of these modifying Signs,
would often be unintelligible.
Indeed Intensity, as respects both the Vocal
Expression and its Signification, may, in strictness,
be considered as modifying generally (absolutely or
relatively) all the Parts of Speech, in other words,
the whole Cree tongue. (See also, Accidence , viz.
Pron. Demon. Adv. &c.)
Note. — It seems to be worthy of observation that, in the intensive Ex-
amples above adduced, as well as in those others referred to, the gut-
tural k (or g) and the labial 00, or w, are especially prominent, as
constituting, singly or combined, (with their accompanying vowels,) an
integral part, or the whole, of the intensive member modifying the
exemplifying Term, whether the same be attributive, formative, or per-
sonal accident: This circumstance will hereafter furnish occasion for a
few remarks on the relative powkrs of Articulate Sounds, as they are,
in Cree, expressive of feebleness, or force, of Signification : — ^a topic
involving an Hypothesis respecting the Origin of this Language. (Vide
infra).
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 177
Section V.
Of the Compound Verb.
The Root or attributive member of the Cree Verb
is often modified in its meaning by an accessory or
secondary attribute, forming together what we shall
call a Compound Verb.
Note. — The Simple Verb, indeed, consisting, as in some European
languages, of two parts — ^root and affix — ^predicate and subject — ^is itself a
Compound expression, and more especially when in combination with
the various formative, &c. adjimcts of which it is susceptible : the root
remaining however the same, unaltered both in form and meaning, we
class such terms as Simple verbs, as above.
The diffisrent parts of speech furnish many kinds of secondary
as well as of primary (p. l6.) attributives^ which combine together
in the relations of Concord^ Government^ &c. (see Syntax) as,
A Noun with a Noun.
Assinnee-wutcheea . . . the rock (y) -mountains.
An Adnoun with a Noun.
Wap-istekwan^-w . . . white-head(ed)-is-Ae.
T^k-ippee-k4yoo . . . cold-water-maketh- Ae.
A Verb with a Noun, in a direct relation.
Kick-assam&yoo...wear-snowshoe(eth)-Ae, he wears snow-
shoes.
K6s8e-cheech-<£^oo...wipe-hand(eth)-Ae, he cleans, ^^ wash-
es," his hands.
A Verb with a Noun, in an oblique relation.
Kipwutt4wmoo-akoon-dyoo...Ae suffocate-snow-eth...he is
snow-suffocated, suffocated bi^ snow.
An Adverb with a Noun.
Oosam''e-toon^-«<. . .too-mouth-(ed)-is-A€, ''he talks too much."
A Preposition with a Noun.
Tdstow-ask-oostow . . .between-wood(s)-puts-Ae it,
N
178 A GRAMMAR OF
A Verb with a Verb, one being in the relation of G&rund,
Fesk-oot;ayoo...tire-'walketh-Ae, he is tired 6y walking or
going about.
I<eskoo-t^pdyoo...tire-hauleth-Ae... he is tired by hauling,
e.g. a sledge. ^
An Adverb with a Verb.
Nuskw-iittin...quick-fTeezes-f7, it freezes suddenly.
Sok-^emoo f reflect)... Ae very-thinks, -intends, is resolute.
The following Adverbial prefixes are thus in very frequent use, viz.
oot', or w^', from; iU, to; pe^fpey', or peyt-, hitherward; litte-, fromward,
away. (Chip, oonj-, ezhe^, be-, ahne'.)
A Preposition with a Verb.
Tet-astc;n;...Ae sur-places it, places it upon (something).
To this head also belongs a manner of expression which is of
frequent occurrence in Indian speech, and requires our eq)ecial
notice. Certain generic nouns or names (few in number, and
chiefly used in Composition) are constantly annexed to the attri-
butive when the Subject of the Verb comes under either of such
classes.
Note, — In the English phrase these generic expressions are generally
omitted as expletive, or not necessary to precision.
The principal of these Substantive signs are the following : -ask-,
signifying. Wood; -appisk-. Metal or Stone; -gum-. Liquid or
Liquor ; -pegg-^ Line or Cord ; -puck-, Le<xf; -g6minik. House,
&c. Thus speaking of (e.g.) a stick or tree, mistick, we say,
[]KhiW"00sz^...A^ is long.]
Kinw-c^^-oo8Z£...long-ft^ooef-is-^e. Angl. (simply) it is long.
fW^-issa ... ^e is crooked.]
W^'dsk'i8Bu...CToo\ied'tvood'iS'he. Angl. it is crooked.
Of a Stone, asstnnee ; a Metal, pem-dppisk ; as,
[W6w-i83u,..he is round.]
W6we''dppisk'issu,..round'Stone'i8 he. Angl. it is round.
Of Water, &c. nippee, &c. as,
[;Tak.ow...itiscold.]
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 179
T^ke-^am-u...cold-/»gtfMf-is-d. AngL U is cold.
Tkke-gdtn'Unip]pee...co\d'liquid'h'-U the water^ the water
is cold.
[[Kinw-ofi/ ,.M is long. lippee. . .a cord.]]
Kinwi-p^gg-un,..\ong-cord'iS'i^. Angl. it is long.
[Sk\i'eHn.,.ii is (come) forth. jV^epeea... leaves.]]
Sake~puck'dtv.,.i88ue-leqf~is'iL Angl. the leaves are out.
, Esp'dsk'W-iow...high-tDood-'is''ii. It is high woods,
Mistick-w-(lfA:-oo-skdiv...tree-ft^ooc2-thick-if ii. It is thick
woods^ a forest -skoff^ augment, p. 70. Note 38.
The seomdary attributive may itself be a Compound^^ as^
Mt^M'oo-mtit-&ppwooy...r^-6erry-juice^ i.c. wine.
Primary Attributes will not coalesce or associate together. (See
Syntax.;
Thus far of the qualifying of one attribute by
another.
But the signification of the verbal root is modified or varied in
two ways: 1. By Words^ as above. 2. By Signsh— as in words
where some departure frcnn the exact meaning of the primitive root
is implied. This occurs both in simple and in Jigurative terms.
Words of the description here brought under notice^ constitute our
first class of Derivative verbs (p. 68.).
The modifying Signs alluded te are^ among others^
1. An Initial consonant^ as,
P-oos^-tt...Ae em-BARKS^ from oos'ee, a canoe^ boat^ or bark*
P-ucKoocHE-n-oyoo ... he em -bowels him, from Met-
ucKoosEB-ttA:^ the bowek.
S-E8K-a-Afifrt...Ae puts fire to^ ignites, it (firom EsK^oot&yoo,
fire).
2. A Retrenchment of initial letters, as,
(£s)Kootk-wa^oo...Ae makes, lights, a fire, (from Esk^oot-
dyoo, fire).
99 ii, 3. 10. Zh6hwe-min-&hboo . . yellow-berry-juice, wine.
n2
180 A GRAMMAR OF
3. A " Conversion" of Consonants or Vowels, or both, as,
Miss-oft;...t< t^ \axge, great.
MEECH^-6t...a GREAT many.
PEBCH''-oiv...a GREAT distance it is*
W6we-Aistt...t< is full (moon) ; from Wow-issu.., it is round.
4. A Repetition of initial letters ; &c. as,
P^-pamoot4yoo...Ae walks about (Fr. il se promene) ; from
p6mootayoo ...he walks.
Kd''KE'P'iti88u...he is stupid ; from Ki'p-(^w...he is stopped
up.
Ni5-NEV-ewissM...Ae is ashamed, MORTi-fied; from Ni'p-m,
he is dead.
WASK'-umme-k^sick ... a clear-liquid-sky ; from WASEG'um-
mu, it is clear liquid. &:c.
Note. — ^rhe Derivatives here alluded to seem to be analogous to such
English words.as the following : (to) Don, Doff, &c. from on, off, &c.
Kinds of Verbs. Returning to the second head of
the first General division of our subject (p. 15), we
have to observe that the Verb may be considered as
of three kinds — the Impersqnal, the Intransitive, and
the Transitive, in their various modes, as already
exemplified.
Forms. The forms of the Verb, as exhibited in
its numerous inflections, are the subject of the last
General head, which comprises the topics of Conju-
gation, Voice, Mood, Tense, &c. in the positive^ suppo-
sitivey and doubtful (and, in the Chippeway, negative)
forms. (See Accidence.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 181
PART 11.
ACCIDENCE.
Chapter I.
Sect. 7.
Having, in the preceding pages, given an outline
of the Cree and Chippeway Verb and its forms, I
proceed now to enter more fully into the grammatical
details of these languages — and, first,
OP THE NOUN.
The Cree and Chippeway Nouns are divisible into two classes^
analogous to those of Gender in European languages^ but more
appropriately denominated, in these tongues^ the Animate and the
Inanimate classes — ^the former in the plural ending in "uk or -fviik
(Chip, -fig, -og, or 'fvug), the latter in -d (Chip. 'Cen, -«»).'•*
CRBE.
CHIPPEWAY.
A Bear
Mdskwah
Mtikwah
Bears
M^kw-uk
Mdkw-wg
A Duck
S^seep
Sh6esheep
Ducks
S^6e^uk
Sh^esh6ep-ug
>«• i. 6. 30. En4neh (homo). . a man.
i. 4. Eninewug (id.) . . men, people,
xxi. 12. Oog^emoA . . a chief, " the Lord."
vii. 26. xix. 6. Oog^emo^. . chiefs^ ** the rulers," " officers."
i. 1. Ek^eddowin . . a word,
vii. 9* £ked6owin-ttn . . words.
182 A GRAMMAR OF
A Shoe
Mdskesin
M^esin
Shoes
MtLsk.e8^~it
Muck^esin-un
A River
oeepee
S^epee
Rivers
S^^epee-a
S^epee-ivtin
Aperscm
I'd
Persons
V^uck'^^
A thing
Vd
Things
r-ee
The Animate plural^ -uk (Chip, ^ug), is^ when in regimen with
the third person^ changed into d (Chip. "Un). See Syntax,
Many Inanimate nomis^ however^ from possessing some real or
imaginary Excellence^ are personified or class as Animates.
Abstract and Instrumentive nomis^ ending respectively in -win
and '^gun (sing.)^ class as Inanimates.
^ofc.— This Substantive ending, -twfi, appended to verbal roots, or
their formatioes, is equivalent, generally, to the English terminations,
-emce, "mess, -ment, "ion, -ty, ing, &c. as is, in like manner, the termination
-gtm to the -er, &c. of English Instrumentive nouns.
The Substantive termination **ofi, quasi^ " made," is used to
signify an image or representation of a thing.
Nisk^...a goose; l^isk-ekdn... an artificial goose, used by
the Indians as a decoy.
Wdtee...a vault or hole in the earth.
W&tee-k6n...an artificial vault, a cellar.
Mistidk...a tree ; Mistick-oo-k6n ..an artificial tree, a long
pole fixed up^ e.g. as a beacon, &c.
Oowd8sis...a child; Oow4ssis-c^6n-tf (dim.)...a Uttk arti-
ficial child^ a doll.
Nouns have iheir Diminutives, ending, in the singular number,
in "is or 'Oos,
101 vii. 25. A^yaho^ . . persons, " them."
ill. 12. A'hyeccn . . things.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 183
Moost^oos^ a buffalo (bison) Moodt^oosW
Mistick^ a tree Mistick-oof
Mook'oman^ a knife Moc^oman-t^
Assinnee^ a stone As8inn4f
It may be added^ that the force of the Diminutive is encreased^
generally^ by the " conversion" of the casual^ as well as the
" constant/' s, into its cognates sh, or {t)sh (t)ck, especially
the latter^ as^
Oow4ssis...a child.
Oowishish...a little child.
Oow&(t)chee(t)ch...a very little child.
Note, — ^The above modification of the Consonant seems analogous to
Angl. " little'* when pronounced " leettle ;" &c.
In some cases a modification of the Diminutive sign^ as^ ^ais,
-aish, or aitch, signifies mean, defective, contemptible, &c.
Op Cases.
The Cases of the Noun are transferred to the Verb (see Part I.),
with the exception of the Vocative, which^ in Cree^ takes in the
plural, -e/a. 102
Woman ! Eskwayoo !
Women ! Eskway w-e/tcA: !
Such a one ! Vd !
Id. plur. V^etkk!
The Ablative case also may be expressed (as well as by the
Verb, p. 121) by the Preposition ootfche (Chip, oon'je), from, with,
&c. placed before or after its noun, &c. (See Syntax,)
Q/* leather (material) Pahk^^gin oot'che.
With a needle (instrument) S^p6o-n-egun (pierc-er) oot'che.
^^ iv. 11. Equ6 . . a woman,
viii. 10. Eqult ! . . (0) woman !
iv. 11. Oog^emah! .. (0) chief, sir!
xi. 41' xii. 27. 28. N'oosd! . . (0) father !
184 A GRAMMAR OF
From the tent {at) Meeg^ewap-tcit ooi'chc
From the ceiluig^(e.g. it hangs^ Espim-tcil oo/^cAe^ i.e.yromoiihigh
or falls)
Becaume it rains Hd kimmew^il (subj.) oolfcke
The cognate labials (for so I designate them^ vide infra)^ oo
and m, are^ in certain positions^ possessive signs — ^the former when
prefixed (in the possess, verb^ p. 140)^ the latter when affixed^ to
the noun possessed — both generally expressing the force of the
English ^^ intejisive" term^ own, as,^^^
Ustis. . .a mitten or glove ; Ustis-u^. . .gloves.
Nef U8tis-t9ii...my own glove.
Net^ ustis-tfn-ti^...iit^ own gloves.
Note, — Oo (or oot) is a mode of the preposition oot^che, of, from, &c.
The Local (or Locative) case, as it has been appropriately called^
is expressed by the affixed sign^ -Ar or ->g, with generally a connecting
vowels as, -oifc, -t*, 5k, (Chip, -g, -ng, ^ing, -ong, &c.) implying, at,
in, on, &c. as,^®*
W&tee ... a vault or cave.
W^itee-i&...vault^tn, in a, or the, vault.
Mewdt...a bag.
Mew^iUik ..in the bag.
Mistick...a tree.
Mistick-oifc...t9i or on the tree.
iw iv. 32. vi. 27. M^im . . food, *' meat."
iv. 34. Ne m^im-tm . . my food, " my meat."
iv. 23. Kezhig . . day, " hour."
vii. 30. Oo kezhig-oom . . his day, " his hour."
Oog^emah . . chief, principal, king.
111. 15. JTecT oog^emdm . . thy king.
»w iii. 17. Ahk'e* . . the earth, *' the world."
iii. 17. 19. Ahk^eeii^ . . in, or i^ito, the earth, or '' world."
i. 33. Hiibeh . . water.
ii. 4. N^b^Ni^ .. fit the water.
vi. 1. 18. K^che-gahm^ . . the great water, the sea.
xxi. 1. 7. K^hegahm^en^ . . at, in, or into the sea,
iii. 10. Israel-tfi^ . . in Israel.
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 185
If the noun be used with a possessive pronoun in the plural
number^ the above-mentioifled " constant" elemait (k or g) is
affixed to the latter, as,i»*
[^Ne wut...m^ bag.
Ne wut-tA:...m my bag.
Ne vrutrendn.,.aur (l.S.) bag.^
Ne wut-enaAr...m our bag.
Section II.
OP THE PRONOUN.
The Algonquin Pronouns are, as in European lan-
guages, Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Relative,
Interrogative, and Indefinite.
Personal Pronouns.
CREE,
CHIPPEWAY.
I
N^th&
Neen
Thou
K^th&
Keen
He or it
Wdthft
Ween
We (J and Ae, or/
N6tha-nan
N6n-awun
and^Aey)
We (/ and thou, or
Kdtha-now
K^n-awun
/ and ye)
Ye
K6tha-wow
K6n-ahwah
They
W6tha-wow
/
W^n-ahwah
10* [xix. II, Ne y6wh . . my body, '' me."
XV. 4. 5. ^e y&tiwing. . tit my body, ** in me.''
XX. 20. Oopema oo weydwh . . the side (of) Ms body, '' his side."
iii. 36. Oo w4y^wmg .. tit or on Aw body, " on him."]
ix. 19. Ke gw4&^wdh . . your son.
V. 38. viii. 37. XV. 4. Ke yHhw-^wdng . . tit your body, " in you."
xvi. 6. Ke 6ji-ew6^ . . iii ymir heart.
viii. 17. X. 34. Ke kShgekwima-ewd-ng . . in your law.
viii. 21. Ke bahtahzewin-etoc^-n^ . . in your wickedness, sins.
186 A 6KAMMAR OF
Possessive Pronouns... Absolute.
The Possessive Pronouns are expressed before nouns as the
Personal before verbs^ that is^ in the abbreviated form; in the
following examples^ however^ (with a few others) we have N'
instead of Net'; K' instead of Kef; and euphony suppresses the Oot
of the third person. '<>• (See Poss. Pron. Relat.)
J«« ii. 16. V. 17. vi. 32. &c. N'oos . . wy father,
viii. 19. iToos . ..% father,
vi. 42. Oos-tm . . his father,
iv. 12. viii. 53, N*oo^en6n (1.3.) . . our father.
viii. 38. 41. 44. 56. K*ooMwdh . . your father,
iv. 20. vi. 31. N*oo%en6n^ (1.3.) . . our father-5.
vi. 49. 58. K'oosewd^ . . your father-^.
vi. 51. Ne wiyoB ,,myi
iv. 49. Ne n^jahnis . . my child.
vii. 6. 8. Nin kizheg-oom . . my day, " time."
V. 24. Nmd^ ^eddowin . . my word.
X. 16. MimP enwdywin . . my saying, ** voice.''
iv. 50. xix. 26. Ke gwis . thy son.
V. 8. Ke n^b6hgun . . thy bed.
iv. 42. Ked^ ^eddowin . . thy saying, word.
vii. 3. Ked^ Hhnook^win-tm . . thy labours, work^.
i. 42. 45. Oo gwisun . . his son.
vi. 52. Oo w^yoB . . his flesh.
V. 28. Ood' ^keddowin . . his voice.
i. 27. Oo m^hkezin-tffi . . his shoe-^.
iii. 21. Ood* ^hecheg&win-tfn (act.) ,.his doing-^, '' his deeds."
iii. 11. Mil deb^jemdowinen^ (1.3«) . . our relation, ** witness."
ix. 19. Ke gw^-etooA. . your son.
ix. 41. Ke b^t&hz^wiQ-eiP(^ . . yom badness, " sin."
xix. 14. Ked" oog^em^hm-aoii . . your chief, " king."
vii. 6. Ke k^Mg^mm-ewdh . . your day.
iii. 1. xix. 19* Ood^ oog^emlihm*aooii . . their chief.
iii. 19. Ood* 6ikeeh!eg6mn>-ewdh (act.) . . 4heir doing, '^ deeds."
viii. \7» Oo tebllijemdowin-etoifA . . their relation, " testimony."
THE CR££ LANGUAGE.
187
CREE.
My father ^oot4wee
Thy father X'oot4wee
His father Ootawee
Ottr(/ and Ae) father jY'ootawee-n^n
Our (/ and ihou) K' ootksf et-n6rv
Your K'ootkyfee-oowdtv
Their
My fathers
Thy father*
His &ther*
Our (I and he) &c.
Our (I and thou) &c.
Your father J
Their father*
Ootawee-oow(^
CHIPPEWAY,
N'oos
ICoos
Oos
N'oos-endn
K'oos^^enbn
K'oos-efvdh
Ooa'^ervdn
N'ootdwee-tt^
K'ootdwee-M^
Ootdwee-^
N'ootdwee-niin-ii^
K*ootkwee-n6w'Uk
K'ootawcJfr-oow6w-ttA: K'oos'-ew6-g
Ootdwee-oow6w-& Oos^-ewdh-n^on
N'oos'-i^
K'oos'-ug
Oos'un
bl'oos'en6n-ig
K'oos'-en<ki-i^
Possessive Pronou ns . . . Relative.
These are no other than the Possessive form of the Generic Noun
Fa, Angl. person or thing. (See p. 1S5.) The Ghippeways add
the Possessive m. (p. 184).
CREE. Singular. chippeway.
Net* I'a-n (i.e. my thing)^ mine (==Tny-n) Nihd ahy'ee-m
Kef I'an, thine (= thy-n)
Oot* I'an, his (= his-n^ vulg.)
Net' I'an-en^ (1*3.)> ours
Kef I'an-en6w (1.2.)> ours
Ket' I'an-oow6w, yours
Oof I'an-oow6w, theirs
Plural
Nef I'an-uk^ mine (Fr. les miens)
Kef Tan-uk
Oof I'an-&
Nef Tan-enibi'^uk (1.3.)
Kef ran-en6w-uk (1.2.)
Kef Fan-oowdw-uk
Oof I'an-oow6w-&
Ked' ahy'eem
Opd' ahy'eem
Nind ahy'eem-endn
Ked' ahy'eem-endn
Ked' ahy'eem-ew^
Ood' ahy'eem«ew6n
Nind ahy'eem-ug
Ked' ahy^eem-ug
Ood' ahy'eem-un
Nind ^hy'eem-endn-ig
Ked' ah3r'eem-en6n-ig
Ked^ fthy'eem-ei;^-g
Ood* ahy'eem-ew&h-woii
188
A GRAMMAR OF
Pronouns Demonstrative. *®7
CREE.
CHIP.
This (anim.)
Ow'a
Wowh
(inan.)
Oom'&
Oowh
These (anim.)
Ook'oo (or Ook'ee)
Oogoowh
(inan.)
06hoo (or Oohee)
Oonoowh
That (anim.)
VmA
Owh
(inan.)
Unnem&
Ewh
Those (anim.)
Unnekee
Egewh
(inan.)
Unnehee
En^wh
Singular. crbe. Plural.
A'ywokoo (anim.)^ the self same A'ywokw-tinnick
A'ywokoo (inan.)> id. A'ywokw-6nnee
(See Syntax.)
i<^ i. 15. M^sah %D6wh kHh deb^jenui^(tf^)-^un . . why this (is he)
whom / related Mm,
ix. 19. M^nah w6u>h he gw48'ewdh ....?.. why (is) this your son. . ?
ii. 16. MUhj^weniAr oog^oowh (anim. plur.) . . take ye away these.
xvii. 11. Ooff^oowh. . Bhkfeeng BhyShwug. . these the world-m they are.
iv. 15. Oowh n^h . . this water,
xvi. 17. W^igoonlun oowh inenung (subj.^) . . what (is) this (which)
he saith to us.
viii. 40. K&h ween oowh ke ^zhecheg^e . . not this he has not done.
iii. 22. Oonoowh . . these, " these things.''
XX. 31. Oonfoowh^ . . ke oozVebeegahddwim (part. pass.). . these have
been written,
xxi. 24. Wowh minzhenawd k^ deb^doodtin^ oon'oowh . . this (is)
the disciple who narrateth> '' testifieth of/' these (things).
viii. 10. Wgiwh 6nahmem^ib|^ (subj.) . . those (who plur.) accuse-^A^e.
xvii. 12. Eg4wh kah m^enzh^aAii(ytf»)f^ . . . those whom thou hast
given me, them.
iii. 11. Ewh kakldndalmu^ . . that we know
Bwh kah w^bundalmu^ . . that which we saw.
iv. 37. Bwh ^keddowin . . that saying.
viii. 29. Bmiwh vakrvMndi^ngin . . those [things'] (which) he approves
them.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 189
Pronouns Belative.
The Pronoun Relative^ referring (in Cree and Chippeway) to a
definite or an indefinite antecedent^ is represented — ^the former by
the indeclinable particle kd or gd (Chip, kah, Jones) — ^the latter by
the "flat vowel" (p. l68). See S^ntaa:.
Pronouns Interrogative.*®®
cree, chip.
Who? (sing.) Ow'ena Wain'ain'
(plur.) Owln-ekee Wain'ain'-ug
What? K6koo K^oo
What (thing) K^kwan Wdgoonain'
K6kwdn-ee (things) W6goonain'-un
Which? (anim.) T^nS
(inan.) Tanemah
(anim. plur.) T^n-dnekee
(inan. id.) T^n-dnehee
Pronouns Indefinite. *^
Some oncy any one Ow'eiik Ah'we^
Somethings anything K6kwan Kdgoo
Whosoever Ow'enS Wdgwain
Whatsoever K^kwan W4g6odoogwain
108 viii. 25. xxi. 12. Wdndin k^en ? . . wAo (art) thou ?
. ix. 36. Wdn^ 6wh? . . who (is) that ?
xvi. 18. Wdgoondin ewh idUng . . . what (is) that (which) he says,
means,
iv. 27. Wdgoon&in aind'^ahw&indoAimifi ? . . what seekest thou ?
*^ xiii. 28. Kah (dush) dkweyah . . (now) not any one, ** no man.''
viii. 33. Kah w^kah dhweydh . . not ever, ** never," any one,
XV. 6. K^shpin ^weyah . . if any one, '' if a man.''
XV. 5. K&h ween kdgoo . . not any thing, '* nothing."
xiii. 29. Kdgoo che m4ndd . . something that he give (to) them.
xiz. 12. Wdgwdin w^emihwe^idezoogwiaxk (refieet. dub.). . whosoever
chie{''maketh'hm8elf.
190 A ORAMMAR OF
Section III.
OP THE VERB.
Paragraph L
The Algonquin Verb may be considered as of three
kinds, namely, the Impersonal, the Intransitive, and
the Transitive. First, of the Impersonal.
Note, — ^The great obstruction to a Theoretical knowledge of these
tongues is found in the manifold powers and anomalous structure of
the verb. The root uniting with/ormo/tre signs of different signification
and personal signs in different relations, is often in a manner lost amongst
its accessories. To separate these — ^to assign to each its proper meaning
— ^to ascertain the various order in which they respectively combine —is,
to the learner of these languages, only oral, an undertaking of no ordinary
magnitude; an unwearying diligence, joined with much practice, can
alone accomplish it. These difficulties, however, overcome, we discover in
the varying fomu ot the Indian verb a number of eLsments or signs —
not, as some ima^ne, arbitrarily linked together, but gystematicalkf com^
bined, on a plan founded on certain laws, which fit them to perform, in
their several relative positions, every required purpose of Construction —
of Language, in a manner as effective, and, viewed as a whole, as simple,
as that of the corresponding elements, or words, in languages where the
verb has a less compounded form.
With this complex subject, then, before us, and having already noticed.
V. 4. W^igw6in(dush)n^tum b^oobc^ain . . whosoever (f* then")
first waded, entered the water,
vi. 54. Wligwian m&hje^^n . . whoso eateth t^.
xi. 26. W^igw^n (dush) psaakhtezeffwian . . whosoever (and) liveth.
xii. 50. Wdgdodoogfoam . . eswk Hadnooy^n . . whatsoever tibat (which)
I speak.
XV. 16. W&g6odoogwain ka und6odahmahw(fAtr(^^ain. . whatsoever
ye shall request (of) Tiim.
xvi. 13. W^6odoogwain kanoond'ahmoo^rwain . . whatsoever he shall
hear.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 191
under the head of Derivative Verbs, the formative signs connecting the
root with the inflectioii> we now proceed to the inflection itself, fii^st,
singly ; and, secondly, with the superadded, formatives of Suppo9iti(m§
&c. which, regarding only the mind of the speaker, hold the last place.
To the above will be subjoined the negative form of the Chippeway verb.
We shall begin our Exposition with premising that the Algonquin
possesses in common with the European verb, all the modifying cir-
cimistances of Conjugation, Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, and Person
(anim. and inan.); that it is, in short, the European verb— but sometimes
much more (p. 77)-
The Moods will be considered as three in number, viz. the Indi-
cative, the Subjunctive, and the Imperative. The Indicative is
declarative, absolutely. The Subjunctive is, also, declarative, but
relatwely or dependently only. See Syntax. The English Infini-
tive is, as already observed, resolved into the Subjunctive. The
English Participle Present is expressed (as in French) by a personal
verb. (Vide infra.)
Note* — From the Present of the above moods are formed their other
tenses respectively.
INDICATIVE. "<>
Pres. P^poon ...it is winter.
Pret. P6poon-oc5p'ii»...& was winter.
Fut. KdUd p^poon...t^ toill be winter.
Comp. of pres. Ke p6poo7t...t^ has (been) winter.
Comp. of pret. Ke p6poon-ooptin...t^ had (been) winter.
no [v. 9. Ewh k^zhig . . that day.]
v. 10. Almahme^-k^zhegiu}. . it is pray (ing)-day,'' the Sabbath day.'^
ix. 4. P^-t^ekfkl. . hither-night it is, night cometh.
V. 9. ix. 14. Almahmed^k^zhegifd-d()ptffi . . . t( was pray (ing) -day,
the Sabbath.
xiii. 30. T6bekahdiud)''6obm ..it was night.
X. 22. P^poon-db&tift . . it was winter.
xviii. 18. KeBenkhmBhgahd(ud)'dobun . . it was cold (weather).
xviii. 28. Kekezhdp&hwahga^(ttd)db^fi . . %t was early (in the morn-
ing).
192
A GRAMMAR OF
SUBJUNCTIVE.*"
Pres. (He) pep6oi^...(as) it is winter.
Pret (H^) pep6o^-ooptiit...(as) it was winter.
Fut Pepoo^^...irAen it shall (be) winter.
Comp. of pres. (H^) ke pep6ok,„(as) it has been winter.
Comp. of pret. (H^) ke pepooAr'oopuit...(as) it had been winter.
Inde£ Tense Fdpook (flat vow.)... when it is winta*^ or Angl.
in the winter.
The Preterite, and the Compound of the Present, Tenses arc
analogous in use, as well as in signification, to the same tenses in
the French language.
Paragraph II.
The Intransitive verb has, in its several conju-
gations, two forms, namely, the Animate or Personal,
and the Inanimate, which last has the third person only
(pp. 131. 181.).
The Personal pronouns, when in connection with the verb, are
abbreviated or '* converted" thus, 1, Ne, or (before a vowel) Net ;
2, Ke or Ket ; 3, Oo or Od. (p. 51.) [Chip. iVe, Km, or Kind;
Ke or Ket; Oo or Ood.^
Note, — The sign of the third person is not prefixed in the Present
tense ; in Cree it is affixed.
The first and second persons singular (Indie.) have their terminations
alike.
Cree — Indicative Singular.
2.
1. (Ne, &c.) Nip-an -ka
2. (Net',&c.) Ap-in -in
3. (Ne, &c.) ' P^moot-4n -kn
4. (Ne, &c.) Ket-6on -6on
5.(Net',&c.) Ach'.^n -6n
6. (Net', &c.) It6thet-en -6n
7. (Ne, &c.) Tdckoos-innin -innin
-6w (I, &c.) sleep.
-u
"kyoo
'6o
"600
-tim
-in
sit.
walk.
speak.
move,
think,
arrive (by land)
111 ix. 4. Mdgwah . . k6zheg^k . while it is day.
vii. 23. ^'nahmea-k^zhegaM-in (flat vowel) . . when (indef.) it is
pray-day, on the &c.
vi. 22. xii. 12. Ahp^ kah wdhbidn^. . the time that it was d^y-light^
i.e. the morrow.
THE CREB LANGUAGE.
193
The Plural of the Present, Indicative, is formed, by adding to
the respective Sing. Persons (with sometimes a connecting vowel)
the suffixes following, viz.
Cree. — 1 Plur. (1.3.) -nan; 1 plur. (1.2.) -^-now; 2 plur.
-ow6w ; 3 plur. -iik or -wiik.
Chippeway. — 1 Plur. (1.3.) -min; 1 plur. (1.2.) -min; 2 plur.
-m ; 3 plur. -ug or -wug (see below) : as.
Plural.
1 (1.3). 1 (1.2).
2.
3.
1. Ap'-init(fn 'indnaiv
'inowdw
-ewtt^.
2. Nip-4nna» 'kndnow
'iiUOWWU
•6wuk.
3. P6m6ot-annan -axidnow
^knowdw
'kywuL
4. K6t-oonnan -oondnow
'6onow6w
'6&wuk
5. Ach'-en»^n -endnaw
'knowow
^eamk.
6. Itethet'enndn -endnow
"inowdw
-dmumAr.
7. Tuckoos-fnninnrfw -innin^now
'inmnowSw
^ixiwuk.
Chippeway — Indicative, Singular.^^*
1. 2.
3.
l.(Nind,&c.)A'hb
-6h
(I, &c.) sit
2.(Ne, &c.) Neb-^ -&h
-ah
&c.
3. (Ne, &c.) Pemoos-a -a
-4
4.(Nind,&c.)Ekid
.60
lis
1. ix. 25. 2Vc w6b . . J see.
ix. 7. Ke p^wahb(wob)cA . . Ac did hither-see, "
came seeing."
xxi. 9- Ke ^Sabeh . he was lying, being,
viii. 2. Ke n&hmahd-dhbeA . . ^ sat down,
ix. 41. Ne wdhb-«iii». . we (1.3) see.
vi. 10. Ke ndhmahd-dhbetotf^ . . they sat down,
xiv. 19. Ne bemdhtis . . /live.
viii. 53. Ket ahp^t-^indlihgoos (indef. pass.) . . Ahtm art so-much-
thought, esteemed, considered,
v. 50. 51. Pemdhteze , . Aeliveth.
ix. 9. Ezhe-ndhgooseA (indef. pass.) . . Ae is so-seen, resembles.
X. i. Kem6ode-shkeA (freq.) . . he steals-often, is a thief,
xi. 3. Alikooze. . he is sick.
xvi. 7> Ked en-dindihgooztm . . ye are so-thought, considered.
O
194 A GRAMMAR OF
5* (Niiid> &0.) Aunj' ... -^h
6. (Nmd^ &c*) £ii«ind'-um -um -um
7. (Ne, &c.) T^hgwesh-in -in -in
Note, — ^In the first, fourth, and fifth conjugations, the Chippeways
drop the (Cree) inflections of the first and second persons (sing.).
xiii. 10. Ke b^nezm . . ye are clean.
T. 25. Tah bemdhtez^trtf^ . . they shall live.
vi. 17. 24. Ke boozcKm^ . . they embarked.
3* xi. 11. Nind ezhdh . . / go.
tdii. 21. xiv. 28. Ne m^^dh ., I go away, depart,
xii. 36. iv. 43. Ke m§ih}dk . . he went away,
ii. 12. Ke ezhdh ^wede . . he went there,
vi. 67* Ke we mSh.jdm . . ye wish to go away,
iv. 45. Ke ezhili'Wuy . . they have gone, " went."
8. xvi. 7. Nin dipwd . . I true-say, tell the truth.
iv. 17. 18. Ke tkpwd . . thou tellest the truth,
vii. 1. Ke pahp^ihmoos(f . . he walked about,
iii. 4. Tah b^endegd . . will or can he enter.
vii. 21. Nin ge ^zhechegi (indef.). . I have done, executed^
iii. 10. Ke k^enoodhmahgtf . . thou teachest.
xii. 34. Mfi ge noondahgdmtfi . . we (1.3> have heard.
viii. 38. 41. Ket ^zhechegdim . . ye do.
iv. 38. Ke ke b^endegiim. . ye have entered.
4. X. 34. Nin ke eldd . . I have said,
viii. 52. Ket ekid . . thou sayest.
i. 42. Ke kah ezh^nekaufl (reflect.) . . thou shalt be named,
i. 42. ix. 38. Ke ^edoo . . he has said.
X. 30. Ne bdzheg6omtii .. ire are one.
iv. 20. ix. 41. xiii. 13. Ked ^ceddom . . ye say.
tiii. 21. Ke gah nebdom . . ye shall die.
viii. 53. Ke n^ooum^ . . tJiey have died.
vi. 14. 42. Ke ^ed6oim^ . . they have said.
6. xxi. 25. xvii. 24. Nifid eniindnm . . Jtiiink, will, intend.
xvL 2. Tah endindum . . Jie will iMnk.
It. 42. vi. 69. Nin tdpwd-dindahmin . . we (1.3) true-think, believe,
xvi. 31. JK> tdpwa-dinddm . . ye believe.
xviii. 39. Ked endinddm nah. . ? . . ye think, will, intend (nah^ inter.)?
tiii. 29. Ke endindldimoo^ . . they have thought.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE.
196
1 (1.3)
1. Ahh''emin
I (1.2)
'emin
Plural.
2.
"im
3.
-eliiimg.
2. Neb-^wzw
'khmin
-ahm
'khwug
3, F€moos-amin
-kmin
-am
'kwug.
4. Ekid-6o7wt?i
-bomin
-oom
'6owug^
5. Aunj'-emt«
6. En^nd-ahmm
'emin
-ahmin
-tow
'€fvug.
-timoog.
7. Tahgwesh-inewm
-inemtft
-intm
-invmg.
The Pronouns which, in the Indicative, are prefixed to the
Singular number are prefixed also, in the same form, to the Plural,
as below ;
Note. — This seems analogous to the Provincial French, faime,
faim-ons, Sfc,
Cree. — Ne ket-oon, / speak ; Ke ket6on, thou speakest ; Ket6o>
Ae speaks; .Ne ket6on-fkin, rve (1.3.) speak; Ke k^toon-dnom, we
(1.2.) speak ; Ke ketbon-orvdw, ye speak ; ILeXho-ivuk, they speak.
Chippeway. — Kind ekid, / speak ; Ked ^kid, thou speakest ;
ekid(^, he speaks ; Wind ekid6o-»ii», me (1.3.) speak ; Ked ^ked6o-
min, we (1.2.) speak ; Ked <^ked6o-m, ye speak ; 4ked6o-iOTfg, they
speak.
Cr££ — Subjunctive, Singular.
1.
2.
3.
1. Ap-ea»
"iian
-i<
2. Nip-i^»
Ann
-a<
3. P«n6ot-erfn
-6tt»
-(it^
4. Ket6o-y(f9}
-yw«
't
5. Ach^-erf«
"hin
-U
6. Eth^thet-umm^n
-iynxmun
'kh
7. T'uckoos-innetfn
-inncMn
Plural.
-kek
1 (1.3> 1 (1.2>
2.
3.
1. Ap-ea)t -e^lit
-e^
-^iXD^
2. Nip-iaJfc Alik
Aaig
'{ffcmfoi
7. iv. 5. xi. 28. Ke tdhgweshifi . . h^ has arrived,
xi. 32. Ke ahptingeshin . . he (jshe) has fialkn.
o2
196
A GRAMMAR O*'
8. Pem6ot-eaAr
-e^fAr
-e^^
-aitrodw
4. KetbO'jdk
^yak
-jdig
'tw6w
5. Ach'-ea^t
-e^
-edig
'^twdw
6. Et^thet-ummajfc
-ummoAr
-nmmdig
'kkw6w
7. Tdckoos-fimeajfc
-inneo^
-iiihey(%
-eekwdw
Chippbway — Subjunctive, Singular, i*'
1. 2. 3.
1. Ahb-ey<^n -6ytt» -irf
2. Neb-4hy(5n -4hytin -(k?
3. Pem6o8-ay(5it -dytiit -aic?
1. ix. 11. Ke wahbe-yon . . (and) I have seen, " received sight."
ix. 10. Kah ezhe-w£hbeyttfi . . that thou so-seest.
ix. 39. Che wihhewdd (defin.) . . that they see.
W&hy&hbe/i^r (indef. flat vow.). . they who see.
2. xiii. 36. A'zhahyoit . . (whither) / go.
Ahn' eende kzhkhyun ?. . whither goest thou ?
xiii. i. Che ezh6(2 . . that he (should) go.
V. 29. Che ^zhahir(^ . . that they go.
vi. 21. Em&h dzhah«7(^(i . . where they went.
X. 8. Kah p^lQiy-ezhdhjt^ (plur.) . . who hither-passed, came.
3. viii. 46. K^shpin t&pway(^ . . if J say truth.
X. 38. K^shpin . . ^zhechegdyon . . if J do.
iii. 2. vii. 3. Ewh dzhechegdytm . . which thou doest.
viii. 4. K(fkenoodhmahg%ttn (flat vow.). . ^Aou who teachest^^'master.'
xi. 9. P^moosflM^ . . (if) Ac walk.
v. 24. Ke b^endegatd . . he has entered.
xiii. 15. Che ^zhechegdye% . . that ye do.
XX. 10. Ke \i€wQ!U)6d . . they returned.
xiv. 27. Azhe migem^wdd, . as they give.
ii. 11. Jdahwa/i^r (flat vow.). . they who exchanged, bartered.
V. 29. Kah m^noo-^zhechegft/tgr . . they who well-do.
4. V. 34. W^nje ^edooyt^ . . whence, '* wherefore" / say.
zii. 34. W^nje ^eddoyun. . ? . . whence sayest thm . . ?
iii. 27. Ke ^dooc? . . (and) he said.
viii. 53. Kah n^boocl . . who is dead*
X. 12. (yozhemooci (dush). . (and) he fleeth.
THE CRBB LANGUAGE.
197
4. Eked6p-y(;n
-yun
-rf
5. Aunj-ey(5n
"iyun
.&iJ
6. Endind-ummdn
'{anmmun
^ung
7. T^hgwesh-inneye^n
-inneyttw
4ng
Plural.
1(1.3).
1(1.2).
2.
3.
1.
Ahb-ey<^ng
-eyung
-eydig
-ewe^
2.
Neb-4hy6»g
-^yung
'Qiydig
-&h«7dJ
3.
Pem6o&-ay(^»g
-ayung
-aydig
'Bxcdd
4.
Eked6o-y<^«g
•yung
.y%
'Wod
5.
Aunj-ey</ng
-eyung
-eydig
•^ewdd
6.
En4ind-umm(^
"Vanmung
'UTDxndig
'Vanmoowdd
7.
T4hgwesh-inney(^ftg -inneywn^
'iimeydig
-innoowdd
7.
xiv. 8. Che dkhsihg-isiemooydng (1.3) ..that we enough-think be
satisfied,
xvii. 22. A'zhe pdzhegooyi^r (1.2). . as we are one.
V. 34 Che n6ojemooy<^^ . . that ye escape,
vii. 15. Ke ^edootood . . they said,
xvii. 21. Che pdzhegoou;(^i . . that tJiey be one.
iv. 53. Kek-^ndttn^ . . (thus) he knows, " knew/'
xvi. 21. W68ahg{ug)~idndung . , he (she) anguished,
xi. 15. xix. 35. Che tdpway-landahm(% . . that ye may true-think^
believe. ♦
xiii. 22. Ke gw^nahwe-endindahmoow(^i . . . they lack-thought were
at a loss, &c.
viii. 9. Kah n6onda%t^ (indef.) . . they who heard.
xxi. 22. NUinonzh tdhgweshene^ . . till J arrive.
xvi. 28. Ke tdhgweshen(^ . . (and) I am arrived.
iv. 25. Ahp^ ke tdhgweshin^ . . when he has arrived.
xi. 41. Em&h shingeshin^ (sing.) . . there which lay.
vi. 26. Kiya iAhesm-eydig . . and ye were filled.
vi. 12. Kah tdbe8inet{7(^ . . (when) they were filled.
V. 3. Shingeshin-ooto(^i. . they lay.
vi. 5. Che w6senew6d . . that they eat.
vi. 13. Kah w^sin^t^ (plur. indef.) . . who eat, had eaten.
xii. 12. Kah t6hgwe8hfng(»sr) . . (id.) who arrived
198 A GRAMMAR OP
The personal Intransitive verb is represented above as belonging
to seven conjugational forms ; the first four only are however of a
GENERAL chavacter^ the remainder being of limited use. The third
person (sing.) is the Conjugational Sign.
It will be proper to remark here that.
To the first conjugation belongs the Adjective Verb, pp.25. 27.49. 114,
115. 14^. etseq.
Neuter (accid.) Verb, p. 146.
Augment, oi Manner, -wissit; of Energy, -sku.
(pp. 69, 70.) Pass. Indef. 115.
To the second, the Verb Substantive ;
To the third, the Indeter. and Indef. Transitives Active, (p. 104.); and
To the fourth, the Reflective, Simulative, Reciprocal ; Accid. and Par-
ticip. Passives, Aram. (pp. 82. et seq. 111. et seq.)
To the fifth belong some Derivatives of the above Verb.
To the sixth, the Compounds of the above Verb.
To the seventh, Pimissin . . he lies (prostrate) and a very few others.
To the second and sixth Conjugations belong also the Inanimate -an
^a» -ow, and -en ^en -um, of the (Cree) Transitive Verb (vide infra).
Adjective Verbs, in their Inanimate form (Indie), end in -«, -in
(subj. -i^), -Of», -un (subj. -ak) [[Def. pp. 25. et seq. ISO.] and
'tnagun [[Indef.]] — the Neuter Inanimate ends in -nuLgdn (p. 490 >
their Plurals are formed by adding -4, or -wd (Chip. -w» or -w«»)
to the Singular. (See Accid, Neat. Verbs, p. 146.)
Paragraph IIL
The Verb -Substantive (p. 135 et seq.) has, in the
Algonquin dialects, a *' constant" Attributive sign, or
Root ; and being a regular verb (of our second conju-
gation) it will be given as an Example of the manner
of forming the Intransitively generally. (Abstract
Noun, I-k-mw, Beingr. p. 182.) See pp. 77, 78.
The want of the auxiliary verbs, Angl. to *'be", and to "have,"
is adequately provided fw — ^tbe former is supplied by the Verbal
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 199
Injleciion, as in the Adjective^verb, e.g. Mithkw-ow, it is red (Lat.
rub-c^) p. 25 — in the passive forms^ Skke-h/^ (def. p. 57) S^e-ht/w
(indef. pp. 107* 110.) he U loved (Lat am-atur) — as vfeQ. as in the
Particip.pa8s.> as^ Nlpa-che*g^<lxoo (p.1 112) he is kiWed ; xiat omittillg
the Accid. pass. (p. 26), aa, Pa&-ta^oo, it is dned.-^Tbe latter, vi».
*'have/' is supplied by the indeclinable monosyllabic particle ke or
ge (g hard), as above. Indeed not only this but the other declinable
words auxiliary to the English tenses, have, in like manner, their
equivalents in corresponding indeclinable particles, as Indicative
Fut. g& (Chip, kak, Jones) ; Conditional, pit ; Optative, we ; Poten-
tial, ke, or gd; &c the Inflection always remaining with the V^rb
(see Notes, passim), as,
[iSTc nip~^ / sleep.]
Ne ke mp-dn I have slept.
[Ne nip-^» (pret.) I slep^]
Ne ke nvp~Ati I had slept.
Ne ga nip-a» I shall or will sleep.
Ne ga ke nip-an I shall have slept.
Ne pa nip-an I should or would sleep.
Ne pa mp'dti I would have slept.
Ne we nip-a» I wish, want, or am about, (to) sleep,
Ne we nip-iifi I wished, &c. (to) sleep.
Ne ga we mpdn I shall wish, &c. (to) sleep.
Ne gh &c. (^ hard, ^ as a in fate) I can, &c,
Ne pa gh^ &o. &c. I should be able, could, &c. &c<
Nb^c.-rThe auxiliary Particle, ke, will be easily distingmshed In the
subjoined Notes from the abbreviated personal Pronoun, kej the former
being always in Boman characters— the latter in Italics, (p. 690
• Note. — In Mr. Jones's "Translation" the abovementioned Particles,
from their place being before the verb, are often incorrectly united iso it, Jq
our citations, care has been taktn to give them their right position,
Note.—^The Cree a and the Chlppeway ah (Jonb»'» Orthog.) ate alike
pronounced as in man, or, father. The Chippeway a, according to Mr,
JoNBs's mode of spelling, is pronounced as infate = Cree ^.
Indicative, Present, Animate, (p. 1S6. and Note 710
CREE. CHIP,
ffet* Vf&n Nind Any-^b / am BEing, or
existent,
200
A GRAMMAR OF
Keei'-an
Nef I'-an-iuin
Kef V'Sri'dnorv
Ket* V'WCk'Owdfv
Ked A'hy-ah
Ahy^dh
Nind Ahy-4h-mtit
Ked Ahy-^-mtn
Ked Ahy-4h-m
Ahy-dh-ivug
he is.
fve (1.3) are.
fve (1.2) are.
ye are.
they are.
Indeterminate. — (Personal Subject p. 98.)
I-d-n^xpoo^ or l-k^newun Ahy-ah-m they (Fr. on) are.
Inanimate. — (Defin. or Accid.)
I-<5f0 Ahy-ah it is.
I-6w-^ Ahy-4h-ivfin they are.
Indefinite (continuous, inherent, 4*c.).
I-4-magu9} Ahy-Mi-mahgu^ // is.
Net' I'i, or. Net' I-Ui
Kef I-d, or, Ket' UUi
Oof I-a, or, Oof I-Ui
^e^' F-a-t-an
UTe^' I'-a-t-aikw
Kef I'^trOfvdiv
Oof I'k^troroon
I-{^pun
I-4-pun-^
'don They are.
preterite.!"
Nind A'hy-ahn-4h6t<it / was &c.
Ked dhy-ahn-dh6ttn ^Aou wast.
Ahy-(£A-6«» he was.
Mnc? ahy-4h-mtra-ahbun «>g (1.3) were
Ked ahy-4h-mtn-dhbun n;e (1*2) were.
Xerf ahy-4h-9ii-wdhbun ^e were.
Ahy'-^h-bun-t^ they were.
inanimate.
Ahy-aA-bun
Ahy-^-bun-e«i
t7wasBEing,&c.
they were.
comp. pres. and pret.
Ne ke' Idn Mn ke^ (or oe) ahy-dh / have l>e(en).
Ne ke' I-a or I-a-Ti Nin ke' (id,) 6hy-dlm-ahBUN/ had be(en).
&C. &c.
"* vi. 62. E'wede ahylili-^fi . . there (the same place) he was (being),
xi. 6. £m^ ahy^-fmn . . where he was,
xi. 30. Kayiihbe ahydhdim . . still he was,
ix. 25. Nin gah-g^-eengwan-lih^fi (iter.) . . I was shut-eyed, blind.
See Note 71.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 201
INANIMATE.
Ke I-6w Ke Ahy-4h ii has been.
Ke I-6w-a Ke Ahy-Qi-vmn they have been.
Ke I-4.pun Ke Ahy-4h-bun it had been.
Ke I-4-pun-^ Ke Ahy-^-bun -een ikey had been.
Note. — ^The siflrn of the third person Oo (Oot before a vowel), he or sJie,
is, in Cree, prefixed to the preterite, and Comp. of the preterite. Indie,
only. The Chippeways omit it altogether in the Intransitive, using it
only in the Transitive forms.
Note, — ^The same element (-bun or -pun) added to a Proper Name, &c.
signifies " late," " deceased," &c. Fr. feu.
The Cree Preterite tense exhibits indeed, in its first form (sing.)^
only the elements of its Substantive Root, Tdy a thing, or a BBing;
but it will be observed that here, in the verb, they are enunciated
differently, the accent being removed from the / to the a, thus.
Net* la (as above) / was. The added -ti, in the second form, has
the force of the emphatic Angl. did. Looking to the other prete-
rites, I consider this Cree preterite (anim.) as being also fcnrmed
from the Present Tense.
FUTURE.
The Future is formed by the particle gd (Chip, kah^ Jones)^
third person gdtd (Chip, tah), prefixed to the Present tense, as
Ne git Idn, I shall (or will) be ; gdtd Idw^ will he-he, he will be.
(See p. 199, and Notes, passim.)
SuBJUNCTivE, Present, Animate. (See Note 71.)
In this mood the personal subject, instead of preceding the verb
as in the Indicative, is expressed by the inflected termination.
(P- 77).
I'l'dn, or, V-a-ydn ahy-ah-ydn, or -ydn If / am beings &c.
I'l^-un, or, I'k-yun sihy-Qi-yun thou art
I'dt ahy-dd he is.
I'Udk, or, \'9fydh ^y^nAi-ydng we (1.3) are.
l'\''dk, or, I'k-ydk ahy-4h-y«ng we (1.2) are.
I-i-a^, or, I'd^yaig ahy-4h-y(£ig ye are.
V-B,t-m6w (def. time) ^y-ah-rndd (def. time) they are.
i^t-atch-t^ (indef. time) ay- odyig (indef. time) they are.
202 A GRAMMAR OF
Indeterminate. — (Pers. Subj.)
I'SL-nervik, or l-^-k Ahy-ah»g, or ong If they (Fr. on) be.
COMP. OF PRES.
Ke \'\-yan Ke Ahy-4h-y^n (as) / have be^i.
&c. &c. &c.
Inanimate. — (Defin.)
Uak Ahy-6g it is.
I-ak'tvorv (def. time) Ahy-6g-a?aA (def. time) they are.
Ai-ak-t^ (indef, time) Ay-6g-t^ (indef. time) they are.
COMP. OF PRES.
Ke l-^k Ke shy-dg it has been.
Ke I'kk'Wotv Ke ahj-bg-wah they have been,
Indefinite. {Contin. Inher.)
I'k'Vaagdk Ahy-dh-raahg^AA: It is.
I-a-mag^-ee Ahy-dh-mahgahk-i/i They are.
This (Definite) tense is made^ in its several persons^ Indefinite
or independent of Time, by the Flat or ** altered" vowel ; in
other words, by changing the Initial / (which in this case consdf
tutes the entire Root, p. 182) into i, or the diphthong ai, as exem-
plified above (p. 201) in the third person plural.
It may be proper here to remind the reader that the Flat vowel
(p. 73. et seq.) is formed by changing the Jirst vowel of the verb,
be it initial or otherwise, into a longer vocal element viz. a long
vowel or a diphthong, as i, or e, or d, or w, into ^ = a in fate ;
a into ed, o into ed, -oo into edo = u, oo (initial) into tve- ; &c the
speaker laying a suitable stress on the lengthened (first) syllable.
Reserving for another place the Exemplification of its important
uses in Speech, as distinguishing the Indefinite from the Defi-
nite, I shall, in addition to what has already been said respecting
it, only observe here as follows :
First — Of the above two Attributive (verbal) fcnnus, the Deriva-
tive or altered'Vowel form is analogous, both in extent (^ meaning
and in use, to the English Attribute, when the same is prefijped to
\t8 Subject, implying habitual, continuous, Indefinite in respect qf
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 203
Time, as, a " good man ;" a ^' Uving man." It is found in this
QUALIFYING seDse^ in the Present tense (subj.) only. (See Syntax.)
Secondly — The Primitive, or Simple form, is analogous to
the English Attribute, when the latter is united to its subject by a
copula or in a predicative form — in its Definite or Accidental
meaning; as, '* he is, was, &c. good ;" *^ he lives, lived, &c/' This
mode, only, of the verb is formed through the Moods and Tenses*
PRETERITE.il*
The Preterite of this mood, also, is formed by adding to its Present
tense the element -pun, with generally a connecting vowel. (See
Acldenda.)
Future.
This tense is expressed by changing the Future Indicative sign, ga,
" shall or wiU," into ge or ke, and placing it, in like manner, before the
Present (subj.), as Tan itta ke i-i-yunF What place (Where) shalt he-thouf
But with a special reference to Time, the following form is used ; when
the same particle becomes as in other cases, the sign of the Compound
tense, viz. "have." (See pres. subj. p. 201.)
I-i-ydn-e Ahy-ah-^(^n-in When / shall be.
I-a-yw7i-e Ahy-4h-^M»-in thou shalt be.
I'k'tck-e Ahy'ddJ'in he shall be-
UsL-ydk-e Aliy-ah-t/dng-in rve (1.3) shall be.
I-a-yoit-oo A'hy-ah-^awg-04m we (1.2) shall be.
I'K-ydik'Oo A'hy-ah-^rf^-oon ye shall be.
r-at-TO<^-e A'hy-aha?(^-in they shall be.
The " altered" first vowel, when used in this form, is equivalent
to the English Indef. element -ever, as when-erer, &c. See Syntax.
CoMP. OF FuT.
Ke I-a-y (fn-e When / shall have been- &c.
"» xi. 21. K^shpin oomih dky^y^-btm . . if here thfM wert, " hadst
been."
xi. 50. Che 6one8h^8heytm5f-oobun . . that we (1.2) should be good;
XV. 19. K^hpin tebdind4hgoozey<%-oopun. . if ye were governed.
204 A GRAMMAR OF
Imperative."*
The Imperative Mood has two tenses, the Present and the Indbfinitk.
The third persons of both tenses are alike, being the same as the third
persons of the Fut. Indie.
Present or Definite.
Ud
Ahy-dhn, or -6n
Be thou.
K&ta U(kv
tab Ahy-dh
Let him he.
l^&'tdk
Ahy-ah-ddh
Let us (1.2) be.
Uk-k
Ahj'k'g or -difoog
Beye.
KStil Ui-rvuk
tab Aby-dh-WKg
Inanimate.
Let them be.
KM I.(;it^
tab Aby.6h
Letf^be.
KfttA i^w-ar
tab Ahj-^-rvun
Let them be.
Indefinite.
The Indefinite (future) tense of this mood is formed of the element
-hm, of which k is the " constant" Sign.
I-4-k-un Ahy-4b-kun Be ihou.
K&& Idw tab Aby-£Ji Let him be.
l-A-kJik Aby-ab-k^A Let us (1.2) be.
UUi-dik Aby-db-k^eifc Be ye.
K&t& 1-dw tab Ahj-fHtk-rvug Let them he.
To the above positive form of the Simple Verb we shall now add the
supposiTivB, the doubtful or Hypotheticdl, and the (Chippeway)
negative, forms.
"« iv. 31. W^seni-n . . eat thou.
vii. 3. viii. 11. Mahj-lbi . . depart thou.
vii. 3. XX. 17. £zh-6ft . . go thou.
ziv. 31. M6h}&liMh. . let us (1.2.) depart.
xxi 12. P^w^sen-iib . . hither-eat-ye, " come and dine."
xiv. 31. P&hzegw^-ib . . arise-ye (from sitting posture).
XV. 4. 9. Ahy-6h-yooAr . . be-ye,
xvi. 33. Oojdp-iindahmoo-yooA: (reflect.). . cheerful-think-^e.
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 205
Paragraph IV.
SUPP0SITIVE."7
The above Simple fonn of the verb is susceptible of the circum-
stances of SUPPOSITION and doubt ; the former is indicated by the
added element e-t'ooki (Chip, k-doog) quasi^ " I suppose." It is
used in the Indicative only, as follows.
Note. — From the great caution which the Indian observes in narrating
events, &c. of which he has not a |9^«onaZ knowledge, these sub-positivb
forms are of very frequent occurrence in discoturs^.
^e<' I'-an-et'ooke Mnc2 dhy-ahn-dh-doog /am, I suppose.
KeC I'-an-et^ook^ Ked dhy-ahn-dh-doog thou art
I'-k-t'ook^ ahy-4h-doogain he is.
Net' I'-an-9tait-et^ooke Mti^ ahy-ah-meVddoog me (1.3) are.
Ket' I'-an-^7ioit^-et'ook^ Ked ahy-4h-min-adoog me (1.2) are.
Ket' I^-an-09t;ofv-et'ook^ Ked ahy-4h-i7i-adoog ye are.
I'-d-took^ii^ ahy-^-doog-an^ they are.
INANIMATE.
I-4-took^ Ahy-^-doogain it is I suppose.
I-k-took^-R^ Ahy-^-doogain-tfft they are I suppose.
The preterite of this mood, instead of e-t^ooki takes 4-^oo^pun
(Sd pers. -^oo-pdn). See Addenda.
Paragraph V.
The latter of the circumstances alluded to above, namely. Doubt,
(in the mind of the speaker,) is expressed in the Subjunctive, where
only it may be said to have a grammatical form, by the inserted
'* constant" element, m, and a final grave ^, as follows.
>i7 xi. 39. N^4hzoo-m^gooz^-<iSt>o^ . . he death-like-smelleth-I-^iif^po^e.
206
A GRAMMAR OF
Subjunctive — Present^ Animate
.118
I-i-w-^n-e
aliy-4h-w-(fAit-ain
If /be.
I'^yrun-^
ahy-dh-wun-4in
ikouhe.
I-ik-w^
ahy-^fag-wain
he he.
I^a-w^-we
ahy-ah-wong-wain
we (1.3) be
I-d-w^ifc-w^
ahy-ah-wtt wg- wain
we (1.2) be.
l-i-yrdig-w^
ahy-ah-wa^-wain
ye he.
I'A-wdk'We
ahy-ah-w%-wain
they be.
Subjunctive Preterite.
In the first and second persons (sing.) of this tense^ the preterite
element -pun becomes the inflected member.
I.a.w-ap(fn-d
I-a-wapMit-^
I-^-Ar-oopun-e
I-^w^A-^pun-e
I-a-w^^-oopun-e
I-a-wc£^-oopun-e
I-a-wflA:-oopun-^
dhy-ah-Wrahb^^4in
4hy-ah-wahbt<n-4in
ahy-ahA:-oopun-4in
ahy-^h-wo«g-6pun-ain
ahy-^-w«(iig-6opun-^
4hy-ah-wcf^-6opan-ain
dhy-dh-w^Ait-oopun-din
Paragraph VI.
If /was.
thou wast
^ was.
we (1.3) were.
we (1.2) were,
jfe were.
they were.
NEGATION.
The Negative form of the (Chippeway) verb is indicated by the
kign -#e or ^ze, added to the Singular (3d pers.) of the Present
indicative. (See p. 6S and Syntojc.)
^18 vii. 17. Tab6hjindi]?oo-w-aA»-rfi» (reflect ). . whbthbr I relate myself,
xviii.23. K^shpin kah m^hje-^ed6o-w-<fAn-din. . if have ill-spoken-/,
vii. 4. K^shpin oowh dzhecheg4-w-i^»-^n . . if these things thm do.
X. 24. K^shpin adhwe-w-tin-ain (p. 155.). . if thou be he.
xiv. 5. Debe azh^h-w-(fA»(iin)-din.. (we know not) whither thou go (est) .
xi. 12. K^shpin n^ah^'-w-kin ,.\ihe sleep.
V. 4. Wdigwdin. . n^tmn bticoobe^-w^n . . whosoever (3d pers.) first
enter-watered,
vi. 64. Wkigwun mlUije^-wain. . kiya mdnegua^-w^n . . . whosoever
(id.) eateth . . and drinketh . .
xvi. 13. W%-6odoog-wMn ka n6ondahmoo^-w^n . . .what-soever he
shall hear.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 207
INOICATIVE."S>
tfind afay-4h-se.. / am not. Mndahy-4h-se-mfw...tt?c(l.S)are not
Ked ahy-4h*se . . . thou art not Ked ahy-ah-se-mtn ... we ( 1 .2) are not
ahy-c£A-se. . . Ae is not Ked ahy-^-see-9?i . . ,i/e are not
ahy'kh-se'Vmg,,Jhe^ are not
Inanimate. (Defin. see p. 200)*2o
Ahy-ah-se-noo-72 (sing, and plu.)...£< or thei/ are not
Indefinite, (see p. 200.)i2i
Ahy-dh-mahgah-se-n6o-n . . idem.
SUBJUNCTIVE.^22
Ahy-4h-se-wo7i . . . f if ) / be not Ahy-ah-se- w(^wg. . . (if) we (1.3) be?
not
"» xvii. 11. Nind aliydh^e . . / am not.
vii. 8. Ne we ezhah^^ . . I want (to) go not.
viii. 35. Ahydhse . . ^ is, " abideth," not.
xi. 26. Tah nodose . . he shall die not.
iv. 14. Tah geshk^bdhgw(£9e . . he shall not thirst.
viii. 48. Nind 6kid6ose!nin. ...}.. we (1.3) say not ?
viii. 41. Nin ge(oonje) neg^^min . . we (1.3) are not bom (of).
xiii. 33. Ke(dah)hh-ez\iihs^em . ye (can) come not.
iv. 35. Ked ekid6o$66m . . ye say not.
xxi. 8. Ke ahy^tLseumg . . have heen-not-they, ** they were not."
X. 28. (Tah) neh6os€wug . . (shall) ^le-not-they.
i. 3. Ahydh^e&tm (pret.) . . it was not.
3d. 30. Mahshe t^gweshinre&un $d.). . already he ornyednot.
i«> [v. 30. O'onesh^shin . . it is good, "just."]
V. 10. (yoDieAietbhkzenoou ..it is not good, '' lawfid."
i. 3. Tah ke dozhechegahdd-^efiooft (part, pass.) . . it would not hav^
been made.
191 V. 31. Tkpwi-mBibg&li'Senoon .. it is not true.
ii. 4. vii. 6. T4hgweshin6omahgdh«e»o(m .. i^ is no^ arrived,
vii. 42. Ke eked6omahgdhgeno(m. . .} ..it has 910/ said. . . . ? viz. the
Scripture.
m zi. 15. Ke ahy&h«ewofi(ewede) . . ^lat I have not been, " was not"
(there),
xvi. 7. Keshpin. . mahjdh^ewon . . If. . J depart not.
208 A GRAMMAR OF
Ahy-^-8e-wtfn...(if) thou be not Ahy-dh-se-wttfigf...we(l.2) benot
Aliy-dh.s!-g...(if) he be not Ahy-6h-8e-w(£^...^e be not
Ahy-ah-8ig-tt^A...^^ey be not
Inanimate. (Def.)*^^
Ahy-dh-8e-noo-g...if it be not
Indefinite.124
Ahy-ah-mahg&h-se-noo-g. . . idem.
IMPERATIVE.^25
Ahj'^'SC'ddh . . .let w^ ( 1 .2) not be
Ahy-^-^'^ftfK* . be /Aom «o< Ahy-dh-A:a«g-oo» ... be ye no^
Tab Ahy^A-^e...let Aim not be Tab Ahy-dh-jc-«Jtt^...let <Aem not
be.
X. 37* Keshpin ^zhechegd^ewon . . If J do not,
xxi. 18. Email wah ezb^h^ewuTi. . where '' wouldesf' go-not-thou,
vi. 24. Emah ahy^m^ . . there (that) he was »io/.
XV. 6. Keshpin dhweyah ahydh^ . . If any one he, " abide, not.
vi. 50. Che n£b6osig (dush) . . (and) that he die not,
XV. 24. An-dhnook^st^ . . as ^ works not.
iv. 32. Kak^ddhr^toat^ . . (which) ye know not.
XV. 4. Keshpin ahyUi^ewa^ . . if yc be, " abide," not.
xi. 50. Che neb6o5t^a^ (defin.). . that they die not.
zii. 39. Tdpway-ainddhre^aA (id.) .... (therefore) they true-think,
believe, not.
ix. 39. Egewh wahyihbesigook (flat vow.) . . those who see not.
123 XV. 4. Keshpin ahydh^evioo^ . . if i7 be, " abide," not.
XX. 30. Wdzhebe^gahd^eiKOO^ (part. pass.). . which are not written.
xiv. 2. Keshpin. . ^zhe-ahydh^enoo^^un (pret.). . if . . so tf were not.
viii. 7. Wdgwfiin pahy^tahz^e^^n(dub.). . whosoever is not wicked.
XV. 24. Keshpin endhnook^ewaA^on (id. pret.)- .if I did not work.
>24 [xii. 24. Neb6o-mahguA; . . if t* die.]
Kiya n^oomahgdh^enoo^ . . and if it die not.
i*« viii. 11. Mdhje-ezhecheg&-H«n .. evil-do-^Aotf no/,
xii. 15. Sdgeze-Hin . . fear thou not.
vi. 20. Zigeze-kdgoon . . fear ye not.
m. 7. M^mahk&hd-£ndah-^<fm. . wonder-think, ''marvel," no/ /Aow.'
V. 28. Mdhmahklihd-^ndah-^(^oon . . wonder-think, " marvel," not
ye!
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 209
The Negative is^ in like manner with the Positive Verb, suscep-
tible of the Suppositive and Doubtful forms (p. 205), thus,
, Suppositive. (Indie.)
Nind ahy-dh-s^-doog, &c..../ am not, I suppose. &c.
Doubtful. (Subj.)
Ahy-4h-se-w-a«-4in, &c....(If) /be not. &c.
Note. — ^It may be proper to repeat here that in certain forms of
Expression, the Verb-Substantive is, as respects European Construction,
dropped. See pp. 137, 156, Note 84, and Syntax.
It should be borne in mind, that the Intransitive Verb, generally,
is susceptible of the Augment, and Dimin. forms ; which also take,
in like manner, the several modifying Accessories noticed above.
(See p. 69 et seq.)
Thus far then of the Intransitive Verb in its absolute significa-
tion, positively and negatively ; we shall now proceed to consider
it in its Relative form, or in connexion with an Accessory gram-
matical THIRD person in an Oblique Relation.
Paragraph VII.
Accessory Case (p. 123 et seq.).^**
The use of this anomalous, and therefore to the European learner
very embarrassing form, will be fiilly explained hereafter. See
Syntax.
Indicative — Present, Animate.
Net* V'&'fV'dn Nind ahy-ah-w-on /am, in relation
to Aim, orthem.
Ket' V'&'W'dn Ked ahy-ah-n;-on thou art.
Ik'thu Ahy-ah-n;-ii» he is.
Net' I'-a-w&n-nrf« Nind ahy-ah-won-«o« rve (l.S) are.
KeV I'-a-wan-4mw Ked ahy-ah-won-n(^ii we (1.2) are.
Ket* V-B.-yfkW'Ofvow Ked ahy-ah-won-ew4A ye are.
V^di'thu'd Ahy-ah-www they are.
i2« See Notes 67 and 68.
P
210
A GRAMMAR OF
Indeterminaie,
[[I-d-newoo, &c. (p. 200) Ahy-dh-m ^Aey(Fr.on)are. absol.]]
I'^'Wun Ahy-dh- id. relat.
INANIMATE. (De£) pp. 127. 128. Notes.
I'&'thu Ahy^ah-neh it is, in relation
to him, or them.
J-irthU'd Ahy-ah^nervun ^^ they are. id.
Indefinite.
I-d-magun-e/Ai^
Ahy-dh-mahgud-en^A
it is^
sent.
in relat. to htm.
Subjunctive Mood — Pre
l^^wuk
ahy-ah-fv-tf^
(If)
I am, in relat.
I'i^tvut
ahj-ah-fvud
thou art.
Ud-^ihit
ahj-ah-nid
he is.
U&^fvuk^^et
ahy~Bh'tvong'id
Tve (1.3) are.
I-a-w^A
ahy-ah-n^ttitg
rve (1.2) are.
I-a^-waig
ahy-ah-ft^a^
ye are.
I-i-thit
ahy-ah-mc^
Indeterminate.
they are.
I-d-w-ait
Ahy-dh-
(If) he
• or they (Fr. on)
are
, in relat. &c.
Inanimate. (Def.)
\'i.'thik Ahy-4h-«tg (If) it is, in relat. to him.
-ee 'in they are, id.
Indefinite.*^*
I-d-magun-€^M* Ahy-dh-mahgud-eittg^ (If) it is, in relation to
him, &c.
The above Accessory Case, in common with every mode of
the (Chippeway) Verb, is susceptible of Negation, and also of its
Suppositive and Doubtfiil forms — ^the Negative sign, se or se-n
al'^ays retaining its place (p. 206), as.
1^ vii. 38. Tah oonj-^jewun-^tetotm . . they shall from-flow in relat. ^c.
>M xi. 55. Aliyek%ah ahy^mahgdd-eni^-oopun (pret.). . almost iV was
hem^-tO'them, " was nigh at hand." (p. 124 Notes.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 211
Indicative,
Nind ahy-ah-sK-w-o'» (p. 209).../ am not, in relat. to him, &c.
&c.
Inanimate. (Def.)
Ahy-dh-sen-ew^A ,,It\s not, in relat. to him, &c.^29
Indefinite.
Ahy-dh-mahgdh-sen-ew^A.../if is not, fW.^^o
Subjunctive, (p. 210.)
Ahy-dh-se-w?/g...(If) I am not, in relat. to him, &c.
&c.
Inanimate. (Def.)
Ahy-dh-sen-e«i^...(If) it is not, id.
Indefinite.
Ahy-dh-mahgdh-sen-en%...(If) it is not, id:
Suppositive. (Indie.) p. 205.
Nind ahy-4h-se-fV(m-dhdoog.../ am not, in relat. to him, &c. I sup-
Ac. pose.
Doubtful. (Subj.)
Ahy-dh-se-w«g-w-4in...(If) /be not, id.
&c.
Sect. II.
The Transitive Verb comprises, besides the
Subject and Attribute (as in the Intransitive form), the
Object and the End (p. 77).
The Transitive Verb may be divided (p. 35) into two parts — the
Root and Affix. The Affix itself (of the derived Transitive) may
also be divided into two parts (p. 37), namely, the Characteristic
130 xix. 36. Tah b6ok-6ogahn-a^gahda-sen-en^A (part. pass. inan). . it (a
bone) shall break-boned-be-«o^#o-A»m.
ISO viii. 20. T6hgweshin6o-mahgdh-*c«-«i^-bun (pret.) oo gezhig-oow. .
it arrived-no^-^o-^tm-was, his day (Nomin.).
p2
212 A GRAMMAR OF
or Formative sign — and the Inflection; the former intimating the
Transition, together with the Manner of it^ as General (p. 38
et seq.). Special (p. 86 et seq.), or Particular (pp. 95. 96) ; — ^the
latter representing the European Personal Pronoun in its Relative
forms of Case ; Direct and Oblique (pp. 51. 55.).
The Transitive, in like manner with the Intransitive,
verb has its two forms, viz. the Animate and the
Inanimate ; the former may be said to have only one
conjugational (pronominal) ending — the latter has two ;
which will be severally exhibited in their Direct and
Inverse, &c. forms, in the order following :
1. Definite Object, &c. (pp. 41, et seq., 86 et seq., 95. 96.)
Anim. Sdke-h-ayoo Oo sahge-h-aun he loves him. -
1. Inan. -t-ow; -t-oon he loves il.
[]Anim.It-^the-m-a^oo Ood en-4ne-m-o». He thinks himJ]
or -aun
2.1nan. It-6the-t-um Ood en-din-d-on He thinks it (pp. 44.
and 64).
2, Indefinite Object, &c. (pp. 99 et seq. IO9. 110.).
Anim. Sdke-h-ew-dyoo Sahge-h-ew-d he loves.
Inan. -(t)ch-egdyoo -(t)ch-eg-d he loves.
(See p. 104 Note.)
3. Participial Passive (p. Ill et seq.).
Anim. Sdke-(t)ch-eg-lt8oo Sdhge-(t)ch-eg-dhzoo.
he is loved. (Lat. amatus est)
Inan. Sake-(t)ch-eg-^tdyoo Sahge-(t)ch-eg.ahdd.
it is loved. (Lat amatum est.)
</
4 Verbal Adjective (p. 114), Active. /
Indet. Sdke-h-ewdy-fww-w Sahge-h-ewd-wiz-eA.
he is loving, afiectiono/e.
Indef. Sdke-(t)ch-egdy-ww-w Sahge-(t)ch-egd-fi;tz-eA.
he is loving, affectionate.
^,
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
213
Passive, (pp. 114. 115.)
1. Anim. Sdke-h-ik-oos-u Sahge-h-ig-ooz-eh.
he is (may be) lowed, is aimable,
Inan. Sake-h-ik-wun Sahge-h-ig-wut.
it may be loyed, is lov^able.
2. Anim. lt-6the-t-ak-oos-u En-din-d-dhgoo-zeh.
he is (may be) so-thought^ considered.
Inan. It-6the-t-kk-wun En-din-d-ahg-wut.
it is (may be) so-thought^ deemed.
Paragraph II.
Indicative Mood. (p. 51 et seq. and Notes.)
Present. Direct. 3d. pers. Acctis.
Ne sdke-h-ow
Ke sdke-h-ow
Sdke-h-ayoo
Ne sake-h-a-/ic£n
Ke sdke-h-anofv
Ke sdke-h-oii/ozi;
Sake-h-dyn^tt^
Ne sdke-h-6w-uk
Ke sdke-h-6w-uk
Sdke-h-dyoo
Ne sdke-h-a-nan-uk
Ke sdke-h-an6w-uk
Ke sdke-h-ow6w-uk
Sdke-h-dyw-uk
Nin sahge-h-ah
Ke sdhge-h-ah
Oo sdhge-h-aun^ or -on
Nin sahge-h-ah-»(^;}
Ke sdhge-h-ah-;i(^/2
Ke sdhge-h-ah-n;(£A
Oo sdhge-h-ah-ft;(^»
Plural.
Nin sdhge-h-og
Ke sdhge-h-og
/ love him.
thou lovest him.
he loves him.
we (1.3) love him.
tve (1.2) love him.
ye love him.
they love him.
1 love them,
thou lovest them.
Oo sdhge-h-aun^ or -on he loves them.
Nin sdhge-h-ah-n6n-ig we (1.3) love them.
Ke sdhge-h-ah-n6n-ig we ( 1 .2) love them.
Ke 8dhge-h-ah-w6-g ye love them.
Oo sdhge-h-ah-w6n they love them.
PRETERITE,
Ne skke-h-d or -dti Nin sdhge-h-dhbun I loved him.
&c. See Addenda.
future. (See Pres. Tense.)
Ne g& skke-h-ow Ne kah sahge-h-ah I shall, &c. love him.
&c.
214
A GRAMMAR OF
Note. — ^llie Future sign ga (Chip, kah), used before the first and second
persons^ is changed into kuttd (ga-ta), Chip, tah, before the third person,
singular and plural.
Indeterminate.
Sake-h-dh-gtf»-en^oo...Ae^ or they, love him, or them. (Fr. on Faime).
Inverse.
Ne s4ke-h-ik
Ke sake-h-ik
Sake-h-ik
Ne s4ke-h-ik-oonan
Ke sdke-h-ik-oondft;
Ke skke-h-ik-oon;(^n;
Sdke-h-ik-ft;?/^
3d pers. Nomin.
Nin sdhge-h-ig
Ke s^hge-h-ig
Oo s^ge-h-igoon
(p. 51. et seq.)
me loveth-he, i.e.
he loveth me,
(and so of the rest.)
he loveth thee,
he is loved
(by him, her, or them, dsf.).
Nin s^hge-hAg-oondn he loveth us (1.3).
Ke s4hge-h-ig-oo»J« he loveth us (1.2).
Ke sahge-h-ig-ooxc7^A he loveth ^om.
Oo s4hge-h-ig-oon^o;i /Aey are loved
(by him, her, or them, dbf.).
Ne skke-h-ik-wuk
Ke s4ke-h-ik-wuk
Sake-h-ik
Plural.
Nin sahge-h-ig-oog they love me.
Ke s4hge-h-ig-oog they love thee
Oo sahge-h-ig-oon he is loved.
Ne s&ke-h-ik-oon^n-uk Ne sdhge-h-ig-oonon-ig they love (1.3) us.
Ke s^ce-h-ik-oondw-uk Ke sdhge-h-ig-oon6n-ig they love (1.2) us.
Ke skke-h-ik-oow6w-uk Ke 8dhge-h-ig-oow6-g they love you.
Sdke-h-ik-wuck Oo 8dhge-h-ig-oow6n they are loved.
Note. — Some Verbs ending in -to-oyoo (p. 45), a^d -sw-ayoo (Special,
p. 87)> and others ending in 'ska-wayoo (Special, p 87)» -tlhwajoo (particul.
p. 96) change ik (3rd pers.)— the former into ook — ^the latter, with some
others, into hk, or dk (p. 107).
Direct. (2d and 1st pers.)
Ke s4ke-h-in
Ke sake-h-in-ndn
Ke s4ke-h-in-ow6w
Ke sake-h-ittin
Ke sdhgeh
Ke sahge-h-
Ke s4hge-h-im
Ke s4hge-h-im-in
Inverse.
Ke sAhge-h-in
thou lovest me.
thou lo vest us( 1.3)
ye love me.
ye love us (1.3).
thee love-I, i.e I
love thee
(and so of the rest).
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 215
Ke s4ke-h-ittin-ow6w Ke s4h^e-h-enim I love you.
Ke s4ke-h-ittin-nani ^i we ( 1 .3) love thee.
Preterite.
Ne 8&ke-h-ik-oo> or -ooti Nin sahge-h-ig-oobun me loved he, i.e.
&c. he loved me.
Future, (p. 201.)
Ne gS sake-h-ik Ne kah sahge-h-ig mewilllove-he,i.e.
&c. he will love me.
Subjunctive Mood Present Direct.
. In this Mood both Pronouns (Nomin. and Aceus.) are expressed
by the Inflection,
Sdke-h-uk Sahge-h-ug (that) I love him.
-ut -ud thou lovest him.
-at -od he loves him.
-uk-^et -ung-id,or-6ed we (1.3) love him.
-ak -ung we (1 .2) love him.
-dig -4ig ye loye him.
-at- wow (def.) -ah-w6d th6y love him.
S-e-dke-h-dtch-ik (ind.) S-ahy-^ge-6dj-ig they love him.*^^
»3i See p. 52 et seq. Notes 30, 31, 32.
I xiv. 31. Sdhge-u^. . (that; / love him,
xiii. 20. AnooD-ahg(ug)-in . . him (indef.) / send,
iv. 14. Ka m^n-ttflf . . / give (it to) him.
vii. 23. Ke. . n6ojem6o-u^ . . that / have saved, cured, him,
X. 15. Azhe kekdnemu^ . . so / know him.
ix. 36. Che tdpway-4ne-m.aA^(tt5r).^un (pret.) . . that I might true-
think him.
xi. 3. Sahyihge-ud (flat vowel). . whom thou lovest him.
xviii. 26. W6}evr'Ud. . as thou accompaniedst him.
iii. 26. Kah debdhje-m-iMl . . whom thou narratest him.
XX. 15. Wdin^n iindahw-iaemud} . . whom seekest thou?
ix. 17. Alm'een. . an^je-m-iMl? . . what manner, how, relatest-^Aoit-
him?
xvii. 2. Kah m6n'dhf(udj)in . . which thou givest him.
xvii. 3. Kah p^-dhnoon-uc? . (whom) thou hither-sendest him.
216
A GRAMMAR OF
Plural.
S4ke-h.uk-w6w
Sahge-h-u^-w^h (that) I love them.
-ut-w<Sw
-ud-wah thou lovest them.
.4t
-od he loves him, or
them.
xix. 38- Koos-dii . . as ^ fears him (or them).
xvii. 2. Che men-dd . . that he give to him (or them).
xi. 36. En^h. . azhe sihge-od . . Behold ! . . as *^e loved him.
xi. 52. Che mdhwunje(h)(^d . . that he " gather together" them.
ix. 14. Ke wkhbe(h)6d (caus.). . that he made him see.
V. 6. Ahp^ kah vrihhummdd . . when that he saw him.
Kiya ke kek^ne-m-o<^. . and that he knew him.
xviii. 26. Kah k^shke-tdhwahge-gdhnahm-<^d . . who cut-off-ear-ed-
him.
xviii. 31. A'hweyah che n^s-un^ . . any one that we (1.3) kill him.
vi. 68. Wandish. . ka nlihzek&hw-un^^^pun (pret.) . . whom should
we (1.3) goto (.him).
xi. 48. K^shpin . . ^zhe ^6one(h)'Ung . . if . . so we (1.2) cease him,
" leave him alone.'*
vi. 62. K^shpin wdhhu-m-ot^ . . if ye see him.
viii. 28. Ahpe ke dohe-n-dig . when ye shall up-lift him.
vi. 29. Che tdpwa-&nem-(% . . that ye true-think him.
V. 18. A'hndahwr^ndahm'-oowde? . . they go-think, seek, him.
X. 39. Che ddhkoon-aAtf;oJ . . that they take him.
vi. 25. Ahpe kah mikahw-ahwod . . when they had found him.
viii. 3. Ahp^ kah h&tigedi-n-ahwdd. . when they had set himiher) down.
V. 16. 18. Che n48'dhw6d . . that they might kill him.
xvii. 18. Kah(ezhe)&hnoon-a^(tf^)-i(;<fA . . (so) /have sent them.
xvii. 12. Mdgwah k^ we^^-w-ahg^wdh . . whilst J accompanied them.
xii. 47. Che deh^hkoon-cJigwdh . . that /judge them.
Che n6o}em6o'ahgwdh . . that I save them.
xii. 40. Che na-ndondahwe-aA^toaA-bun (pret.) that J should
" heal" them.
X. 14. xvii. 10. Tabknem'dhg(4g)-ik . . (whom) I own them.
xvii. 23. Ke sahge-a^ (ud)'wdh . . (and) thou hast loved them.
xvii. 16. Che 6koO'n-ahd(ud)-wdh . . that thou withdraw them.
xvii. 10. T^hine-m-dhjiudfi-ig. . (which) thou ownest t?iem.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 217
Sake-h-iik-eet-w6w Sahge-h-dng-id-wdh we( 1.3) love them.
-kk-w6w -ung-w§Ji we (1.2) love them.
-aig-w6w -^ig-w4h ye love them.
-at-w6w (def.) -ah-w6d they love them.
Seake-h-atch-ik(indef.) Sahyahge-h-6dj-ig they love (hun or)
them.
In the " flat voweP* or, as respects Timb, Indefinite form, the plur.
ending -wow (Chip, -wah), is changed — ^in the first pers. plur. (1.2), and
the second pers. plur. into -^okj — ^in the other persons, plural, into -ik
(see e.g. the third pers. plur. and p. 218, where it is exemphfied
throughout.)
Indeterminate.
Sake-h-&h-gun-ewik Sahge-h-ong (that) he or thet^ love him.
Inverse.*33
Sake-h-it
S^hge-h-id (that) he loves me.
-isk
-ik he loves thee.
-Ik^-oot
-6g-ood he is h>ved.
vi. 2. Kah &tiymdbo-dahw6d. . which he did to them.
vi. 42. Kakane-m-tfit^oo^ . . we (1.2) know them.
xxi. 10. Kdh nis'dig'ook . . ye have killed them.
vi. 1 1 . Menik wah ihyBhw-ahtodd . . as many as they want (to) have
them.
iv. 1. KiysL zegQh6nd'ahw6d ..and (that) t?iey poured on, "bap-
tized,*' them.
XX. 19. Koo8'dhw6d . . (as) they feared them.
vi. 40. 'WBhYihh\jmrdhj(j6dj)ig. . who ^they) see him.
vi. 46. Kah n6ondahw-rfA/-i^ . . who have heard him.
V. 38. Kah i}moondh(ddj)in . . whom he hath sent him.
vi. 29. Kah dhnoon(%'((^<(/)tn . (inan.) whom he hath sent (them.)
vii. 25. Wah n68-Qh.wdhj(odj)in . . whom they want (to) kill.
133 iv. 34. xii. 44. 45. Kah ahnoozh-uf . . he (who) sent me.
v. 32. Owh tab&hjemu? . . he who narrates me.
V. 3. Ewh andhjemirf . . that (which) he relates (of) me.
X. 15. Azhe kekinemid ..as he knoweth me.
X. 17. Wainje sdhgetJ . . therefore he loves me.
X. 18. Kah m^enzhtd . . which he gave me.
218
A GRAMMAR OF
Sdke-h.6ani^t
Sdhge-
-h-6amingid or
-^ungid
he loves us (1.3).
-ittiik
-enting
he loves us (1.2).
-itt&ig
-endig
he loves you.
-Ik'oot-wow
-6good-wah
they are loved.
Plural.
(Indefinite ; or '' Flat Vowel.")
Se4ke-h-itch-ik
Sahyahg<
5-h-idj-ig* (that) they love me.
-isk-ik
-ik-ig
they love thee.
-ikoo(t)ch.ik
-6goo(d)j-ig
they are loved
-6am6etch-ik
-6amingidj-ig
they love us (1.3).
-ittak-ook
-eniing-ook
they love us (1.2).
-ittdig-ook
-endig-ook
they love you.
.ikoo(t)ch.ik
-egoo(d)j-ik
they are loved
(by him or them, dbp.)
•Sdhge
-h-ewod, DBF.
vii. 20. Wdn^n babdh-undah-nes/A; . . who about-go-that he kill thee.
ix. 37. Me owh kdnoon-/A;. . it is ^ (Ital. Ecco to) who talketh (to) thee,
i. 48. Ch^pwah und6o-m-/it . . before he called thee,
ix. 21. Ahn'een kah d6od-dbA; .^. . what manner, how, did he (to) thee,
xix. 11. Kah bdhked^-n-ahm(um)-dbA; ..who (he) has delivered (it)
to thee,
xvii. 3. Che kekdne-m-egiM^^ (= -ik^wdh), , that they know thee.
i. 31. Che kekanem-Zj^ooe^ . . that he should be known by him,
iii. 2. Wej^we^ood . . if Ae be accompanied hy him,
vii. 1. Che n^s^^ooe^ . . that he be killed hy him, or them,
vii. 51. Ch^pwah nbondL-dhgood, .before he is heard hy it (viz the law).
xviii. 3. Ke Tdhiegood , . he had been given (to) hy them.
X. 4. N6opendhne^oo(2 . . ^ is followed by him (or them),
iv. 12. Kah mi&iYi-iyahmingid , , he who gave (it to) us (1.3).
vi. 52. Che ihshahm-'en/dng . . that fie feed «« (1.2).
viii. 36. V^tigeden-endig ,,i[ he release you.
xiv. 16. Che m^n^iat^ that he give (to) you,
xiv. 16 Che w6}ewendig . . that he accompany you.
xiii. 14. Kiya kakenoo-dhmoo-wiiflf (flat vow.) . . he who teacheth you,
xvii. 20. Ka tkpw3i-inem'ej{idj)ig . , who (they) shall true-think me.
xviii. 21. Egewh kah n6ondahw-e;(»c^')-t5'' • those (they) who heard mc.
V. 36. vi. 39. Kah raeezh-ejiidfi-in (inan.). . which lie hath given me.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 219
Direct.!** (2d and 1st pers.)
Sake-h-eun S&hge-h-eyun (that) thou lovest me.
-ekk -ey6ng thou lovest us. (1.3)
-e4ig -ey^g ye love me.
XV. 18. Ke sheeng'inem'ewdd . . they hated me,
viii. 10. E'gewh diiahme-m-/A;-tA; (flat vow.) . . those (they) who ac-
cuse thee, " thine accusers."
vi. 45. Kiya kah k^enooahmi%oo4r-i^ . . and who (they) are taught
by him.
vii. 18. Kah £hnoon-^oo4;-tft . . whom he was sent by (him).
X. 35. Kah dodea-^goodjig . . who (they) were arrived at by it.
i. 22. Kah h6'^nooz\i'^ahming^j(ic^-ik . . . they who hither -sent
iw(1.3).
XV. 18. 19. Keshpin Bheeng-kaemendig-wdh . . if they hate you.
xiii. 35. Ka. . k^kBnem'-endg'wdh . . they shall know you.
xviii. 28. Che w^ne-sk-&hk.^)oir(^ . . that they he defiled by it.
13* XX. 29. Ke wdhhahm-^uft . . thou hast seen me.
xvii. 6. 9^ 12. Kah m^enzh-^aAfi-(UN)-t^. . whom (plur.) thou hast
given me,
xvii. 7. Kah m^enzh-^aAn(iin)-tn. . which (plur.) thou hast given me.
xvii. 4. Kah m^enzh-^tm . . which thou gavest (to) me.
xi. 41. 42. Ke n6ond4hw-eytm . . (that) thou hast heard me,
xi. 42. Ke £hnoozh-^n . . (that) thou hast sent me,
xvii. 23. 26. Kah . . s4hge-^«9» . . thou hast loved me.
i. 48. A'hn'ahp^ kakinem-^un ? (flat vow.). . what time know-^Aou
me?
X. 24. Ka gw^nahw-^ndahmoo-^dft^ (caus.) . . . thou lack- thinks
" doubt," makest us (1.3).
vii. 19. W^goonain . . ni^-eydig . . why . . ye kill me.
viii. 19. xiv. 7. Keshpin kekiinemcy<%-oopun (pret.). . if yc knew me.
xvi. 27. Ke sdhge-ey% .. as yc love me.
iv. 26. Neen kandon-eftdirt . . I who speak (to) thee.
xxi. 15. 16. S&hge-ett(^ . . that I love thee.
ii. 4. Ka x6ot6on-en6n . . shall / do (to) thee.
xiii. 12. 15. Kah tdotoon—na^ooA; . . what / have done to you.
220 A GRAMMAR OF
Inverse.
S4hke-h-itt4n Sahge-h-en6ii (that) I love thee,
-ittuk-wow -h-6nug-wah I love you.
-itt^ -h-en6ng we love thee.
Imperative Mood, Present (See p. 204.)***
Sdk^-h S4hg6-h love thou him.
Kutt& sdike-h-ayoo Oo tah sdhke-h-at<n, or -on let him love him
Sdke-h-a-tak S^hge-h-ali-ddh let us love him.
S4ke-h-^k S4hge-h-6eg love ye him.
Kutt& s^ke-h-dy-wuk Oo tah sihge-h-ah-won let them love him.
Plural.
S^ke-h-ik S4hge-h love thou them.
Kutti sdke-h-ayoo Oo tah s^ge-h-aun let him love (him
or) them.
xiii. 34. XV. 9* Kah ezhe s&hge-Snahgoog . . as J have loved you.
xiv. 3. Che ood^hpen-^no^oo^ . . that I take, " receive," you.
xiv 25. Magwah . . w6}4iW-6iahgoog . . whilst . . I accompany you.
XV. 14. Kah li6kem'6iahgoog . . which / command you,
xiii. 14. Ke k^zeb^-ezeddn-^toA^oo^ . . I have wash-footed you,
135 xvii. 17. V6en-6h: , purify, " sanctify," thou (Hm or) them.
xvii. 11. Kdhnahw^ni-m . . guard, " keep," thou (him or) them,
i. 46. B^w^hbu-m . . hither-see thou him (or them), "come and see.^
xxi. 15. 16.' AVshu-m. . feed thou (him or) them.
ix. 24. Meenj?^ . . give thou (to) him.
iv. 29* W^hbu-m-fib . . see ye Mm.
xii. 7. P6one(h)iA; . . leave off yc him, •* her."
xviii. 31. XX. 22. Ahy4hw-»A: . . have, " take," " receive," ye him.
xviii. 31. Ezhe teb^ihkoo-n-i% . . so judge ye him.
ix. 21. 23. Kahgwdje-m-ZA: . . ask ye him.
xxi. 10. P^-n-/Ar . . bring ye them.
xi. 44. Ah^hsL-h'dok . . loose ye him.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 221
S^ke-h-d-tdh-we-nik Sdhge-h-ah-ddh-nig let us love them
Sdke-h-^ek-ook Sdhge-h-^ek love ye them.
Kutt^ s4ke-h-dy-wuk Oo tah sdhge-h-ah-won let them love (him
or) them.
Verbs Ending in -^ayoo (anim. p. 42) change the t into s in' the first
person singular, thus, Nugga-t-ayoo makes nuggu-« . . leave thou him ;
Naht-t-ayoo (or nk-t-ayoo) makes nk-s. . fetch thou him, &c.
Indefinite,
Sdke-h-d-kun Sdhge-h-dh-kun love thou him.
Sdke-h-a-k^k Sdhge-h-ah-gkk let us love him.
Sike-h-a-kdik S4hge-h-ah-gdig love ye him.
Sdke-h-^-kunik Sdhge-h-dh-kun-ig love thou them.
Sdke-h-a-kw6w-in-ik Sdhge-h-ah-kah-dwdh-nig let us love them
Sdke-h-a-gdik-ook Sdhge-h-ah-gdig-oog love ye them.
Present. (Ist and 2d Pers.)*^^
Sdke-h-in Sdhge-h-^zhin love thou me.
Sike-h-inndn Sdhge-h-^zhin-om love thou us (1.3).
Sdke-h-ik Sdhge-h-^zhig love ye me or us.
Indefinite.
Sdke-h-^-kun Sdhge-h-ezh^-kun love thou me.
Sdke-h-e-k-dik Sdhge-h-^zhe-k-aik love ye me.
Paragraph III.
Inanimate Object, Direct.
1. Sdke-t-6w Oo 8dhge-t-6on he loves it.
2. It-^he-t-um Ood en6in-d-on he so-thinks it.
^^ xxi. 19. 22. N6openahzh^^tn . . follow thou me.
iv. 7. M^na-h-^Atn . . give thou me drink,
vi. 34. Meenzh-^Atn-om . . give thou (to) us (1.3).
222 A GRAMMAR OF
Indicative Mood.
Ne s4ke-t-an Ne s&hge-t-oon I love it.
Ke s4ke-t-an Ke s&hge-toon thou lovest it.
Sdke-t-ow Oo s4hge-t-oon he loves it.
Ne sake-t-an-n4n Ne 84hge-t-oon-n6n we (1.3) love it.
Ke sike-t-an-anow Ke 84hge-t-oon-n6n we (1.2) love in.
Ke 8^ke-t-an-ow6w Ke 8dhge-t-6on-ahw4h ye love it. •
S4ke-t-6w-uk Oo 8^hge-t-6on-ahwah they love it.
*
Net' It-ethe-t-en Nind en-din-d-on I so-think it.
Ket' It-^e-t-en Ked en-din-d-on thou thinkest it.
It-6the-t-um Ood en-din-d-on he thinks it.
Net' It-6the-t-en-nan Nind en-din-don-non we (1.3) think it.
Kef It-6the-t-en-anow Ked en-din-don-non we (1.2) think it.
Ket* Tt-6the-t-^n-owow Ked en-din-don-ahwdh ye think it.
It-ethe-t-tim-wuk Ood en-din-don-ahwdh they think it.
* This n is expletive, heing simply the cognate liquid of the d follow-
ing it. See Introduction.
Indeterminate.
1. Skke-Uk'netvoo .,he, or thet/, (Fr. on) love it
2. It-6the-t-ahgun-ewoo...A« or ihe^ so- think it.
Double Inanimate.
Sake-t-^-mahgun it loves it'
Inverse.
Ne s4ke-h-ik-oon Nin sdhge-h-6goon me loveth it, i.e.
it loves me.
Ke sdke-h-ik-oon Ke sahge-h-^goon it loves thee.
Sdke-h-ikoo Oo sdhge^h-^oon he is loved (by it).
Ne sdke-h-ik-oon-n6n Nin s4hge-h-egoon-n6n it loves us (1.3).
Ke sdke-'h-ik-oon-anow Ke sahge-h-6goon-n6n it loves us (1.2).
Ke sdke-h-ik-oon-ow6w Ke sdhge-h-^goon-ahwah it loves you.
Sdke-h-ikoo-wuk Oo s4hge-h-6goo-wug they are loved.
Double Inanimate.
S^ke-h-ik-6o-mahgun...it is loved by it
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 223
Subjunctive Mood Direct.*^7
Sake-t-ian S4hge-t-ooy6n (that) I love it
-lun -6oyun thou lovest it.
-at -ood he loves it.
"ihk -ooy6ng we (1.3) love it.
"iSk -6oyung we (1.2) love it.
-idig -ooydig ye love it.
-at-w6w (def.) -oow6d they love it.
Se4ke-t-^tch-ik (indef.) Sahyahge-t-6odj-ik they love it.
It-ethe-t-umm^w En-aind-umm(5ro (that) / so think it,
&c. See Intrans. pp. 195. 196. 197- Conjug. 6.
Indeterminate.
1. Sdke-t-dnewik Sahge-t-ang (that) he or thei^ love it.
2. It-^the-t-dhgun-ewik En-din-d-ong he or thei^ so-think
or esteem it.
Double Inanimate.
Sake-t-a-magdk Sahge-t-fli-m^k (that) it loves it.
137 iv. 34. Che gizhe-Uooydn . . (and) that / finish it,
X. 25. Wdzhe-too-y<£in(^)-t» . . (which) I do them.
xiii. 2. Ke dht-ooe? . . he had put it.
V. 18. Ke hahn&hje-t-ooc?. . he had defiled it.
xix. 39* Ke h6d'6od . . (and) he brought it.
xix. 10. A''hy-ahm<^. . (that) I have it.
xviii. 37. Che w^n-d-ahm(^. . that I tell, declare it.
xiii. 26. Ke gw4hbah-ahm(um)-(^ . . (when) I have dipped it.
V. 30. An&ind-ahm-(^ . . as J think, intend, " my will."
X. 17. P4hged^-n-ahm(^ . . as J lay-down it.
X. 18. Che ooddhpe-n-ahmdn . . that I take it.
xvi. 30. Kekdind-dhmun . . (that) thou knowest (it or them),
i. 50. Wainje tdpway-dind-ahmtm ? . . whence true-thinkest, " be-
lievest,'* thou it f
iv. 11. Alin'eende . . wdinde-n-dhmun ? . . .what-place . . from-takest
thou it?
XX. i. 5. 6. Ke wdhbundim^ . . (and) he saw it (or them).
xiii. 26. Kah gwdhbah-ilft^ . . (when) he had dipped t^.
viii. 9. E'gewh kah ndondi'dhg-ig . . those who (fhey) heard it.
224
A GRAMMAR OF
Inverse.
Sake-h-ik-oo-y4n
Sahge-h-egoo-y6n that it loves me.
-6o-yun
-eg6o-yun it loves thee.
-oo-t
-6goo-d he is loved (by it
-oo-ykk
-egoo-y6ng it loves us (1.3).
-oo-yak
-eg6o-yung it loves us (1.2).
-oo-ydig
-egoo-yaig it loves you.
-oo-t-wow
-6goo-d-wah they are loved.
Sdke-h-ik-6omagak
Double Inanimate.
Sahge-ig-6omag^ (that) it is loved by it.
viii. 51. Keshpin. . minj^mi-n-un^ . . if . . ^ hold it.
viii. 29. Mdnw-dind-tcn^-in (plur.). . which he well-thinks, approves.
vii. 23. Keshpin. . ootdhpe-n-tm^ . .ii he take it.
iii. 31. Ahkeh aindahzhindt^^ . . earth, he relates, " speaks of/' it.
iii. 11. Kak&indahmc^ . . (which) we (1.3) know {it).
Kah wlihbundahmdn^ . . which we have seen (it).
i. 14. Ke w^bundahmt^n^ . . (and) we saw it,
xiii. 29. Ka ahykh-m-ung-oon (plur.) . . (which) we (1 .2) shall have
(them).
XV. 10. Keshpin minj^me-n-ahm-c^i^ ..if ye hold them.
xiii. 17. Keshpin kekdindahm-<% ..iiye know them.
xvi. 4. Che megu-dindahm-c^t^. . that ye may find-think, recollect it.
vi. 26. Ke wdhbundahm-£% . . that ye had seen them.
i. 38. W^oonain lundahw-dindum-(% f . . what seek ye ?
ix. 27. Wah . . ndndBhrn-dig ? . . (that) ye want (to) hear it.
vi. 14. 22. Ahp^ kah w^bunddhm-ooti^^c? . . when they had seen it.
vi. 13. Kah esquand-ahm-oou;cf(i . . which they had left, " remained
over."
V. 28. Che n6ond-ahm-oo«;(^(2 . . they will hear it.
xi. 41. Ke ^koo-n-ahm-oot(;o(i . . they withdrew it.
xviii. 28. K6o-t-dhm-oow(^(i . . as they feared it.
vi. 23. Kah . . m4yewod . . they eat it.
THB CRBE
LANGUAGE.
225"-^
Imperative Mood^ Present
Sdke-t-ah
Sdhge-t
.ooni88
love thou it
Sdke-t-ah-tlik
Sdhge-t-oon-ddh
let us love it
Sdke-t-ak
Sdhge-t<
-6og
love ye it.
It-ethe-ta
£n-&in-d-un
think thou it.
It-^the-ta-tlik
En-4ia«dun-dih
let us think it
It-6the-t-uni"6ok
£n-din-d-um-^6ok
Indefinite.
think ye it
1 Sdke-t-s
i-kun
-kak
.kaik
love thou it
let us love it
love ye it
2 It-^e-t-um-6o-kun
think thou it.
-k^
let us (1.2) think it.
-kdik think ye it.
Paragraph IV.
Indeterminate^ &c. Object
Anim. obj. Sdke-h-ewdyoo S^ge-h-ew& he loves, (p. 99)
Inan. obj. Sdke-che-gdyoo S4hge-ch-egd he loves, (p. 101)
Indic. Pres. Direct. (Conjug. 3.)
Ne sdke-h-ewdn Nin s4hge-h-*ew4 I love (somebody)
Ke s4ke-h-ewdn Ke s^ge-h-ewd thou lovcst (id.).
S^e-h-ew&yoo Sdhge-h-ew& he loves (id.).
iM xii. 28. P^8heg-aind6hgoo-t-<fe» . . one-think» " glorify," thm it,
ziii. 29. K^shpenah-d-dbn . . buy thou (it or) them.
ii. 19. Bahn6hje-t-(^05r . . destroy ye it,
xi. 34. XX. 27. W6hbu-nd-im . . see thou (it or) them,
xviii. 11. P^ena-h-t^» . . enter, " put up,'' thou it,
V. 8. 11. Oot^pe-n-im . . take thou it,
ii. 8. Z4f;e'n-dhm^ook . . poury6 1^.
V. 39. Undah-kekla-nd-aAffi-(^oJt . . go-know ye (it or) them,
xi. 39. E^oo-n^dhm-ook . . withdraw, " take away," ye it,
ray. 15. Minj^me-n-oAm-oo* . . hold, '' keep," ye (it or) them,
Q
226
A GRAMMAR OF
Ne s4ke-h-ewdn-nan Nin s4hge-h-ewd-min
Ke s4ke-h-ew4n-^now Ke sdhge-h-ew^-min
Ke s4ke-h-ewdn-owow Ke sdhge-h-ew^-m
Sdke-h-ewdy-wuk
Ne 8dke-h-ik-6win
Ke sdke-h-ik-6wm
Sdke-h-6w
Sdhge-h-ewd-wug
Inverse.
Nin 8^ge-h-ig-6o
Ke 8dhge-h4g-6o
S^ge-h-^
Ne sdke-h-ik-6win-nan Nin 8dhge-h-ig-6o-min
Kesike-*h-ik-6win-£lnow Ke sdhge-h-ig-6o-min
Ke sdke-h-ik-6win-ow6w Ke sdhge-h-ig-6o-m
Sdke-h-6w-uk Sdhge-h-dh-wug
we(1.3)love (id.),
we (1.2) love (id.),
ye love (id.),
they love (id.).
me love theycindet).
they love thee,
he is loved
they love us (1.3).
they love us (1.2).
they love you.
they are loved
Subjunctive Moon^ Direct.
Sdke-h-ew-^dn Sdhge-h-ew-^3wki (that)
-^un -dyun
-dit -did
-6ak -dy6ng
-e&k -dyung
-edig -aydig
-ait-w6w (def.time) -dwod
-ditch-ik (indef.time) -didj-ig
Inverse.
Sdhe-h-ig6o-y6n (that)
-h-ig6o-yun
-h-ind
-h-ig6o-y6ng
-h-ig6o-yung
-h-ig6o-ydig
-h-ind-wdh
Sdke-h-ik.6w-edn
-h-ik-6w-eun
-h-6et
-h-ik-6we-€dc
-h-ik-6we-&k
-h-ik-6we-dig
-h-6et-w6w
I love (somebody),
thou lovest.
he loves,
we (1.3) love,
we (1.2) love,
ye love,
they love,
they love.
they (somebody)
love me.
they love thee,
he is loved,
they love us (1.3)
they love us (1.2)
they love you.
they are loved.
Indefinite Object Indie. Mood. Direct. (Conjug. 3.)
Ne sdke-(t)ch-egdn Ne sdhge-ch-egd I love.
Ke sdke-ch-egdn Ke sdhge-ch-egd thou lovest
Sdke-ch-egdyoo Sdhge-ch-egd he loves.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 227
Ne sdke-ch-egdu-nan Nin s^ge-ch-egd-min we (1.3) love.
Ke s^e-ch-egan-^now Ke adbge-ch-egd-min we (1.2) love.
Ke s4ke-ch-egdn-ow6w Ke 8&hge-ch-eg&-m ye love.
Sdke-ch-egdy«wuk Sdhge-ch-egd-wug they love.
Subjunctive Mood.
Sdke*(t)ch-eg-6dn
Sahge-(t)ch-
eg-dy6n (that) Ilove(somethj
-^un
-dyun
thou lovest
-dit
-did
he loves.
-64k
-ay6ng
we (1.3) love.
-^k
-dyung
we (1.2) love.
-eaig
-dydig
ye love.
-dit-w6w (def.time)
-dwod
they love.
S-e-dke(t)chegdi(t)chik S-ahy-dhge-(t)ch-eg-di(d)j-ig they love.
The Invbrsb or return form of this (Indefinite) mode of the
nrerb constitutes the Participial Passive^ as follows^
Participial Passive. Past Participle, (p. Ill et seq.)
Indicative Mood, {Conjug, 4.)
" Ne sdke-ch-eg-ks-oon Nin sdhge-ch-egdhz
I am loved (Lat. amatus sum).
Ke sdke-ch-^-ks-oon Ke sdhge-ch-egdhz
thou art loved.
Sdke-ch-eg-4s-oo Sdhge-ch-egdhzoo
he is loved.
Ne sdke^ch-eg-ks-oon-nan Nin sdhge-ch-egdhzoo-min
we (1.3) are loved.
Ke sdke-ch-eg-as-oon-^ow Ke sdhge-ch-egdhzoo-min
we (1.2) are loved.
Ke sdke-ch-^-£^s-oon-ow6w Ke sdhge-ch-egdhz6o-m
ye are loved.
Sdke-ch-eg-ds-oo-wug Sdhge-ch-egdhzoo-wug
they are loved.
Inanimate, (p. Ill et seq.)
Sdke-ch-eg4tdyoo Sdhge-ch-eg^hdd it is loved.
-eg^tdy-wd -wun they are loved.
q2
228 A GRAMMAR OF
Subjunctive Mood,
Sdke-ch-eg-^soo-ydn Sdihge-ch-egdhzoo-y6n (that) I am loved,
-yun -yun thou art loved,
-t -d he is loved,
-ykk -y<^ng we (1.3) are loved,
-y&k -y wng we ( 1 .2) are loved,
-ydig -y^ ye are loved.
-t»wow -w6d they are loved.
INANIMATE.
Sake-ch-eg^tdik Sdhge-ch-eg^hd-dig (that) it is loved,
-ee -in they are loved.
1'aragraph V.
Verbal Adjective. — Active, (Intrans. Conjug. 1.)
Ne sdke-h-ewdy-wiss-t» Ne s^hge-h-ewdi-wiz
&c. / am loving, affectionate.
Passive, (id.)
Ne sdke-h-ik-oos-tn Ne s4hge-h-ikoos.
&c. / am lov-able, &c.
Subjunctive, fid.)
A ct. Sdke-h-ew4y- wiss-e^f » Sahge-h-e wa-wiz-eyo«.
&c. (that) I am loving, &c.
Pass. Sdke-h-ikoos-e(in. Sdhge-h-^g-oos-eyo'n.
« &c. (that) / am ami-able, &c.
(See pp. 114, 115.)
Paragraph VI.
Reflective, Reciprocal, Simulative, Verbs, (p. 82 et seq.)
These modes of the Verb involving to some extent (as respects
Agent and Patient) the character of Transitives, are nevertheless
conjugated as Intransiiives (of the 4th Conjugation).
Indicative Mood.
Reflect. Ne sdke-h-i^y^oow (or -Yi'ittissoon) Nin sihge-h-idis
I love myself.
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
229
Recip. Ne sdke-h-ittoonn(fn (plur.) Nin sahge-h-^e-mira.
We (l.S) love eaqh other.
Simul. Ne sdke-k-asoon (reflect.) Nin sahge-kas.
/ make myself, pretend, to love.
Subjunctive Mood.
Reflect. Sdke-h-issoo-y(in S^hge-h-^desoo-y(^.
(that) / love myself.
Recip. Sake-h-ittoo-y^^ (P^ur.) Sahge-h-(§de-yc^ng.
(that) fve (1.3) love one another.
Simul. S4ke-k-^soo-yan (reflect.) Sahge-k-^soo-ydTt.
(that) / pretend to love.
Paragraph VII.
The Oblique Cases, p. 117 et seq. Notes 64. 65.
From the Transitive Verb in its Direct Relation (Nomin. and
Accus.) we proceed to the Oblique Cases; namely, 1, Dative; 2,
Ablative ; and S, Accessory or Possessive ; beginning here with
the last It is, as already observed, used in connexion with the
third person only. See Syntax.
Possessive, &c. Case. (p. 123.)
Anim. Ne s4ke-h-im-6w-a I love his him.
Inan. 1. Ne sake-t-&-wan. I love his it.
2. Net' It-6the-t-um-waii. I think his it
Indicative Mood (anim.). Direct, 3d- person Accus.
Ne 6dke-h-tm-6w-&
Ke sdke-h-«m-6w-&
S4ke-h-(f/A-u-&
Ne sdke-h-tm-dnnan
&c.
I love his him, or them,
thou lovest his him.
he loves his him.
we (1.3) love his him.
Subjunctive Mood.
S^e-h-iwi-tik (that) I love his him, &c.
Sdke-h-ew-ut thou lovest his him.
230 A GRAMMAR OF
SSke^h-dthit he loves his him.
Sake-h-im-wAr-r^c^ me (1.3) love his him.
Imperative Mood. Pres.
Sake-h-if» love thou his him, &c
Sake-h-tm-eek love ye his him.
Ifidefinite.
Sdke-h-iiw-akun love thou his him.
&c.
Inanimate (Indio.)
1. Ne sdke-t%«i9->dai I love his it.
Ke sdke-t&-ft;-dn thou lovest his it.
Sdke-t-(l^Ati-& he loves his it.
&c.
2. Net* It-6the-tum-w-6n I think his it.
Kef It-^e-tum-w-tdn thou thinkest his it.
It-6the-tum-6thu& he thinks his it.
Net* It-6the-tum-w-&n-nan we (1.3) think his it.
Subjunctive Mood.
1. Sdke-td-n^-uk (that) I love his it
&c.
S. It-6the-t-(im-f9-uk I think his it.
&c. See Addenda.
Paragraph VIII.
Dativb Case. (p. 117 et seq. T^ote 64.)
Anim.
Sdke-t-ow-4yoo
he loveth him f<n: him.
Inan.
S&ke-t-iim-ow-dyoo
he loveth it for him.
Direct. Anim. Indie.
3d Pers. Accus.
Ne s£ke-t-ow-6ft;
I love (him) for him.
Ke sike^t'OW^dru
thou lovest (him) for him.
&c.
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
231
Inverse. 3d Pers. Nomin. (p. 55.)
Ne s4ke-tw-&k
he loves (him) for me.
Ke 8dke-tw.&k
he loves (him) for thee.
Sake-tw-dk
he is loved for him, by &c. def.
Ne sdke-tw-dk-oondn
I he loves him for us (1.3)
&e.
Direct
2d and 1st Pers.
Ke 8ake-tw-6win
thou lovest him for me.
Ke sdyke-tw-6win-nan
thou lovest him for us (1.3)
Ke sdke-tw-6win-owow ye love him for me.
Inverse, (p. 55.)
Ke 8ake-tw-4tin
I love him for thee.
Ke s^ke-tw-atin-owow T love him for you.
Ke 8^ke-tw-*^tin-ndn
we (1.3) love him for thee.
Subjunctive Direct. 3d. Pers. Accus.
Sdke.tw.6w.uk
(that) I love (him) for him.
Sdke-tw-6w-ut
thou lovest (him) for him.
&c.
Inverse.
Sdke-tw-6w-it
(that) he loves him for me.
Sake-tw-Usk
he loves him for thee.
Sdke-tw-akoot
he is loved for him,by,&c. def.
S4ke-tw-6w-eam^
he loves him for us (1>3).
&c.
Direct.
2d and Ist Pers.
Sdke-tw-6w-eun
(that) thou love him for me.
Sdke-tw-6we-aig
ye love him for me.
Inverse.
Sike-tw*&-tdn
(that) 1 love him for thee.
Sdke.tw4.tiik.ook
I love him for you.
Sdke.twa-tak
we (1.3) love him for thee.
Indeterminate. Inverse, (p. 226.)
Anim. Ne sdke-^i9-dk-6win they (some one) love him for m&.
&c.
Inan. Ne sdke-/Mm-^.6win they (id.) love it for me.
&c.
232 A GRAMMAR OF
Anim. Ne tern ne n4-fu7-&k-6win. . my horse they (indet.) fetch (Mm)
for me.
Inan. Ne mdkoman ne na-^m-dk-6win. . my knife they (id.) fetch
(it) for me,
Suhjunclive. (p. 226.)
Anim. Sdke-tw-^k-6w-edn (that) they (indet.) love him for me.
&c.
Inan. Sdke-tum-ak-6w-edn they (id.) love it for me.
&c.
Paragraph IX.
Inanimate. (Indie.)
Ne sdke-ttim-ofv-(^iz; / love it for him.
&c.
Inverse, (p. 55.)
Ne sdke-tmn-^k he loves it for me.
&c.
2d and Ist Pers. Direct.
Ke s4ke-t^m-6win thou lovest it for me.
Ke 8dke-t-um-6win-nan thou lovest it for us (1.3).
Ke 8dke-t-um-6win-ow6w ye love it for me.
Inverse, (p. B5.)
Ke sdke-t-um-^tin I love it for thee.
Ke sfike-t-um-£itin-nan we (1.3) love it for thee.
Ke sdke-t-um-atin-ow6w I love it for you.
Subjunctive^ Direct (p. 215.)
/S4ke-ttim-ow«uk (that) I love it for him.
S&ke-tdm-ow-ut thou lovest it for him.
&c.
Inverse.
S&ke-tum-6w-it (that) he loves it for me.
Sfike-tum-dsk he loves it for thee.
S^e-tum-^oot it is loved for him^ by &c« def.
Slike-tum-6w-eam6et he loves it for us (1.3)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 233
2d and 1st Pers. Direct (p. 219-)
Sdke-tum-6w-eun (that) thou love it for'me.
&c.
Inverse, (p. 220.)
Sdke-tum-^-tdn (that) I love it for thee.
Sdke-tum-k-tiik-ook I love it for you.
Sdke-tum-k-tak we (l.S) love it for thee.
Paragraph X.
Dative and Possessive Cases combined.
Anim. Ne sdke-tw-4in-6w-& I love his him for him.
&c.
Inan. Ne sdke-tum-^-6w-& I love his it for him.
&c.
Anim. Oo t^m& ne nlu-TW-am-6w&. . his horse / fetch (his him) for
him.
Oof ustis-S ne nd-TW«^m-6w& . . his gloves I fetch (id.) for him .
Inan. Oo mtlskesin-^ ne nd-TUM-^m-6wS. . ^ shoes I fetch (his it)
FOR him.
Paragraph XI.
Reflective^ &c. Conjug. 4. Indie. Mood.
Anim. Ne sdke-^iv-dssoon / love {him) for myself.
&c.
Inan. ^e sdke-/tim-dssoon / love (it) for myself.
&c.
Subjunctive.
Vnim. S&ke-tw-assoo-ydn (that) 1 love (him) for myself.
Sdke-tw-4ss6o-yun thou^ &c.
&c.
Inan. Sdke-tum-dssoo-ydn (that) I love (it) for myself.
&c.
234 A GRAMMAR OF
Paragraph XII.
Ablative or Instrumental Case. p. 121. (Conjug. 3.)
^e sdke-ch-ega-g^n / love with, or of, something.
Ke sike-ch-egd-g^fn th&u lovest with something.
Sub^'unctive.
S&ke-ch-egk-ge(£n (g hard) (that) I love with, or of, some-
&c. thing.
Sect. V,
NEGATIVE VERBS. (See p. 63 et seq.)
Anim. Ne s&hge-h-dh'Se I love him not.
Inan. 1 . Ne a&hge-t^dO'Seen I love it not.
2. Nind en-ain-(^-aA-^een / think it not.
Indicative Mood.
Present. Direct. 3d. Pers. Accus.
Ne s4hge-h-aA-se (plur. -g) I love him not (plur. them).
Ke sdhge-h-ah-se (-g) thou lovest him not.
Oo s&hge-h-4h-seen he loves him not.
Ne sdhge-h-dh-se-non (-ig) we (1.3) love him not.
Ke s4hge-h-^-se-non (-ig) we (1.2) love him not
Ke 84hge-h-6h-se-wi^ (-g) je love hkn not.
Oo Bifag6-h-4h-se-w6n they love him not.
Inverse. See p. 214.
Ne sahge-h-^-oose (plur. -g) me loveth-Ae-not, i.e. he ioveth
me not (and so of the rest).
Ke sahge-h-igoose (-g) he Ioveth thee not
Oo sahge-h-ig-oo-seen (-un) he is loved not by him^ her^ (or
them) DEF.
Ne sahge-h-ig-oose-n6n (-tg) he loves us (1.3) not (plur. /Aey).
Ke sahge-h-ig-oose-n6n (-ig) he loves us (1.2) not (id.).
Ke sahge-h-ig-oosen-ahwdh (-g) he loves you not iid).
Oo sahge-h-ig-oose-w6n they are loved not by, &c, def.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 235
2d and 1st Pers. Direct.
Ke s4hge-h-6se thou lovest me-not.
Ke sdhge-h-es6e-m ye love me-not
Ke sahge-h-^se-min thou or ye love us (l.S) not.
Inverse.
Ke sihge-h-esenoon I love thee not
Ke s4hge-h-6sen6on-im I love you not
Subjunctive Mood. Present Direct.
Sahge-h-4h-se-wug(plur.-waA)i«9(that) I love him not (plur, them)
Sahge-h-£h-se-wud {-wah) thou lovest him not
Sahge-h-ah-s-ig he loves him not
Sahge-h-4h-.se- wong-id {^wah) we (1.3) love him not.
Sahge-h-dh-se-wung {-wah) we (1.2) love him not
Sahge-h-dh-se-w^ ("WaK) ye love him not.
Sahge-h-^-s-ig-w4h I i , ,
^ > they love him not.
"Se- woci /
Inverse.
S4hge-h-6sig (plur. -ivaA)^^® (that) he loves me not
Sdhge-h-esen-ik he loves thee not
S4hge-h-6goo-sig he is not loved (by> &c. def.)
i3» xix. 4. M^-ahmahw6h-M-t«^ . . (that) I find not to, "in," him.
iz. 31. N6ondahwdh-«-»^ . . (that) he heareth him, or them, not,
vii. 35. Che m^ahwdh-se-iot^ . . (that) we (1.2) find hm not.
vii. 45. Ke henbHtLse^wdig . . (that) ye have not brought him.
ix. 30. Kek^einlUi-«e-t«7(% . . (that) ye know him not,
XV. 21. Kekiaemkih-se-wod . . (as) they know him, or them, not.
1^ xiv. 24. Owh sahy&hge-h-en-^ (flat vow.). . he who loveth me nof.
XX. 29. E'gewh kah wdhbahm-e«^-^-f^ . . those who have not seen me.
xii. 42. Che s&hgeje'wihe^n'^g'Oose-wdd . . that they be not onU
thrown (by them dbf.).
IMPBRATIVB MOOD.
XX. 17. Tdngen-^he-kdin . . touch thou me not.
X. 37. Ti^w9X6h.W'e8h€'k'4ig'Oon . . believe ye me not.
236 A GRAMMAR OF
S&hge-h-6s-eainmind he loves us (1.3) not.
S4hge-h-^-wuiig he loves us (1.2) not.
Sahge-h-6se-wdig he loves you not.
Sahge-h-6goo-se-wod they are not loved (by, &c. def.)
(2d and 1st pers.) Direct.
S^ge-h-es^-wun (that) thou lovest me not
S&hge-h-ese-w6ng thou lovest us (1.3) not
Sdhge-h-ese-wdig*^^ ye love me not
Inverse.
Sihge-h-6sen-ow6n (that) I love thee not.
Sdhge-h-6sen-6nug-oog I love you not.
Sdhge-h-6se-n-ew6ng we (1.3) love thee not.
Paragraph II.
Inanimate Object. Direct.
Indicative Mood.
Ne 8dhge-t-6o-seen (plur. -un) I love it not (plur. them).
Ke s4hge-t-6o-seen thou lovest it not
Oo s4hge-t-6o-seen he loves it not
Ne sdhge-t6o-se-non we (1.3) love it not
Ke skhge-t6o-8e-non we (1.2) love it not.
Ke 84hge-t6o-sen-ahwdh ye love it not
Oo 8^ge-t6o-sen-ahw^ they love it not
Inverse.
Ne 84hge-h-6g-oo-seen(plur.-tt») it loves me not (plur. tke^).
Ke s&hge-h-6g-oo-seen it loves thee not
Oo sdhge-h-eg-oo-seen it is not loved (by, &c. def.).
Ne sdhge-h-^g-oo-se-n6n it loves not us (1.3)
&c.
*^i viii.46. X. 38. (Wdinje) t^pw^'tdw-ese-wdig . . (whence) ye true-hear,
believe, me not.
XV. 5. AhytLhw-ese-'waig . . (if) ye have not me.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 237
Subjunctive Mood. Direct.
Sdlige-t-6ose-won**2 (that) I love it not.
-t-6o8e-wun thou lovest it not.
S4hge-t6o-sig he loves it not.
S^ge-t6o-se-wong we (1.3) love it not.
&c.
Inverse.
Sahge-h-6goo-se-w6n (that) it loves me not
S&hge-h-^goo-se-wun it loves thee not.
Sdhge-h-6goo-sig he is not loved by it.
S^ge-h-6goo-se-w6ng it loves us (1.3) not.
&c. See Notes (Obi. Cases, Neg.) p. 56.
Paragraph III.
Indeterminate. Animate.
Direct. (Indie.)
Nin sdhge-he-wdy-se I love (some one) not
&c.
Subjunctive.
S£hge-h-6w&y-se-w6n (that) I love (some one) not.
&c.
Inverse. (Indie.)
Ne sdhge-h-eg6o-se he or they (Fr. on) love me not
Ke sdhge-h-eg6o-8e he or they love thee not
Sdhge-h-dh-se he is not loved.
Ne 84hge-h-eg6o-se-min he or they love not us (1.3).
Ke 8dhge-h-eg6o-se-min he or they love not us (1.2).
Ke sahge-h-eg6o-s-eem he or they love not you.
Sdhge-h-^-se-wug they (def.) are not loved.
»*2 vi. 39. Che wQme-Udo^e-wdn . . that I lose not it.
iii. 10. Kekimd^'Ze-wunF, . (and) thou knowest not (it, or) tliem.
iv. 32. Kak6md&li-se'^dig (flat vow.) . . (that) ye know it not,
iv. 48. K^shpin . . . w^hnndwi'Ze'wdig . . if ye see them not, " except
ye see," &c.
iii. 12. viii. 24. Tapwattin-^re-trot^ . . (and, &c.) ye believe them not.
238 A GRAMMAR OP
Subjunctive Mood.
Sahge-h-eg6o-se-w6n (that) he or they (FV. on) love not me.
Sahge-h-eg6o-se-wim he, &c. love not thee.
Sahge-h-4h-se-wind he is not loved.
Sahge-h-eg6o-se-w6ng he or they love not us (1.3).
Sahge-h-egoo-se-wung he, &c. love not us (1.2).
Sahge-h-eg6o-se-waig he, &c, love not you.
Sahge-h-^-se-wind-wih they (def.) are not loved.
Indefinite Object p. 101. et seq. (Indie)
Ne sihge-(t)che-g4-se I love not
&c.
Subjunctive.
S^ge-che-g4-se-w6n (that) I love not.
&c.
Verbal Adjective. Active. (See Intrans. p. 207.)
Indet Ne 8&hge-h-ewd-wiz6-^e, &c» I am not affectionate.
Indef. Ne s&hge(t)ch-eg^wiz6-^e, &c. I am no^ &c.
Passive, (id.) See p. 116. Notes.
Anim. Ne sdhge-h-fg-ooz6-#e. Sec. I am not lov-able, ami-able.
Inan. En-din-d-dhg-w^-^enoon it is not so thought (p. 213).
See Addenda,
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
Chapter II.
239
8ect.
ADVERBS
Note, ch is pronounced
Op Time Prbssnt.
An-nooch, at present,
EkVA, now, instantly,
K^sdch, this instant, immediately,
K^seskow, the present opportwwty.
Past.
Usp'in, ago.
I'spee, then, when,
A'stum-ispee, since.
AVoos-ispee, before,
Anndoch-egdy, very lately,
K'yas, ky^tee, hny ago.
W^skucli, formerly.
Shdslii, already,
Oot^oos-diky yesterday.
AVoos-oot&koosaik^ the day be-
fore yesterday,
I-dwoos-oot^oosaik^ two days be-
fore yesterday,
P^poon-ook, last winter.
N^pin-ook, last summer.
Future.
Etdp, afterwards.
Pitoos, hereqfter,
TktxmsL, by and bye.
Ch^skwa, presently,
P^-ch^skwa, id. with emphasis.
K^k^ek, some time or other.
K4jf^ at length,
W^yk^ch, at a future time.
I.
(Cree).
as tch, and J as dj.
P^pook-e, when it shall (be) winter,
next winter.
W&ppdk-e, tomorrow.
A'woose-w&ppik-e, the day qfter
tomorrow.
W^puch, soon.
NtimmS ^skwS, not yet.
Op Time Unspecipibd.
Is-p^ese, whilst,
Mdosiik^ always.
AsFow, sometimes, frequently.
I-4skow^ unfrequently, rarely,
Neg6otoon^^ seldom,
Kinwai8,/or a long time,
Ntiggisk, for a short time, tempO'
rarily.
Ki88ik,/or a very short time,
Methdgas, a long time ago.
Pitta, /or an instant.
K5k'ekdy, every moment, on every
occasion,
Oofche, ever.
Numma 6otche, never,
Mdikwauj, at the same time (or
place),
W6ekee, usually,
Semm^> at once, without delay.
Ket^tow&ith, all on a sudden.
Thiskunnej j^^^^ f throughtheday
Kuppdy J \all day long,
(Fspee, time,)
Ecco-spee, that very time.
240
A GRAMMAR OF
(Is-p^eche, space, quantity)
Tdn-ispeeche ? howfar^ &c.P
T^-isp^e, when {past)?
Tdn.ithek6k,W. </«'.) .^
T^-ispee doche, what-time from,
how long?
£e-dyowee^ continually.
Oosk'uch, at first.
Eskwiach^ the last.
Amdya, my'wais, brfore.
Mtislum, mwy'stus, after.
Of Place.
(Lite, place.)
Tiln-itte? what place? where?
0-t^, here.
N^t^, un'-t^, there.
Ecco-t^> that very place.
0-t^6oche, here-from, hence.
"Nh-th doche, therefrom, thence.
Ch^ke, nigh, close to.
Kisshewauk, near.
Wkthow, afar off.
O'pemay, on one side.
IJtte, fromjwards.
Pey-, Peyche, hitherward.
T^-tf it-^e, on which side.
0-t^ it-6ike, on the hither side.
Kwisk-itt^, on the other, reverse,
side.
Ntibbutt^, on one sid^.
T-eetow, on both sides.
Astum-itt^, on this sid^.
Awoo8-itt^, on the other side, be-
yond.
Nigootchis, inland.
Ndntow, somewhere.
Missliewdy, every where.
M6och^ek, on the ground.
Espim-ik, on high.
Of Quantity and Number.
Appesis, little.
Mistahay, a great deal.
TKck-tik, the whole (number).
Att6et,part, some (id.).
Missheway, the whoU (quantity).
V^e,part, some (id.).
K6g^t, almost
K5kethow, aU.
Kickee, among.
Ni-ee, exactly.
Ni-ithekok, exact quantity or
number.
Kesdstow, middling, moderately.
Awoo8-ithek6k, more.
A'8tum-ithek6k, less.
Uthew&k, exceeding, very,
mth, short qf.
UthewlOt-eptithu, it exceeds.
N6t^puthu, it falls short, (p. 146)
Nummah mw&see, not much.
Eg'ah-waudj, scarcely, hardly.
Op Quality and Manner.
Tkhiskooch alike,
P^toos, different.
Kwiusk, strait.
Pimmich, crosswise.
Stigge, thick, close together.
I-dspees, thin, far between.
M4hmow,aW together, collectively.
Piskis, apart, separately.
Mummdin, here and there one.
M^nah, again, another.
Nkspich, very.
S6ke, extremely.
K^tw6m, over again.
Niss^ek, softly.
P^ykdcb, slowly.
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
241
S^ak-aith, kindly.
Pw^stoway, lingering, slowly,
Pidtucky carefully,
Piik-^um, very steadily, atten-
tively,
Kithippee, quickly.
Sissekootz^ suddenly, abruptly.
Mooche, openly, gratis.
Saik-aith, of one's own accord,
Ma-mdich, (frtm muche, bad,
»9h» SfC.) badly,, wickedly.
Smooch, positively, inevitably,
K^mooch, privately, secretly,
Mkhmuskdch, wonderfuUy.
Pississ^, alone, unaccompanied.
Ndspkch, wrong, mistakingly,
A'tbimach, difficultly,
MknsL, seemingly,
^iapitche,Jmally.
Ketktowaith, all at once, suddenly.
Odm'isse, this wise,^thus,
Cte, to wit,
Piko, only, nothing hut.
M6w-utche, collectively.
Wtissuswy, dispersedly.
Op Comparison.
N6w-uch, inclining to, rather.
Kes^tow, moderately, middling.
Mistahay, greatly, a great deal.
Nlispich, very,
Ath'^ew^, exceedingly.
S6ke, very greatly.
Weysah, very.
Weysah dthew&k, extremely,
Oosdm^ too, most,
NtimmS mw&see, not much.
Mti6ontt, perfectly, completely.
E-dp-itch, the same.
P^t6o8, different.
Mw6oyche, exactly.
Op Appirmation.
T^pwooy, truly.
ChekdymS, to be sure, certainly.
Ethinnuttok, in reality,
S^koo-ch, posittve-ly.
W^ychetdwee, completely, tho-
roughly.
Eth^penay, really.
Op Negation.
NtimniS,»o, not. Used with Indie.
NummS w^tha, id. stronger, id.
E'gah, not. Used with Subj. and
Imperat.
Ntimma-nisse, (sqft neg.) no.
Nummd-nta, (strong neg.) no.
Ntimma wAw^tch, not at aU.
Eck'wiss^, fwbear.
Eck'wisse ^gah (stronger neg.) id.
do not.
PickdonSta, trifling, "nonsense,'^
(also Intensive) indefinitely.
Of Doubt and Uncertainty.
W^eskowin 1
me-piko I^^^I^'^^now.
Mdskooch, perhaps.
Kistenacli, perhaps.
E'^tooke, I suppose.
Mdna, apparently, seemingly,
M^eskow, by chance, accidentally.
U'tchethow, in^vain, uselessly.
Op Interrogation.
K^kwan? whatF
Ch6} \
Nah? f^^^^^^9' Particles.
Tka.' iUh ? which place f'^where ?
Tdn' itt^ 6otche ?/rom«>A*cA|)toecf
whence?
T^n' isse ? which wise, how ?
T^n' t^to? which number, how
many ?
242
A GRAMMAR OF
Sect 11.
CONJUNCTIONS.
1. Copulative. — Minn, and, again j Aasitche, also j W&wauj, likewise,
3. Disjunctive. — ^Mogga, butj E'gah, or.
3. Conditional. — K^spin, ifj E'gah, unless.
4. Adversative. — M6ggah, butj A'cbe, elsej A'ch^-kay, Missowauj,
so much the more.
5. Concessive. — A^t^ indeed, although: Wtliewaik, nevertheless ; Kwkj-
kootow, however, nevertheless.
6. Causal. — Ootche, from, because, by reason of.
Final— Ktitche that, to the end that.
7. Conclusive. — E^cco-isae, thus, therefore j Whche, whence j Mk,/or.
Eccose (Ekin), thus, so, (it is).
Mogga (pos.) and J (privat.) but.
Mustum, after that.
Mooyais, before that.
"Sutt^ckaL, fortunately.
P^etow, \ expressions
Nuppdit, > of
Nwppwo^vis, J dissappointment.
Tdpean, it is a chance \f.
E^ga, {with subj.) unless.
H6, as (Fr. comme).
Tiaepwk, no wonder.
Tdckoow&j, so much the more.
T^akwuch, contrary to expectation.
E^akum, why.
EgA m^ for {e.g. I did) not.
1,1
> expressions of doubt.
'» J
{with
Pdssena,
Mutwdy,
A'ta, isoith Indie.) indeed
subf.) although.
Untowduj,
Wiw^es, a fortiori.
Sect. III.
PREPOSITIONS.
P^kche, in, within.
Wtiskitch, on the outside.
Esplm-ik, on high.
Chtippasees, below.
Tdlikootch^ t^tche, upon.
UttlUbmik, underneath.
S^pah, under.
Ath^eoo, beyond.
S^poo, through.
W&skah, around.
Wdnnuskootch, at the end, extre-
mity.
Ch^eke, close, very nigh to.
Fssee, towards*
Pdoskoo k^sik, the same day.
V6o8koowntchee'k,onthesamehill.
Ass^tche, backwards.
T^e (m&iskunnow)y all along (the
path).
Utte, fromward.
THB CREE LANGUAGE.
243
O'oche, FROM^ <fy with, by
mean8of,
KithekoWy Kickee> amon^,
Tu8t6widj> between,
(Tdbbeskooch, aUke, ^qwUJ)
Tibbeskoo€h> opposite
A'bbetow, (ha^,) in the middle.
Note,— The Preposition gwems its Noun, generaUy, in the Locative
Case, pp. 184, 185.
P^ethis, until, unto.
P&ssichy (passing) over.
Awkwk, at the back of, behind.
Sissoonay, parallel to.
A^8tum-ik, in the front.
A'b-im-ik, at the back, behind.
Sect. IV.
INTERJECTIONS,
Ah I express, of assent.
Ah! Ah! yes.
O ! O ! O ! Angl. I thank you.
Eh! Ch^I express, of surprize
and disappoi$Ument.
I! ah! id.
Hi ! express, of pleasure.
TlUt^ch, expressive qf contempt,
Angl. tush!
Waw? Angl Eh?
Kaw! indeed!
Y6 ho ! Angl. what now !
How! comef nowf
How! untowdudj, well! then.
Ek'wa! now J
Chist! look!
Po'otee! loJ behold.
A'ttat^pun 1 Angl. I am glad of it!
Ek'weskne ! Angl. thafs right !
Athls ! alas ! there is no help for it I
M^eakw&m! wiind!
Pick6(m&tll ! nothing! "nonsense'* I
S6ke! very! strong! stoutly!
Miltee! let us seel
P^gktch! slowly!
P^edtukl carefully!
Nissik! softly!
Pittitne ! would that /
Tdpwdoy! verily, in truth /
A^stum! hither {come) '*
A'woos ! away (go) !
'Rm-ek-ootee ! what of that !
Titn-eke-in6gg& ! and what then!
P&p^yway! good luck!
Hdppwo K^tha ! it rests with you^
as you (thou) please !
K^ysa
K^ysa 6tee! it is well 'tis no
worse!
K^eam! ah-k^eam! be it so!
GkanekH Utpwooy ! (ironically)
yes, I dare say !
Kw&chist! dwkw&chist! express,
of wonder or astonishment.
Tilpwooy-glinne ! seriously ! with-
out joking !
Esk'wH ! presently t
E^gHisse! dont!
Ecco ! just (so) I (Fr. voiUk)
r2
244 A GRAMMAR OF
PART III.
SYNTAX.
Chap. I.
The Parts of Speech are Seven, viz.
1. Noun; Pronoun; Verb, including the Accid.
and Particip. Passives ; decUnable.
2. Adverb ; Conjunction ; Preposition ; Interjec-
tion; indechnable.
In Construction the rules of Concord and Govern-
ment are observed as in European languages.
Sect. L
OF THE NOUN.
The Idiom of this Language^ as seen in its declinable forms^
divides the Noun into two classes^ (analogous to those of gender^)
which we have denominated the Animate and Inanimate. Their
respective plurals are formed — ^the former by -uk or ^fvuk (Chip.
'gy 'Ug, or -tvug) — ^the latter by -^ or 'Wd (Chip, -w, -un, or -it^tfn)
added to the Singular, (p. 181.)
(tl*» But when governed by a verb, in the third person (expressed
or understood), the Noun ends — ^the Anim. in -o or -wa (sing. and.
plur.) Chip, -n, "Un, or -tvun — the Inan. in 'Cthu sing, -^tku'a plur.
Chip, -en^h sing. -Sneivun plur. Vide Trans. Verb.
Note, — ^The (Pronominal) equivalents of their Cases wiU be found in
the Verbal Affix. See pp. 55, 183.
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 245
The Element me- (and w- or we-) prefixed to certain nouns, has, from
the manner of the hitter's uniting with the Possess. Pron. been considered
by some writers as equivalent to the European Article. This is, however,
a mistake, since it is found only in the names of the body and its parts,
as W^-ow, the body, Ne 6w, my body ; Me-tdon, the mouth, Ne tdon,
my mouth ; Me-s(t, the foot, Ne sit, my foot ; &c. — and in those expres-
sing Relationship, as, Me-gduwee, a mother, Ne gduwee, my mother;
&c. — ^with a very few others, as, Me-wdt, a bag, Ne vmt, my bag;
W-4egee, a dwelling or habitation, N4egee, my dwelling.
Two Nouns coining together, one of which is in the posses-
sive case, are expressed as follows, (See Possess. Pron. p.
187.)
Ne gnosis 00 t^nis-a...my son his daughter ; Angl. my sovit
daughter.
iCeg6osis 00 XkmS'-d,.Ahy son'^ daughter.
Oo g6o8is 00 ih,\m'4thu'd,,,his sonV daughter.
Ethlnu oo g6osis-c^...the Indian his (or her) son, Angl. the
Indian's son.
Ethinu 00 g6osis^ oo thxa%-4thu-d„,^e Indian'^ wm's daugh-
ter.
Eskwdyoo 00 t^nis-^...the woman her daughter^ Angl. the
woman's daughter.
Eskw&yoo oo tanis-& oo t^m-^ifAtt-cl^...the woman her daugh-
ter, her (access.) dog. Angl. the woman's daughter's
dog.
♦ Vide infra.
Sect, II.
OF THE ADJECTIVE.
The European Adjective, as expressed in the Algonquin
dialects, is, in its most simple form, a Verb (Intrans). p. 25.
Sect. III.
OF THE PRONOUN.
The Personal Pronoun has three persons in the singular and four
in the plural. (See pp. 51, 60, 185.) Indet Ofve^Hk, some-body
any body. Indef. Kekrv-dn, some-things any thing.
246 A GRAMMAR OF
The third person sing. Wetha, i» the same in both ♦'genders/
Their Cases will be found in the verbal Affix.
Note. — The Personal Pronoun is expressed in three ways . 1, Unab-
breviated, as — ^when in Apposition, as Ou>a wetha (anim.) this (is) he i
Oomawetha (inan.) this (is) it ; Netha wetha I it, i.e. it (is) I, (seep. 254 Of
the Verb-Substantive) ; or — when used absolutely, as in answer to a
Question ; or, — ^for the sake of Emphasis, as, Ne ga seehwdoytan, netha, I
will depart^ I. (Fr. Je partirai, moi.) 2, Abbreviated^ as it is used before
the (indie.) Verb. 3, And lastly, by the verbal Inflexion.
The Possessive Pronoun is the Personal Pronoun used in
combination with its noun. The Inan. changes the (anim.)
plu. -Wit into -a.
Net' sss^ixn-uk (anim. )...nry snow-shoe-x.
Net' assam-emin-uk... oMr (1.5) snow-shoe-*.
Ne pdskesiggun-^ (inan.)... my gun*.
Ne pdskesfggun-en(£ra-£f...oi/r (1.3) gun*.
The Relative Possessive Pronoun agrees with its Subject in
^^ gender*^ and number (id.), (p. 187,)
Net' I'an 6wa (anim.)... mine (is) this. Angl. this (is) mine^
Net' ran-iiifc 6o-ifcoo. . .mine (are) these. "«* ^ ^^ ^« '^'
Net' I'an i1nn-&...mine (is) that.
Net' I'an-nAr tinn-e^ee...mine (are) those.
Net' Fan 6o-m& (inan.)... mine (is) this.
Net' I'an-& 6o-hoo...mine (are) these.
iVef I'an tinne-m&...mine (is) that.
Net' I'an-a t!inne-hee...mine (are) those.
The Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns also agree
with their Subject in gender and number^ as>
Owa mistik (anim.). ..this tree.
(Xokoo mistik-wiik... these trees.
U'nn& e8kwdyoo...that woman.
U'nnekee eskwdywuk... those women.
Oom'a mtiskesin (inan.)... this shoe.
O'ohoo mtiskesin-^... these shoes.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 247
Unnem& m6okoman...that knife.
Unnehee m6okomdn-a... those knives.
Koottick Ethinu (anim.)...the other Indian.
Koottick-uk Ethlnu-uk...the other Indians.
Koottick pew^pisk (inan.)...the other metal.
Kootdck-a pew4pisk-wa...the other metals.
Ow'ena k^tha ?...who (art) thou ?
Owiaekee k6tha-wow...who (are) ye ?
Ow'ena unna Ethinu ?...who (is) that Indian ?
Owinekee tinnekee Ethinu-uk?...who (are) those Indians?
K^kwan tinnema?...what (is) that (thing) ?
Kekwdnee tinnehee ?...what (are) those (things) ?
(tl*» The Demons. Pronouns, when governed by a verb in the third
person, change (in like manner with the Noun, vide supra) the
above (anim.) forms into the Inan. ookee and Unnee or linnehee (Chip.
oonooTvh, enetvh. (p. ^56.)
The (indeclinable) Pronoun Relative get (Chip, kah or gah,
Jones) implies, and stands for, its Antecedent; and when
there is no other nominative, the verb agrees with it accord-
ingly, in (the implied) ^^gender,^^ number, and person. It
governs the Subjunctive Mood. (Ital. che; Angl. whOy w?iom,
whichy that).
Ktittaw^sis-ti Iskwdyoo gd wdthaw-tY...(Ae or) she is hand-
some. Woman, (she) who is gone out.
Ktittawdssisu-2<^ Iskwdyw-«^^a w6thawit(ch)-f^...id. plur.
M6eth-2;t (imperat.) m6okoman (inan.) gd kin w^Ar... give thou
(to) me knife, (that) which is long; AngLthe long one.
M6thow^sin-ff ^ m6okoman-^ gd kin wak-i^... they are good
knives, (those) which are long; Angl. the long ones.
So with the Demonstrative Pronoun, e.g.
Ke g& m^eth-t7/zn unna (anim.) gd m6tho-ethe-m-ti^ ../ will
give thee that (e.g. horse) which thou likest (-him).
248 A GRAMMAR OF
Ke g& m^eth'Utin tiimema (inan.) gk m6tho-6the-t-u9Rmttn...
id. that (e.g. thing) which tkou likest (-t/)«i^^
As the Pron. Relat. ga refers definitely to its (indef,) Antece-
dent^ it has thus the force of the European Definite Article, as,
M6thostt (indie.) Ethinu (homo)... good-is- Ae man; he is a
good man.
Ethinu h^ (indef.) m6thosi7 (subj.)...man as good-is- Ae.
Ethinu OA (def.) m^thostV (subj.) ... man (he) who good
is-he.
Ne w^ke-pw6w-M^ sap6o-min-2<Ar he dttissoot(ch)-i^...I like
gooseberries (such) as are ripe.
Ne w6eke-pw6w-tt/r s^p6o-min-«/r ga dttisoot(ch)-t/r...id.
(those) WHICH are ripe.
Ne weeke-stcn Menississ-^ h^ dtteetdik-ee.../ like berries
(such) as are ripe.
iVe weeke-st^w M^nississ-^f ga dtteetdik-ee...id. (those) which
are ripe.
When the Attributive is to be understoo<i in its qualifying sense,
the satne (verbal) form is used, but instead of following, it precedes,
its subject, thus,
H^ m^thosit Ethinu... as is good (Angl. a good) man.
Gk m^thosi/ Ethinu... (that) which is good (Angl. the good)
man.
Ne w6eke-ste« h^ dtteet-^kee menississ-a . . . / like ripe berrie*.
Ne weeke-steTt gk dtteet-dikee m^nisslss-^...! like the ripe
berries (i.e. not the unripe).
In this (qualifying) mode of the Attributive, the Indefinite Con-
junction hi is very frequently omitted, and its place supplied by
143 xii. 41. Oonoowh kah dhy-eked6opun (p. 71) owh Isaiah . . (it was)
these things which said Esaias.
xviii. 9. E'gewh (pliu.) ito* meenzheyttn-f^r (plur.). . those which thou
gavest me.
xvii. 3. Jesus Christ, kah hh-shnoon^ud . . Jesus Christ whom thou
hast hither-sent.
In Mr. Jones's Translation the pron. relat. (kah), as well as other
indedin. particles, is ijnifonnly, but very improperly, united to the
following word.
THE CREE I.ANGUAGE. 249
the " Flat Vowel," which aUo has an Indefinite signification, (p.
73 et seq.)
So instead of
h^ in^thosit Ethinu he 4tteet£ikee m^nississa.
We then say
methosit Ethlnu (^ as a in fate) eteetdikee m^nississa.***
The (definite) Pronoun Relative gd is also often omitted, as in
English.
In sentences which have no Pron. Relat. the place of the English
Definite Article is supplied, generally, by the Demonstrative Pro-
noun, and in this way the latter is indeed used much more fre-
quently than grammatical precision requires.
Qui^ (Cree got) causam significans, subjunctivum exigit^ ut,
Stultus es, qui huic cred-as. {Eton Gram,)
Ke kak^pdtissin, get tapwooyt6w-ut 6w&.
Again,
// la trouva qui pleuroi-t ,,he found her (who was) Angl.
weepeng. (Chamhaud's Gram,)
Ne misk-ow-^ gd mktoo-/.../ found her who was weeping.
Sometimes a nominative comes between the Relative and
the Verb. See Trans. Verb.
Sect. IV.
OF THE INTRANSITIVE VERB.
Under this head we include, besides the Impersonal (p. 145. 191),
the following Personal verbs : — 1, The Adjective Verb; 2, Neuter;
144 i. 33. vii. 39. xiv. 26. Pdhnezid (flat vow. subj,) Oojech6g (anim.). .
as A« is " Holy Ghost."
ii. 10. Ewh winesheshingCid.) zhUiwe-men-^boo (inan.). . which is
good yellow-berry-liquor, i.e. wine, " the good wine."
vi. 57. Pdmdhtezui (id.) Way6osemind (nomin.) ., vls he is living
father, " the living father."
vi. 69. Vknikhtezid ^id.) Keshd-mtinedoo (id.) ..9a he is living God,
« the living God."
xvii. 11. Vdhnez^ifun (id.) waydosemind . . (p. 22.) as thou art holy
father, (0) " Holy father."
250 A GRAMMAR OF
S, Reflective; 4, Reciprocal; 5^ Simiilatiye ; 6, Indeterminate
(Trans.) ; 7, Indefinite (id.) ; 8, Accid. Passive ; 9, Particip. Pas-
sive; 10, Verbal Adjective; and 11, Instrument. Verb; — all of
which, with few exceptions, are formed after the four General
conjugations already exemplified, — ^the third pers. sing, (indie.)
indicating the Conjugation to which they severally belong (p. 198.).
The Inanimate has only the third person in both numbers (p. 200).
All of the above^ by means of their two (Anim. and Inan.)
forms, agree with their Subject in ^^ gender/^ as well as in
number and person.
Awk'-oosM (adj. verb anim.) Ke gduwee ..{he or) she is sick
thi/ mother. Angl. thy mother is sick — and so of the
rest.
Kinw-oosU'uk (id.) n^peyw-wA...the men are tall.
Chimmis-issu-t^A: (id.) Iskwdy-wwA.-.the women are short.
M6ttawdyw-ttA: (neut. id.) oow48sis-ttA...the children play.
P6ekoo-puthu-tt^ (p. 14*7) Mistik-n;MAr...the sticks break.
P^ke-puthu-6^ (inan.) ne ch^echee-d... mi/ finger* swell.
K^es-esoo-u^ (accid. pass.) seeseep-t^A: ... the duck* are
finished, " done." (Fr. cuits).
K6es-etayoo (id. inan.) w^eas...the meat is done.
K6es-etay-ii^a n^ep§es-a...the leave* (vegetables) are done.
K6ese-ch-ega-soo-tfX: (part. pass, anim.) net' assam-en^n-ti^
...our (1.3) snowshoe* are finished.
K^ese-ch-eg^-tdy-ft;a (id. inan.) ke mdskesin-oowdw-a...
yoiu" shoes are finished.
Nokoo-sd-ttA: (p. 114) m(5ost6os-n;t;^X:...the bison* are visible,
in sight.
Nokw-un-fz;^ wdskah6ggun-^ (inan.). . .the house* are visible*
Nipp6e-w;w» tiskec.the country is water-jr.
Nummdis-ewttw uskee..'.the country «* fish-^./**
1^ V. 30. O'onesh^shin (adj. verb) nin depibkoonewd-v^in . . it is good,
" just,'* my }iidgment.
viii. 14. Tdpwd*maligud (neut.) nin teb^jemoo-im. . it is tme. . . .
my rela-/wm, " record."
THE CREfi LANGUAGE. 251
Both Nouns (see above), and Pronouns (Demonstrative and
Interrogative), when in the Nominative Case, require the
verb in the third person.
Meth6-sissu (adj. verb anim.) 6wa...this is good.
Mexh6'Si8s-U'Uk 6okoo... these are good.
Meth6-w^ssi» (id. inan.) 6oma...this is good.
M6thowassin-n;a...6ohoo... these are good.
Kinwoo-su 6wa iskwayoo (anim.),,, she (or he) is long, tall,
this woman.
Kinwoosu-uk 6okoo isk way- wuk ....they are tall^ these
women.
Kinw-ow 6omamookoman (inan.)... it is long, this knife.
Kinw6w-a 6ohoo m6okoman-a...they are long, these knives.
So also in the Subjunctive.
— ^h^ kinw-oostV 6wa iskwdyoo (anim.)... as she (or he) is tall, this
woman.
— ^h^ kinwoositTz^c/yz; (def.) or -he kinwoositchi% (indef. time) 6okoo
iskwdywuk...as they are tall, these women.
— he kinw-4k 6oma m6okoman (inan.).. as it is long this knife.
— ^he kinw-^-w6w (def.) or, -h^kinwak-ee (indef.) <!k}hoom6koman-&
...as they are long, these knives.
In a simple sentence the (verbal) Attributive commonly
precedes its Subject, as above, unless an Emphasis on the
latter require the contrary order.
As the English Adjective, and present and past Participles,
are, in these dialects, expressed by a personal verb, it results (and
it is deserving of attention) that the Attributive, unless when
compounded with its Subject, is ever in the predicative form ; so
not only in *' the man is good," but also in ^^ the good," ** the
V.28. P^-tdhgweshin-6omahgut(id.) ewh k^zhig. . it is hither-arriving
the day.
viii. 16. Tah qidyukw-^d<%umc? (p. 213) nin teblihkoonew4-win. .
it will be strait-think-able, " true/' my judgment,
i. 5. Ewh (dush) wihsaydbze-win ke z^gaA^cf-mahgud (accid.pass.)
. . that light is broke forth. See pp. 25 et seq. 36.
252 A GRAMMAR OF
living/' *'thc loved man," &c there is a (subordinate) verbal
assertion expressed, (p. 248.)
MOODS.
The Indicative and Imperative moods are used absolutely —
the Subjunctive and Doubtftd (dub.) subordinately or depen-
dently.
Indicative and Imperative Moods.
Ne g& m6ches-oon...I will eat
It'-akwt^n ^skootayoo m6gga nippee nummd 't-akwti»...
there is fire but water there is not.
A'tt6et tet-dppu-uA, dtteet m6o8t-oot4y-wtt^.. part (of them)
they upon-sit, i.e. ride ; part they go on foot
Kiittawdssis-ti (intrans.) Iskwdyoo, ethewaik ntimma ne
s6ke-h-oit; (trans.) the Woman is handsome^ never-
theless / love her not
O'td dpp£e...sit thou here.
Unt^ it-6otai- A: . . . go-^e thither.
M6chesoo (pres.) m6ches6o-kun (indef. tense)... eat thou.
Wiputch p6yche-k6way-k^t^ (indef.)... socm hither-return-
ee, " come back" ye.
Subjunctive Mood.
But if two Verbs are joined by a relational^ or a dependent
conjimctive word, as the Pron. Relat. or certain Conjunctions^
the latter or dependent verb is governed in a subordinate Mood
— if it be declarative, in the Subjunctive — ^if contingent or
doubtful, in the Doubtful Mood.
^ekiskissiw (indie.)., h^ ke itw-edn (subj.).../ remember
that / have said so.
Ne kiskissin h^ t6ot-^^.../ remember that he did it.
Ne kissewdssin h^ t^-wa-mA-.../ am angry that they (Fr. on)
say so.
S^shi ne ffi.ke isaehwoojtdn p4yche-k6w^ii«.../ shall have
departed when you hither-return.
Ke met6on-in h^ N6hethaw^n...^Aoti perfect-est when thou
Cisee-e8t> talkest Cree.
THE CAEE LANGUAGE. 253
M6tho-w&S8-iii ktitta p6y^k6o-jftm...t< is good that thou he
one^ i.e. be alone.
P^eesk£itik-wtiii(p. Il4)h^ nippi/...»/ is regret-ible, melan*
choly^ that he is dead.
The Infinitive is resolved into the Subjunctive.
Nieet6wtfn kiitta it-6otedn..,it is inconvenient that / (for
me to) go thither.
W^ytun ki^ta t6octiegkt(Uk,..it is easy that it (to) be done.
The Subordinate may precede the Principal Verb.
Ithecok p6etoog-ldtch-e (subj. p. 203). — ^ne gft wdthaw-in
(indie.) when he shall enter — I will go out.
Hi kissewisst/ (subj.) oot6mma-w-%oo (indie.)... o^ he was
angry (Angl. in his anger) he beat him.
We it-6otedn-e ne ^ it-oot^fn (p. 33.),.. when I wish, or
want, to go thither / will go thither.
We it-6otay-wdpp(£iid ne ga it-oot^-ti...if / had wished to
go thither / should have, &c
Ke k6waitJ9<^ft^e ne gk n^-^thet^n...ft;Aeit they shall have
returned / shall be content.
But it very frequently happens that, apparently at least,
there is no Principal Verb in the sentence, the Indicative
being, for the sake of Emphasis^ changed into iJie Subjunc-
tive ; thus giving to the Indian the force, and somewhat of
the ybrm, of the inverted English phrase.
1. Ithecok k^w-^n-e (subj.) ne g^ k6w^n (indie) ndesta...
when thou shall return / will return also.
2. Ithecok kiw-Sun-e (subj.) 6kw& k^ k^w-edn (subj.) neesta
...when &c. — ^then rviU reiurn-I also.
The comparative strength of these varied modes of Expression may be
estimated by the number and kind of the Accents, &c. which they
respectively bear. The former is feeble, simj^y positive — tiie latter
energetic ; the former admits of only one Accent — in the latter, the
Time, ke, the Attribute, hew, the Agent, ean, are, as abwe, all accented,
emphatic.
254 A GRAMMAR OF
Before we quit the Intransitive Verb, it may not be super-
fluous to remark briefly on the Verb-Substantive.
OP THE VERB-SUBSTANTIVE.
The Verb-Substantive is expressive of Existence, simply,
or without reference to manner of Being ; so,
1. It is not Auxiliary; its place in the English phrase being
supplied by the verbal Inflection. (See pp. I98. 199.)
9., Nor is it Copulative ; so it is omitted between words in
Apposition; as>
1. O'wena ^^<Aa?...who (art) thou ?
2. N'ootdwee-nan kitha.„mr (1.3; ^Either (art) thou-
3. Ne m6okoman ooma ,,my knife this ; this (is; my knife.
Again,
W6lha ga t6o-t-ak...(it is) he, who has done-tV.
Niiha, gk x6ot'Ummdn...I (it was), who did (-/-) it.
W^iha-rvotv, gkt6ot'ak''ik.,.they (id.), who did (-they) it.
Ec^co-te, gk w4ppa-m-tf^... there (id.), that / met him.
Ec'co-spee, ga nugge-skdw-w/c ..then (id.), that / met him.
Ethlnu tinnema (inan.) gk wd.ppa-t-tiiitfiiun (inan.)...(it is
an) Indian that (thing) which thou seest (it).^*^
This remark applies, however, only when the subject is expressed
absolutely ; for when the same occurs in a subordinate or depend-
ent part of a sentence, a verbal form (not of the Verb- Substantive,)
then appears, in the subjunctive, as,
1. Ke kisk^the-m-f/^in OY/in-kweun...! know thee who thou art.
x^ i. 19. viii. 25. Wlinain keen? . . who (art) thou f
xviii. 38. Wligoonain ewh t&pwdywin ? . . what (is) that, truth ?
i. 21. Elijah nah keen?. . Elijah (art) thmf nah ? interrog.
i. 24. Phdrisee^ . . 4gewh kah b^dhnoo-n-inj-i^r . . (inv.) Pharisees
(were) those who were hither-sent.
ix. 17. Anwdhchegaid . . . owh . . a prophet (is) that.
X. 7. Nc«i . . . ewh ood^ eshqudnddm-^ti^cfA . . / (am) their door,
xi. 25. Neen . . ewh iJibe-jebdh-ttwi kiya ewh pemdhtez^imn. . I (am)
the resurrection and the life,
xiv. 6. "Neen . . ewh m^un, kiya ewh tdpw&.ti;tn, kiya ewh pemUh-
tez^-tmn . . I (am) the path, and the tru/A, and the life.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 255
2. Ne sfggethdy sin-nan h^ oot6wee-m-e^^...it;e (L.S) are glad
that thou fatherest-t^^^ art our father.
S. Ne kisk6theten h^ oo-m<Spkomdn-ettn (poss.) 6oma.../know
that thou own-knife-est (poss. p. 141) this.>*7
The elementary verb net* aw-in (p. 155) is, however, for the
sake qf Emphasis, often used in the Indicative or absolutely.^^
Where there is no verbal form the Assertion consists in, or is
supplied by, the stress on the leading or the emphatic word.
Sect V,
OF THE TRANSITIVE VERB.
The Intransitive verb, in its most simple form, contains^ as
we have seen, only one person, viz. its Subject, analogous to
the European verb. The Transitive verb comprizes two (or
more) — subject and object, &c. A few remarks on the latter
may not be unnecessary.
The Transitive verb presents no difficulty, in either the
Definite or the Indefinite forms, except in their double third
persons. These in their Direct and Inverse significations are
Active and Passive, and hence are often confounded by the
learner, — ^the other combinations of the pronoun being all
expressed Actively. The forms alluded to are these :
Direct. Inverse.
Def. -h-ayoo (p. 213) he-him. -h-ik (p. 214*) he-by him.
Indef. 'h-etvdyoo (225) he-somebody, -h-div (p. 226) -he-by somebody.
1^7 iv. 19. Ne wdbwnc^on. . ewh anwkhchegaid ^hweywn ... 7 see . . that a
prophet thm art. (p. 155)
viit. 24. K^shpin (mah) t^pwattin-^^-toat^ ewh neen dhweydn..if
(for) ye believe not that / am he.
148 iv. 26. Neen.,KkxL6on&n6n, nind 6wH. . I. . that speak (to) thee,I au hb.
vi. 41. Neen, nind 6wh ewh bdbqudzhe-gim . . I, / am the bread,
iii. 28. Kdhween neen^ nind AHWK-se owh Christ . . not I, I am not
(he) the Christ.
See Note 83.
256 A GRAMMAR OF
So in the Subjunctive,
Def. -h-a/ (p. 215) that, as, &c. -h-<^Wthat,as, ^LC^he-hyhim.
he-him.
Indef. 'h-ew'dit (p. 226) as, that -h-^et as, that, &c. he-by-some-
&c. he-somebody. body.
It may also be repeated here, that the Noun and the Pronoun
in Construction are modified, that is, have the Accusative (or
Ablative) form, only when governed by a verb in the third
person, expressed or understood. See <1^* pp. 244 and 247*
Ne g& nippa-h-oit^ unna mah^gun.../ will kill (him) that
wolf.
Kegk nippa-h-oir unna mah6ggun...^Aotf wilt kill that wolf.
Ktitt& nippa-h -oyoo iinnee, or dnnehee, mah6ggun-^...Ae will
kill that wolf, (accus.)
Ne gSi nippa-h-t^ dnna mah6ggun...that wolf (he) will kill
me (See p. 51).
Ke g& nippa-h-tX: tinna mah6ggun...that wolf will kill thee.
Kiitt& nippa^h-i^ iinnee, or Unnehee, mah6ggun-6f...A< will
be killed by that wolf. (ablat)i*9
»^ i. 24. Phdrisee^ bgbwh kah b^Uhnoo-n-inj-i^ (inv. indet.) . . Phari-
sees (were) those who were hither-sent.
y. 1. Ke w^u(md^-imf^ (recip.) ^ewh Jiwyug . . they have feasted,
(recip.) those Jews (aomin.)
vi. 10. N&hmahd-^be-(h)^;fc ^gewh en^ne-un^ . . sit-down-make-ye-
them, those people.
vii. 11. E'gewh Jiwjug oo ge tindah-wdhbuin-aAii;dn . . those Jews
they went to see him.
vii. 26. Oo g^-^ndihn-aAii;<fA ^ewh dogemo-^ . . ?. . do they know,
these chiefs (nomin ) • . . ?
. vii. 35. Oowh ke et^wug (recip.) ^gewh J^wyug . . this they said
(recip.) " the" Jews (nomin).
viii. 9. E'gewh kah n6onddhg-ig . . those who heard it.
Enbwh. (Governed of 3d pers. See (!=>• p. 247.)
viii. 31. Oo ^t endn (dir.) enewh J6wyun kah t^pway-ine-m-ij^oq/in
(inv.). . he said (to) those Jews whom he was believed on by.
iv. 42. Oowh 00 g6 enahwdn (id.) en^wh equ^-n . . this they said (to)
the woman.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 257
DIRECT.
Ke ga ixi^^a-h'afidw-nk ..dokoo mah^ggun-uk,
JVe (1.2) will kill these wolve-*. But with 8d person,
Kutta nippa-h-dy-n;t/A: oohee mah6ggun-a.
Thej^ will kill these wolve-*.
INVERSE.
Ke ga vi\^i^2i''\iHk-oon6w'uk Moo mah^gguii-ttA-.
Thei^ will kill us (1.2), these wolve-*. But with 3d person,
Kutt^ nip^sL-h-ik'tvuk dohee mah6ggun-a.
Thei^ will be kill-e^i 6^ these wolve-s.
The Ablative sign, M'che, is often used with its regimen, e.g»
after the Participial Passive, as,
Ke (auxil.) nippd-che-g^soo 6otche m6okoman...Ae has been
killed by, or with, a knife.
The verb agrees with its Subject and Object, expressed or
understood, in ^^ gender/' as well as in number, and person ;
as.
Note, — In simple sentences the Objective noun commonly precedes,
the Subject follows, the verb, unless Emphasis suggest a different order.
Note. — ^The Inanimate object has two conjugational endings of the verb,
[see below 1 2.] as well as a Double Inanimate form. (p. 222.)
M6ostoos (anim.) ne k^ nfppa-h^oit^... bison /have kill(ed)-
him, i^e. I have killed a bison.
1 W6eas(inan.)neke nippa-t-an... flesh or meat /have kiUed-if.
Net' ustis (anim.) ne g& wdnne-h-oft^...i7iy mitten / shall
lose him.
vi. 19- Oo ge wlthbum-a^oon (dir.) enewh Jesus (im). . they " saw*'
Jesus,
iv. 28. Oowh ke endd (id.) enewh en^netcmfi. . this he said (to)
*' the" men.
vii. 1. Oo ge tindahw-£ue-m-^oon (inv.) enewh Jewyim che n^s-
egood Cmv.) . . he was sought by the Jews, that he might be
killed (by them def.)
vii. 3. En^wh w^k^nis-ttn oowh oo ge tkoon (id.)* • those his breth->
ren this he was said (to) by,
S
258 A GRAMMAR OF
1 Ne miiskesin (inan.) ne g& wiinne-t-ait...iity shoe / shall
lose-t/.
Mah^gun (anim.) ne g6os-t-oiv...a wolf / fear-Am^ i.e. I
fear a wolf.
2 Eskdotayoo (inan.) ne g<5os-t-eii...fire / fear-t^.
Mis-tik f anim.) it' 6ote-n-of9...a sticky /take^Atm.
S P&skesiggun (inan.) n'6ote-n-eit...a gun^ / take-t<.
Ow'e-uk (anim.) nah Ke w&ppa-m-ofv?...any one (dost)
thou see-Am ? {nah, Interrog. part.)
2 K6kwan (inan.) nah ke w&ppa-t-en ? something (do) thou
see-itl
Note. — It may be useful to observe that, among others, the Special
Inanimates -h-uni, -ta-h-um, -sk-mii, &c. (see p. 86 et seq.) belong to the
2d (Inan.) conjugation, throughout.
^ATote.— -In Gree, the Inanimate form of the verb remains the same for
both niunbers of the Object, i.e. sing, and plur.
INYBRSB.
Ne g& nippa-h-ZA mah^gun (anim.) me will kill-Ae> a^ or,
the wolf^ i.e. the wdf will kill me.
Ne gk nippa-h-ii^-ooft ^skootayoo (inan.) ..t^ will kill me the
fire.
i^« w^ethippee-h-i%-ooft Missiraia-h-^gun-ap'pwoc^ (id.)
it aoilfl me (the) writing-liquor^ or ink.
DOUBLE INANIMATE, (p. 222.)
Net6wage-t-&-9iiag»9t iiskee^ moskoosee-c^...^ brings forth^
produces^ the earthy grass.
Kissi-gumme-t-dmagtin (p. 178) ^kootayoo (inan.) nlppee
Gnan.)...the fire warms the water.
See p. lai. The TransitifVe verb has, &e.
A member^ or part^ of a sentence^ whether standk^ as
Nonunative or Accusative, dasses in Construction with /n^
animate Nouns, and the verbal inflection agrees with it accord-
k^ly, as,
Weyt-im kutche t6o-Uumm6n.,,it is easy that / (Angl. for
me to) do k.
T.HK CREfi LANGUAGE. 259
Ath'em-u/t kutche t6o't'Ummun,,At is difficult that thou do
a.
Ne m^tho^the-t-en... kutche too-t>umniUn.../ well-thitik"
it, approve^t^^ that thou do it.
Ne pdckw4-t-eit kutche t6o-t-ak.../ hate»t< that he do it
The Indefinite Transitives, ^ewayoQ and ^egayooy classing in
form (p. 99 et seq.) and use as Intransitiyes^ have generally>
like these) no Accusative noun (as AngL I love> intran.) ; the
latter {-^egayoo) however admits an Indefinite (uninflected)
Accusative, as,
M6ona-h<i«gdyoo &8kee-pw6w*ttk..khe digs potatoes^ AngU
he is potatoe«digging.
The Indefinite Transitites take the oblique Cases (p. 1^).
^ofe.— «^The latter (Inan.) i% as already observed, the more oomprdkai*
9we of the above two forms, it being (AiliwrM^^referting to periont as
well as things, (p. 104. Note,)
Lastly, our inflected verb, then> expiresses its (pronominal)
Subject and Object, both definitely and indefinitely^ and in
both (Anim. and Inan.) forms :
aniHatb^
SfJLe-h'^oo he loves-Atm.
S^ke-h^dganewoo they (Fr. on) love^AtM.
Si^-h-€iP(fyoo he loves (somebody).
S'^\LB'\i*e90&nenfoo (p. 93).) theg (Fr. m) love (somebody).
INANIMATK.
Sdke^t-oM^ foloves^t^.
S&ke-t-dii€iroo they (Fr. on) love-tl.
Sdke-(t)ch-eg^j^oo he loves (something).
Sdke-ch-i^dii€iroo they (Fr. on) love (something).
See Accidenee.
It seems worthy of remark, that the tndi^tmte Personal Pronoun, so
imperfectly seen in European tongues, is, in these dialects, distinctly
brought out, and placed on 4 footing with the D^mte Pronouns, /> f Aon,
&c» It is liirther interesting to observe that the Cree (and Chippeway)
Indians can, in like manner with Europeans, be Gbnbral or Parti-
b2
260 A GRAMMAR OF
CULAR (as regards the meaning of the terms which they use) according
as the Subjects and Objects occurring in their discourse may require.
The Accidental and Participial Passives class^ in all respects^
with the Tntransitive Verb.
Paragraph II.
Of the Moods, (p. 252.)
The Indicative and the Subjunctive Moods are alike
Declarative — but are used in the relations of Principal and
Subordinate — ^absolute and dependent. The former is used
as follows^
Ne ke n^ge-skow^dm k'6otkwee.,.I have met thy father.
Ne ke natt6o-t-oir-(^it^ (p. 96) ke gduwee.../ have listened
to her, thy mother.
M6o8uk ne nugga-t-t^ ne g6osis... always my son leaves me.
Ne ke wydise-h-^^ ne stdis-.-m^ (eldest) brother has deceived
me.
Ke sake-h-i]^^ ke g6ost-i% m6gga...Ae loves thee, he fears thee
also ; he loves and fears thee.
The latter^ as well as the Doubtful (see below) is used when
dependent on another verb, expressed or implied, as,
Ke ga meeth-tV/tn tippahum6w-et/«-e.../ will give it to thee
when thou (balancest it to,) payest, me,
iVe ng-6the-t-en he peyt~ummdn.,,I am content, pleased^
that / (to) hear it.
Ntimma k^kw^n ne meeth-ofv he k6etim-t< (intran.) ...not any
thing / give him as he is lazy.
^e p^ekeskdche-h-i'Xr-oon kenunew-(^-e (flat vow.) ...it
depresses me when (ever) it rains.
Ne kusk-6thetume-h-ik-oon he klmmew-&k...it impatient-
eth me as it rains.
Nippee s^ge-n-aA ooth6ggun-tX:...(some) water pour-ZAou-
it into the dish.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 261
M6eth'ik attlk-wyd kutta M(iskesfnna-kaitch-t^ .... give
(thou) them deer-skin^^ that tkei/ shoe-make^ make
(some) shoes.
Suppositive and Doubtful, (pp. 205. 206.)
The Suppositive (Indie.) form is used absolutely — ^the Doubtful^
relatively or dependently.
Nippd-took^-m'Ar (intran.)...Mey. sleep I suppose.
I'-esk-oot^y-took^-m^ (id.)...//i^ are tired (with walking)
I suppose.
Sdhke-h-dy-took^-nt^ (trans.)... /Ae^ love them I suppose.
S4hke-h-ik6o-took^-«iA: (id. inv.).../Aey are loved bi/ (them)
I suppose. "<>
Doubtful.
Kuckw4yche-m-fA- kutta iu6otky'ivdk'ive.,.&sk {thou) them
if they go or not.
Niimm^ ne kisk-6the-t-en itt^ ga ath^j'rvdk^m^...I do not
know (it) the place where thei^ may have laid him.
Keespin sdke-h-^-w-M/i-^...if thou love me.
Tkn et^the-m-^-w-nn-^... whatever thou mayest think (of) me.
Keespin tintow-^the-m-€-w-<%-w^...if ^e seek wf.^**
The Subordinate (subj.) may precede the Principal (indie.)
verb in a sentence (vide supra),
Tiickoos-^t^e ne ga w&ppa-m-on^...ft^^i he arrives / shall
see him.
iM xi. 13. Neb&h-doogdn-tm (suppos.). . he sleeps (to them) I suppose.
1*1 XX. 16. K^hpin , w^indohmhhweshin d6be ke ahg6h-w-«W(tt(0
-6in . . if , tell thou me where thou hast laid him.
XX. 2. 13. Kah (neg.) ne kek&inddh-ze-en (neg.) d^e ke ahs&h-w-
ahg (d^)-w&in. . I know not where they have laid him.
xiy. 15. K^shpin 8ahge-b-^-ti;-a«^-w^ii . . if ye love me.
xviii. 8. K^shpin tindaw-&ne-m-e-u;<it^-wdin . . if ye seek me.
XV. 20. K^shpin ke koodahge-h-i'i9r-oot<;^A^-w^n . . if they have per-
secuted me.
xi. 12, K^shpin n^-khy-w&in . . if Ae sleep.
262 A GRAMMAR OF
K6 doae-tm^w^eun-e (dat.) ke g^.tippa^hum-^^tii.. wlmx thou
hast made it Jar me J will pay thee.
Ke 6o6e-t-ii<(ch)e ne g& in^h-ti(...wheii he shall have made
it he will give (it to) tne»
Tlie Indioative Mood^ also^ as of the Intransitiyes^ may be
changed into the Subjunctive.
Ke 6oae'twdW'^eun^e ^kw& k^ tippa'>h<im-d/<lit...when thou
shalt have made itjor me then will pay-^A^-/.
K6 dose^Udtche 6kwi k6 meeth-ft...when he shall have made
it then will give (it)-Ae-ffie.
The Infinitive Mood is resolved into the Subjunctive with
the Conjunction Ad, as (Fr. eomme), when ; or IMtii or kutehe,
that (Fr. que), as,
Ne p^->tow-d» h^ iim4t»..I hear Asm as^ or when, he speaks;
Angl. / hear him speak.
Ne w&ppa-m-^MV h^ too-t-oil.../ see Urn as he does it; Angl.
/ see him do if.
iVe ge tt^ik^wtn ktittanigga^moo-^(lit...<Aey have desired
me (Fr. on m'a dit) that / (AngL to) sing.
Ne k6 iUik'dmn kutche mMti-'Uk,..! was told (Fr. on m"a
dit) that / (Angl. to) give (if) to him.
Ittissaw-(fyoo.. .kutche i6o^U€ik,..he sends him that Ae (Angl,
to) do iin
Paragraph III.
OP THE PASSIVE VERB.
We have seen that Attributive words or (in Indian) verbs
of a Passive signification^ are found in both the Transitive and
the Intransfitive forms.
As respects the Transitive vwb, which indudea botii Sub-
ject and R^men> the Passive is found in the (Inverse forma
of the) double-third persons only, the other combinations of
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 263
the pers. pron. having all an Active signification (See pp. 106
et seq. 255 and Accidenee).
In simple sentences^ the Active or Passive foraa may be
used^ generally, as in otiier languages, together witii its noun
in the appropriate Case (pp. 244. 247)*
(Dir.) S&ke-h-ayoo £skw4y-oo (nomin.)...she loves him, the wo-
man, (nom.)
Sdke-h-oyoo Eskwiy-it^^ (accus.)...Ae loves {her) the wo-
man, (accus.)
(Inv.) Sdke-h-iAr Eskwdy-oo rnom.)...*^c is loved 6y him, the wo-
man, (nom.)
Sdke-h-tAr Eskwdy-wa (ablat)...Ae is loved by, the woman.
The Indeterminate^ &c. verb (p. 225) takes no noun after it in
regimen.
But, in Construction, the forms of the verb and the signi-
fication, &c. of its pronominal elements, sometimes impose a
certain manner or order of expression, which gives to the
Indian what may be called a Phraseology of his own. We
particularly allude here to the frequent use of the Passive
Voice, in the place of the Active as it is commonly employed
in European tongues, and which is therefore an occasion of
much perplexity to European (oral) learners.
In English we may say^ actively, *^ she loves him because he be-
friends hef^* — ** he knows that she hates him," and the meaning is
dear and precise ; but if changing^ simply^ e.g. the femin. into
the mascul. pronouns, we say> in the same reciprocated sense^ '' he
loves Mm because he befriends htm" — *^he knows that he hates him,**
the meaning is ambiguous — may be misunderstood : we rather^ in
such case8> would say ^^ he loves Aim, because he (pass.) is be-
friended hy him"'-'*^ he knows that he is hated by him," &c. Just
so it is in the Indian language. The above^ and similar examples^
for want of the sexual distinctions id the personal pronouns^
must in Cree, kc be almayt expressed as in the latter sentences^
that is^ by giving the inverted or retwm meaning of tlie subordinate
verb, in the Inverse or Passive Snstead of the Active) voice. [See
264
A GRAMMAR OF
p. 57 et seq. and Noie 34^, the Examples (*) of which should be
compared with the context of the EngUsh (active) Originals.3
The aboTe Examples must be resolved thus^
S&ke-h-oyoo (dir.) (Eskwdy-oo) ootche h^ kittem^k-6the-
m-ik-oot (inv.).
She loves him (the woman) because that she is befriended
6y him,
Kisk-6the-t-tim (dir.) h^ puckw^-t-tAr-<$o^ (inv.).
He knows that he is hated hy {him ox her, understood).
Direct.
" Gk)d is the father of those whom he Idves."
K^che-mdnneto oot&wee-m-o^ao dnnehee ga sdke-h-a/.
God (he) father-e/A {them) those whom he loves (them).
Inversely.
" God is the father of those who love him." (act.)
K^che-mdnneto oot4we-m-/i^oo dnnehee gk 8ake-h-i%oo/. (pass.)
God fatber-eth those whom he is loved by.
" He protects those that fear him." (act)
Kdnnaw-^the-m-oyoo unnehee gk g6ost-i^-<^^ (pass.)
He protects those whom he is feared &^."2
This Idiom^ or Inverse mode of Expression^ may be further
exemplified in phrases of another kind^ where the distinction
159 iv. 60. " He believejd the word that Jesus had spoken (act.) unto
him."
Oo ge tdpway-dind-on ewh ^eddowin kah ^good (pass.) Je-
sus (im).
He believed the word which he was said to by Jesus.
iv. 51. "' As he was going down, his servants met (act.) him and
told (act.) him/* &c.
Mdgwah i\me^g6waid 00 ge n^qua-8hk-(%-oon (pass.). . 00
b^metlUigun«ttn^ 00 ge w^^ndah-m-(%r.o(m (pass.) dush.
As he was returning he was met by (pass.) . . his servant«> he
W*8 told by (them) (pass.) also.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 265
between Agent and Patient is less obvious^ and which are also
in English expressed Actively, thus,
(Dir.) V^liom does A« love? ovf-ithua sdke-h-a^oo? (indie.)... i.e.
whom love-eth-Ae {him) ?
The converse or return form is, •
(Inv.) Who loves him? ow-Mud sdke-h-t'Ar? (id.)... i.e. whom t>
he loved hy ?
These and similar sentences, from their usual places in discourse,
are more commonly expressed in the subjunctive, thus,
(Dir.) Whom does he love? ovr^thud hh s4ke-h-a/ ? ...i.e. whom
(is it) that he loves {him) ?
(Inv.) W^ loves him? owethua h^ sdke-h-f Aroo< ?... i.e. whom (is
it) that he is loved by ?
(Dir.) Whom has he given it (to)? ow6thu& h^ m^th-o/ ?...i.e.
whom (is it) that he has given it (to him) ? *
(Inv.) Who gave it (to) him? owethua h^ m^eth-t'Aroo/ ?...i.e. whom
(is it) that he has been givcft (to) by ?
The Intransitive Passives, namely, the Participial, the Ac-
cidental, and the ^^ Adjective^^ Passives (p. 114) are used as
other Intransitives. The Particip. Passive may take a Noun
of the Instrument, &c. after it, with the ablative sign ootcke,
of, from, with, &(;.
Tkto-pitch-egd/-^^oo net' uckoop dotche cheesta-ask-wan.
It is tor-n or ren-t my cloak by a pierdng-iron, i.e. a nail.
Paragraph IV.
OF THE POSSESSIVE OR ACCESSORY CASE.
Having noticed, in the preceding pages, the verbal Root^n
combination with the Cases (of the Pronoun) direct and
oblique, corresponding with the same relations (under other
forms) in European languages, we now proceed to the Pos-
sessive or Accessory Case, which being of an anomalous
266 A GRAMMAR OF
character^ becomes one of die leading difficulties of the
Algonquin dialects^ and therefore demands particular atten-
tion.
This case we call Possessive, because it is always used when in con-
nexion with a Noun preceded by the Possessive Pronoun of the 3d pers.
00 or oof, Angl. his, {hsr, or thmr) — ^Accessory^ when the same relational
sign has a more extended meaning, implying simply " in relation to
him, &c."
This additional oblique case (p. 123 et seq.) refers exdu-
sively to a 3d pers. as the ^' End/' and signifies or implies^
generally, ^^ Aw/' or, "in relation to him (Acr, or them).^^ It is
indicated, in its simple form, by the element ethu, and may be
superadded to the other (verbal) Cases.
To have a clear view of this subject^^we must refer to the two
forms before given, viz. — Intran. p. I99. Net' I'-an, &c. and p.
209. Net V^anW'dn, &c. Trans, p. 213. Ne sdke-h-oit;, &c. and
p. 229. Ne skke'h'im-dW'd, &c. together with their respective
subjunctives — and in both " genders."
The former of these two forms I shall call the Absolute— the
latter, the Relative form. Ex.
Intransitive (Indie).
Absol. Unt^ I'dw ne, or ke, gdosis... there b he nty, or thi^, son; my
or thy son is there. But with an access. 3d pers.
Relat Unt^ i'dthu 00 g6osis-£{... there is-Ae- (relat. to him) his son;
Angl. Ais son is there.
Subjunctive.
Absol. Tdn-itt^ Udt (subj.) ne or ke g6osis ? Unt^ 1-^ (Indie.)...
where i8-A« my or thi^ son .> There he is.
fiei&i. Tdn-itt^ Udth-it (id.) 00 gikisis-a ? Unt^ i-dthu (id.).. .where
U'he (to him) his son ? There Ae is (to Am).
Inanimate. (Indie.)
Absol. Unt^ T-ofv piflkesiggun... there is (-t^) the gun.
Belat Unih I'dthu p4skesiggun... there is (it, to him) tibe gun.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 267
Subjui»ctiv€.
Absol. T4n-itt^ UtJc p&skesiggan ?... where U (it) the gun?
Relat Tdn-itt^ i'dih4k p&skesiggun?... where is (to kim) ^ gun ?
Transitive. (Indie)
Animate.
Absol. Ne or Ke g6osis ne w&ppa-m-oit^ (p. 213) my or tkif soiu../
see Atm ; I see my^ or thy^ son.
Relat. Oo goosis-^ ne w^ppa-m-tm-oit^d (p. 229).,. his son / see his
him, I see his son.
Inanimate, (pp. 222. 230.)
Absol. Ne or Ke m6okoman ne ke wt!inne-t-(£n (1st conj.)...my or
<Ay knife^ / have lost (it), 1 have lost m^, &c. knife.
Relat Oo m6okoman ne ke w6nne-t-a-it7^it...Atf knife / have lost
(it " to him.*')
Absol. Ne or Ke m6okoman ne ke 6ote-n-eit (2d conj.)...my or thy
knife / have taken (it).
Relat. Oo mookoman ne ke doite-n-'Um-wdn (id.)... his knife / have
taken it, (relat. " to him").
So in the Subjunctive.
Animate.
Absol' Ne or ke g6osis h^ w&p'pa-m-tiA...fit^ or /Ay son as / see him.
Relat. Oo g6osis-a h^ w&p^pa-m-tiit-iii^...A» son as / see (his) him.
Inanimate.
Absol. Ne or Ke m6okoman h^ ke wdnne-t-f(fit...ffiy or thy knife
as / have lost (it). Angl. having lost.
Relat. Oo m6okoman h^ ke wtinne-tk-it^-t<i^...At> knife as /have
lost (it) " to him.*' Angl. id.
Absol. Ne or Ke nuSokoman h^ ke <Sote-n-«fiini(£ii...iiiy or thy knife
as / have taken (it). Angl. having taken.
Relat Oo mdokoman h^ 6ote-n-ii»i-iPtfifc...AM knife as / have taken.
(U " to him").^^
So also in the Imperative^ as^
158 vi. 42 6os«tNi, kiya oo-g^e-n kSkioe-m-iM-i^f-oo^ f . . JUf father^
and his mother (that) know-His-ir6./A«m f that toe know
(Ms) them.
%y. 10. Kah ^zhe miDJ^me-n-um*(i%-ii;-«^ (inan.). • as / have hel4
«' kept" them (relat. to him).
268 A GRAMMAR OF
Animate.
Abflol. Oo-ti-9t ne t^pan-a8k...take thou my sledge.
Relat Oo-tYfi-tm oo tikpan-ask-oom...take thou (his) him, his sledge.
Inanimate.
Absol. 0'ose-t-(^ ne nipp^y win... make thou my bed.
Relat O^ose-t-k-»(oo) oa-nipp&ywin-tift...make/AoM {his t/) Airbed.
But this Relative form is not limited in its use to nouns
having the Possessive prefix oo or oof (3d pers.); it is used
also in its Accessory character, referring simply to an ante-
cedent (or Principal) 3d person.
When the discourse is continued concerning the same (3d)
person which the sentence began with, the absolute form is
proper^ as,
1 P6etook-«yoo A he dwkoos-t< A... he (A) comes in as he
(A) is sick.
2 Wdth^w-a^oo B h^ we mkch-et B ... he (B) goes out as he
wants to hunt.
But when another person is introduced into the sentence, in
the same relation, the Relative form is used, distinguishing
the Accessory from the Principal agent, &c. (see Mavor's
Eton Lat. Gram. The Construction of Pronouns, Note) as,
1 P6etook-a^oo A h^ 4wkoosi-M-t/ B,..he (A) comes in as Ae
(B) is sick (rel. to him).
2 Wtith& w-oyoo A he we mache-/A-t/ B,,.he A goes out as
he (B) wants to hunt.
Ne gk weetum-0ft^-6n^ t<ickoos-<ft^-e (fut )..;/ will tell him
when he arrives.
A ktitt& wketunt'OW 'dyoo Bwd ti!ickoos-in-^/A-ttoA-e...Ae (A)
will tell him B when he (B) arrives (rel. to him).
Ne g& w6etum-^m-(^f»-a oo goosis-^ tuckoosin-^/A-t/cA-e...
/ will tell {his him) his son when he (the latter)
arrives (rel. to him).
Ne g& w^etum-ofV'dw wdppa-m-wAr'-e.../ will tell him when
/ shall see him.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 269
Ne ga w^etum-dm-c^w-a oo tanis-a (accus.) w&ppa-m-tm-u^-e
... / will tell (Aw him, S^c») his daughter when / shall
see {his him, S^,).
Ne ke w&ppa-m-ofr h^ p6etook-at/.../ have seen him as he
came in.
Ne ke w&ppa-m-tiTt-r^it^a^ h^ peetook-ot/A-?/^ oot* oowlLss-
im-is-a (accus.}...I have seen {his him, S^c) as thejf
came in (rel. to him) his children.
Wappa-m-a^oo A (nomin ) hwa (accus.) h^ pimmlttissliw-
dt Mooswd . ... A saw B as Ae (A) followed {him,) a
Moose.
Wappa-m-ffyoo A (nomin.) Bwa (accus.) h^ pimmlttissaw-
dth-it Moosw^...A^ A saw him B as he (B) followed^
&c.
Ne gS w6etum-(w-(^w kuckwdyche-m-tifcAe..,/ will tell him
when he shall ask me,
Ne g& w6etum-£Jm-(^a;-5(A*s B) kuckwayche-m-i2A-i^cAe (B)
.../will tell {his him) when Ae (B) shall ask me
(rel. to A).
Ndttoona-w-(fyoo oof ustiss-<S (anim.) >ye ke kat-t-tm-($ft;-a...
he searches for his mittens. 1 have hidden {his)
them.
Nutt66-n-t(m oo chicka-h-6ggun (inan.)...^e ke k^t-t-d-ft^^it
...he searches for it, his hatchet. / have hidden
(Am) it.
The Relative form expresses a Relation with a definite
3d person ow/y, expressed or implied; with other Nomin-
atives^ (e.g. the Indefinite 3d person)^ tiie Absolute form is
used.
P6etook-^iteft;oo (indef.) he dwkoos-^(£it (ab8ol.).../Ae^ (Fr.
on) enter^ as / am sick.
P^took-^^oo (def.) h^ dwkoos^-n^-ti^ (relat) he enters^ as /
am sick (rel. to him).
Nippi-iteivoo (indef.) h^ peetook-^n (absoL).../Aey (Fr. on)
sleep (arc asleep) when thou etUerest.
270 A GRAMMAR OF
Nipp-(^ (def.) h^ p6etook&j-W'Ui (relat.)...he sleeps as^ or
when^ ikou enterest (rel. to him).
li^ckooB'm'dnewoo (indet.) hd m6diteoo-n*anewik (absol.)
.,.th^ (Fr. on) arrive when Ikey (Fr. on) eat, or, are
eating.
T(ickoo8*tii (de£) h^ m^edteaoo^m^dil (relat)...A« arrives
when they (Fr. on) are eating (rel. to him),
iV'ittik-<^ii (indef.) k^tche wdthaw^n (absol.)... /Aey (Fr.
on) tell me that / (Angl. to) go out
Witt'ik (def.)k(hche wlitkawdy-it^-tfik (relat.)...Ae tells m^
that / (to) go out (rel. to him).
Nutt6om**ik-»(^b^(iii-e (indef.) ne g& iUoct'^n (absol.)... when
Mey (Fr. on) call me I will go.
Ndttoo*m«t(/)cA-e (def.) ne gjk it*6otay-w<f9t (relat.)...wheli
he calls me I will go (rel. to him).
Kisk^he^t^-ganen^oo (indef.) hk U m6eth«ik-(^-^f«
(absol.)... <Aey (Fr. on) know that thejf (Fr. on) have
given it to me.
Kiskdthe-t^trm (def.) h^ k^ m^h^'k-dipe-tp-nib (relat.)...Ae
knows (it) that they (Fr. on) have given (it to) me
(rel. to him).
Wfinnetk-diiffvoo (indef.) h^ p^etookatl (ab9o}.).../Aey (Fr.
on) rise as he enters.
W(innesk-on^ (def.) h^ petook-at/At< (relat.)... /lenses as he
(the latter) enters (relat. to him).
Paragraph V.
Unlike €be (verbal) Cases already noticed^ this Relational
element affects also the other inflected parts of speech^ viz.
the Noun^ and Uie Pronoun (Demons* and Interrog.)^ thus
distinguishing the Object from the Subject. And firsts of the
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 271
NOUN.
We have already seen (p. 244) that Inanimate Nouns, when
governed by a definUi 5d pers. in order to form their
Accus. and Ablative cases, take for their ending this Particle
-etkA (sing.) -Sthu-d (plur.), as,
N' 6ote-n-0it pdskesiggun.../ take (it) a gun.
Oot6-n-tiiii pdskesiggun-e/Au...Ae takes (it) a gun.
Ne nt!igga-t-0it n* iskootoggy.../ leave (jU) my coat
Nt^ga-t-tim It' iskootoggy-6<Ai^...^e leaves (t/) my coat.
PRONOUN.
In like manner, the Pronoims (Demons, or Interrog.)
Cfwena (sing.) Owinekee (plur.) AngL who, or whom ; — and
kikwdn (sing.) kikwdnee (plnr.) AngL tc;Aa/ (nomin. and
accus.) make respectively, when in connexion with an Acces-
sory 3d pers. owithua, kikwdtku, (sing, and plur.) as,
Absol. (ywena dwkoos-u? (indie) who {he) is sick ? or
(ywena gk dwkoos-d? (subj.) ivAo (is it) that is sick ?
But in reference to another 3d person,
Relat Ow6thu& dwkoos-^Atfc^? (indie.) who is^ or are> sick (reiat.
to him) ?
Owdthu& g^ dwkoos-^Att (subj.)... who (is it) that is sick
(WL)?
Absol. Kekw&-n miiskow-(^ ? (indie.)... what (it) is hard? or
K6kw&n gk mdskow-niEr? (subj.) ..what (is it) that is hard.^
Relat. Kkkwi-thu mdskow-a/A-tt f (indie.)... what (reka.) is hard
(rel. to him)} or,
K6kw^lhu gk m^iBkoW'Oth'ik 9 (subj.)... what (is it) that is
hard (relat)?
With the Transitive Verb, both owithua and kSkwathu
become the Accusative or the Ablative case when governed
by a double 3d person, e.g. he'-him, he-by him, as
DIRECT.
O'w-ena (nom.) sdke-h*ayoo? (indie.) ...who (he) loves Attn? or
272 A GRAMMAR OF
O'weiia (id.) gk skke-h-al? (subj.)...who (is he) that loves
him ?
Ow6.thu& (accus.) s4ke-h-ayoo? (indie.)., whom does Ae love
(him)? or,
Ow6thuSi (id.) gk skke-h-at? (subj.)...whom (is it) that he
loves (him) ?
INVERSE.
O'wena (nomin.) sdke-h-i%?...who is loved (6y him, ^.)? or
OVena (id.) gk s^ke-h-»^oo/ ?...who (is he) that is loved
(by him, ^,) ?
Ow^ua (ablat.)...8dke-h-tA: ?...whom is he loved by ? or,
Ow6thu& (id.) gk sdke-h4A-oo<?...whom (is it) that he is
loved 6y ?
DIRECT.
K^kwa-n ke meeth-on^? (indie.)... what (dost) thou give (to)
him? or,
K^kw^ ga m^eth-u7?...what (is it) that thou hast given (to)
him f
K^kwd-thu meeth-o^ ? (id.) ...what gives-Ae-Atm ?
K^kwd-thu ga m^eth-a/?...what (is it) that he has given (to)
him ?
INVERSE.
K^kwdn ke m6th-t^? (indic.)...what; gives-Ae (to) thee?
K6kw^ gk m€eth'{sk} (subj.)...what (is it) that he has given
(to) thee}
K6kw&-thu m6ethik} (indic) ..what is Ae given (by him, ^.)
K^kwd-thu gk m^eth-ik-ooi} (8ubj.)***what (is it) that he has
been given to (by him, 4«.) ?
INANIMATE.
Kekwdn ke s^e-Uan (indic.)... what (dost) thou love (it), or
K^kw^ ga s4ke-t-tt<n? (subj)...what (is it) that /Aou lovest
(t/)?
K^kw4-thu sdke-t-Oft;? (tWtc.)...what (does) he love (it)} or,
K^kwd-thu ga sdke-t-a/ ? (subj.)...what (is it) that he loves
(t7) ?
THB CREE LANGUAGE. 273
K^kwftn ke wdppa-t-en (indie.)... what (dost) thou see (if) or
K^kw^ ga wdppa-t-t/9mift/n (subj.)...what (is it) that thou
seest uV).
K6kyriihu wappa-t-um (indie.)... what seeeth he.
Kkkwk'thu gk wippa-t-d^ (8ubj.)...what (is it) that he sees
(it).
See Additional Notes.
Paragraph VI.
OF THE PRONOUN RELATIVE.
Sometimes a Nominative Case comes between the Pronoun
Relative (get) and the Verb. (p. 247.)
It has been seen that when there is no other Nominative^ the
subordinate verb agrees with the Relate Pron. gd. in (its implied)
gender^ number^ and person. We subjoin a few more examples.
Note. — In the following Examples the indeclin. get, is rendered by the
indeclin. that, or, which, as more analogous to it than the declinable
who, whom.
M^kowe-k(£^oo na > dnna mlstuttim gk (nomin.) mdthkti>-tV.
Is he swift that horse whieh ugly-t^-(Ae).
Ket oogduwee-m-on; nk ? (inna ga meth6sis8-i7 oow&ssis.
Thou mother-est (Angl.) eh ? that (whieh is) niee ehild.
Ne ke w&ppa-m-(^ft^-ti^ Ethln'u-u^ g^ tuekoos-aik-it;c^it;.
/ have seen (them) the Indians that are arrived.
Ne we idmme-h-of& iskwdyoo gk w^che-h-ew-dii (indet).
/ want (to) speak (to) her the woman that accompanied.
Ne g'6ote-n-en gk k&ssis-t^ m6koman (inan.).
/ will take (it) which is keen> Angl. the keen^ knife.
Ke misk-cn nk ? ooth6ggun gk k6 wuune-ch-egel/-^tA: (part.p.)
Hast thou found the dish which was losec^^ lost ^
T
A^
374 A GRAMMAR OF
Ne kisk^the-m-anit(£n iskw&yoo g^ mi8kow-(t^ kdwkw&.
We (1.3) know (the) woman that found (the) porcupine.
Tkn-itt^ it-6ot-at7 tinna EtW'u gk ke k^^ook-o^^ f
What place go-eth-Ae to that Indian that vis]ted-(Ae)-<Afe f
Tkxi iith I'dt Ethinu gk nuttoo-m-t7 f
What place^ wher^, is {he) the Indian that called (Jie^) me f
K^tha, g^ ootdwee-m-ed^^ ga t6o-t-2^9nmtift.
(It was) thou, that fatherest (jthou-) us {l.S), that didst (thou-y
it
Nomin. between Relat. and Verb.
Iskwdyoo g^ sake-h-u^ ndspitch dwkoo-#».
Woman (she) that thou lovest (her) very iW-As-the.
U'nna iskwdyoag^ w^chenn^chesoo-m-tt/...
That woman that with-eatest-/Aou-(Aer).
Netha unna Agkthksu gk dntow-wappa-m-ai^.
I (am) that Englishman that go-seek-ye(Atm).
W^ekt!issin-ft;aA che ? m^niss^ gk m^ch^fiit.
Are iheif sweet ? (the) berries which eatest-^Aou-ZAem.
Ne k^ w&ppa-m-ow eskwiyoo gk sake-h-u/.../ have seen
(her) the woman whom lovest-/Aoti C-her).
Ne k6 wdnne-t-an m6okoman gk k6 m^th-^it.../ have
lost (t^) the knife which thou gavest (to) me.
Ne ke misk-^ missina-h^ggun (inan.) gk ke wdnne-t-ftin.
I have found writing, or book, (the) which hadst lost-/Ao2i-(t<).
...k^kwan gk wkpj^&'Uummdn gjk ^y-Uummdn n^esta.
...any thing which have 8een-/-(t0 which have heard /-(t<)
also ; Angl. which I have seen and heard.
Note.-r^We may just remark here, that from the peculiar personal
C9mbintttums which form the subjunctive verbal Inflection, e.g. "Ut,
thou -him ; -it, he -me^ &c. (see above) i.e. subject and regimen, the
(signs of the) personal pronouns are, in the Transitive form, necessarily
repeated where in English they are often omitted. In the Intransitive
forms (Adject. Neut. &e.) the Subjunctive Inflection, in Construction, is
in all respects in perfect accordance with the verbal (personal) ending^
of European inflected languages, e.g. ItaL &c.
THE €REE LANGUAGE. 275
Articles. (See p. 248.)
I'^k kinwoo-st7 nkpdyoo (Lat. vir)..,ih€ def.) that is tall man ;
Angl. the tall man.'
H^ kinwoo-st/ nkp4yoo...(Af indef.) as is tall man; Anfj^l. iz
tall man.
Without a Noun, as,
fyk kinwoosi/...(Ae def.) that is tall ; Angl. ike tall one.
H^ kinwoodt7...<^ indef.) as is tall ; Angl. a tall one.
Paragraph Vll.
OP THE FLAT VOWEL.
The PLAT, or altered. Vowel (pp. 73 et seq. 202) is the
sign of Indefinite time and indicates in the Verb what is con-
tinuous, habitual, natural, &c. as opposed to what is Accidental,
&c. It is equivalent to the Iterative Indicative (p. 7lX ^^^
is found in the Subjunctive (or Dub.) mood only : -thus we
say in the simple
INDICATIVE.
K^kwdn ke mlnnekw-dn ?..,what drinker/ thou f
K^kw4n ke n6che-t-an f ...what workest thou (at)? &c
SUBJUNCTHTB.
K^kwan "gk" mlnnekw-^un ?....what (is it) ^' which" thou
drinkest?
K6kwau '' gJi** n6che-t-iti»?...what (is it) '^thaf* tkou work-
est at ? &C.
«nd these forms are susceptiUe of the auxiliary Particles <&€. of
Tense, as^
K^kwan ke "k^* (ghee) minnekw-^n ? (indie.)... wlurt; ^hast"
Ihou drunk ?
K^kwan gk k6 (id.) minnekw-^ft f (sulj.)...what <is it) which
thou hadst drunk ? &c.
t2
276 A GRAMMAR OF
But the ^* altered vowel'^ form, which, as already observed, is always
in the Subjunctive, signifies Indefinite^ continuoui^ &c. Time, as,
K^kwan m^nekw-f uit f (not mtn-)... what drinkest thou (habit.)?
or art (hrinktng f
K^wan ne-6che-t-tiin f (not n6che-)...what workest thou($t)
(id.) ? or art working at ? &c.
Tan' itt^ ^it (not &p-) (p. 148)... where is he sitting, dwell-
ing, hewing.
Tan' itt^ hst-, or, ^sUaik (not &st-) (id.)... where is it lying,
placed, bet'n^.
The (verbal) Attributive^ so modified^ is used to qualify^ in-
definitely, its Noun, and is, generally, placed before it. In the
neuter and transitive verb it has (as above) the force of the
English Participle -ing. In the 3d. pers. it appears thus,
M^skow-isstV (not Musk-) ethYn'u (Lat homo).*
Who is (indef.) strong man, i.e. a, or the, strong man, Indian.
K^wdss-issf^ (not Kut-) iskwayoo.
A, or the, handsome woman.
P^m-kt*is8t< (not PS-) oow^sis.
A, or the, living child.
The Attributive, in this form, may also be used without a
Noun (expressed or understood), when, if it imply an energy
or action it is a verbal equivalent to English nouns ending in
-er, &c. — ^if simply a quality (acyect.), it is then also (Anglic^)
used substantively, as,
W^s-itch-e-gatY (not Oos- p. 202). t
Who makes (habit.), Angl. a or the mak-er — and so of the rest.
W^-t-o/ (id,).„he who makes it (def. obj.), the maker of t^.
Ne-6oti-n-eg<lt< (not Noot-)...the fighter.
K^lnoohtim-^cft^ (not Kisk-)...the teacher.
K^mkk-]ssit(ch)-t^ (not Kit-)... who are poor. Angl. the poor*
W^dt-iss-itch-iifc (not With-)... the rich.
• See Note 144. t Vide infrik
THE CRBB LANGUAGE. 277
K^w&t-is8-itch-tiEr (not Ke-)...the friendless.
M^kow-iss-itch-tA: (not Musk-) ..the strong.
They are also used> in the same sense> in the sing, number.
Nb*e.— See p. 76, The eflfect, &c.
In the 1st and 2nd persons^ it sometimes conveys a Vocative
or Intefjeciional meaning, (see Note 144) as,
M^os-iss-^it (not Me-) ethln'u U.Jkou (who art) good man !
P^m-kt-iss-^it (not Pg-) ethln'u ! ,,tkou (who art) living man !
Or without a Noun^ as,
K^sklnoo-h-tim-^^i» ! (not Kisk-).
Thou (who) teachest (habit.). Teacher ! '' Master !'*
Khtemkk'isS'edn ! (not Ktt-)... destitute, wretched, that I am !
The same "altered^^ form is expressive of the English word
when — ^osed in the indefinite sense of whenever (p. 203, The
^^ altered^^ first vowel, &c.) as,
Tdckoosin-eifit-e (fut.) ..when / shall arrive*
T^koosin-e<lft-e (indef.)...when(ever) /arrive.
W&ppa-m-it^-e (fut.)... when / shall see him.
We-dppa-m-i^^-e (indef.)...when(cver) / see him.
After the Inteijection Ecco ! Chip. Me! (Ital. ecco ! Pr.
voila !) expressed or understood, it is also employed, by way
of Emphasis, as,
Ith'ec5k gk nippah-a/ pissiskti-a ^co ! (or eckwa !) V.'kvrait.
When he had killed an animal behold ! or, then ! he returned.
(Ith^ekok) g^ k^ese-Tdm-tV, ecco ! n^o/.
(When) he had finish-speaking, then ! he fell asleep.
Ne ke meches6o*taiiit(fit (ecco !) t^koos-otX
We (1.3) had eaten then ! he arrived (by land).
K6gat oot^coosih-e^Au (ecco) m^ssag-a/.
Almost (towards) evening (behold) then ! he arrived (by water).
Ecco-t^ wH-6ot-«^ (not oot-).
Just there from-come-n;f (1.3) ; we come thence*
278 A GRAMMAR OF
Note, — With this " altered vowel" form of the verb the 3d pers. plur.
(subj.) ends in -ik, instead of --wow. See p. 21 8»
PARAeRAPH VIII.
OF NEGATION.
In Cree there are two primary Negatives, viz* numrna^ no,
not, — ^used before the Indicative, as,
Numma ket' ethin-^s^tit... /Aoti art not wise.
Ndmma ne sake-h-ow,..! love him not
Nihnma ow'eiik tapwooy-t-tim...not any one believes it.
W&pip&'ia'-d^'fvuk m6gga ntimma w&ppa-m-t^-frui^...^A€3r
see them but Mey are not seen by {them),
Ntimma k6kw^n (inan.) kef i-an-^ww (p. 1S9) ke m^eche-
dk (1.2) not any thing we (1.2) have (that) we shall
(Angl. to) eat.
and ^gd, not — ^used in like manner before the Subjmictive and
the Imperative, as,
£glt h^ t^p-w-etfn...a8 thou true-say est not
£gk h^ kis8h^w-d-t-iss-t^...as he is not kind.
Nu'mma ke gk gh k6ese-t-ait (indie.) e'oa' w6che-h-t/^d»-^
' (subj.) ... thoti wilt NOT be able to finish it, if / do
NOT assist thee.
'Egk t6o-t-a...do thou not it.
£ga t6o-t-z<m-ooA;...do it not ye.
Note. — ^The addition of the Pronoun w^tha (Chip, ween) it, to the
former before the Indicative, and to the latter before the Imperative,
strengthens the negation.
The element -et'ookk (Sign of the Suppos. mood) added to
certain words, has the effect of a very soft Negative, as,
Ow^ena gjk t6o-t-d^ f who (is it) who has done it ?
Ans. Owin-tookfe (quasi ''who indeed!") Angl. I knoWnot who.
Owinekee gk tbo-t-ctk'ik ?...who (plur.) id. ?
Ans. Owin-took^-mAr...Angl. I know not who (plur.)
THE CRBE LANGUAGE. 279
Tan itt^ we it-(5ot4y-ivt<Ar f ...where do ^ey want (to) go f
Abb. Tan-itte-dtook^...Ang]. I don't know where.
K^kwin-took^ ke m6echAUwdw.. Angl. I know not what thei^ will
eat.
Note. — In the Chippeway Dialect also are two negative signs, viz. kah
(JoNBS) no, not — ^and *$$, or "Ze, not. The latter of these is annexed to-
incorporated with-r-the verhy in all the forms of the Indicative, Suhjunc-
tive, and Douhtfdl moods ; it is found also in the Imperative. It is a
9(^ Negative (quasi Fr. ne). For the sake of Emphasis, the former, kah,
(Fr. pas) or stronger kdh ween (Fr. point) is used before the Indicative ;
as is kdgoo (or stronger, kdgoo ween) before the Imperative. The Sub-
junctive does not admit of the added negative Particle. The 2d negative
strengthens the negation, (pp. 63 et seq., 206 et seq., 234 et seq. and —
Notes, passim.)
Paragraph IX.
OF INTERROGATION.
Interrogation is expressed^ generally, by the Particles che ?
or nh? (Chip, nah? Jones) added to a positive (or negative)
sentence, or placed immediately after the word to which the
question refers, as,
Ke ke nk-X^&m, che ? or n^ ?...hast thou fetched him ?
Ke ke it-(^^ che?... hast thou said (it to) him f
M^^su ke ke w&ppa-m-on^, che?... a fox hast thou seen
(him)?
M^^uche? gk w&ppa-m-u/...(wa8 it) a fox which thou
hast seen (him) ?
Niimmache? kewe m6che8-ooit...dost thou not want (to)
eat?
To tiiis bead also belong the Interrogatiye Pronouns (p.
189), as,
Ow'ena wee-^-t-um-o^^ ?... who (is it) tells thee ?
K^w&n gh we 6ose-t-tun f .i.what @s it) which thou wantest
(to) make (it) f
280 A GRAMMAR OF
Tan itte it-6ot&y-WMAr?...what place^ where, go theif to ?
Ans. Un-t^, there ; Ecco-t6, tfiat very place, just there.
T^n isse ke (fut.) tSo-i-'Ummdn ?...what wise, how, shall Idioitf
Ans. O'om isse... this wise, thus.
£cco-i8se...this very manner, just so.
T^n ispee (past) too-t-d^-t^ f ...what time, when, did they do it f
Ans.£cc6-spee...at that very time, just then.
Tan ithekok (fut.) ke meeth-M<?...how much, when, (is it) thou wilt
give it him ? Also,
T4n ithekok (quantity) gk m6eth-tfX:f ...how much (is it) ^at ^ha»
given thee ?
Ans. O'om' ithekok... this much. Ecc'o 'thekok...just so much
Tdn isp^eche .> (space, &c.) . . .how much >
Tan isp^eche tim-ai^?...how (much) deep-i^-t^ (the water) }
Tkn isp6eche k^sik-^^ ?...how much d&y-is-it, what time of day?
T^n isp6eche isp-dk ?...how (much) high-t^-iV ?
TItn isp^eche 6ga ga wappa-m-t7/(£iif...how much, how long,
(is it) that / have not seen thee f
Tkn isi^iet'iss'it ?...(anim.) what time, age, is he ?
Tan' ispeech-c^^ ?...how far-w-£/ ? Peech-ofi;...t7 is far.
Tkn' isse-nakoosfV?...(p. 114) how is he seen, what is he like.^
Tan' isse-makoosxV ?...(id.) how is he smelled, what does he smell
like.?
Tsin'-itt^ isse .^...what place like, which way ?
T^n', or, tan ispeeche, ittiggit-i7 ?...how big is he f
Tan' weche?...what from, why, wherefore, for what reason ?
Tkn' tato . . . what number ? Kekoo t6o-^ . . . what kind ?
T£in'it-t<iss-iifcA-t^(anim.) Tan' it-tkUdikee (inan. ).?... how many are^
they^
Tkx^ iskoo-st^ 6wa tkpan-ask? (anim.)...how long if (^e) this sledge ?
T^' iskwwl^ 6oma ch6man? (inan.)..«how long is {it) this canoe?
Tkn' iskw-^k-oost7(p. 178)linna mi8tik(am'm.)?...how long (-stick)
is that stick or tree ?
T^' isikw4-«pegg-(£/(r(id.)t!innemai4ppee? (inan.)... how long j(-line)
is that line ? &C..
TH£ CRBE LANGUAGE. 281
Chapter II.
Sect. I.
OF THE ADVERB.
The Adverb (p. 239) is of various kinds, and in simple
sentences is usually placed before the verb, as,
Mistahay ke g& m6eth-tn...a great deal ihou wilt give me.
Pi^tuk ne g& t6o-t-ei}... carefully I will do ii.
Att^et ne gk w^pe-n-ow-MAr...part (of ^em) / will fling
(away).
Athew&k ne w6eke-st-en... exceedingly / like it (taste).
Nistoo p6e8iin-it;t<Ar " lispin'' gi tuckoos-m^... three moons
" ago" (it was) that he arrived.
Ot^ w^skutch it^akwt£ft-^tin (p. 138 pret.) waska-h^gun.
Here formerly there was a house.
K6tha^ ke m^ttaw-an isp6ese ^but-iss-e^n, n6tha ..^ou^ thou
pixyest whilst / am useful^ I.
Some Adverbs (a few) appear in the (subord.) verbal form
slightly modified, e.g. of THme^ as,
Ne gSi is8ebwooy-t-(£» wdppiik-e^ i.e. wkppctke (subj. of
Wkppun,..it is day-light).../ will depart when ii
shall be morning, or, to-morrow.
Ne glk nk't-en ootakoos-at^-e (subj. of oot-akoos-tn...t/ is
evening).../ will fetch it when it shall be (Angl. in
the) evening.
COMPARISON.
Comparison we shall consider as it respects, 1. Manner; 2.
Dborbe.
First, — As it respects Manner of Being, as — so, {sse^^co-se,
&c. See Conjunctions, p. 287*
#
Secondly,— As it respects Degree*
282 A GRAMMAR OF
The Degrees of Comparison are usually expressed as follows : —
Isp^eche^ or Ithekok (quantity)... as much as.
E'cco isp^eche^ or^ ^co-tbek5k^ just so much.
A'woo8-itt^...beyond> more.
A'stum-itt^...on this side> less.
A'woos-ithekok...more (in quantity).
A'stum-ithekok...less (id.).
Ath'ew&k... exceedingly^ very, more, most.
Oos4m...more, too much.
1. Equality. Isp^eche.
O'wa isp^eche m^o-^ dnna...
This (anim.) as much good-is^he (as) that ; Angl. this is as
good as that.
CVoma isp6eche m^thow-dsstn, dnnema...
This (inan.) as much good-»^-t^, (as) that ; Angl. id.
Isp^eche mech6t net' i-ow6w-tiAr (anim. p. 139)> h4tha,,.
As many / have ithem), (as) thou.
Isp^eche mfstahay net' i-an (inan. id.) w^tha...
As much / have (it) as he.
Isp^eche ke kinwoo-gapowin Mha — 6cco-se n6esta n^ka...
As much as thou long-standest, art tall, thou — just so also /.
'* Isp^che" hitha^ net* it-igglt-tn...
"As much as" thou, I am so-big, Le. I am as big as thou.
K4tha, hh it-iggitt-^n, nef it^iggitt-tit...
Thou, as thou art big, / am so big.
Isp^edie ne^ l-ow^dw 86oneow k4tha...
As much / have money (as) thou.
Ke ke nippa^-h-c^w-tt^ '* isp^eche mech^t," n4tha (gli nippa-
huk^ik understood)...
Thou hast killed " as many" (as) / (have killed them
understood).
2. Excess. Awoos-itt^ — ^isp6eche.
" Aw6os-itt6" kish^w-A-t-wtftt " isp6eche" k4tha,, .
^' More" he is kind (Angl.) '' than" thou.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 283
A^wooS'itth m^thow-&8stn 6om&, isp^eche ij^nnona...
More good-is'tt this, than that ; Angl. this is better than
that.
AVoos-itt^ meth6s-i88M 6wa ispeeche tinna...
More good'is-he this, than that ; AngL id.
O^oma mathdt-uit^ ni6gga dnnema oos&m, or^ ithewclk...
This bad-i>-j^^ but that> more; Le.. worse.
A'woos-itt^ ne kesh-6thindyw-tn ispeeche w4iha„.
More / am old-man^ an older man, *' than" he,
Aw'oos-itt^ ne kinwoo-gdpow-i» ispeeche kStha,,,
More I am long-stand, taller, than thou.
Aw'oos-ittfe mech6t net' i-ow-6w-fiAr ispeeche kelha,,.
More (in) number / have ithem) than thou,
P^poo^^ dwoos-itt^ math4tun-f9^ m&iskiinow-^ isp^che he
neepee-A:...
In winter more h^A-are-thetf, the roads, than tit summer.
So,
Pepoon-ook, last winter ; dwoose-p^poon-ook, ^e winter before
last; F-dwoose-p^poon-ook (p. 7l« !•)> two winters before last.
3. Defect.
Ndmma w6tha ispeeche oo mis-& kist-6^e-m-oo...
Not as much as his (or her) elder sister proud-»-Ae (or she).
Niimma w6tha ispeeche oo tknis-& tippa-h-um-^i(;-oofw^tf
(p. 114. freq.).
Not as mueh as her daughter revenge<^/^u-«Ae.
4. More and Less repeated. Ache — ^A^ch-ekdy, or, A'che-plko.
A'cHE mistahay mfmnekw-at^-^— a'che^-ka^y we minnekw*ayoo,
The more he drinks — ^the more he wants (to) drink.
A'che dppesis m6eth-«/-^— dch^-kdy awoositt^ he sdke-h-til.
The less thou give ^tm— -the more he loves thee*
284 A GRAMMAR OF
A'che dwoot-itt^ kuckwdyche-m-tt/-^ — 4ch^k4y m&mma ke gi
tiipwoy-t-^
The more thou ask him — the more he will not consent (to) thee.
The Adverb sometimes assumes the verbal form, e.g. Ndt-ow,
short of; Oosdm, too mnch, as,
Not-^-tf...A€ is unhandy, awkward.
Not^pti^-u (p. 146). ..t^ falls short, is not enough.
N5t<5we-t-(^i9...Ae under-does-i^.
Oosdme-t^(^...Ae over-does it.
Sect. II.
OF THE CONJUNCTION.
Conjunctions (p. 242)^ as they are of various kinds^ so do
they govern different moods.
In simple sentences^ the Copulative and Disjunctive govern^
generally, the Indicative mood^ as,
Ke sdke-h-tA:, ke gdost-t^ " m6gg^" (pos. ''and")...
He loves thee, he fears thee " also."
Ne ndttoo-m-dw-iiA:, *' m6gg^" (privat) ntimma ne p€yt'dk'fvuk,..
I call them " but" thetf do not hear me.
But those which subjoin a dependent verb, be the same
declarative or otherwise, always govern the latter in the sub-
ordinate (subj. or dub.) mood, as,
A^'em-un h^ 4wkoosin-dntfi9-i% (indet.)... It is difficult, bad, when
one is (Fr. on) ill. Angl. to be ill.
«
W^3rt-un k6tta boae't-k-newik (id.)...t^ is easy that theif (id.) make
t^ Angl. to make it.
Ne m^tho-^e-t-«i n^he-ch-eg/an (flat vow.).../ like it (am
pleased) when / am worktii^.
THB CRBE LANGUAGE. 283
Hh, as (Pr. comme), S^,
Ne gk m^h'dw h^ sdke-h-iiAr...
/ will give it to him as / love Attn.
Ne kisk-6the^t-^ h^ nstU^ewit (p. 17) •»
/ know that it is a mitten.
H^kissew&ss-tif ootdma-w-oyoo...
As he is angry (Angl. being angry) he beats him.
Ne ne-6the-t-eii hh nippd-che-g^-(£«Ar (part, pass.) mechim...
/ am glad as it is Mlled (to wit) food.
Ktitta^ or^ Kutche. (Chip, che) that, to the end that, &c.
Ne ga it-(^ kutt& t^koo-pit-i'jAr...
/ will say (to) him that he (Angl. to) tie thee.
m
Ne ga littoo-t-c^ft' kutche nippa-Zn^e^it^-t^ (dat.) plssiskd-^,..
/ will engage him that kill^/br*me-A€ animals.
Ne g^ ^ttoot^^n; ktitche mpp^'tum^dwii (id. inan.) w6eas-e/AM...
/ will engage him that kill^/br-me-Ae meat
Ktitche w&ppa-m-tt/ g'oo p^y8hoo-w-wA>^€/.
That thou (mayest) see him is the reason that bring^ft^e (1 .3)-Atm.
Wfene-t-ia«-fe (p. 203) k6kwan ne '* nuttoon-kpa-t-e»."
Whenever / lose something I '' look-for" it.
Mdosuk It-ootdy-w-tiA:-^ ne w^ppa-m-oft^.
Always when / go (relat.) / see him.
'• K6espni" tdckoos-aiA:-^...'' in case" he arrive^
W^ta-m-(/fVfn... k6 too-t-t/m-oo^-fp^ (dub.).
Tell-^Aon-me... whether he has done it or not.
Qe k6ese-missina-h-^g-eaite ne g& w6thaw-t».
When / shall finish-writing / will go-out.
Ke g& t/.6otan-dnon' (1.2) ke k^se-m^echesoo-^^iS^oo (1.2).
We (1.2) will there-go when we (1.2) shall fini8h-eat(ing).
286 A GRAMMAR OF
" Tkn isp^eche" dppesis meeth-tt/-fe.
^' However" little ikon may est give hitn,
Is's-i kfitta gh it-oot-dt< vfkgh it-oot-^t^.
Say ihou (to) him that he may go whither he wants (to) go^,
Niknntia " 6skwk" m^thow^ss-tn kiitta m^ddn-dnefviL
Not '* yet" w it good to eat (Pr. qu'on le mange).
" Bth'ewaik" ne^ {Uoot-dn.
" Nevertheless" / will there-go, go there.
The addition of a grave ^ (Fr. ^), Chip. -di», to the Subjunc-
tive gives it a conditional or contingent sense^ (Angl. ify &c.)
as^
Ow'en& ch6ese*h-}V-^...|^any one (Ae) deceive me.
Niigge-sk-6w-fi/-^ idmee-h*i^Ar-^ m6gg^...
//* /Aott meet him, if he speak to thee also.
We it-<Sot-e/{n^ ne g& it-oot-^n...
//*/ wish (to) thither-go, / will thither-go.
iCe g& m6eth-t^n tippa^h-imi*6w-^m-^...
/ will give (it to) thee if thou pay me.
M^tho-^e-t-i^mvit-^ he g& w^che-w-l//tft...
If thou like it I will accompany thee,
Atk t^pwi-^e-fin-^ ntimma ne g& p6y-it-oot-<fn...
Although /Aofi shouldest call me I will not come.
H^ mk;iho^ithit ne g& ke meth-c£-tf, ke nutt6o-t^um-(^fi^iit-tf{;^uii-^»
A good one / would have given (to) him, if he had asked it of me.
T^ipvrk'SUwdpdnA ne g^ tdckoos-in-i//f...
If thou hadst called me I would have arrived^
8&ke-t-a-ft^(^-pttn.^ ke misslna-h-^ggun "ispeeche" sedke-t-tt<n (flat.
vow.) kiitta m6ttaw-^n...
If thou hadst loved thy book " as well as" thou lovest that thou play,
Angl. to play.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 287
Ne gft ke 6ose-t-d/t we dose-t-iiiw-^...
/ could have made it if I wished that / (to) make it,
£g& tfickoosin-e^n-^ ne g& misslna-h-egcfn...
If I do not arrive / will write.
The Condition or Contingency expressed by this verbal
form is strengthened by the added Conjunction, Kiespiny
Angl. ^' In case that/^ as,
K6espin ow'enS, mlnnekw-ai/-^ 6oma nippee-ethu (accus.).,.
In case that any one (he) drink this water....
Note. — ^The fat. (subj.) is ended by a short 6 (p. 203). The inserted
w, and the added ^ or w^, (Chip, -ain, or, -wain) constitute the signs of the
Doubtful mood.
Owa m4na iinn& ..this and that (anim.).
Ow& ^gct duulk ..this or that.
Comparative Conjunctions.
(See Adverbs^ Comparison, p. 281^ also p. 132 et seq.)
As—so Is/ser-^se, or, Ecco-'se with tsse repeated before the
following (Indicative) verb ; h^^^sse, (jb=Fr. ^) or, h^*se (Chip, dzhe,
eu", an-), before the Subjunctive, as,
G^ isse i-i-^tin, Ecc'o-'se ne/* isse Udn (indie.), or, £cc'o-se
h^'se I-i-an (subj.)... as thou art just so / so am.
H^'se ki8k^the-m-t/...ecc^o ndtha, h^'se kisk^the-m-i/Ar.
As iLnoweth-he-me voila I, so know-/-Atm.**^
>^ X. 15. A^ZHE kekdne-m-ti. . me !. . neen, a^zhe kekdne-m-tc^.
As knoweth-A^-mtf. . ecco !. . I, so know*J-Atm.
XV. 9. Kah :^ZHB B&kgeAx-id, . me ! . . neen, kah b'zhb s&hge-h-^A-
goog.
As hath loved-^e-me. . voild !. . 7, have so loved- J-y em.
XV. 12. Che ^zhe sdhge-h-^<ie-y(% (recip.) n&hsob kah ^zhe sdhge-
6tahgoog,
That so love-one-ofiof Aer-ye, like as have loved-J-yotc.
288 A GRAMMAR OF
In the following and similar Examples^ the correlative verb ii
the (elementary) Et-w (tee p. l60) he "is," or, "does" ; thus,
Aw'koos-ti, w6tha...n6esta net* et-m.
He is sick, he... also / am (so). Angl. so ant I.
Wi!inne8k-of9, w6tha — n^sta net* eUin.
He rises, he — also / do (so). Angl. ao do L
Sect. III.
OF THE PREPOSITION.
The Preposition (p. 242) governs nouns of place in the loca-
tive case, generally, (p. 184) as,
M^egew^p-tA: 6otche...the tent {at) from, from the tent.
Wdskah6ggun.t^ " issee"..." towards" the house.
S^p^-ifc " cheeke"-.." near to" the river.
K6eske-s-a tinnehee muskoos^e-a " ch^eke" usk-ift/t.
Cut thou those grasses " close to" the ground.
" Ast'um-ik" w4ska-h-6ggun-t^.
" Before," in front of, the house.
'* Pfeeche" mistik-oowdt-tit... "within" the wood-bag, i.e. box.
They are placed either before or after their nouns, as,
Mewtit-t^ p^eche, or p^eche mewtit-tJt...in the bag.
Wutch^e-* p6o8koo, or, p6oskoo wutch^Jt...in the same hill.
XX. 31. Kah ^zhe IJinoozh-tcf . . me !. . neen, dzhe dhnoon-^A^oo^.
As hath sent-Ae-me. . voilk. . J, so send-J-you.
xiy. 27. Kah ween. . kzhe m^gewa-to<^. . ked" ezhe m^ne-«ai-<^-m.
Not as they give so give-noM-yott.
ix. 17. Ahn een an-^je-m-iMf.
What wise, how, so-relatest-^Aott-Atm.
ix. 10. Ahn een nah ? kah ezhe wahb-6yttit.
How (is it) that so see-est thou ?
vi. 30. Ahn een nah ? an-ihnook-^un.
How workest-^Aotf ?
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 289
*' Pim"-a8tay-w£{...Mey are lying " about.**
*' P^esooch" m^egew&p-tAr..." near to" the tent
" Ch^eke" seep^e-^..." close" at the river.
Seepee-Ar " issee"..." towards" the river.
Chdppasis k^tha. Isptm-ik n^thti*
Below thee. Above me.
Ne g& mlnnekw(2n '* amdya" k^ka.
I will drink " before" thee.
" Sepi" nipp6ywin-tA:, ast-^fA.
" Under" the bed, put-^Aoti-t^
" Tlikootch" t6yt-app6win-t^, ath-(fy.
** Upon*' the chair, place-/Ao?/-Atm.
Wdth-ow ^skwa kef lan-ctnow (1 .2) ''6oche" k'6gee'ndk (p. 1 85).
Par yet tve (1.2) are " from" our (1.2) dwelling.
Ooch'e— with flat. vow. We^ch'e. (p. 202.)
K^kwan " 6oche" p^egee-skli-t-ttmmffn.
What *' from" art thou sorrowful.
Withow " 6oche" ne pey-it-oot-rfn.
Far off '' from" I hither-come.
K^as '' ooche" net' &wkoos-tn.
Long since " from" / am ill.
Khch-^gdi'-dytvd (part, pass.) menis-ts-d *^ 6oche'' n^epdes-d.
Thetf are hidden the berries ^^ by" the leaves.
Ndmma n* *' ooche" w&ppa-t-en.
/ have not " ever" (never) seen it.
Ow^ena " 6oche" kisk-6the-t-uf?tmti» ? (p. IBS).
Who '♦ from" (is it) that thou knowest it ?
K6kw&n '' 6oche" ge 6o8e-t-itfn ?
What " from," of what, wilt thou make it f
290 A GRAMMAR OF
Tan-itt^ " w^che"-pitch-it(ch)-tA ?
AVhere " from" do thei^ remove (their dwelling) ?
Tkne w^che m6eth-w/ 9
Which from, why, (dost) thou give (it to) him ?
Tkne weche gh ge nuggus-^n ?
Why didst thou leave me ?
Tkne w^che ^gk h^ 6theb6kk-mit ?
Why art thou not prudent.
They are often used without a Noun, or Adverbially ; and
in this way the Prepos. (or Postpos.) oochey from, (or o/y &c.)
is used be/ore the verb, thus,
Ne g' ooche 6ose-t-aii.../ will of (U) make it,
K6kw&n ke 6oche ^kee-k? (p. l63)
What will from (it) happen, be the consequence ?
The Instrumental case of the verb (p, 121) -gk-^dyoo (3d
conjug.) does not admit the Ablat. sign ooche before, or after,
its Noun.
M6okoman ne ga munne-se-gkgcfii...a knife / will cut- with.
Mtintow-6ggin ne gk 6osi-che-g^(fit... cloth /will make- with.
The Preposition sometimes assumes the verbal form (p.
34), as,
Ne g^ skpoo-n-en.../ will put it through.
Ne gk p6et-a-h.e«, -n-en, -sk-en, &c..../ will enter it, put k
in. See pp. 86 et seq. 103.
[^W^k&h ^skootai-Ar... round the fire.]
Ne g& wdska-n-en mistik-ft^a.
/ will round-hand-t7, surround it with, sticks.
Ne gk wkskk'n-fssoon (reflect.) 6skootayoo.
/ will round-hand-myje^ surround fra^^e^with, fire.
W^k^-tay-^oAr, unnem^ mdskootayoo.
Round-go-^.fi^, let us go round, that plain.
THE CREK LANGUAGE. 291
Ne yi^\i^'^i^oyf\stak'rvuk .„they stand round (/o) iwe.*
Ke '7iik^9!ti'gk^OYf\'St6tV'd.n6rv-uk,..'we stand rovrnd them.
W4skah-dppt-^/d-g^^-n;MAr (indef.)...M<^ sit round (indef.
obj.)
Ne w^skah-sk-^^-fPt<^ (p. 87- sk special )...^Aey walk round
me.
* See p. 122, Intransitive &c. and pp. 129. 130.
[Ooch^'e espimik. from above.]
Ooch'6oo...Ae proceeds from.
Ooch'echegun ..produce^ fruit.
Oos'e-h-oyoo (anim.)...^e from-eth, produces, makes^ htm.
Oos'e-t'Ofv (inan.)...Ac produces^ makes, it.
Ooa6-che-gun...a thing produced, made.
Ooch'-^k...the producing-being ; a name of the Deity.
Ooch'e-h-^^oo...^e from-eth, prevents, him.
Oot6-n-ttm...Ae from-hands-i^, takes it. (See p. 87 et seq.)
Tdn't^ w^ch-^tV ? (flat vow.)... whence is he, proceeds he?
Tan'tfe w^ch^-magd^ ?... Whence is it ?
Sect. IV.
INTERJECTIONS.
Interjections connected with a verb generally require the
latter to be in the Subjunctive Mood, as,
Pittane ! w&ppa- t-^mman... would that ! / saw it.
Wd! m^sk6w'>M«-f7 (anim.)...how strong-w-Ae .'
W4 ! TQi&skoW'dk (inan.)...how hard it is I
Wi! p4p-i/...how he laughs !
Wd ! k^tim-iV...how lazy he is!
Wk\ ke it-dpitch-^l/n.^..how (long) thou hast (been) absent!
The Interjection is commonly expressed absolutely, or
without a regimea.
v2
292 A GRAMMAR OF
Chap. III.
Sect. L
OF COMPOUND WORDS, (p. 177 et seq.)
As respects the relative force or value of the Simple and
Compound forms^ we may observe, generally, that the Simple
form has a specific — ^the Compound, a general or indefinite
signification, as.
Net* &wkoo-6-tn ne sit-ik (defin.).../ am sore my foot-tn, in
my foot.
Net' 4wkoo-8it-(fn (indef.),,, I am 8ore-foot(ed).
Ne w&ppisk-iss-tn »' istikwin-tA: (defin.).../ am white in
(or, at, &c.) my head, my head is white (accid.).
JVf wdpp-istikwan-i» (indef.).../ am white-headed (natur-
ally, &€.).
So with the Transitive, as,
Nippe€^-eMfl nat-um... water he fetches (it): for a specifl
purpose.
Nkt-ipp-<fyoo...Atf fetch -water-e/A (indef.) ; Angl. is water-
fetching.
Att'ik-fv^ noch'e-h-ayoo...Ae hunts, is hunting, a deer (def.)
Not-attfk-w-^^oo...Af hunt-deer-eth, is deer-hunting Gn-
def.).i"
iM ziii. 10. K^zeb^ge-n-i^^. . oo zid-un (defin.;. . that he wash his feet,
xiii. 5. 12. Kemldijee-k^zeb^-z^-a-n^ (indef.). . Aebegan-wash-
fooUthem.
ziii. 5. Ke kHhse-z^d-a-w-e^. . (and) he wipe-footed-^Aem.
zii. 3. Oo ge n6ome-z^d-a-n-ofi. . she anoint-footed-Atm.
xiii. 14. K^shpin. . . . ke k^eb^ge-zed-a-n-^ttaA^ooy,
If have wash-foot-I-yott,
kcHahwah, ke tah k^eb^e-zed-a-n-^m. (Recipr.)
ye, ye should wash-foot-one-ano^Aer.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 293
Natural appearances or events^ common operations, &c.
are generally expressed in Compound forms — one component
Root always, in some way, qtutltfying the other, indefinitely,
as,
I'sp-kmuttin-c^n^-high-hiU-tV-ftf.
Thisk-ipp-ayoo...rise-water-e/A-t^, the water rises.
PtSost-dskesin-oy (imperat ) . . .put-on-shoe-^Aotf ; put on thy
shoe^ or shoes.
K^t!iskesin-4y...take-off-shoe-Motf; take off thy shoe, or
shoes.
Note, — It must be remarked that the Simple elements (Roots), for the
sake of Euphony, or to express a slight difference in the meaning, &c.
are often modified, by elision or otherwise (p. 17), in the Compound.
When the Attributives are co-ordinate, or equally attributive
to their subject, they will not coalesce or combine together.
Your sister is a handsome (and) young woman, (turn),
Ke mis ktittawis-iss-fi, 6osken^g-eskw&y-f9oo m6gga.
Thy (elder) sister {she) is handsome, young-woman-w-^Af
also.
The verb Oos'e-h-ayoo (anim.), Oos'e-t-ou? (inan.), in its
ordinary acceptation, he makes -Aim, or-i/, — is rendered, in its
Indefinite sense, by the Formative -K-ayoOy annexed to the
Noun, &c. (See p. 19.)
M6ewut (inan.) ne g' 6ose-t-aft...a (or the) bag / will make
(it) (defin.)
M^ewdt ne g' 6ose-t^um-0Q/-(^«;...a bag / will make (it) for
him. (p. 232.)
Ne g& m6ewut-e-K-rf».../ will bag-make (indef.)
Ne gk m^wdt-e-K-ow-(^i»(dat.).../will bag-make-for-Af'm.
Kiitche m6ewtSt-e-K-6w-ii^ (subj.)...that bag-make-for-/-
him.
The verb It-6the-m-ayoo (Chip. Oo(P en-dne-m-on) anim.;
It-6the-t-tii7» (Chip. Ood^ en-Ain-d-on) inan., he thinks-Aim,
or,-i/ ; is frequently found in Compounds.
M^toon-^he-t-tfm...A6comp]ete-thinks, considers, if.
Wiin-^th^-t-f/wi...Ae lose-ihinks, is at a loss. &c.
294 A GRAMMAR OF
Sect. II,
OF SENTENCES.
The Cree and other Algonquin dialects resolve themselves,
in like manner with European languages, into different kinds
of sentences, as Simple, Compound, &c., and these may
be expressed Positively, Negatively, Interrogatively, &c.
(Vide supra.)
SIMPLE SENTENCES.
T^k'issoo (accid. pass.) k60n&> 6oche p^sim ,,,he U melted,
the snow, by the sun.
Unt6 we- wftppa-m-d/dil ke gkiiwee-now . . . go^see-lei-vs ( 1 .2)
our (1.2) mother.
P^this wftpptLke, ne g& p^y-h-annait ..till to-morrow, we (1.3)
will wait (for) him. &c.
COMPOUND SENTENCES.
M^tho-pem&tisstt " isp^se" gk !t-lip-itch-CT<fi.
He well-behaved " whilst" thou wast absent
Ootl-n-aA k^kwan wi dote-n-UtnTnun, " picko" net' ustis-tfit.
Take thou any thing (that) thou wantest (to) take, "except"
my mittens.
Ne g& p^m-oot-an " ^thewaik" h^ mtitche-k^esik-^iit.
/ will walk " although'' it ugly-day-i*.
K^kwan gi n6che-t-tfm '^speese" it-4pitch-e(fn (subj.pres.*).
What (is it) that thou workedst at " whilst" / was absent
Ne k6 \t'ik'6n>in (indef. inv.), h^ 4wkoos-^n (^ubj. pres.).
They (Pr. on) have said (to) me, that thou art sick.
Ath'em-tin (indie.) kdtt& iXrooUdnemik (subj. indef.) h^
timme-koon-^tit (impers. subj.)
It is difficult that one ( Angl. to) go there, as deep*snow-t/-tj'.'
• The Present, and the Ck>mpound of the Present, are often used
for the Preterite tense.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 295
Ne ^ in6ech-ow (indie.) wdppa-m-t{Ar-« (subj. fut).
/ will give (it to) him when see-J-Atm,
W6yt-tt« (indie.) kdtt& t6oehe-gd/-(feA; (purt pass, subj.)
It is easy that it (Angl. to) be done.
Ntimma w§th& methow&ss-m (indie.) ktitt&piakoo-^uii. (subj.)
// ii not good that thou be one> (i.e) alone.
Nthnma w^tha ke g^ ra^eth-t^^en (indie.), ^gk tippa-hum-
dweun (subj.)
/ will not give (to) thee, if thou do not pay me for {it).
M^thow&ss-tn (indie.) ehe? 6oma, gk "we" m^eth-^n (subj.)
/* it good ? this, whieh thou art " going to" give me,
Ndmma ne kisk^the-t-eit, tdn't^ w& it-ootdy-w(£^-w^ (dub.)
/ do not know, where they want (to) go.
Unt6we-wdppa-t-aA (imperat.), matee kdtt& ^iesichegd.taik"
w^ (part. pass. inan. dub.)
QrO'see-thoU'it, whether it be fim^ed (or not).
The Subordinate may precede the Principal verb or sen-
tence (p. 253).
The Relative clause may follow, precede, or be inserted in,
the, Antecedent sentence, as,
^e ke nat-^n(indie.)p&skesiggun (inan.),gk we kputehe-t-iun(subj.)
/ have fetched (jt) the gun, whieh thou wantest (to) use (t7).
or,
Gk we kputehe-t-tun, p4skesiggun, ne ke na-/-^.
Whieh thou wantest (to) use it, the gun, I have fetched it.
or,
Pdskesiggun, gk we kputehe-t-iun, ne ke na-t-^n.
The gun, which thou wantest (to) use (f^), / have fetched it.
We have also in these dialects the idiomatic phraseology fre-
quently found in the Scriptures at the beginning and the end of
sentences, such as " Thus saith the Lord, &c." and '* — saith the
Lord." as.
296 A GRAMMAR OF
Oom' iite itw-i^oo ktsh^-ethXn'u.
This wise, thus, saith (-Af) the old-man.
— -, ttw-(fyao, or, ^cco-se itw-dyoo,
— , he saith, or, just so he saith.
— , it-6the^t-tim, or, Ec^co-se it-6the-t-i/m.
"^, he thinks, or. Just so he thinks
So
He says that he saw him. (turn)
Ne ke w4ppa-m-oiP, itw-oyoo.
/ have seen Aim, he says.
They (people) say that he is arrived (turn),
Tdckoos-tit, itw 'dnewoo (p. 98) ...he is arrived, they my.
He is said to be arrived, (turn)
Ttickoos-tn, \t'6v) []Indet. In v. Indic. p. 305]... Ac is arrived,
he is 9tdd (of).
I do not like him to be called niggardly, (turn)
Ndmma ne m6tho-^the-t-en — sa-skk-iss-ti, kiitche it-^/. (id.
id. SuBJ.)
/ do not well-think, like, (it) — he is niggardly, that he be
said (of).
Sect. III.
OF THE ELLIPSIS.
The language of this people is purely oral — ^and their collo-
quial intercourse^ as is the case with Europeans^ is in a high
degree Elliptical. In Cree^ &c. as in English, the parts of a
sentence are relative-HSo e.g. a dependent part, expressed
with its relative words and forms, supplies the ideas, &c« of
the antecedent— omitted clause of the same sentence, as
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 297
M4n& ke ^ wappa-m-t//tit (indie.) che ? Again shall /see tkee f
Ans. Ah ! Fernktiss-^n-h (subj.) Qm6n& ke g& wdppa-m-m. un-
derstood^. Yes ! if / live [[again ihou wilt see me. under-
stood]-
K^koo uppw6oy (anira.) gk p^yshoo-w-vf (subj. anim.)
What paddle (is it) which ihou bringest i-kim).
Ans. Ga methd'Siss-U (subj. anim.) .... (that) which is good.
Angl. the good one.
K6koo chicka-h-eggun (inan.), ga p^y-t-iwn (subj. inan.)
What hatchet (is it), which tkou bringe^^
Ans. Gk methow-^J-iA; (subj. inan.) ... (that) which is good.
Angl. the good one.
Ke ke too-t-en, che } (p. 279) •••Hast ^^ou done it ?
Ans. Shkshl... Already (I have done it understood).
Otherwise the verb is repeated (as in French), as,
Ans. Ah ! Ne ke too-t-^n... Yes ! / have done it. Angl. Yes, I
have.
Sect, IV.
OF ACCENT, &c.
The Cree language is expressed, generally, by an agreeable
alternation of Vowels and Consonants, composing long and
short syllables.
Note. — ^We must, however, observe that, in some Dialects, the Cree s
is changed into sh, which, when joined to another consonant, gives
sometimes, to the eye at least, an unpleasant effect, e.g. sk becomes shk,
and in the German orthog. schk. Of the h, see p. 124. Note.
Every word of more than one syllable has one of its sylla-
bles accented, as,
Ottim...a dog. N^p-tn...t/ ii summer. Tibbisk-otc;...!/ w night
Sometimes \n a long word we find two or more of its sylla-
bles accented. (Vide passim.)
298 A GRAMMAR OF
As respects the Simple verb and its adjuncts, the Principal
accent or stress may be variously placed — on the Root, the
FormatiYe; the Person (subj. or obj.), or the Auxiliary,^ thus^
Ne s&ke-h-on;.../ love him — with Emphasis on the root,
becomes
iVif 8A"ke-h-oit^...I Lov'^E (not^ e.g. hate) him.
Ne sA"ke-t-a«.../ love (id.) it. On the Formative, it be-
comes
Ne a6ike'H"^onf ../do love him.
Ne s4ke-T''-flw.../ do love it.
• See also p. 201. The Cree Preterite &c.
When the Principul stress is on a personal element (nomin. or
accus.). it is generally expressed by the added pers. pron. used ab-
solutely, as,
Ne sdke-h-ofp, ne'th& (nomin.)... (Fr.^'e Z'aime^Moi.) I see
him, /.
Ne'tha, ne 8&ke-h-ow...(Fr. uoi,je Taime) I, / love him.
So on the Object,
Ne s4ke-h-on7, we'tha (accus.)... (Fr. Je faime, lui) / love
him, HIM.
We'tha, ne 84ke-h-oto...(Fr. Luij^eTaime) him, /love him.
So also in the Subjunctive, where the subjective and objective
pronouns are combined, -uk, I-him ; -ut, thou-him. Sic. as,
Kutche sfike-h-uA', ne'Vha. (nomin.)... (Fr. que je faime,
Moi.) that love-/- Aim, /.
Kutche s4ke-h-tt^, we'^'tha (accus.)... (Fr. que ^c Taime,
LDi) Angl. that / love- him.
Kt&tche s4ke-h-t/, wb"th& (nomin. )...(Fr. qu't/ m'aime, lui)
that he love me, he.
Ktitche s&ke-t-t<fn (inan.) NE"THA....(Fr. que^'e Taime,
Moi.) that / love it, I. &c.
Note. — See Note 154. x. 15. — xv. 9. — ^xx. 21.
THE CREB LANGUAGE. 299
Again,
N6tha, w6tha...(Lat. ego ipse) (it is) I, myself.
W6tha^ w6tha...(Lat. ille ipse) (it is) he, himself.
Sometimes the Emphasis is on the auxiliary particles ke, gd, we,
g^ (g hard), &c. as on their English equivalents, have, will^ wish,
can, &c. as,
Wk" k^edn-^, ne o*" dp-en... when I wish (to) sit, I will sit.
Note, — ^The learner will not fail to notice the accentuation of the 1st
and 2d. pers. sing. (Subj. Intran.) -e-rfii, ^-mii, &c.
A stress is sometimes laid on Demons. Pronouns^ Ad-
verbs, &c. as opposed to their Correlatives — on Connective
words also, as, the Pron. Relat. get — Conjunctions, &c. as,
Eth"ewaik, nevertheless, &c.
Note. — See also. Of Negation, pp. 278. 279.
Emphasis affects also, sometimes, the arrangement of their
Words : thus the objective noun commonly precedes and the
subjective follows the verb, unless where Emphasis changes
the order. Inversion is not here a cause of ambiguity, as the
forms of the words sufficiently indicate the Relations which
connect them with each other.
300 A GRAMMAR OF
PART IV.
ADDENDA.
Chap. I.
INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
Indicative Future.
Ne ff ap'-tii.../ skM or will sit. Ne g' apMn-itait...fpe (1.3) shall
or will sit.
Keg' a:p'An,,Jkou shall or will Ke g' ap'-in-anofP...i9e (1.2) id.
sit
*Gd-id ap'-ii...Ae shall or wiU sit. Ke g' ap''-in-on7^7r...ye id.
♦ GMd k^'e'Wiik.,Jhey id.
♦ Pronounce, Ktitt&.
Compound of the Present.
Ne k6 ap'-i».../ have sat. We k6 apMn-itaft...ZDe (l.S) have
sat.
Ke kk ap' 'in,,. thou hast sat. Ke k€ a,p''in'dnow...we (1.2) id.
K^ &p''U...he has sat. Ke k6 SLp'-in-owdw.. ye have sat.
Ke ap'-e-fvt2A;.../Aey have sat.
The auxiliary Particles^ as regards both their meaning and their
grammatical position^ are exactly analogous to the English
Auxiliaries; but unlike the latter^ they are indeclinable, the per-
sonal inflection belonging to the verb (see p. 199)*
They are prefixed, in the same manner, to the Subjunct, &c.
Ke dp-(?(fn-e...when / shall have sat.
We 4p-e<f«-e...when / want or am about to sit.
&c.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 301
SuBJuircTivB — Preterite. (Posit)
I-i-^{Kin If, &c. / was being, &c.
I-i-dp»it thou wast
l-aAr-epun he was.
I-i-d^-epun we (IS) were.
I-i-a^-oopun we (1.2) were.
l-i-£ft^-oopun ye were.
I'dik'tvd'^xm they were.
Imperative Mood. (See pp. 192. 204.)
Present (or Definite) Tense.
Sing. Plur,
Ap'-f...8it thou. Ap'e-/^^...let us (1.2) sit.
Ap'-t^...sitye.
Indefinite Tense.
Ai^^'4kun...%\t thou. Ap'-e-kd^...let us sit
Ap'-e-k{£i^, . . sit ye.
Accessory Case.
Indicative — Present (See p. 209.)
Net* A^^C'fV'dn,,.! sit, in relat Net* apVw-an-non...ft'e (l.S) sit,
to him or them. &c.
Kei* Ap'e- W-4/I . ..thou, &c. Ket* apV w-^-(i>iow ...we {1.9) sit-
&c. &c.
Subjunctive — Present (See p. 210.)
Ap'e-w-i^...(If) / sit, in relat Ap'e-w-wA;-^e/...(If; we (1.8) sit,
&c. in relat &c,
TRANSITIVE VERBS.
Subjunctive — Preterite. (Posit.)
SUie-h-ti^-^pun If, &c. / loved him.
-h-ti^-^pun thou lovedst him.
-h-dit-6pun he loved him, or, M«m.
'h-ukdet'i'^nvi we (1.3) loved Atnt.
-h-^^-6opun we (1.2) loved Atm^
-h-^tg-oopun ye loved At»i.
-h-^^-n;(^-pun they loved Atwi, or, <Aem.
302 A GRAMMAR OP
Subjunctive Future. (See p. 203.)
S4ke-h-t^-^...ipAen I thall love him,
S4ke-h-tf/(cA)-^...ft;Aen thou shall love him.
Q6ke'h'dt{chyi..,nfhen he shall love him, or^ them.
Sike'h'uk-M{ch)'^,,.fvhen tve (1.3) shall love him,
S6ke'h'ak'00.,,fvhen we (1.2) shall love him.
Skke'h'dig'00,..fvhen ye shall love him,
Sike'\i'2X'fv6rv^^,,,mhen they shall love him, ox, them,
SupposiTivE — Indicative.
Ne 8ake-h-li-took-^ (plur.-niX:) / love him, (plur. -them) I suppose.
Ke &c. thou &c.
Doubtful — Subjunctive.
Present Tense.
S&ke-hd-w-ttA;-^ (plur. -ittilf) If / love him (plur. "them)
'Vf'Ut'^ (id.) /Aow love him (id.).
->t-w^ Ae love him, or, /A^in.
'if'Hckeet'h (plur.-ntA) tve (1.3) love Atm (id.).
-w-^A-w^ (id.) we (1.2) love him (id.)
-w-atg^-wd (id.) ^c love him (id.).
-w-(iA-w^ *** they love Atw, or /Aem.
>^ i. 33. W4gw4in-^doog ka w4hbahm&b«w-aA<f(tM^-4in. . whom-soever
<Ao« shah Bee {him),
iiL 15. 16. Wdgw^n (nomin.) ka tapway-4ine*in-aA^(ikib)-w4in. .
Whosoever shall believe in him.
ziii. 22. Wdgwldn-^m (accu8.)kah en-aA^(dib)-wdin..whom (\% it) that
^ says t^to (of).
zv. 16. W^6o-doog-wain ka und6odah-mahwih-to-iit^-w&in. . what-
soever ye shall ask/rom km.
XX. 23. Wl^jTw^n dkoo-n-aAfii<fA-u;-a»^-w&in . . whomsoever ye with-
draw them from (-Aim).
W^igw4in ma»DJ^me-n-aAmifA-io-(%r-w^ . . whomsoever ye
hold ^A«m to {-him).
:fhe crbe language. 303
Preterite Tense.
S4ke-hd-w-uA*-^pun-^ (plur. -nik) If / loved him,
-w-w<-6pun-^ (id.) thou lovedst hirtL
'k'OapvLTi'h he loved him, or them.
'W'Uckeei^6pun'^ (plur. -nik) we (l-S) love him (id.),
-w-o^-oopun-^ (id.). we (1.2) loved Aiwi.
-w-^ig-oopun-^ (id.) ye loved Atiif. '
-W'dk'Oo^un-h Ihey loved Aim, or them.
Compound of the Preterite.
Ke sdke-hd-w-M^-^pun-^ (plur. -nik).
If / HAD loved him (plur. -them). &c.
SupposiTivE — Inanimate.
Indicative. (See p. 205.)
Ne 8^ke-t-an-&took^.../ love it-I suppose.
Ke sdke-t-an-4took^.../Aou lovest tV-I suppose.
S&ke-t-d-took^ ...he loves t^-I suppose. &c.
Preterite.
Ne sdke-t-an-dkoopun.../ loved itA suppose.
Ke 8dke-t-an-4koopun...^Ao2i lovest it-I suppose.
S&ke-t-(fit-oopun...Ae loved it-I suppose. &c.
Doubtful. — Subjunctive.
Present. (See p. 206.)
Sdke-tk-w-^n-^ If, &c. / love it.
S&ke-tk-w-tin-^ thou love it.
S4ke-tk-^-w^ he love it. &c.
INVERSE.
ix. 21. W6gw&n-U9i (ablat.) kah wdhbe-H-iJ^-oogwdin-tm (caus. dub)
. . by whom he batb been caused to see.
X. 6. W4g6o-doog-wain kah ^-oow&bg-w4in. . (tbey knew not) what-
soever they were said to h/ {him).
xii. 46. Wdgwdin ka tdpway-^ne-m-»Ar-wdin. . whosoever shall believe
on me.
xiii. 29. O'owh oocT en-^l^-doog^n-un . . this he said to him 1 sup-
pose (relat. to them, his disciples).
304
A GRAMMAR OF
Preterite.
S4ke.tk-w-&p-(^^ If, &c J loved it.
S&ke-tk-w-Ap-tin-^ thou lovedst it,
S&ke-t&-A;-oopun-^ he loved it.
Compound of the Preterite.
Ke 84ke-ta-A:-oopun-%...if Ae had loved it.
&c.
Itwayoo.
Itw-(fyoo (Conjug. 3),.. he says.
ItW'dnefvoo (Fr. on dit) they (indef.) say.
Transitive.
Indicative Mood — Present.
CRBB.
CHIPPBWAY.
NefiUdwiplvL,^)
Niud' en-M (plu. dg)
I say (to, or of) kim
(plu. them).
Kef it^^
Ked* eu'dh
thou sayest to him.
lUdyoo
Ood' en-dn
he says to him.
Net* It-in-nan
Nind en-^-fum
we (1.3) say to him.
Kef lUka-hnow
Ked* en-^-fum
we (1.2) say to ^tm.
Kef It-^w^ow
Ked' en-dh-woA
ye say to him.
li-&y^wuk
Ood" en-ah-irof|i«7
they say to him
Subjunctive Mood — Present
H^ it^Or (plu. ^wd)
en-if^ (plu. wah)
as / say (to, &c.) kim
(p]u. them).
itH^
en.t»
thou sayest him.
\Ut
en-dd
he says him.
it^-^t
enrung^d
we (i.3) say him.
it^
en-^ng
we (1.2) say Aim.
it-oi^
en-£%
ye say Wfii,
en-ah-w<Wiw
<^ say him.
INDICATIVE.
1^7 i. 38. Oowb (dush) oo ge en-dn . . (and) this he said unto him (or
fJkaii).
X. 36. Ked eU'dhwdh, nah ?. . . . say ye of Aim . . ?
V. 10. Oowh 00 ge en-ah'wdn . . this they said unto him.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
>w iii. 3. V. 19. Oowh ke en-dd. . this he said (to) him^
xviii. 21. Ewh kdh en-ahg-wdh. . that which / said (unto) them.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 305
Inverse — Indicative.
N'it-a
Mnrfig
he says (to &c.') me.
icit-a
Ked' ig
he says thee.
IWA:(pas8.)
Ood* ig'Oon (pass.)
he is said to by him, &c.
N* it-ik-oa»an
Nind* ig'OonSn
he says us (1.3\
IC iUk-ooTKhv
Ked* ig'Oondn
^ says us (1.2).
iP it-ik-oowdw
Ked* ig'0(yu}dh
he says yo«.
It'ik-tvuk (pass.) i59
Ood* ig-oow6n (pa^s.) they were said (to, &c.)
&y him or #Aem.
Subjunctive.
H^ hM
kzh-{d
as Ac says (to, &c.) me.
iUsk
hUk
he says thee.
it'ikoot (pass.)
ik-oof (pass.)
he is said to hy him,Scc.
is-eam^et
6zh-eam{nd
Ac says M5 (1.3).
iut-ay
^n-ewdng
fAow sayest iw (1.2).
viii. 54. ix. 19. A'n-dig (flat vow.). . as ye say (of) him.
iii. 26. viii. 39. ix. 19. Oowb (dush) ke en-ah-wdd, . (and) this they
. said to him.
SupposiTivE (Indie),
xiii. 29. Oowh ood* en^dh-doogiin-un. . this he (Jesus) said to him, I
suppose.
Doubtful.
xiii. 22. Wdgwan-«n kah en-efA^-wdin . . whom (is it) that he says
to, means,
xiii. 24. Wdgwain kah en-dhg-wkin-un (Relat.) . . whom (is it) that
he says of, means.
X. 6. Wdg6odoogwdin kah ^goo-u^aA^-wdin . . what (it was) that they
were said (to) by (him).
ii. 5. Ndhmimj ka en-^o-w-flt^r-wain. . whatsoever he may say to
you.
INVBRSB.
1^9 ix. 11. Oowh (dush) nin ge ig (and). . this he said to me.
u. 3. iv. 9. Jesus (dush), oo g^en oowh oo ge eg^don. . (and) Jesus,
his mother this he was said (to) by.
W
306 A GRAMMAR OF
H^ it-it'dig hn-endig he says you (plur.).
it-ikoot-trdw ik-oo-tood i^ they are said (to, &c.)
by him.
Indicative — Direct (1st and 2d pers.)
Kef is'^n Ked ezh-ifi thou sayest (to, or, of,)
me.
Ket* is-in-nrfn Ked ^zh-in-n<^ thou sayest ..us {l .3)
Kef iB'sin-owdw Ked Szh-im ye say . . me.
Inverse.
Kef itt-Zn Ked en-ifi I say (to, or, of) thee.
Kef itt-in-ow<^ Ked en-^»m »<^i I say . . you (plur.)
Subjunctive Direct, (id.)
He iss-^n ..as tkou sayest (to, &c) me.
H^ i8S-ed^...as thou sayest t/f (1-3).
H^ i8S-eaig^...as^^ say me.
Inverse.
He it-2//^n...as / say (to, &c.) thee.
Hh it'tiikdok >««... as / say...^oii.
Subjunctive.
^^ w. 11. xii. 50. Kah ezh-id. . who (he) said to me.
V. 12. Kah en*0;. . who (he) said to thee.
iv. 10. An-Oc (flat vow.) . . as (he) says to thee.
iv. 50. Kah eg-dod . . Jesus which he was said (to) 6y Jesus.
xvi. 17. Wdgoonain oowh kti-en-Ang?. . what (is) this (which) he says
{%0)U8f (1.2)
vii. 45. O'owh (dush) k^ tgoo-wdd (and) this they were said to by
(them).
Impbrativb.
XX. 17. Oowh (dash) 4zh'ek. . and this say thou unto (him, or) /A«m.
Indicative (1st and 2d Persons).
1^1 iii. 3. xxi. 18. Kef en-/n. . I say unta /i^.
i. 51. iv. 35. V. 19. Kef en-Mm. . I Bay \mto you.
Subjunctive.
183 1. 50. Ke en-eiM^ . . (because) I said unto thee.
xvi. 6. Ke en-enahgdog. , as I have sud unto you.
vi. 63. X. 26. Kah en-^nahgdog . . which I say unto yoit.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 307
Inanimate.
Indicative — Present.
Net* It-t^.../ speak of, mean, it,
KeV lt't^n,,,thou speak of, mean, it,
lt''tum.,.ke speaks of, means, it.
&c.
Subjunctive — Present.
H^ it-t«f»m(fn...as / speak of, mean, it,
Hh it-tummun ...as thou speakest of, meanest, it.
Hh it-tctk ^^^.,,a3 he speaks of, means, it,
&c.
Exam. O'oma, gk it-tummdn (it is) this, which / speak of, mean.
Un'^nema, gk it-tak (it is) that, which he speaks of, means.
Inverse — Indicative, (p. 226).
N' it'ik-dwin
Nind ik'do (Fr. me
dit-on)
they (indet.) say (to) me.
K' lt-ik-dW»
Ked^ ik'do
they id. thee.
It-dw (pass.)
In-dh (pass.)
he is said (to by some-
body).
N' it-ik 6u>inr-nan
Nind* ik-do-min
M63^(id.)8ay(to)tts(1.3)
K' it-ik'tkvin-itnow
Ked* ig-do-min
us {1,2)
K* \i'\k-6w%n'Ow6w
Ked? ig^om
you.
It-6w-MA; (pass.)
In-Qi-wug (pass.)
Subjunctive (Present),
they are said (to by,
(somebody).
lVJiiL'6vO'edn
Ig'do-ydn (as, &c.) they (indet.) say (to) me.
-eun
-yun
thee.
lUet
lu'dend, or, In-iki
he is said (to) by, &c.
It-ik-dwe-ait
Ig-6o-y%
they (indet.) say to us
(1.3).
^ak
-yung
us (1.2).
'dig
-ydig
you.
Inanimate (Subj.).
i«3 ii. 21. xi. 13. Kah ed-i^^r (pres.) . . which he "spoke"' of, meant, {it),
xvi. 18. Wdgoonain ewh dd-t^^ (flat vow.). . what (is) that (which)
he says of, means.
w2
308 A GRAMMAR OF
It'^et'WOW (def. time) la-ind^dh (def.) they are said (to) by,
(somebody) .
^{ch)ik (indef. id.) -jig (indef.) 16* Id. &c.
Indeterminate.
ltt'kgg'anewoo.,,tkei/ (Fr. on) say, call, name, him or it.
T^' itt-^lgg-anew-tAr (8ubj.)...what do /^ey (indct.) call, or
name, it ? Angl. what is ii called ?
Passive. (Absolute, p. 213.)
It-ik-oo-*tt (1st Conjug. p. 192) he is said (to, or, of).
NUMERALS.
Piak or P6yak
One.
N6esh-oo
Two.
Nist-oo
Three.
Ndyw-oo
Four.
N^annan
Five.
Nickoot-wass'ik
Six.
N6esh-wassik, or T^ypuckoop
Seven.
Swdss'ik, or I-enknaywoo
Eight.
K^at metktat, almost ten, i.e.
Nine.
M^Mat
Ten.
M6tlttat-p6y-ak-oo-skup
Eleven.
M^tlLtat-n^shoo-sk-up
Twelve.
&c.
&C.
Nickoot-w^s'ik-tkto-sk-up
Sixteen.
&c.
&c.
Indeterminate (Subj.).
'<^ xviii. 34. Ewh dg'Ooyih, (flat vow.). . which they (Fr. on) say of me.
XX. 24. xxi. 2. Didymus dn-M (flat vow.) . . Didymus as he is said,
called.
Reciprocal (Indie.)
xix. 24. vii. 35. Oowh (dush) ke et^umg . . (and) this they said one
to (mother.
Subjunctive,
iv. 33. Ewh kah oonje AHY-ed^oJ (iterat. p. 71; • . therefore tJiey
said one to another.
THE CREE LANGUAGE.
309
K^gat Nissetdnnoo, almost twenty, i.e.
Nisse-tiinnoo
N 'isse-tdnnoo-piakoo-skiip
&c.
Nistoo-metunnoo
Naywoo-metdnnoo
&c.
M^tat^to-metunnoo
K^eche-metatato-metunnoo
Nineteen.
Twenty.
Twenty-one
&c.
Thirty.
Forty.
&c.
A hundred.
A great hundred, i.e. a
thousand.
Peyak-wow
N6esh-w6w
Nist-wow
M6ch6t-wow
Tkn t^to
Tkn tat- wow
Once.
Twice.
Three times.
Many times.
What number, how many.
How many times.
The Numerals, like other (English) Adjectives, are, in these
dialects. Verbs, and are formed through mood, tense, &c. accord-
ingly.
Ne p^yak-oo».../ am one, alone.
Ne i\Ut-endn ,,.we (1.3) are three.
Naywoo-WMA;.../Aey are four (anim.).
Ndywin-fi;a.../Aey are four (inan.).
Oo nkyyve"t'0rv6rv,.Ahey were four (anim. p. 200).
Ndywin-6opun-^.../^ey were four (inan. id.).
&c.
Chapter II.
FURTHER REMARKS.
OF THE NOUN.
Most if not aU Nouns, both Primitive and Derivative, have
their Derivative Verbs also (Intran. and Trans.). AngL e.g.
patron-i^e, person-a^e. - (p. 16 et seq.)
310 A GRAMMAR OF
Adam was the father of all men (turn) ;
Ood* oo-n^jdni8e-m-(^n (possess.) kdhkendh Eninnee-n^tin*
owh Adam (Jones's MS.).
He childrened (Aim or them) all Men (Lat. Homines) Adam.
• Not -vmg, because governed by a verb in the third person. This
example may, perhs^s, solve the Rev. Mr. Daggbtt's difficulty, with
respect to the Choctaws. Mass. Hist, Coll. vol. x. p. 112.
We have seen that a final -k or -g (Chip, 'ing, &a) with its
connecting vowel, has a two-fold signification. First, Appended to
a noun, it is the sign of the Locative Case (p. 184). Secondly^ to
«a verb, it expresses (in the Subj. Mood) the Indeterminate Pronoun
(Fr. on) some one, &c. (See p. 98-)'*' It has this last sense when
added to a verbalized noun also, as.
She is as fond as, or loves like, a mother (turn) ;
Isp6eche oog^'w-ee*, sake-h-ewa^oo (Indet. p. 99)-
As much as when one is mother, she loves.
He is as kind as a father (turn) ;
Isp^eche ootA^Yf-eek, klttemltk-^the-m-ew(fyoo (Indet).
or
Ispeeche ootk'w'eek, kittemy^-^the-ch-eg^^oo (Indef.).
As much as when one is father, he befriends (Trans, p. 99)*
Zeisbbrger classes the following, although they have ver5aZ endings,
as Nouns (Voc. Case).
1, Wo Kit-anittow-WM .'...O God !
2, Wetoche-m-ux-ian !...0 Father !
3, Shawanow-ian !...Thou Shawanese !
4, Wetoche-m-eDan !...0 my father !
5, Wetoche-m-ellenk !...0 our father !
6, Nihillal-ian !...0 my Lord !
7, Nihillal-eyenk !...0 our Lord!
8, Pemauchso-h-alian !...0 my Saviour !
9, Pemauchso-h-aluweyan !...0 Saviour !
10, Weliliss-ian !...0 pious man !
ifi5 i, 41. 42. Alinookahnootahm-iw^r. . when one interprets it; *' being
interpreted," " by interpretation."
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 311
The version here given accords with the English — not the Indian —
idiom. The literal meaning of these examples is, severally, as follows :
1, Great-spirit as thou art ! 2, Father-ed (esteemed Father) as thou art !
3, Shawanese as thou art ! 4, As father- J-^Aec, i.e. consider as father !
5, As ftitlieT-we-tJiee I 6, Who governest-^Aoti-me / 7, Who govemest-
thou'us! 8, Thou who makest me live! 9 Thou who cause^^ to live, savest!
10, Rous as thou art I All the above Examples are in the Subj. or Sub-
ordinate mood, and have (or should have) the "altered vowels*' to express
Indefinite time. (See p. 277.)
They therefore do not require — cannot take — the Possessive Pronoun.
N.B. The same forms he classes as Participles, &c. also.
The Cree (and Chippeway) Adjective is a Verb (p. 24 et
seq.)5 but in Compound words it is stripped of its verbal
adjuncts^ and remains in combination with its subject, in the
pure form of the English Adnoun, with sometimes a connect-
ing vowel. Prefixed in like manner to a verb, it qualifies the
same Adverbially.
The Personal pronoun has neither case nor gender; its
Cases are transferred, as those of the Noun, to the Verb.
The Pronoun is expressed absolutely only when in answer to
a question, or for the sake of Emphasis, p. 298.
The Pronoun Relative {get,) is indeclinable ; but in Con-
struction it is of all cases, genders, numbers, and persons.
It is expressed or understood (as in English) as Emphasis
may direct.
In connection with the Transitive Verb, it will be observed
that the forms which express the Dative Case of the Pronoun,
include also an Accusative of the Object in the third
person, him, or it (see p. 1 17 et seq.) ; but if the Accusative
be of the first or second person, the verb must be accom-
panied by ne yow, my body, my self, i.e. me ; ke yow, thy
body, thy self, i.e. thee, &c. (from weyow, the body) ; thus.
312 A GRAMMAR OF
" They have delivered thee unto me" (turn)
Ne ke pdketin-t/iTt-a/nt^tig (inan. inv.) he y6w.
They have delivered-t^-to-me^ thy body-
" He that delivered me unto thee." (turn)
Ow'enS gk p^etin-wm-(fejAr, ne y6w.
Whoever (he be) that delivered-t^-/o-<Aee, my body.*^
The Cree (and Chippeway) have no Impersonal forms : that
is, they have neither Participle (active or passive), nor, as
ahready observed, Infinitive mood. These are all resolved
into B. personal mood. **7 (See p. 129.)
I see him comtng^ (turn) ;
Ne wdppa-m-oft^ he p^t-^tum-oot-^tV.
/ see him as hither-cometh-Ac.
Dr. Edwards, indeed, says " Thoupfh the Mohegans have no proper
Adjectives," which are verbs, as in Cree, " they have Participles to all
their verbs : as,
Pehtuhquisseet. . the man* who is tall.
Paumseet . . the man who walks.
Waunseet . . the man who is beautiful. &c.
iW xviii. 35. Nw ge ^dhg^in^ahm-dhg-oog ewh ke y6wh.
They have delivered-tV-fo-mc, thy body,
zix. 11. Owh . . kah bdhged^n-oAm-dbib ne yowh.
He who delivered-i^-fo-^^ce, my body.
J^7 xi. 38. Ke mahmahpen-(^ (indie.) ke tdhgweshin-^r (subj.).
" Groaned"-Ac as arrived-Ac ; " groaning cometh to."
i. 36. Kdhnahwahbah-m-oc? (dush) Jesus.
(And) as looked-at-A€-Atm. . . . Jesus j " looking upon."
i. 31. Pah-6onj'-ezhah-y6n zegahtindahgd-y6n.
Therefore come-f baptize- J; *' therefore am I come bap-
tizin^r."
XX. 14. Ke wahbah-m-oc? (dush). . Jesus, n^dhw-eittc? (subj. access.)
(And) saw .Ae-Aim . . Jesus, as stood-^ (relat.); "standing .^*
i. 29. John oo ge wahbah-m-on . . Jesus, b^-nahnzek-^coot.
John he sRW-him. . Jesus, as come-to-Ae-^ him ; " comtw<;
to him." (Inver. p. 264.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 313
So in the plural.
Pehtuhquisseecheek . . the tall men." f
and he goes on tor say that " it is observable of the Participles of this
language, that they are declined through the persons and numbers, in
the same manner as verbs : thus, Paumse-uh,t I walking ; Paumse-an,
thou walking ;" &c. Zeisbergkr also has given numerous examples
of the Delaware Participle, in all persons. Sing, and Plur. extending them
even to the Transitive forms. The corresponding Inflections may be
found in the Cree and Chippeway Dialects, also — but we must observe,
that all these and similar forms are not, cannot he. Participles. Firstly,
because those Inflexions are common, as in the examples given above,
to all Intransitive verbs — to the Adjective verb as well as to the Neuter.
Secondly, and conclusively, because " Participles, in their personal
forms,"§ is, obviously, a solecism in Grammar. See p. 276 et seq.
• He who, &c. — Ed. t They who are tall. — Ed.
§ Zeisherger^s Oram. p. 141, Note. t As, or when, I walk; &c. (subj.) — Ed.
With respect to the Infinitive Mood, . Eliot's account of it in
the Massachusetts dialect, is very unsatisfactory. Dr. Edwards observes
that "The Mohegans never use a verb in the Infinitive Mood, or without
a Nominative or Agent." So may it be said that the verb includes, univer-
sally, a Nominative Sign (Dep. or Indep.) in the Cree and Chippeway
Dialects, also. ^^^
Dr. Edwards says, however, on another point, that "they cannot say,
I love; thou givest; &c. but they can say, / love thee; thougivest him; &c."
Here he is manifestly in error. Sake-h-cw^fyoo, &c. (p. 225) he loves, is
certainly of less frequent occurrence in Indian discourse than its defin.
form, 86ke-h-ayoo, Ae loves him or her; and me'g-u, or MB'oB-wtfyoo, he
1^8 i. 33, Kah khnoozh-M? che zegahdndahga-ydn.
(He) that sent-Ae-mc that /baptize " to baptize."
v. 16. Ke dundahw-aindahmoo-ii7(^. . che n€sah-u;(fc?.
They sought that (might) slay-f^-Aim, "/o slay him."
viii. 26. Wah enhi-ahgooTc kiya wah endhkoon^n-aA^ooA:.
(That) wish say-I-(to)-yoM and (that) wish " judge"- J-(of)
ytm ; ** to say ;" " to judge."
i.8. Ke b^6hnoon-<fA atah, che k^kenahw^hje-t-oo«/ ewh Wahsaydh-
zewin. . He has been hither-sent, that he (Angl. "to,") shew
that light.
314 A GRAMMAR OF
gives — the Indet. form of meeth-rfyoo, (Chip, oo mb^n-oji) he gives it to
him, is an Irregular verb— hence, probably, this mistake. See p. 99 et
seq. 1^
OF THE VERB-SUBSTANTIVE, &c.
We come now to a topic which has engaged the attention of
most writers on the American languages. The venerable Eliot
denies the existence of the (abstract) Verb-Substantive in the
Dialect of the Massachusetts — Dr. Edwards, in that of the Mohe-
gans — the Rev. Mr. Dencke, in the Chippeway ; and Mr. Pick-
ering has thence been led to infer that this important Element of
Speech is wanting in all the Algonquin dialects. Strange, however^
as it may appear, they are certainly all in error. That the Chip-
peways have it we have amply shown from the native Missionary
Mr. Jones's translation (see pp. 136, 137, and Note 71). That it
exists in the Moh^an, may be seen, making allowance for the
orthography, by referring to Dr. Edwards's own (?) Translation of
the Lord's Prayer, as,
Sptimmuck oie-dn (subj.) . . on high (" in heaven") thou (who) art.
Hkey die^heek (id.) . . on earth they (who) are.
Sptimmuk 6ie-^?ieek Cid.) . . on high (** in heaven*') they (who) are.
And that it is found, also, in the Massachusett's dialect, Eliot's
own Indian Bible will abundantly testify; a^ a few examples, taken
from the Gospel of St. John, &c. for the purpose of comparison,
may suffice to shew.
Lat. Esse. N.B. These Dialects have no Infinitive Mood.
Eliot. (Mass.)
JoNBS. (Chip.)
John, xi. 30.
A'y-CM (pres.)
Ahydh-hnu (pret.)
Ae was.
xvii. 11.
Ay^u-o^r
Ahy-dh-um^
they are.
xi. 32.
Ay-it (subj.)
Ahy-dd (subj.)
he was.
xii. 1.
Aiy-tV (id.)
Ahy-dd (id.)
Ae was.
Matt.xxiv.l6.
Ayit.c% Old.)
(Ahydd-jig) id.
they were.
John, xvii. 11.
Mattafmf*aiy-«*.*
Nind ahy-aA-se
/ am not.
Jerem. xxxi. 15
. Mktta ay^u-oo-o^ (neg. pres.)
they were not.
>^ xiv. 27. Kdh ween. . dzhe MB'GBWA-i»6rf ked' ezhe MK^NE-sen-don-im
Not . . as GivE-f^, 80 GivB-wof.I-(#o)-ycm.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 315
It should be borne in mind that the Verb-Substantive, in these
Dialects^ is often, idiomatically, suppressed, p. 254.
Lat Stare, (p. 148, et seq.)
Cree, Ap'-w (anim.) B&t-dyoo (inan,).
Chip. A'hb-eA (anim.) ; dht-(£ (inan.).
Delaw. Wut' dpp-m (anim.).
Massachusetts, ^^ A'p-cw" (anim.); *'6ht-^au" (inan.).
Animate. (Eliot.) Animate. (Cree.)
John, iv. 6. A'pp-ctt (indie.) A^p-w.
/*cis (p. 148)
V.6. vi.9. Wut' dp.t« Cid.pret.) Oof dp-t
Ac was.
i. 48. Ap-^a» (subj.) Ap^ww
as thou art.
i. 18. ii. 3. A'p-tV Cid.) A'p-«Y
as A^is.
V. 28. A^p-it.c% (id.) A'p-it-cA«it
as they are.
Inanimats.
John, iv. 6. Oht-^aw flndic. sing.) A^st-liyoo
tH8(id.).
Judges, xiv. 8. Ohtd-o** (id. plur.) ABtky-voah
^Aey are.
Job, xi. 6. Oht-rf^ (subj. sing.) A'st-dik
as it is.
1 Corinth, i. 28. Ohtdg-wA (id. plur.) Ast-4ik-cc
as they are.
The (Indian) Esse and Stare are often used indiscriminately, e.g
Eliot. Jones.
John, iv. 40. Wut' dpp-tn (indie.) Ke ahy^dk
i. 48. Ap^-on (subj.) Ahydh-yim
ii. 23. A'p-»* Cid.) Ahy-dd
iii. 13. A'p-t^ (id.) Ay-6rf (flat vow.)
i. 18. A'p^^ (id.) Ay-dh-ntci (id. aceess.)
vi. 62. Ap^-up (id.) Ahy-(fA-bun (indic.>.
viii. 68. Negonne Abrahamii^t, nuf 4p-ip (indie, pret.)
Before he was Abraham, I was, " I am."
We may pursue the analogies between the Elementary verbs still
farther, if we allow for the diflference of Dialect and Orthography, as,
Cree Net* E't-in (or Net It^-in) . . I so-^m, or so>do. 4)p. 132, 133,
Chip. Nind' In't . . Id. (p. 160) [160, 288)
Delaw. Nd* iHa-in . . Id. (Zeisb. p. 117.)
Mass. N'd^ inni-tfi . . Id. •
* (Eliot) John iii. 8. Wuf inni-m . . he so-is, " every one."
V. 6. Un* inne-on (pret.). . he so-was (" in that case").
316 A GRAMMAR OF
Inanimate. Ek-tw. (p. 163.)
John XV. 25. N-n-/^ (indie, pres). .it is; " cometh to pass."
Gen. i. 7. 9- N-n-/A (id.) . . it " was" so.
Gen. xli. 1. N-n-i'A (id.) . . it *' was ;" *• came to pass."
John vi.l. vii.l. N-n-a^r (subj.pres.). . (after) it was; "after these things."
Again,
Cree Net* It-at'-is-tn . . / so-act (morally) p. 158.
Chip. Nind In-khd'-is . . Id. (p. 158.)
Delaw. Nd' EU-duch-s-m. . "/ live or walk'' (Id. Ed.). Zeisb. p. 132.
Chap. III.
OF DIALECT.
Connected with our subject, in some degree, and deserving of
attention, is the circumstance of Dialect, as exhibited in the diflPe-
rent branches of the great Algonquin family. In the several
lapses by which the gradations are marked, there appear to be
circumstances worthy of note, such as,
1. The organic change of one or more letters — in Cree, one
consonant for another.
2. The change or modification of the meaning of the Root.
3. A modification of the Inflection (besides the commutation of
letters) with some new Roots.
4. Some new Particles, e.g. Adverbs, Prepositions, &c.
5. Some new Roots and again modified Inflexions.
6. New Roots and new Inflexions, varied also in their colloca-
tion with the Root.
The Cree, which I assume to be the source (for reasons I cannot
enter into here) is distinguished by the 1st and second. The
widely scattered tribes of this nation, change the ih, consecutively
into 1/, n, Z, and (vide Eliot) r, e.g. We-tha (Angl. he), W^-ya,
W^-na, W6-la, &c.; and a large portion of those among whom
this series of permutation occurs, is by themselves, denominated
N^'-EthowttA; (plur.) i.e. (say) Exact- Persons (see p. 72). The s and
the sk also mark different families and tribes. See p. 37 et seq.*
* " On the East-main side of Hudson's Bay, (t)ch is in general used in the
pronunciation of words instead of the k (or c hard) used on the West side of the
Bay, as (t)chis8in-0?<? for kissin-oio, it is cold (weather) j (t)che-y-a for ke-th-a,
&c. thmi, &c." — Hov, Hudson s Bay Co.'*s Papers.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 317
The 3d and 4th, together with a frequent omission of the s (in-
dicated by an hiatus in the articulation) before k (c hard), and / —
and a frequent insertion of m before b, and of » before d and g (see
p. 213 Note) — mark the Chippeway : which is also distinguished
by Vowels as well as Consonants extremely nasal, seldom found in
the parent Cree. The Chippeway differs also from the Cree in
having a Negative form of the verb (p. 63).
The 5th removes us still farther to the south, as the Delawares,
Shawanees, &c.
The 6th marks, perhaps, those called mother-tongues.
It appears that the Cree and its cognate dialects permute only^
and do not augment, the number of their letters; and that,
compared with European tongues, they have only a limited scale of
sounds — yet it is remarkable that all the letters of our Alphabet
are found separately in some one or other of the American lan-
guages.
The permutations of the Cree chiefly affect the linguals, with
indeed the want of the two labials y and t> — but the Mohawk and
Huron are in a sad state of privation, having none of the labials
— ^neither 6, p, f, v, nor m. When conversing, their teeth are
always visible. The auxiliary oflice usually performed by the lips
is transferred, or superadded, to that of the tongue and throat.
So violent a change in the mode of articulation, together with the
circumstances above mentioned, has naturally produced as violent
a change in their language, and given it at least the appearance of
a mother-tongue. But it seems to retain the leading features of
the others in its general Grammatical structure.
As a matter of speculation, it is curious to observe that the
organic powers of articulation existing in the Old world, are found
also to the same extent in some part or other of the New; and it is
further interesting to note that the sound given by us to th, which
so few European or Asiatic nations can articulate, is strongly pro-
318 A GRAMMAR OF
nounced by natives of the other hemisphere — by the Cree* of the
Forest, on the coast of the Atlantic — ^by the Huron,t of the Great
Lakes — ^by the Rapid Indians, J of the Great Western Plains — and
by the Flat-heads,§ of the Rocky Mountains, bordering on the
Pacific Ocean.
* WethsL, Jie. f HoMore, it is cold (weather). X With, a. knife.
§ Che/Mais, three.
Chap. IV.
ADDITIONAL NOTES.
Nouns have their Diminutives (p. 182); and Adjectives, &c.
their Augment, and Diminutives (p. 62 et seq.).
Nomina substantiva, non minus quam Adjectiva, habent, non tantum
Diminutiva, verum etiam Augmeutativa. Gram, Gronlandica it Paulo
Egede. HavnuBj 1760. p. 25.
The Local (or Locative) Case, -iir, &c. (see p. l84).
Quando significatio est : Apud me, in loco, in, &c. tunc Particula me
V. ne voci addenda, ex. gr. Killangme, in coelo. (W. p. 203.)
The Cree (and Chippeway) Adject, is a verb (p. 24 et seq.).
Nomen adjectivum plerumque describitur per praeteritum, quod &c.
ut : — k verbo aupiUarpok^ rubet ; kakorpok, albet (id. p. 9)-
The third person (sing.) is the Conjugational Sign (p. 198).
Tertia Persona Singul. est Radix sive Character Conjugationum. (Id.
p. 69.)
The present, &c. are often used for the Preterite tense
(p. 294, Note).
Tempora sunt tria : Prsesens, Prseteritum, & Futurum, quod iterum
duplex. {Id. p. 71.)
Prgesens loco Pr«t. interdum usurpatur. (Id.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 319
Prsesens loco Praeteriti saepissime usurpatur. (Id, p. 1870
The Transitive verb adopts into its Inflexions both subject
and object (nomin and accus.). Vide Accidence.
Habet Suffix. Pers. & Agent. & Patient, in omnibus conjugationibus.
(Id, p. 71.)
In English we may say actively, &c. (Construction of 3d
pers. Dir. and Inv.) p. 263 et seq.
In quo differt haec & antecedens Flexio ubi tertia pers. singul. utrobi-
que patitur, ex sequentibus patet exemplis, ut :
Mattarmane ningekpok. Is (A) iratus est, quia Alter (B) exuebat
ipsum (A). (Inv. or Reflex. Ed.)
£ contrario, cum juxta priorem Flexionem esset :
Mattarmago ningekpok, tunc Sensus est. Ille (A) offensus est,
quia Alter (B) exuebat tertium (C). [Dib.Ed.] Id. 117.
Of the Possessive or Accessory Relation. (Construction
of 3d pers. Absol. and Relat.) See p. 266, et seq.
Tertia pers. singul. et pluralis est duplex ; Prior (I. a.) notanda^
unico Agente adbibetur, ex. gr.
Hannese Mattarame innarpok.
Johannes, cum se exuisset, cubitum ivit.
Posterior vero, (2. a.) notanda, ubi duo fuerint agentes, usurpatur, ut:
Pauia mattarmet Pele ningekpok.
Petrus iratus est, cum Paulus se exuisset. (Id, p. 113.)
Again,
In tertia Persona Singularis, Dualis and Pluralis, usus Conjunctivi
duplex est :
Occurrentibus duobus in sententia Agentibus, ut : Ploravit cum (alius)
se laverit, tunc dicendum ; Kiavok ermigmet, non : Ermikame. Unico
autem Agente, ut: Ploravit quod seipsum laverit, tunc Kiavok ermikame,
non ermigmet, did debet. (Id. p. 97.)
The Imperative Mood lias two tenses (Pres. and Indef.).
See p. 204
Forma Imperativi duplex est } aut enim quandam involvit civilitatem^
ut jussum non ita statim fieri debeat, v. c. Ermina ; aut magis imperans
est, & mandatum ilhco exequendum innuit, ut Mattarit. (Id. p. 97.)
320 A GRAMMAR OF
In the Chippeway Dialect are two negative signs, one
of which is incorporated with the Verb. See p. 279.
Negativum ab Affirmativo, interposito ngi, formatur. {Id. p. 141.)
Again,
Verbum Negativuianon discedit k Flexione Verbi Affirmativi, dum-
modo observetur character negativi, ngui, ante Suffixum, addatur.
The nasals m and n, which &c. See p. 13. Note.
K post i & u mutatur in ng, &c. (Id. p. 5,)
The Cree language is expressed, &c. (Of Accent) p. 297-
Duplicis sunt generis, Longi et Breves ut : —
Ad yerum verborum sensum eruendum Accentus multum faciunt : in
Ultima, Penultima, &c, collocantur. (Id, p. 7.)
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 321
Chap. V.
ELEMENTARY WORDS.
To the principal or more obvious Elementary terms, &c. in
the Cree language, I attach considerable importance, from
their apparently furnishing (p. 134 et seq.) the roots of
some of the verbal &c. formatives — and also as seeming to
be eligible points of comparison with the corresponding
words in the tongues of the Old World. Some of them are
accompanied by examples of at least apparent analogy. The
reader will, for obvious reasons, note the sound and signi-
fication rather than the orthography. See ^^Permutable
Letters,^^ p. 17-
NOUNS.
I'-a (i long)... a being, thing (Chip, dhyah, p. 182). Heb.
Jah (pron. Yah).
Iss'e (or, Is^-e)... manner. Fr. sL Lat. Angl-ic^. (p. 142.)
It'-&... place (Chip, eende).
Isp'ec.time (past) (Chip. ahp^).
T6w'6fD (verb)... there is room, space.
Tdto... number.
T6o^...kind or sort.
Ethtn'u...an Indian. Or. tOv-of.
&c.
VERBS.
l-dtv (i'd + oo) ,,, he or it is. (Chip, ahydh). Heb. hai/a-
Gr. u'/ukt. p. 1 36 et seq.
I'dtv (possess.) ...he has it. (Chip. ahyaA) .
Ap^'U,..he sits, or he is. (Chip. dhbeA). Angl. ^e.
Astd-^oo, or, Ashtd-oo...i< stays, &c. (p. 38, Note) Sansk.
shia. Lat stare. Angl. stai^.
Ach'e-oo... Removes. (Chip, dunjeh). lat. agit.
'magnn...it moves.
Athi-^oo, or, ath^'-oo...Ae puts him. Gr. di-«.
Ast-o'w, Le. Aitk'Oo, or Ashta-oo...AeputsfV. Angl. siotvs.
Gr. (Trei'U.
322 A GRAMMAR OF
E^tu = E'te-oo,..he is, or does. (pp. l60. l64.)
Ekin..M is so. (p. l6S.) Gr. ix-«'-
Oot'che-oo. (p. 166.) (Chip, oonje/i.)
T6o-t-wm or D6o-d-tim (=Do-etb-Ae-t/).
Chap. VI.
SUPPLEMENTARY REMARKS,
Abstract and Instrumentive Nouns, ending &c. (p. 182.)
To these may be added the Frequentative Noun ending with
its Characteristic sign -sk (pp. 91. 70.), and formed by dropping
the personal inflection of the (freq.) verb, as from K6etim-w^-u,
he is frequently lazy, we have lL€e\Aimsk! Angl. Lazy-(one)! &c.
These Nouns are however used only in the Vocative Case.
Note. — ** The Frequentatives in sk-o are probably, &c." (Turk, sek,
often.)--lfa«Ai«. Or. Oram, 199. 1.
We may further add the Passive Noun, ending in -dggun, as
from Missw-dfv, he is wounded, we have Mlssw -oggun, a wounded
(e.g.) animal, &c. The Active, Instrumentive, nouns generally
end in -dggun, as from Chicka-h-eg%oo, he chops (p. 101), Chicka-
\i-^ggun, a chopping instrument, a hatchet ; &c.
Words ending in "-</," also in "-oirf, 6d, -^ed, -id, -ood/' (Chip.)
have also by some writers been classed as Nouns ; this is however
a mistake, the above being, as in the Examples they have given, all
verbal, personal endings (3d pers. subj.) ^'he who &c." — ^the Indian
equivalent to this kind of European Nouns. See pp. 73. IO9. Note.
The English Participle Present is always expressed (in
Cree &c.) by ^personal verb-— as sometimes in French — (p.
191) e.g.
The next day John seeth Jesus coming unto him, &c.
Le lendemain, John vit Jesus qui venoit k lui, &c.^^ohu, 1. 29.
The Spanish and American writers have fallen alike into the great error of
classing certain personal modes of the verb, as Participlbs, apparently
because they may, sometimes, be so rendered in English^ &c. as above — but this
is confounding, in an important point, the Indian with the European idiom ;
and is, moreoyer, a solecism in Grammar. Sec p. 812.
THE CREE LANGUAGE. 323
The Past Participle is, in like manner with the Present, com-
pensated by a regular verbal personal form, viz. the " Participial
Passive" form. (p. Ill et seq. 212.)
Thus this reduplicative form, &c. are often in the Indicative
mood what the flattened vowel is in the Subjunctive, (pp. 71 •
73. et seq. 202.
Note. — Of these two singularly formed tenses, I find a moat striking
resemblance in Dr. Grimm's description of the modified root in the
Preterite of Teutonic and Gothic Verbs.
"The preterite of the strongly inflected conjugation/' says Dr. Grimm,
" must be considered as a chief beauty of our language, as a character
intimately connected with its antiquity and its whole constitution.
Independently of the inflection in the endings, of which the nature has
already been pointed out, it affects the roots themselves, and that in a
double manner ; either the beginning of the root is repeated before itself
[ Cree Indie], or the vowel of the root, whether initial or medial, is
modified. [Cree F. vow. Subj.] The Gothic language yet retains both
methods, it reduplicates and modifies ; sometimes it applies both methods
at once. Reduplication never afiects the terminating consonants of the
root." — See Dr. Prichard's Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, 1831,
pp. 145, 146.
This description, as regards the two Cree (and Chippeway) tenses above
mentioned, may be said to be throughout literally accurate — ^had the learned
Professor only added, that the vowel sound so modified was at the same
time lengthened (pp. 76* 202), it would have been complete.
These energizing signsy however, though appearing &c.
(p. 48.)
Note. — In Chippeway, and probably in other dialects, the ** constant"
transitive signs of the Cree, by Dialective permutation, often merge,,
and are lost, in their cognate formatives — and are consequently so
far, less " constant" or certain in their Special, 8cc. meanings than in
the parent Cree (e.g. n, see p. 13, ^o^e,and Dialect, 316).
324 CREE LANGUAGE.
To the Transitive verb, generally, belong the Reflective,
&c. forms (p. 82 et seq.).
The Reflective Verb has two Characteristic endings^ -h-oo^ -m^oo^
&C. (p. 84) and -h-«**-oo, H-ditw-oo, &c. (p. 95) but they are all of
the same (4th) Conjugation. The former is a simple unemphatic
Reflective (perhaps a middle voice)> as Ache-H-oo^ he changes
himself (his dress) ; It-^the-M-oo, he thinks^ imagines^ himself, &c.
The latter expresses^ generally, a more energetic Reflective {pp.
88. 39.) as Nippa-H-iss-oo> he kills himself, i.e. causes himself
to die. Pem^h^e-H-iss-oo, he vivi-Fie^, makes alive, hi-mself &c.
Baily, Printer, Cirencester.
-00,
'of
^f
mm
The borrower must return this item on or before
the last date stamped below. If another user
places a recall for this item, the borrower will
be notified of the need for an earlier return.
Non-receipt of overdue notices does not exempt
the borrower from overdue fines.
Harvard College Widener T^ibrary
Cambridge, MA 02138 617-495-2413
WIDEN'ER
mmMMh i
BOOK DOB ^<
V\AA/VWS/W
Please handle with care.
Thank you for helping to preserve
library collections at Harvard.